Home

DHIS 2 User Manual

1. 24 3 5 Mobile application setup 24 3 5 1 Installation and initialization 24 3 5 1 1 Installation 238 Download the jar packages from the DHIS 2 homepage www dhis2 org downloads Mobile Mobile application setup 24 3 5 1 2 Initialization Initialization should be performed before the phones are delivered end users Given the large variation in possible phone configurations it is impossible to describe the exact steps which are required in order to enable the client on the phone However for most phones simply copying the DHIS Web Mobile client JAR file to the phone with a USB cable or via Bluetooth is sufficient Of course GPRS 3G connectivity must be enabled Contact your mobile service provider for exact details on the configuration of the phones and networks F al Login Username mobileyser Password Server Location Atte Mocalhost SUaU dhs Once the client has been installed on the phone an initialization process must occur by providing a user name password and server URL 1 Logging into the server for the first time The first time the client logins to the server or if the client is reinitialized the username password and server URL must be entered If the client is unable to login there could be several possible error messages which you see e Connection Not Found The specified server URL Is not correct Check the server address ensure that the server is actually reachable and
2. 264 Gateway Configurations Parameter BulkSMS Clickatell Generic Modem SMPP Description Gateway Gateway HTTP Gateway Gateway Gateway URL Not Not Required Not Not API URL for Template Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable sending sms Baud Rate Not Not Not Required Not The Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable baudrate for example 19200 265 Using Event Capture Overview Chapter 25 Using Event Capture 25 1 Overview The event capture app allows users to register events that occurred at a particular time and place An event can happen at any given point in time This stands in contrast to routine data which can be captured for predefined regular intervals Events in DHIS 2 are linked to a program Hence the event capture app lets you select the organisation unit and program and specifiy a date when a event also Known as case or record happened before entering information for the event 25 2 Capturing events To capture an event the first step is to select an organisation unit from the left side organisation unit tree After selecting an org unit the list of programs will display the programs which have been associated with the selected organisation unit and which have been given access to the current user through user roles Events are displayed in a tabular fashion as Shown in the figure below As seen in the screenshot each row corresponds to an event The colu
3. Elng Federal Government ab Abia State El ab Aba North Local Government Area ab Abundant Life Organization ab Annabelles BOGI Development Initiative ab Seventh Day Hospital ab Aba South Local Government Area ab Arochukwu Local Government Area ab Bende Local Government Area ab Ikwuano Local Government Area ab Isiala Ngwa North Local Government Area ab Isiala Ngwa South Local Government Area ab Isuikwuato Local Government Area ab Obio Nwga Local Government Area ab Ohafia Local Government Area ab Osisioma Nqwa Local Government Area ab Ugwunagbo Local Government Area ab Ukwa East Local Government Area ab Ukwa West Local Government Area WwW Care amp Support X February 2012 v Add Cancel In the example above a data lock exception would be created for ab Abundant Life Organization and ab Seventh Day Hospital for the Care and Support dataset for February 2012 22 10 Min Max Value Generation This administrative function can be used to generate min max values which are used as part of the data quality and validation process for specific organization units and data sets Simply select the dataset from the left hand frame and then select the required orgunits to generate the min max values for from the organisational units selector on the right Press the Generate button to generate or regenerate all min max values Press Remove to remove all min max values which
4. valueof Object 5 i q F The report should now have three tables one for each indicator Each table will have a heading with the name of the indicator and also a table header row EPI BCG coverage Jan Feb Mar April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Ahan l a Central ZR Eastern Upper West 19 4 2 8 1 Sorting and grouping When using grouping some precautions must be taken with regards to sorting Notably when adding sorting parameters whatever parameter is used as basis for the grouping must come first Thus if you are grouping the report by indicator and want sort the organisation units alphabetically you have to choose to sort first by indicator then by organisation unit name as Shown below For instructions on how to add sorting see the sorting section above we Sorting Sort by J indicatorname Field Add field organisationunitname Field SSS Modify field Remove field r Move up J Move down 2 Asc Desc 19 4 2 9 Charts By default a 3D bar chart is included in the jrxml file that is downloaded from DHIS 2 This is set up so that only data from the parameter organisation unit often the parent or grand parent is used Usually this is a good solution Since it is the default we will start by looking at bar charts before looking at line charts 149 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport
5. ssssssssssnesrrenrrsrrrnrrnsrrrsrrrrrrrerreere 179 21 3 EXDOFEING data ana meta data saioei aE a A EA 179 249 1 Metadata Cx DOM moree a A A NSA 179 21 3 2 Meta data detailed export s ssssssrrssrrsrrrsrrrerrrsrrrerrnsrrrsrrnerrrsrrrsrrrrrrrere 180 2123 3 Data EXPO E erie eaor r e eE 181 2ko A Event aata eXDON eai raa E A a A EUG 182 213 5 EXPOMing Gata TOOMNEr SYSCEMS sarrin E T A 183 21 3 5 1 DHIS 1 4 Meta data export cerron aa a A 183 21 3 5 2 DHIS 1 4 Detailed Metadata Export sssssssssrrssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrnne 183 23 Sae DAIS FA Datasex POM snein r 184 213 94 XES Metadata EXPONE sritan a a ate taeaviaeniaas 184 225 Data AGMA MISECATION siyir a a a a a AEE 185 22l Data DrOwWSET siooni a r a A T ANN 185 DD Dat CEO e arae a a ar an eee ase aN 190 22 2 1 Data elements without data set ssssssressrrserrsrrrsrrrerrnerrrsrrnrrrnerreerrne 190 22 2 2 Data elements without groupsS s ssssssresrrrsrrerrresrrrrrrnrrresrrrrrrnrrrerrnerrnne 190 22 2 3 Data elements violating exclusive group Sets ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 190 22 2 4 Data elements in data set but not in form or sections sssesserrrrerresn 190 22 2 5 Data elements assigned to data sets with different period types 190 22 2 6 Data sets not assigned to organisation Units s essssseresrrsrerrerrerrrerene 190 22 2 7 Sections with invalid category combinations sssesssessresrrerrrrrrresrrerrnn
6. Available Constants Filter Selected Constants In this example we have created a metadata export filter to export all Constants from the system If any meta data objects have been selected to be part of the filter they will be highlighted in green Click on the name of the objects you would like to export and add them to the right side to be selected to be part of the export Once you have composed the filter as needed click Save when editing or Add when adding a new metadata filter To export the filter click on the name from the main Meta data detailed export menu and choose Export from the context menu The following dialog will appear Export x AML T zipped T Export with dependencies Export Ms You can choose to export the data as XML or JSON format You can also specify whether or not the result should be zipped or unzipped Lastly if you click check Export with dependencies all dependent meta data objects which the ones you have selected depend upon will also be exported 21 3 3 Data export To export raw data from DHIS2 choose Import export gt Data export Select the organisation unit s the start and end date and dataset or data sets for which data export should be selected You can also select which types of identifiers which will be exported by pressing 181 Import and export Event data export More options and then selecting either UID Code or Name for data elements orga
7. Relationship Type Report Report Table Section A Sql View Tracked Entity Tracked Entity Attribute Tracked Entity Attribute Group User User Credentials User Group User Role Validation Criteria Validation Rule Validation Rule Group Selectall Selectnone XML Y Zipped v Export Simply choose the objects which you would like to export and click Export 21 3 2 Meta data detailed export In certain implementations it may be useful to create groups of metadata objects which should always be exported together To access this feature click Meta data detailed export from the left side menu of the Import export dialog Meta Data Detailed Export Filter by name Filter Sort Add new Filter Clear Ad hoc export Name ANC Indicators ANC standard reports ART data element groups Constants Indicator groups PHU data sets No of pages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to paget Go ex a a 1 gt a 180 Import and export Data export A list of available metadata export filters will be shown Click on the name of the filter you would like to edit and then select Edit from the context menu An example of the dialog is Shown below Edit Filter Filter Details Name Constants Description Constants t Attribute Types Select all Categories Select all Charts Select all t Concepts Select all Constants Select all
8. To view all the program stages click on the name of that program Child Heath Program as the screen shot Bisirat Michael Birth Details m 03 1 Navigate to Bisirat Michael Home 2 2 Visit Schedule Choose An Organization Unit 213 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Available organisation units Ngelehun CHC lt Navigate to Home e Current Activity Plan the list of the beneficiaries registered enrolled not yet finish complete a many program and there is at least a program stage open for data entry Step 1 Choose a Person for entry BeneficiaryJList Hyiab Welde Bisirat Michael Abc Navigate to Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Step 2 Choose a current and active program stage for entering the data Activity List Details 16 24 months after birth Navigate to Beneficiary List Home You can also see the person s information ID gender Date of Birth and Blood Group by clicking on the Details on top of the list appeared Activity List 16 24 months after birth Navigate to Beneficiary List Home The details information of the chosen person 215 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Detail For Hyiab Welde ID 1149367 Gender Female Date of Birth 2010 11 3 Blood Group A Navigate to Activity List Home e All Activity Plan the list of all beneficiaries registered enroll
9. 19 4 2 9 1 Bar charts ANC dropout rate a v qe vo D gt Oo D is fs ts ey vy 4 45s ae S gq o a Bar charts are the default chart type in DHIS 2 In this section we will look at how to make a bar charts like the one above comparing the value of one indicator in several districts To edit the default chart in iReport right click on it and choose Chart data Test bar chart Flreporting_month_name Padding And Borders Hyperlink Copy oe 6 Cut ob xX 5 Paste ab V 4 Delete a6 amp Copy format i Paste format a J E i i Transform to One Two Three Four Group selected element s E First BS Ungroup selected element s QF Bring To Front i Bring Forward Organisation unit ANC ANC ANC 4 Send Backward EF Fiant Flanc Sane gf Send To Back 1 Align e Cian A window will appear By default the Filter expression is filled in so that only data for the parent organisation unit will be displayed If for some reason you do not want this simply delete the text in the text box In this case we do NOT want the filter as we are making a chart showing a comparison across districts To continue click the details tab 150 Setting up report functionality a Oe Chart details Type of dataset Category dataset Reset type Reset group Report BE 7 Increment type Increment group E None LE m Filter expression O E Dataset run Sub dataset B SSS F Copy datas
10. 4 Fill data into the registration form Then click the Add button to complete to process of registration To continue to register other new entity click the Add amp amp Register new button Tracked entity instance management Add new tracked entity instance Tracked entity instance profile Tracked entity Please select v Provider identification First name Last name Other details National identifier TB number Add Add amp Register new Cancel 295 Tracker Individual records For tracked association attribute which is used to register representative for the registering entity in registration form check on the checkbox of this attribute the sub function has two tab e Search existing entity tab is used for searching available entities and users can select one entity in the result list to set relationship The criteria to search is based on attribute of entities e Add new entity tab is used for registering a new entity for relationship When adding a entity in this form you need to select one user defined relationship type in the list Finally click Add button Search existing tracked entity instance Add new tracked entity instance TS Relationship type Please select v Attribute Please select v Search value Search Search existing tracked entity instance Relationship type Please select v Tracked entity instance profile Tracked entity Please select M Other de
11. A program stage has three types of data entry form 1 Custom data entry form Define a data entry form as HTML page click on the program stage which you would like and select to define custom data entry form The system supports to define a custom entry form with multi stages So this form can be re used in other stages of the same program section data entry form Group some data elements which belong to the program stage as sections and display data elements by each section Click on the program stage which you would like and select Section management link to define section data entry form 3 Default data entry form List all data elements which belong to the program stage 29 2 1 6 2 3 Program stage template reminder This module also supports to define template message reminders which are sent to users entities To access to this function click on the program stage which you would like to define template message reminder and select View template reminder message link Name Name of description Send base on There are two options include 1 Days scheduled The message Is sent in day 2 Complete event The message is sent when the event of an entity is completed Date to compare This is the date used for calculating the date to send the message There are 2 options include 1 Enrollment Date 2 Incident Date Send message X days before after scheduled date The number of days needs to calculate the
12. Click on SAVE to register a new beneficiary A message Successfully Saved will appear when the beneficiary is created registered successfully Beneficiary Registration FullName Gender Male Date of Birth yyyy MM dd Blood Group Please select Save Navigate to Organisation Unit Home 3 Beneficiary Enrollment Enroll a beneficiary to one or many programs 228 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Beneficiary Enroament i Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version Before enrolling a beneficiary to a program the search function for a beneficiary is provided Beneficiary Search Beneficiary Name Nguyen Van Al Navigate to Organisation Unit Home If the beneficiary is found the result will be listed The simply click on the beneficiary name for navigating to the programs in which the beneficiary enrolled Search Result for Nguyen Van A Nguyen Van A Navigate to Beneficiary Search Home The below screen shot example describes the beneficiary named Nguyen Van A Has not enrolled any programs before 229 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry There is one program Child Health Program available for enrollment Enrolled Program s for Nguyen Van A Other Programs Child Health Program Tracking Navigate to Beneficiary Search Home The list of the available programs for enrollment w
13. F_ INDICATORGROUPSET DELETE Delete Indicator Type F_ INDICATORTYPE_ DELETE Delete Locale F LOCALE DELETE Delete Min max rule F DATAELEMENT MINMAX_DE LETE Delete Option Set F OPTIONSET DELETE Delete Organisation Unit F ORGANISATIONUNIT DELETE Delete Organisation Unit F ORGUNITGROUP_ DELETE Group Delete Organisation Unit F ORGUNITGROUPSET DELETE Group Set Delete Program F PROGRAM DELETE Delete Program Attribute F PROGRAM ATTRIBUTE DELETE Delete Program Enrollment F PROGRAM_INSTANCE DELETE Delete Program Stage F PROGRAMSTAGE DELETE Delete Section Program Stage F PROGRAMSTAGE SECTION DELETE Delete Relationship Type F RELATIONSHIPTYPE DELETE Delete Report F REPORT DELETE Delete Report Table F REPORTTABLE DELETE Delete Section F SECTION DELETE Delete SMS F MOBILE DELETE SMS Delete SQL View F SQLVIEW DELETE Delete Tracked Entity F TRACKED ENTITY DELETE Delete Tracked Attribute Entity F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTE DELETE 329 User authorities 330 Delete Tracked Attribute Value Entity F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTEVALUE DELETE Delete Tracked Entity Data Value F TRACKED ENTITY DATAVALUE DELETE Delete Tracked Entity Form F TRACKED ENTITY FORM DELETE Delete Tracked Entity F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE DELETE Instance Delete Tracked Entity F T
14. New Database JDBC connection and click next In this window you can give you connection a name and select the JDBC driver PostgreSQL and MySQL should come included in your iReport Then enter the JDBC connection URL username and password The last three refers to your database and can be retrieved from your DHIS configuration file hibernate properties Click save You have now connected iReport to your database Go to standard reports and click add new then get report template Open this template in iReport This template contains a series of report parameters which can be used to create dynamic SQL statements These parameters will be substituted based on the report parameters which we will later select and include in the standard report The parameters are e periods string of comma separated identifiers of the relative periods e period name name of the reporting period e organisationunits identifier of the selected organisation units organisationunit_name name of the reporting organisation unit organisationunit level level of the reporting organisation unit organisationunit_level_column name of the corresponding column in the _orgunitstructure resource table These parameters can be included in SQL statements using the P periods syntax where periods represents the parameter To create a SQL query in iReport click on the report query button Write or paste your query into the textarea An exampl
15. The design of this hierarchy will determine the geographical units of analysis available to the users as data is collected and aggregated in this structure There can only be one organisational hierarchy at the same time so its structure needs careful consideration Additional hierarchies e g parallel administrative groupings such as Facility ownership can be modelled using organisational groups and group sets however the organisational hierarchy is the main vehicle for data aggregation on the geographical dimension Typically national organisational hierarchies in public health have 4 6 levels but any number of levels is supported The hierarchy is built up of parent child relations e g a Country or MoH unit the root might have e g 8 parent units provinces and each province again at level 2 might have 10 15 districts as their children Normally the health facilities will be located at the lowest level but they can also be located at higher levels e g national or provincial hospitals so skewed organisational trees are supported e g a leaf node can be positioned at level 2 while most other leaf nodes are at level 5 Typically there is a geographical hierarchy defined by the health system e g where the administrative offices are located e g MoH province district but often there are other administrative boundaries in the country that might or might not be added depending on how its boundaries will improve data analysis When
16. click the name of the data element in the centre panel and then press the Move right button To add data elements to the group select them from the leftmost panel and click the Move left button Press the Update data element group member button to save your changes 5 4 Data element group sets Data element group sets allow multiple data element groups to be categorised into a set Data element group sets are used during analysis and reporting to combine similar data element groups into a common theme To access the data element group set maintenance module choose Maintenance gt Data elements and Indicators gt Data Element Group Set Similar to the other data element maintenance modules new data element group sets can be added by pressing the Add new button Other operations include Edit Translate Delete and 45 Data elements Categories Information similar to data elements and data element groups as described in the previous sections Existing data element group set members can be edited by clicking the name and selecting Edit from the context menu of the desired data element group set as seen below Update Data Element Group Set Details Name Main data element groups Description Main data element groups Compulsory Yes v Data Dimension Yes v Available Data Element Groups Group members Filter Filter Clear ANC ART ART Enrollment HIV Peadriatics ART entry points
17. Add update users within managed groups and not grant access to the standard Add update users authority An implication of the managed users concept is that when creating a user with the Add update users within managed groups only the user must be made a member of at least one user group that the current user can manage If not the current user would lose access to the user being created immediately This is validated by the system 67 User management OpenID Support When granted the Add update users within managed groups authority the system lets a user add members to user groups for which she has read only access to The purpose of this is to allow for desentralized user management You may define a range of user groups where other users may add or remove members but not remove or change the name of the group 7 1 6 OpenID Support 68 DHIS 2 supports the OpenID standard which allows third party login using a OpenID provider please see http openid net for more information To create a custom OpenID URL for a username you can visit this URL and log in with your OpenID provider http openid provider appspot com To enable support for this in DHIS 2 two steps must be done Set your OpenID provider This can be done inside system settings under Access Here you can set both the OpenID provider and also the label to display on the login page to login with this provider defaults to Login with OpenID Set the O
18. Category options are atomic elements that are grouped into categories 335 DHIS2 Glossary Comma separated values D Data dictionary Data exchange format Datamart Data element Data element group Data element group sets Dimension DXF H Health management information system 336 Comma separated values are series of tabular data stored in a plain text format They are commonly used with DHIS2 to export and import data values A collection of data elements and indicators which can be exchanged with other DHIS systems Typically used to define a set of data elements and indicators when setting up the DHIS system In the context of DHIS2 the data exchange format refers to a XML schema that enables the transportation of data and metadata between disconnected DHIS instances as well as between different applications that support the DXF schema A set of database tables in DHIS2 that contains processed data elements and indicator values that is generated based on aggregation rules and calculated data element and indicator formular Datamart tables are used for analysis and report production Typically users Should not work directly with unaggregated data values but rather with values that have resulted from a datamart export for analysis A data element is the fundamental building block of DHIS2 It is an atomic unit of data with well defined meaning Essentially it is a data value that has been actually
19. Facility select Facility and District as your aggregation levels Basically you select where you have data Selecting Facility means that Facilities will use data from facilities given since this is the lowest level Selecting District means that the District level raw data will be used when aggregating data for District level hence no aggregation will take place at that level and the facility data will not be part of the aggregated District values When aggregating data at Province level the District level raw data will be used since this is the highest available aggregation level selected Also for Country level aggregates the District raw data will be used Just to repeat if we had not specified that District level was an aggregation level then the facility data and district data would have been added together and caused duplicate double population data for districts and all levels above 19 1 2 Resource tables Resource tables provide additional information about the dimensions of the data in a format that is well suited for external tools to combine with the data value table By joining the data value table with these resource tables one can easily aggregate along the data element category dimension or data element indicator organisation unit groups dimensions E g by tagging all the data values with the category option male or female and provide this in a separate column gender one can get subtotals of male and female based on data
20. Forgot password Create an account Log in with admin district and feel free to do any changes system is reset every night dhis2 org Change language v You can select the language which you wish to display DHIS2 in from the Change language dialog box at the bottom of the screen Not all languages may be available Should you have forgotten your password you can click on the Forgot password link You must have informed DHIS2 of your email address and the server must be properly configured to send emails If you want to create your own account and the server administrator allows this simply click Create an account and follow the directions provided Once you have logged into DHIS2 refer to the specific sections in this manual for the different functionality which is available 2 4 Logging out of DHIS 2 12 Just click on the Profile and the click Log out the top right corner of the DHIS2 menu Getting started with DHIS 2 Quick intro to designing a DHIS 2 database 2 5 Quick intro to designing a DHIS 2 database DHIS 2 provides a powerful set of tools for data collection validation reporting and analysis but the contents of the database e g what to collect who should collect it and on what format will depend on the context of use However in order to do anything with DHIS 2 you must first create meta data Meta data or data about the data describes what should be collected data elements and cat
21. Mobile 3 Messages Getting started with mobile browser data entry Delivery Returns Anonymous Address Education Age 45 20 A Gender ooo Select Option El Occupation Parity Manage the messages and discussions from the server Message reply is Agaregate Reporting Tracking Reports Settings Navigate to Logout Desktop version The number showed is the unread messages Click on that to view the list of the messages the unread messages are in bold and dark blue color 219 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser 220 data entry Conversations a DHIS version 2 7 is depl Where can do dynamic analysis DHIS version 2 6 deployed on server How can set up my personal dashboard New reports available send feedback Subject Navigate to Home Then you can pick up the message topic for the discussions by leaving the reply message see this example DHIS version 2 7 is deployed Reply Reply from Administrator DHIS Hi all version 2 7 of DHIS is deployed It contains a range of new functionality including chart options translation of databas content locking of data entry forms and pre defined options in event registration This messaging functionality now supports marking messages for follow up paging of the message list an improved navigation Navigate to Messages Home User can create and send a feedback to serve
22. Password Login Reset After logging in there are the list of functions Menu Aggregate Reporting Tracking Messages 3 Reports settings Navigate to Logout Desktop version Aggregate Reporting Entries for aggregate data with defined assigned dataset by organisation units Tracking 208 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry e Find Person find person based on Name Phone Number or ID and Organization unit e Activity Plan Entries data for the persons by organisation units persons and programs program stages e Person Registration Registry a new person e Anonymous Entries for anonymous person based on programs Messages Manage the messages and discussions from the server Message reply is available User can send feedback message in Messages Reports The output reports from the server Settings User information e g First name Surname Phone number E mail and the Interface language Logout to log out the application Desktop version navigate to the desktop version of DHIS2 for administration This require a lot of resources from the client mobile for example the sufficient memory to load the pages Not recommended for the normal GPRS 3G phones The list above will be explained in details 1 Aggregate Reporting Entries for aggregate data with defined assigned dataset by organisation units Aggregate Reporting Tracking Messages 3
23. Stage 1 Stage 2 gt Stage 3 2013 03 09 2013 03 09 2013 03 09 Sierra Leone This is the program statistics result Program overview Normal program From 2013 03 09 To 2013 03 09 Total new enrollments in this period Total programs completed in this period Total programs discontinued un enrollments Average number of stages for complete programs Summary by stage Program Visits scheduled Visits done Visits done Forms completed Forms completed Visits overdue Visits overdue stages All Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 In result 1 Total new enrollments in this period The number of entities who enrolled the selected program from start date to end date 304 Tracker 2 3 Individual records Total programs completed in this period The number of programs completed Total programs discontinued un enrollments The number of programs un enrolled 4 Average number of stages for complete programs The average number of stages per completed programs From Summary by stage section L Visits scheduled All column is the number of events of all stages includes overdue skipped incomplete and complete events Visits done column is the number of events incomplete and complete Visits done column is percent of visits done events the number of all visits scheduled 4 Forms completed column are the number of events completed Forms completed
24. and strategy to configure how the scheduled job should run If you are using surveillance rules you can choose to run them All daily by selecting this option Pressing Start will enable the scheduled job to run at a pre determined time always at midnight based on the server time 200 Data Administration Data synchronization Scheduling management Resource tables Resource tables task strategy Analytics tables Analytics tables task strategy Data mart Data mart task strategy Neve Aggregation period types Weekly Monthly Bimonthly Quarterly Six monthly Yearly Financial Yearly Organisation unit group set aggregation level Data monitoring Data monitoring strategy Stop Scheduling is active 22 16 Data synchronization DHIS 2 provides a feature for synchronizing data being captured on the local instance with a another remote instance of DHIS 2 This can be useful e g when you have deployed multiple Stand alone instances of DHIS 2 which are required to submit data values to a central DHIS 2 instance These are the steps to enable data synchronziation Go to Settings gt Synchronization enter the remote server URL username and password and click Save You can test your settings by clicking on the Test settings link Go to Data administration gt Scheduling Under Data synchronization set strategy to Enabled and click Start Some aspects of the data synchronization feature to be aware of
25. dimension is to describe data values which are reported by multiple partners in the same location for the same data element and time period In principle it can be used as a free form dimension to describe multiple observations of the same phenomena at the same place and time Table 3 1 Organisation Unit Data Element Period Value Gerehun CHC Measles doses given Dec 09 22 Tugbebu CHP Measles doses given Dec 09 18 3 2 Data elements The What dimension 3 2 1 Data element categories The data element mentioned above Measles doses given can be further disaggregated into by combinations of data element categories Each system administrator of DHIS 2 is free to define any data element category dimensions for data elements There are however certain best practices which should generally be followed Given the example of Measles vaccination if you want to Know whether these vaccines were given at the facility fixed or out in the community as part of the outreach services then you could add a dimension called e g Place of service with the two possible options Fixed and Outreach Then all data collected on measles immunisation would have to be disaggregated along these to options In addition to this you might be interested in Knowing how many of these children who were under 1 year or above 1 year of age If so you can add an Age dimension to the data element with the two possible options lt 1 y and
26. gt 1 y This implies further detail on the data collection process You can also apply both categories Place of service and Age and combine these into a data element category combination e g called EPI disaggregation You would then be able to look at four different more detailed values in stead of only one as in the example above for the data element Measles doses given 1 Fixed and lt 1 y 2 Fixed and gt 1 y 3 Outreach and lt 1 y and 4 Outreach and gt 1 y This adds complexity to how data is collected by the health facilities but at the same time opens up for new possibilities of detailed data analysis of Measles immunisation Table 3 2 Example of detailed storage of data values when using data element categories Place of Service and Age simplified for readability compared to the actual database table 20 Organisation Data Place of Age Period Value Unit Element service Gerehun Measles Fixed lt ly Dec 09 12 CHC doses given Gerehun Measles Outreach lt ly Dec 09 4 CHC doses given Gerehun Measles Fixed gt l y Dec 09 4 CHC doses given Gerehun Measles Outreach gt l y Dec 09 2 CHC doses given Tugbebu Measles Fixed lt l y Dec 09 10 CHP doses given Tugbebu Measles Outreach lt l y Dec 09 4 CHP doses given Data dimensions in DHIS2 Data element group sets Organisation Data Place of Age Period Value Unit Element service Tugbebu
27. one and will explain why These two tables are a bit confusing and not the best design The most important data coming out of these tables are the pregnancy complications and the maternal deaths These data elements contain further detail on the cause of the complication or death the first column in both tables as well as a place of death in PHU or community and an outcome of the complication when its not a death that can be either Managed at PHU or Referred We decided to create two data elements for these two tables Pregnancy complications and Maternal Deaths and two category combinations one for each of the data elements For the Pregnancy Complications data element there are two additional dimensions the cause of the complication the combined list of the first column in the two tables and the outcome managed at PHU or Referred so these are the categories and options that make up that category combination For the Maternal deaths data element the same category with the different causes are used and then another category for the place of death in PHU or In community This way the two data elements can share one category and it will be easy to derive the total number of pregnancy complications and maternal deaths While the list of complications on the paper form is divided into two early and late labour you can see that e g the malaria in 2nd and 3rd trimester are listed under early but in fact are for a later phase of t
28. registered liv Consumption vs population Diarrhoea lt 5 y incidence rate 9 Dropout rate Penta 1 3 Export 21 3 5 3 DHIS 1 4 Data export This service allows you to export data to a format which can easily be imported into a compatible DHIS 1 4 database DHIS 1 4 XML Data Export Data Data Value Daily Data Value Start date End date 2014 09 23 2014 09 23 Export Select all Select none 21 3 5 4 XLS metadata export Meta data can be exported directly to the XLS format with this function Simply click all of the available object which you wish to export and click Export 184 Data Administration Data browser Chapter 22 Data Administration The data administration module provides a range of functions to ensure that the data stored in the DHIS2 database is integral and that the database performance is optimised These functions should be executed on a regular basis by a data administrator to ensure that the quality of the data stored is optimal 22 1 Data browser The data browser maintenance and analysis module which allows the user to produce a Summary of the data contained in the DHIS2 database The summary view provides a count of data elements which have been entered at the selected organisation unit as well as its descendants Raw data for all data elements for a range of time periods and a given organisational unit can be browsed and exported to Excel CSV or PDF formats There are fo
29. 1 Basic information Name Name of attribute Short name Short name of attribute Code Code of attribute Description Description of attribute Unique Specify the values of this attribute is unique There are four options for unique property Whole system The values of this attribute can duplicate with values which belong to other attributes But the values in this attribute must not duplicate Organisation unit The values of this attribute must not duplicate in the same orgunit Program The values of this attribute must not duplicate in the same program Program within Organisation unit The values of this attribute must not duplicate in the Same program in the same orgunit Inherit When to registry a new entity for relationship with an available entity all inherit entity attribute values of the entity will be pre filled in the registration form Value Type There are value types as follows Date String Number Letter Just accept values with alphabet only a z Yes No There are three options include null false true Yes Only There are only one true value Option Set Link to a optionset The options of the optionset will be displayed on registration form User can select only one option in option set list as attribute value Phone number To make it more flexible to define new recipients to reminders
30. 5 or at a bigger PHC at level 4 This varies form country to country but DHIS is flexible in allowing data entry or data import to take place at any level This means that orgunits that themselves have children can register data sometimes the same data elements as their children units The basic rule of aggregation in DHIS 2 is that all raw data is aggregated together meaning data registered at a facility on level 5 is added to the data registered for a PHC at level 4 It is up to the user system administrator designer to make sure that no duplication of data entry is taking place and that e g data entered at level 4 are not about the same services visits that are reported by orgunit children at level 5 NOTE that in some cases you want to have duplication of data in the system but in a controlled manner E g when you have two different 127 Setting up report functionality Types of data and aggregation sources of data for population estimates both level 5 catchment population data and another population data source for level 4 based on census data because sum of level 5 catchments is not always the same as level 4 census data Then you can specify using advanced aggregation settings see further down that the system should e g not add level 5 population data to the level 4 population data and that level 3 2 1 population data aggregates are only based on level 4 data and does not include level 5 data 19 1 1 2 2 How data gets added tog
31. 70 percent Fixed lt 1y Ngelehun CHC July 2014 0 23 0 d Setting up Data Quality Overview of data quality check functionality Chapter 12 Setting up Data Quality functionality The data quality module provides means to improve the quality of the data in the system This can be done through validation rules and various statistical checks 12 1 Overview of data quality check Ensuring data quality is a key concern in building an effective HMIS Data quality has different dimensions including Correctness Data should be within the normal range for data collected at that facility There Should be no gross discrepancies when compared with data from related data elements Completeness Data for all data elements for all health facilities olocks Taluka districts Should have been submitted Consistency Data should be consistent with data entered during earlier months and years while allowing for changes with reorganization increased work load etc and consistent with other similar facilities Timeliness All data from all health facilities olocks Taluka districts should be submitted at the appointed time 12 2 Data quality checks Data quality checking can be done through various means including 1 At point of data entry the software can check the data entered to see if it falls within the min max ranges of that data element over the last six months or as defined by the user 2 Defining various validation rules which can be
32. ANC 3 Coverage Modify Remove Advanced options b Close the window and the data for the line chart should be ready However some additional adjustments might be needed most of these can be found in the Line chart properties panel For example when making a month by month chart as we have in example there is often not enough space for the month names along the category axis This can be fixed by rotating the Show Shapes Category Axis Label Expression ia Category Axis Label Font SansSerif 10 p Category Axis Label Color E 0 0 0 Category Axis Tick Label Mask Category Axis Vertical Tick Labels wi Category Axis Tick Label Rotation 40 0 Many other options are available to give the chart the desired look 161 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport 125 100 5 50 19 4 2 10 Adding the Report to DHIS 2 We can now switch to DHIS 2 and import our report Go to the Report Module in DHIS 2 and select Standard Report In the Standard Report screen click Add new or edit an existing one In the following screen there are several actions we need to take First enter a name for the new Standard Report Second for design click Choose File and find the jrxml file you have edited in iReport Then we select the report table that we used as a basis for the report in iReport Click add and it should move to the Selected report tables area Finally click sav
33. ANC M4 160 7 Available Q gt mw 4 Selected ANC 1 Test ANC 1 Coverage ANC 1 3 Dropout Rate ANC 2 Coverage 1422 ANC gt 4 Coverage ANC 3 Coverage 140 4 ANC IPT 1 Coverage ANC IPT 2 Coverage ANC LLITN covera ge ANC TT2 coverage 420 4 118 8119 2 ANC visits per clinical professional 114 5 109 1 we 107 9 106 2 102 101 9 100 8 100 4 982 97 966 97 6 98 6 Periods 897 88 9 91 6 997 Organisation units 837 Commodities 80 79 4 78 2 lt 74 2 733 758 a 5 Diagnosis B z 69 5 70 9 70 7 Donor 65 60 4 EPi nutrition age 60 57 3 Facility Ownership 51 3 Facility Type Funding Agency 40 Gender HIV age Implementing Partner 20 4 Location Fixed Outreach Location Rural Urban Main data element groups 0 T T T T T T i T a gt a gt 2 No 2 Na 2 Morbidity Age amp D D amp K gt amp P D amp Ry k A Pa Fa K S C x S s F S gf Morbidity Mortality s S s Y 3 oe w amp PMTCT 16 2 Selecting chart type The visualizer module provides nine different chart types each with different characteristics You can select the type of your chart by clicking on one of the icons in top left bar titled Chart type 1 Column chart Chart which displays information as vertical rectangular columns with lengths proportional to the values they represent Useful e g for comparing performance of different districts 2 Stacked column chart Chart with vertical rectangular columns wh
34. After user start the application and enter PIN a requested to be sent to server to update new data 2 While this function perform the Current Activity Plan is temporarily blocked and it will be open again as soon as the updating process complete 3 This function update both Activity Plan and Program Form Update Completed message will appear on the screen after the update process finish Select Dismiss to close this window and go back to Activity Main Menu Your Current Activity Plan is now updated 4 When a data element removed due to the changing of form structure all data value that related to that data element will be hiding also You are no longer seeing the value in the form 24 4 SMS Command SMS command feature helps DHIS system receiving SMS from users patients or even anonymous A SMS command is an object containing the configurations for each SMS form reporting data from phones or j2me apps alerting users registering patient or user etc 24 4 1 Set up SMS command This is where you can create a new SMS command 260 Mobile SMS Command Type atsa DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone fi ati istration 49 Data administration ati nts and Indicator Maintain resource tables check data integ Statistics and more Dat Mobile configuration 3 Maintain data in y On ictionaries u DHIS 2 Online DHIS 2 Homepage Datasets i ettings e Tracking Maintain data sets custom forms sections pr
35. Area Select number of standard deviations 3 0 Analysis result The potential outlier values discovered will be presented in a list after the analysis process is finished The data element organisation unit period minimum value actual value and maximum value will be displayed for each outlier The minimum and maximum values refer to the border values derived from the number of standard deviations selected for the analysis Each outlier value can be modified directly in the analysis result page The value can be modified by clicking inside the corresponding field in the value column entering a value and then navigate away from that field either by clicking tab or anywhere outside the field The system will provide an alert if the value is still outside the defined minimum and maximum values but the value will saved in any case The field will have a red background color if the value is outside the range and a green if inside Each outlier value can be marked for further follow up by clicking the star icon 83 Using Data Quality functionality Min Max Outlier Analysis 11 5 Min Max Outlier Analysis The min max value based outlier analysis provides a mechanism for revealing values that are outside the pre defined minimum and maximum values Minimum and maximum values can be custom defined or automatically defined by the system in the data administration module See the section about Std dev outlier analysis for further details on u
36. Attributes for more information about how attributes can be used 4 2 2 Organisation unit group sets Group sets can be understood as a flexible tool to add more categorisation to orgunits Any number of group sets can be added but as a default start all databases will have the two group sets Type and Ownership Using these group sets will simplify how reporting is done and facilitate analysis through the use of tools such as Excel PivotTables While a group set like Type describes a measure dimension the actual categories are represented by the groups and the categorisation of an orgunit through the orgunit s group memberships This can be understood as a parallel hierarchy of orgunits with the group set as the root Type the groups at level 2 e g Clinic Hospital Dispensary and the actual orgunits at level 3 The group set can as such provide additional information and dimensionality to the data analysis as data is easily filtered organised or aggregated by groups within a group set For this aggregation to work without any duplication in the data some rules are necessary A group set is always exclusive which means that an orgunit cannot be member of more than one group in a group set Therefore when creating a new organisational unit you will only be allowed to select a single organisational group membership for each group set Furthermore it is possible to define whether a group set is compulsory or not which wil
37. Child Health 42351 Life Saving Commodities 41990 Morbidity 37996 Reproductive Health 29614 EPI Stock 6109 ART monthly summary 1635 TBIHIV VCCT monthly summary 1092 PMTCT monthly summary 1052 HIV Peadiatric monthly summary 91 Mortality lt 5 years 5 No of pages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to page 1 Go aa a 1 pp By clicking on the name of the individual dataset a more detailed summary of each data element can be obtained as shown below A cross tab table summarising each time period will be shown Data Administration Data browser Data sets From date 2014 01 01 To date 2014 01 31 Period Type Monthly Download as PDF Back Download as Excel Download as CSV 2a I Start Data Set list ART monthly summary Recorded values Data element January 2014 ART No clients who stopped TRT due to TRT failure 23 ART No clients who stopped TRT due to adverse clinical status event 24 ART No clients with change of regimen due to drug toxicity 24 ART No clients with new adverse drug reaction 24 ART No started Opportunist Infection prophylaxis 20 ART clients with new adverse clinical event 32 ART defaulters 23 ART enrollment stage 1 2D ART enrollment stage 2 208 The functionality of the grouping by Datasets Data element groups and Organisational groups is essentially the same The functionality of grouping by organisation units will be discussed below Begi
38. DHIS start page you can click on the Home button to the right side of the top centre menu 114 Using GIS GIS module overview Chapter 17 Using GIS 17 1 GIS module overview You can access the GIS module from the Apps gt GIS link in the top menu The picture below Shows the GIS viewport In the top right corner there is a panel called Layer overview If you are online you will see Google Streets and Google Hybrid which can be used as background maps layers Switch between the two of them by checking the checkbox By unchecking the box you can hide the background completely If you want to see the background but with reduced opacity you can set the visibility to something lower than 100 in the numberbox to the right The final four layers are the vector layers which the user has at his disposal for thematic mapping explained in the next section The panels below hold the map legends when you create a thematic map A legend explains the link between values and colors on your map Lets take a look at the map toolbar The four icons from the left represent the mentioned vector layers and this is the starting point of the GIS application Further to the right we have Favorites Save your maps to easily restore them later Saving a map as a favorite also gives you the opportunity of sharing it with other users as an interpretation or put it on the dashboard Legend Create you own legend sets to ensure meaningful maps Download E
39. DOCUMENT PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Indicator F INDICATOR PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Indicator Group F_INDICATORGROUP PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Indicator Group Sets F_INDICATORGROUPSET_PRIVATE_ADD Add Update Private Option Set F_OPTIONSET PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private F ORGUNITGROUP PRIVATE ADD Organisation Unit Group Add Update Private F ORGUNITGROUPSET PRIVATE ADD Organisation Unit Group Set Add Update Private Program F PROGRAM PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Report F REPORT PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private SQL View F _SQLVIEW PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Tracked Entity Attribute F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTE PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private User F USERGROUP PRIVATE ADD Group Add Update Private User F USERROLE PRIVATE ADD Role Add Update Private F_VALIDATIONRULEGROUP_ PRIVATE ADD Validation Rule Group Add Update Program F PROGRAM ATTRIBUTE ADD Attribute Add Update Program F ADD PROGRAM _INDICATOR Indicator Add Update Program Stage F_ PROGRAMSTAGE_ADD Add Update Program Stage Section F PROGRAMSTAGE SECTION ADD Add Update Public Category Option Group F CATEGORY OPTION GROUP PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public Category Option Group Set F CATEGORY OPTION GROUP SET PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public Chart F CHART PUBLIC ADD User authorities Add Update Public F DASHBOARD PUBLIC AD
40. F TRACKED ENTITY FORM ADD Add Tracked Entity Instance Comment F TRACKED ENTITY COMMENT ADD Add Tracked Relationship Entity F RELATIONSHIP ADD Add Update Attribute F_ATTRIBUTE_ADD Add Update Chart F CHART ADD Add Update Concept F CONCEPT _ADD Add Update Constant F CONSTANT ADD Add Update Data Value F DATAVALUE_ ADD Add Update Indicator Type F_ INDICATORTYPE_ADD Add Update Min max rule F DATAELEMENT MINMAX_ ADD Add Update Unit Organisation F ORGANISATIONUNIT ADD Add Update Private Category Option Group F CATEGORY OPTION GROUP PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Category Option Group Set F CATEGORY OPTION GROUP SET_ PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Data Element F DATAELEMENT PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Data Element Category F CATEGORY PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Data Element Category Combo F CATEGORY COMBO PRIVAT E ADD 325 User authorities 326 Add Update Private Data Element Category Option F CATEGORY OPTION PRIVAT E ADD Add Update Private Data Element Category Option Combo F CATEGORY OPTION COMBO PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Data Element Groups F DATAELEMENTGROUP PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Element Group Sets Data F DATAELEMENTGROUPSET PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Data Set F DATASET PRIVATE ADD Add Update Private Document F
41. F organisationunitname charAt 0 amp amp SFi organisation_ unit _is parent equals No ol Ln 3 Col 44 Parameters organisationunitid Field a numberOfLeadingia organisationunitname Field String numberOfTrailingZ Variables reporting_month_name Field String bitCount int int as _ param_organisationunit_name Field String equals Object boo C User Defined Expression organisation_unit_is_parent Field String toString int int St a Recent Expressions tbhcuresptumsm 15 yrs_quarterl Field Double W toString int String E Expression Wizards thcuresptumsm 15 yrs_quarter2 Field Double toStrin n Ceri a R bej Wa g String thcuresptumsm 15 yrs_quarter3 Field Double def int fe els m tem m m b ms ee oe i sarem raim bm e d Fin bel TA en oba Dn Reset to default O Cancel F 19 4 2 5 Sorting Often you will be making reports where the first column is organisation unit names However it can be a problem that the list of organisation units are not sorted alphabetically This can be fixed in iReport through a few simple steps In the report inspector right click on the name of the report by default this is dpt and select Edit query lat la Page format gt Remove Report Margins gt gt Compile Report p gt Properties p m Edit E it Query Add Report Group Add Dataset Paste V Open Report Folder in Favorites SATB CUreSOTUMS A Rep
42. FOSS makes the source code available as well Proprietary software owners license their copyrighted object code to a user which allows the user to run the program FOSS programs on the other hand license both the object and the source code permitting the user to run modify and possibly redistribute the programs With access to the source code the users have the freedom to run the program for any purpose redistribute probe adapt learn from customise the software to suit their needs and release improvements to the public for the good of the community Hence some FOSS is also known as free software where free refers first and foremost to the above freedoms rather than in the monetary sense of the word Within the public health sector FOSS can potentially have a range of benefits including e Lower costs as it does not involve paying for prohibitive license costs e Given the information needs for the health sector are constantly changing and evolving there is a need for the user to have the freedom to make the changes as per the user requirements This is often limited in proprietary systems e Access to source code to enable integration and interoperability In the health sector interoperability between different software applications is becoming increasingly important meaning enabling two or more systems to communicate metadata and data This work is a lot easier and sometimes dependent on the source code being available to
43. Failed DataSet is locked not possible to Upload Update Forms This function is used to synchronize the forms on mobile and on server The process is automatically triggered after entering PIN number Note Checking and downloading updated forms process run in background After finished prompt is displayed to ask user whether refresh form list or stay where they are Multi Language Support This function help user to choose language of mobile s GUI graphical user interface and content s language Forms The forms must be translated on server otherwise default language is used Default language of first login is English Change language in Setting menu will affect both interface and content Mobile Mobile application setup Tol i J Select report torn BCHBieu05 configurable Parameters http localhost 8080 dhis Username ct ttytdpcairang aiPassword de oe ok ok oe oe oe Open Back Tot E Configurable Parameters Multi Language Interface In Setting menu there are list of supported language downloaded from server Language of GUI is only changed after restart application Multi Language Content forms Form s language is change after click Save In case there are many forms it take several minutes to save setting 245 Mobile Mobile application setup 24 3 5 3 3 Troubleshooting e Data has been entered on the phone but does not appear on the server This usually occurs wh
44. Is required to do data analysis according to which donor supports the project In this case a category option group set called Donor can be created Each donor can be created as a category option group where each category option project is put in the appropriate group In data analysis apps the Donor group set will appear as a data dimension while each donor appear as dimension items ready for inclusion in reports 5 10 Translations of data elements and other objects DHIS 2 provides functionality for translations of database content like data elements data element groups indicators indicator groups validation rules and more These elements can be translated to any number of locales A locale represents a specific geographical political or cultural region To add a translation click the Translate icon next to the element you would like to translate Start by selecting the desired locale from the Locale select box In the Translate screen select your locale and enter values for the available element properties The reference property values are shown on the right These values are the values which have been entered in the regular add or update user interface for the current object Translations can be enabled by selecting the desired locale under Database Language under User General Settings in the Settings module 5 10 1 Data element translation 50 DHIS2 provides functionality to translate existing data elements into other
45. Java x J Format Factory Class SIE 4 imports No imports set P dpt 7 J ol be iReport output Note If you cannot see the Palette or Properties sidebar you can enable them from the menu item called Window on the menu bar The iReport document is divided into seven main bands divided by layout separators the blue lines These lines are used to decide how big each of the areas should be on the report The areas all have different purposes e Title area for the title of the report e Page header area for the page header e Column header area for column headers for the table Detail 1 area where the actual report data will be placed e Column footer area to make footer of the table e Page footer area for the page footer e Summary elements in this area will be placed at the end of the report By default you will see that only the Title Column Header and the Detail 1 bands have data For most reports this is OK The Title band is suitable for a title and e g a chart Data fields entered into the Detail 1 area will be iterated over to create a table For example if a field called dataelementname is placed in the Detail 1 band all data elements in the report table will be listed here We ll come back to data fields management just a little below The unused bands in the report are shrinked to add more space for your report data You can however increase decrease the band height as you like There are
46. Received SMS SMS Coane ALERT_PARSER J2ME Client Update Sai UNREGISTERED_PARSER _ Data set J2ME_PARSER With KEY VALUE PARSER and J2ME_PARSER the SMS command will have dataset because those are used for reporting data DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Add command Command Details Name Parser KEY_VALUE_PARSER Data set PHUF 6 Staffing IS Commands J2ME Client Update Save Back With ALERT PARSER and UNREGISTERED PARSER the SMS command will have user group because those are used for sending message such as SMS DHIS conversation email dhis DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone fi DHIS MOBILE CONFIGURATION Add command Person Mobile Settings Data Set for Mobile SMS Service Configuration Name View Sent SMS Command Details SMS Commands 24 4 2 SMS Command Type The SMS command is basically defined by its parser type In other word each SMS command has one unique parser to parse the plain text SMS then the result will be used for the purpose of that SMS command 24 4 2 1 SMS Command for Reporting Data In order to report data for example data set aggregation we use SMS commands which have KEY VALUE PARSER for phone s plain text or J2ME PARSER for j2me apps 261 Mobile SMS Command Type Edit SMS command Security worker Not on salary If the command has name report and a list of data element with code like above The format should
47. Select Sum of data element values to get sum of data values of data element in Data element for sum average field with the criteria in the condition field 4 Select Average of data element values to get average of data values of data element in Data element for sum average field with the criteria in the condition field 5 Select Minimum of data element values to get min of data values of data element in Data element for sum average field with the criteria in the condition field 6 Select Maximum of data element values to get max of data values of data element in Data element for sum average field with the criteria in the condition field e Program Select program needed for aggregation e Program Stage Select program stage from the selected program above e Data element for sum average min max Select an data element for operator as Sum Average Min Max Next section included 3 tabs Data elements entity attributes and Program Depend on the requirement of data aggregation data element entity attributes and number of programs are selected Data elements tab List all available data elements from selected program stage To create a formula related to each data element double click on the data element The formula of the data element is filled on the condition field like DE 1 2 3 in with e 1 id of the selected program e 2 id of the selected program stage e 3 id of the selected data element Note The f
48. Setup SMS COMMANA erreneren A R EA AAS 260 2454 2 SMS ComMMand TYDE errkeiran aaa AREE AE A AN 261 24 4 2 1 SMS Command for Reporting Data ssssssressersrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerresrene 261 24 4 2 2 SMS Command for Alerting Registering sssssssessrerrrrsrresrrerrrne 262 24 SMS SENICE urn a r r S ER 263 245 1 Seting UP SMS SEVICE reinii O a T aeris eaae 263 24 oL L CONNJUre SMS GatEWaAy ricer iei A a AA 263 viii DHIS 2 User Manual Contents 24 Ove Stale OMS SEVICE sor O a A a na nase aes 263 249 21 Gateway COMMGULATIONS siiaiteneniadpincecnvertinnn tenting eieas ontaw eater ainda 263 25 USING EVENE CAPUTO serere arei A E rede iee hadi hi viene Rena aaa nae aa 267 DD pth CON CVV NOW iiaa vias sete tanner tae ea era terete Saba a cuba Caan 267 25 23 Capturing EVENTS rvericnscerepeseiwesstregtmirnetearieneeieetanth bee a a a 267 20 USING Event RCD OFES zaidan anea E nna E anal E E E nea 269 26 4 Event REPONS OVEIVICW 5 idsaisnsthervinldvaveinnagidnanceiads vaguad tanens panied aastin ann pitaaiaeats 269 26 1 1 Pivot tables with aggregated values cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeanenenes 269 20 Wa kV a eae 18 gl Lc pee a ne ee ee rere mn ne oD ee ene ee oe 270 2Oj1 37 ODGOWS haea a a a a E 270 27 USING EVENE VISUGIIZEP aenirvecteuctedinis papas a A a a E E AaS 271 27 1 Event Visualizer OovervieW sssessesssrsseresrrrsrrnrrrrsrrrerrrrrresrrrerrnrrrerrreerrrrrrerrrenrnt 271 27 1 1 Charts with ag
49. Sharing interpretations gt i4 cit isasaisccaveaea tas T E E casa E nie ana cae nasiabar Meade inane 113 16 15 Embed Charts In any WED page iiticssiescceciretvasiaessdreaerwarcdaanmesviviesinesnmonne ve 113 16 16 AMGIVSIS INtegra LOM iersinii nies yeah cela anime edad AA E a dish tov names nana 113 16 17 Exiting the data visualizer module sssssssessnrssressrrsrrrrrrnrrrrsrrrrrrnrrresrrrrrrrrrrenre 114 TFs PIS VY Oh E E e E E E EA EE ah va CL ET E E E A EE E IA A A 115 tls OIS MOdUIC OVEFVIEW Reesiiaytivaczat ee wipe A E A O EE O dae 115 2e mMematie Ma DOING siue T ueey ase ievent aad teieateinle vous 115 AZ oly EVENE IOV Cl AE T A A E 116 UI 22a FACU NAY Cl coreia N Aa aa a 117 DIZ 3r BOUNGALY laye ea a Ga Oe ae 118 1724 Thematic AV er Lede ayre a A A A AA R 119 TFS TOOS yur a A a a Sa 119 7 Svs Favore Maps ciissearsiebavetestcpiroei eens ciseubier eaaneesernnavatera ea e 120 17 3 2 Create predefined legend Sets ccccccceceeececeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseaeeneanaeseeneaeas 120 L765 5 DOWRIOAGHINA DOS IMAGES einir 120 17 3 4 Share Map Interpretation ccccececeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaegeesesegeeteneanseeneaes 121 17 3 5 Embed Maps IN ANY WED PAGE ccccceccceeesceeeeeeeseeceeeseeeeeeaegeeneetataneneanas 121 LASO Play SIS ALC ORACION eeraa vues teat ei aianraah nea hoes canoer ene 121 Bie SELIG UDGD maaa Aa a arama a is Sle Crue ea da atta RE nana eT ianea Meads manus 123 tS A COMOX oee leu smerelwuaunnsus
50. Summary Organisation unit Based on complete data set registrations Sierra Leone Based on compulsory data elements Child Health Y Quarterly v Prev year Next year April June 2014 v Get report Show more options Download as PDF Download as Excel Download as CSV Sierra Leone Child Health Apr to Jun 2014 Name Actual Reports Expected Reports Percent Reports On Time Percent On Time Moyamba 270 282 95 7 270 95 7 Bombali 284 297 95 6 284 95 6 Kenema 348 366 95 1 348 95 1 Kailahun 217 231 93 9 217 93 9 14 6 Using organisation unit distribution reports 98 You can access the Orgunit Distribution reports from the left side menu in the Apps gt Reports Orgunit distribution reports are reports that show how the orgunits are distributed on various properties like type and ownership and by geographical areas The result can be presented in a table based report or in a chart Running a report To run a report first select an orgunit in the upper left side orgunit tree The report will be based on orgunits located under the selected orgunit The select the orgunit group set that you want to use typically these are Type Ownership Rural Urban but can be any user defined orgunit group set The you can click on either Get Report to get the table based presentation or Get chart to get the same result in a chart You can also download other format such as PDF Excel and CSV Organisation unit distribution report Report organ
51. The local DHIS 2 instance will store the password of the user account on the remote instance encrypted in the local database The remote account is used for authencation when transferring data For security purposes make sure you set the enryption password configuration parameter in hibernate properties to a strong password Deploying the remote server on SSL HTTPS is strongly recommended as the username and password are sent in clear text using basic authentication and could be intercepted by an attacker The data synchronization uses the UID property of data elements category option combos and organisation units to match the meta data Hence the synchronization is dependent on these three meta data objects being harmonized on the local and remote instance in order to work appropriately The very first time DHIS 2 attempts to synchronize data the system will include data entered during the last three days For the subsequent attempts the system will store the time of the last successful data synchronization and only include data saved or edited since that time A synchronization job is considered successful only if data was submitted authenticated and saved successfully on the remote server 201 Data Administration Data synchronization e The system will attempt a synchronization every minute If the local server does not have a working Internet connection at the time the synchronization will be silenly aborted and re attempted after a
52. a T ane eas 46 5 0 Category COMDINALIONS dorii n A A 48 5 7 Using category combinations as attributes ssssssesrrrsrrerrresrrrerrrrrresrrrrrrnrrreernne 49 5 8 Category option combination maintenance ss sssssrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerre 50 5 9 Category option groups and group Sets ssssssresrersrrrsrrrsrrrerrrrrresrrnerrnrrrerrrerrnne 50 5 10 Translations of data elements and other objects ssssssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrere 50 5 10 1 Data element translation erasia a a a AAA 50 6 Data sets and data entry TOMS ecserin sr EEIE 53 O Dara Ol e ee Te ne eee eee ee ne ee ae 53 oL DataSet IMAG CCI resce E Sha areal E asta wea 54 62 Data Set CalteQOrleS crawls tadanccieeeis e E india N 55 6 2 DENNY FORNO msc ea sca tewsialntnsdy ene E A ate Madea danas wired eens 56 6261s SECEION TOMS aiurria E AE 56 6 2 2 AGdING a NEw SECTION Tor Meritan dian seat and ade ahaa 56 6 205 CUSO FONS scx onceieucd a clon wnenlenbatienley fondo a S 58 6 24 SCHIPUING I CUSTOM TONIS criin naera a E A E enbaaaaonanins 59 6 2 5 Data Set assignment editor sssessrssrrsrrresrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrrrrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerrrere 60 Ja Usor Managemen enrera a a E 61 7 1 Creating new users and roleS ssssssssesrresrrrerrrrrresrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrnrrrerrrerrrnrrrerrrerrnt 61 fll User Mantena CC hess inns aa ean ran cot agains a A A E AA 61 1 2 User role management vicmuvetectscarssesteecreeetuw
53. a te en ee err eee ee a ey Se A ee 193 2243 RESOULECE LADIES seneictontsenenererbiioernewntsaiintts cuthlea ea r aE ra eaea 193 225s Locale Management saroia aA AE A ENE E A 194 DPB SOL VOW aa E E EAA 195 22 0 1 Creatingo a NEW SOL VIEW siirre A N i a A 195 22 o2 SQL VICW GINS GIOVE erea a a a A aereea gen aes 195 22 7 DUDPIICATE Gala SlIMINGEON iar saiatadsvaipararvesiabengnd ieee a a A AAE 195 2248 Bata SUAUSUCS eieaa a a T 196 22 9 LOCK EXCEP UONS shimii e aaa o teat a 198 22 10 Min Max Value Generation s sssssssssresrrrsrrrrrrsrrrrsrrrrrrsrrreerrnrrrerrrrernnrrrerrreernne 198 22 Tey SEUNG gera a a n Oa 198 22 12 OPON SOE na a aA a NAA 199 22 AS CACC SUAUISUICS aean r aerar E e 199 22 lA AWIOUTES i O E ees 199 22 los SCNCAUIINO marnie a r ri 200 22 L6 Data SYNCATONIZATORN eiee E T E O a 201 ZS OO ara A E E EEA E E E EET 203 Dv SY tem SeN erana r ea T O a T Gane ee eect eva es 203 25340 GEMENA SENOS oraaa a aa ean an 203 DAG Zi SEVO SCN S a A E A sue iansaue eee tauoks 204 25 3 APPEN CO eNOS aaa AE N T Ea 204 23 Ay EMAN SONOS ruse anr a a a E A peatacaeimonas 205 2a An ACCESS SENOS n E Ras ae ean 205 2 LO APP OVAN re TA R E AEA A OE 205 23517 Calendar SENOS eer aE E A E E cada A AA 206 23 18 DAt MOO sumra ra aaa e 206 23 1 9 Sy CNrONI Zaton SCLUNGS araea i a A an cs 206 2S VO OAC CIENTS aoine E aa eaten Daman A ET OA 206 Dr MODIG nieren a E A E E T E E AS 207 24 be BHIS Z MOODIE IFO GUCEIOM orrai nous AE A
54. aita a a a 325 DAISZ GiOS SAL V aaen T R T AA 335 BIDDING OLA DAY creana e a A incase tate able tinh AA 339 HIE aeann asc eas octal eeepc ed eae adv aaa ED ede am mene pda Fae Se pean 341 About this guide About this guide The DHIS2 documentation is a collective effort and has been developed by the development team and users While the guide strives to be complete there may be certain functionalities which have been omitted or which have yet to be documented This section explains some of the conventions which are used throughout the document DHIS2 is a browser based application In many cases screenshots have been included for enhanced clarity Shortcuts to various functionalities are displayed such as Maintenance gt Data administration The gt character indicates that you should choose Maintenance and then click on Data administration in the menu which appears through the browser Different styles of text have been used to highlight important parts of the text or particular types of text such as source code Each of the conventions used in the document are explained below Note A note contains additional information which should be considered or a reference to more information which may be helpful i Tip A tip can be a useful piece of advice such as how to perform a particular task more efficiently D Important Important information should not be ignored and usually indicates something which is required by
55. and other messages in Tracker we will add a new Attribute Type called Phone Number Here the user can put any recipient name attribute name and collect the phone number the value All attributes of this type phone number will be available in the recipient lists for reminder templates or manual reminders messages in Tracker Tracker associate A checkbox will be displayed on data entry form When user checks this chekcbox a form will be shown user can seach an TEI existed or add new TEI The id of TEI searched added will be saved as value of this attribute Users In theTEI registration form this attribute is rendered as a dropdown box with option as user list who belongs to the selected orgunit The id of user selected will be saved into database as value of this attribue 1 2 Some configuration An attribute can be set to display values of its in entity list search result by configuring in Manage attributes with no program function 282 Tracker Programs Attributes The Manage attributes for visit schedule supports configuration for entity attributes that are added to the visit schedule This is very useful when the list is printed and used for tracking in the community Select patient attributes on the left section and move them to the right section and click Save button 29 2 1 2 Attribute group To access the entity attribute group maintenance module from App menu go to Programs Attributes icon and
56. and sets the number of future periods which are available for data entry For example for a monthly data set a value of 2 would allow data for 2 months in advance to be entered which is useful e g for population target and planning data Days after period to qualify for timely submission Sets the number of days in which data can be entered to be considered timely The amount of timely reports submitted can be checked within the Reports gt Reporting Rate Summary option Frequency Defines the frequency of reporting for the particular dataset Combination of categories Allows relevant Category Combination s to be assigned to the dataset Category option groups and group sets which define these category combination s are discussed in more detail in the data element chapter Complete notification recipients Sets which users should receive a message with a notification about this data set being marked as complete in data entry In this list you can select a user group and all members in this group will receive a notification The message will be delivered through the DHIS messaging system Send notification to completing user Sets whether a notification that the dataset is marked as complete in data entry is sent to the user who has entered the data This message is also delivered through the DHIS messaging system 53 Data sets and data entry forms Data set management e Approve data Define whether data for this data set should be Ap
57. are currently stored in the database Min Max Value Generation Available data sets Organisation Unit Selection Care amp Support Selectatievel Federal Governn Un selectatievel Unselectall HCTestin HSS aa Selectingroup AlDSRelief Un selectin group Selectchildren PMTCT El ng Federal Government Prevention El ab Abia State Treatment OVC Dataset ab Aba North Local Government Area ab Seventh Day Hospital ab Aba South Local Government Area ab Aba Health Office ab Aba IDH Hospital 22 11 Constant 198 Constants are static values which can be made available to users for use in data elements and indicators Some indicators such as Couple year protection rate depend on constants which usually do not change over time Simply press Add and provide a name in the Name field and define it s value in the Value field Press Add The constant will now be available to users for use in their expressions Data Administration Option sets Add Constant Details Name Pi Ti Value Add Cancel 22 12 Option sets Option sets provide a pre defined dropdown enumerated list for use in DHIS2 You can define any kind of options for instance an option set called Delivery type where Normal Breach Caesarian and Assisted would be the options To define a new option set simply click Add new Once you have defined the option set itself you
58. at the intersection of the data element Measles new and the group New cases in the group set morbiditymortality e All the intersections where the data element does not link with the groups in morbiditymortality are left blank Thus in this case we would get a nice table if we excluded the dataelement from the table and just had diagnosis and the group set morbiditymortality as in the figure shown earlier Now lets see how the data element categories can be used In the data entry form for Morbidity the new cases and follow ups use one age category the referral data another and the mortality data a third age breakup so these are available as three individual age group fields in the pivot tables called morbidity age referrals age and mortality age It doesn t make sense to use these while looking at these data together as in the examples above but e g if we only want to look at the only the new cases we can put the MobidityMortalityGroups field back up as a page field and there select the New cases group as a filter Then we can drag the Morbidity age field down to the column area and we get the following view E ji AT All BE E Aldila Al E fE dldlal4 a4 e 4 Yew Cases Sum of value Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP 1 All Others Anaemia 1 ARI Treated With Antibiotics Pneumonia 1 204517 45762 102004 1 l ARI Treated Without Antibiotics Cough 1 1 Bums 1 1 Cholera Bi 104 127 Clini
59. be used both for showing for example names of district or for numeric values It is therefore important the Expression class seen in the Text field properties matches the Text field expression For the default text fields in the jrxml file downloaded from DHIS 2 this is not a problem but it is important when making new text fields The two most important Expression classes are java lang Double for numbers and java lang String for text 19 4 2 3 2 1 Example For example let us say you have a quarterly report where you would like to add a new column with the yearly total You therefore add a new Static text field to the column header band and a Text field to the details band in By default new Text fields are set to java lang String text However the yearly total column will be filled with numbers We therefore have to change the Expression class for the new text field to java lang Double v Text field properties Text Field Expression F tbcuresptums Expression Class EVERE magia J Blank When Null v Text field propertie Text Field Expression java lang String jjava lang Boolean java lang Byte java util Date Pattern java sql Timestamp Stretch With Overflow j Evaluation Time Expression Class Blank When Null Expression Class When we edit the text field expression we see the Expression editor window with all the available columns from the report table We can see here that each of these are m
60. be visible under selected data items Here you can specify a filter for each data element with operators such as greater than in or equal together with a filter value Periods For the period dimension you have three options relative periods fixed periods and start end dates Relative periods can e g be last 12 months and has the advantage that it keeps the data in the report up to date as time goes Fixed periods can e g be January 2014 You can swith to start end dates by selecting from the drop down menu under the periods tab which lets you specify flexible dates for the time span in the report Organisation units The organisation unit dimension lets you select any org unit from the hierarchy You can use the org unit mode selector to select org units explicitly by org unit hierarchy levels and by org unit groups 271 Using Event Visualizer 272 Chart ler mF we gl DRN Data Program Inpatent morbidity and mortality Available data items Admesion Date Diagnosis ICD 10 Discharge Date Gender lt 10 Mode of Discharge One of ial ea 1 Periods _ Organisation units Charts with aggregated values ll eal P aaa Upd E ll lA Stage Singk Event Inpatent morbidity and moral 10 8 6 S A wi 2 Died i x 0 poe By clicking Layout from the top menu you can control which dimensions should appear as columns rows and filters in the pivot ta
61. by moving category options 47 Data elements Category combinations from the left side pane Available category options into the right side pane Selected category options Category options can be reordered using the Move up and Move Down F buttons Once all data element categories options have been added to the data element category press the Add button to save all changes or the Cancel button to discard any changes A category can have two types Disaggregation or Attribute For disaggregation of data elements you should select Disaggregation A dimension type of Attribute will allow the category to be used to assign a combination of categories to data recorded through a dataset If the Use as data dimension box is ticked the category will be available to the analytics as another dimension in addition to the standard dimensions of Period and Organisation unit 5 6 Category combinations Category combinations allow multiple categories to be combined into a related set As an example a data element Number of new HIV infections might be disaggregated according to the following categories e Age Under 5 5 15 15 24 24 and above e Gender Male Female In this example there would be two levels of disaggregation consisting of two separate data element categories each consisting of several data element category options In most HMIS systems different data elements are disaggregated according
62. by the end users producing data exchange files which are sent electronically by email or physically by mail or personal travel Note that the brief Internet connectivity required for sending emails does not qualify for being defined as online This style of deployment has the obvious benefit that it works when appropriate Internet connectivity is not available On the other side there are significant challenges with this style which are described in the following section e Hardware Running stand alone systems requires advanced hardware in terms of servers and reliable power supply to be installed usually at district level all over the country This requires appropriate funding for procurement and plan for long term maintenance e Software platform Local installs implies a significant need for maintenance From experience the biggest challenge is viruses and other malware which tend to infect local installations in the long run The main reason is that end users utilize memory sticks for transporting data exchange files and documents between private computers other workstations and the system running the application Keeping anti virus software and operating system patches up to date in an offline environment are challenging and bad practices in terms of security are often adopted by end users The preferred way to overcome this issue is to run a dedicated server for the application where no memory sticks are allowed and use an Linux based operat
63. capacity Regarding external hosting there is lately a move towards outsourcing the operation and administration of computer resources to an external provider where those resources are accessed over the network popularly referred to as cloud computing or software as a service Those resources are typically accessed over the Internet using a web browser The primary goal for an online server deployment is provide long term stable and high performance accessibility to the intended services When deciding which option to choose for server environment there are many aspects to consider 1 Human capacity for server administration and operation There must be human resources with general skills in server administration and in the specific technologies used for the application providing the services Examples of such technologies are web servers and database management platforms Reliable solutions for automated backups including local off server and remote backup Stable connectivity and high network bandwidth for traffic to and from the server Stable power supply including a backup solution secure environment for the physical server regarding issues such as access theft and fire OU A UN Presence of a disaster recovery plan This plan must contain a realistic strategy for making sure that the service will be only suffering short down times in the events of hardware failures network downtime and more 7 Feasible
64. click Update To overwrite an existing favorite with the current pivot table click the green Overwrite icon To share a favorite with everyone or a user group click the blue Share icon To delete a favorite click the red Delete icon Manage favorites By Facility Type Coverages Quarteny Distinct Matemal Health Key Coverages Qutreach vs PHU Visits by fed outreaach Visits by org unit Feedback Indicator report Page 1 of 3 15 5 2 Sharing pivot tables ANC 1 Views Cumulatve Numbers nonga 0000 208 2000 2000 0000 708 0000 nona Next After you have created a pivot table and saved it as a favorite it is possible to share the pivot in different ways Click Share to reach the menu presented in the screen shot below Share About Ho Write interpretation Embed in web page Favorite link API link e Write interpretation Allows you to create an interpretation of the pivot table and share it with all users of the system 103 Using Pivot Table Analysis integration For certain analysis related resources in DHIS like pivot tables charts and maps one can Share a data interpretation An interpretation is simply a link to the relevant resource together with a text expressing some insight about the data If you want to share a pivot table interpretation you need to first save the table you want to share as a favorite Then without making any changes to the table click the Share butt
65. click on the view resource button and copy the link address To create a resource click on the Add new button Enter a name for the resource then choose between uploading a file or external URL If you chose file upload click Choose file and select your file your local computer If you chose URL enter the link to the resource on the Internet Then click Save 14 5 Using reporting rate summary Access the reporting rate summary from the Apps gt Reports menu Reporting rate summaries will show how many datasets forms that have been submitted by organisation unit and period There are two methods available to calculate reporting rates completeness e Based on complete data set registrations A complete data set registration refers to a user marking a data entry form as complete typically by clicking the complete button in the data entry screen hereby indicating to the system that she considers the form to be complete This is i e a Subjective approach to calculating completeness e Based on compulsory data element You can define any number of data elements in a data set to be compulsory This implies that data values must be captured for all data elements which have been marked as compulsory in order for the data set to be considered complete This is i e an objective approach to calculating completeness The reporting rate summary will for each row show a range of measures e Actual reports Indicates the number of data entry
66. clicking on pivot table in the top panel then clicking on create pivot table then marking the data range in the spreadsheet before clicking OK u can Data can also be downloaded in JSON XML Excel and CSV as plain data formats with different identification schemes ID Code and Name The data document will use identifiers of the dimension items and will be opened in a new browser window in order to reveal the URL of the request to the Web API in the address bar This will be useful for developers of apps and other client modules based on the DHIS 2 Web API or for those who require a plan data source for instance for import into statistical packages For advanced users two additional options are available under Advanced JXRML will produce a template of a Jasper Report which can be further customized based on your exact needs and used as the basis for a standard report in DHIS2 The Raw data SQL will provide the actual 105 Using Pivot Table Constraints and tips SQL statement used to generate the pivot table This could then be used as a data source in a Jasper report or as the basis for an SQL view Lastly the pivot table app allows you to download data in CSV format directly without first rendering the data in the Web Browser This will help overcome any constraint in the system settings that has been set in regards to the maximum number of analytic records This allows for much larger batches of data to be downloaded and u
67. column is percent of completed events the number of all visits scheduled 6 Visits overdue column is the number of overdue visits 7 Visits overdue column is percent of visits overdue the number of all visits scheduled 29 2 2 5 3 Program stage completeness To generate the completeness of events select an organisation unit on the left panel Then select a program which you would like After to select two dates for Start date and End date field Finally click Generate button The result is children organisation units where finished all events of the selected program by the date range you selected 29 2 2 6 Manual aggregation The Manual Aggregation module is used for aggregating individual data and import into aggregated data element To access Manual aggregation module from the Apps menu go to the Individual Records Select Manual Aggregation option on left menu Manual aggregation form is opened as below Manual aggregation Data set list ECG Report From 2012 01 01 To 2012 01 31 Use data from level s All x Organisation Unit Selection E Siera Leone Bo O Badjia Ngelehun CHC Njandama MCHP Baoma Bargbe Bargbo Bumpe Mgao Gbo Jaiama Bongor Kakua Komboya Lugbu Niawa Lenga Selenga Tikonka m Aggregate and Save Preview In the Manual aggregation form above L Select dataset from Dataset List to get aggregate values Note that only datasets which were ass
68. complete registrations for the relevant data set e Expected reports Indicates how many data entry complete registrations are expected This number is based on the number of organisation units the relevant data set has been assigned to enabled for data entry Percent The percentage of reports registered as complete based on the number expected e Reports on time Same as actual reports only reports registered as complete within the maximum number of days after the end of the reporting period This number of days after reporting period can be defined per data set in the data set management e Percent on time Same as percentage only reports registered as complete on time used as numerator To run the report you can follow these steps e Select an orgunit from the tree e Select one of the completeness methods to use to calculate the reporting rates Select all or one data set All will give you a report with all data sets for the selected organisation unit A single data set will give you a report with completeness for all children of the selected organisation unit e Select a period type and a period from the list of available periods for that period type Move back forward one year by using the prev next buttons e The report will then be rendered Change any of the parameters above and the report will be updated automatically 97 Using reporting functionality Using organisation unit distribution reports Reporting Rate
69. data only for certain category options and groups If you don t want users to see data that is aggregated beyond of their assigned category options and or category option groups you can assign Selected dimension restrictions for data analysis when adding or updating a user You can optionally define approval levels for partner data within any or all of these organisation unit levels For example you could define any or all of the following approval levels Table 20 2 Example Category Option Group Set approval levels Approval level Organisation unit level Category option group set 1 Country Partner 2 District Partner 3 Facility Partner 20 6 2 Approving by multiple category option group sets You can also define approval levels for different category option group sets To continue the example suppose that you have various agencies that manage the funding to the different partners For example Agency A funds accounts 1A and 2A while Agency B funds accounts 1B and 2B You could set up category option groups for Agency A and Agency B and make them both part of a category option group set called Agency So you would have Table 20 3 Example Multiple Category Option Group Sets Category option group set Category option group Category options Partner Partner 1 Account 1A Account 1B Partner Partner 2 Account 2A Account 2B Agency Agency A Account 1A Account 2A Agency Agency B Account 1B Accoun
70. date Create SQL views Will recreate all SQL views in the database Update category option combinations Rebuilds the category option combinations This may be required after altering the category options which belong to a given category Resource tables Resource tables are supporting tables that are used during analysis of data One would typically join the contents of these tables with the data value table when doing queries from third party applications like Microsoft Excel They are also used extensively by the analysis modules of DHIS2 Regeneration of the resource tables should only be done once all data integrity issues are resolved The resource tables are also generated automatically every time the analytics process is run by the system Organisation unit structure _orgunitstructure This table should be regenerated any time there have been any changes made to the organisational unit hierarchy This table provides information about the organisation unit 193 Data Administration Locale Management 22 5 hierarchy It has one row for each organisation unit one column for each organisation unit level and the organisation unit identifiers for all parents in the lineage as values Data element group set structure _dataelementgroupsetstructure This table provides information about which data elements are members of which data element group sets The table has one row for each data element one column for each data element
71. defining health programmes and action for each stage of the programme 29 2 1 6 1 Program A program must be specified with only one tracked entity And just entities what who have the tracked entity as same as the tracked entity of program can enroll into that program There are three type of program include 1 Multi events with registration program MEWR Used for health program with many stages e g Mother Health Program with stages such as ANC Visit 2 4 Delivery PNC Visit 2 Single event with registration program SEWR used for birth cerficate and death certificate This type of programs have only one stage An TEI just can enroll into the program one time 3 Single event without registration program anonymous program or SEWoR used for saving health cases without registering any information into the system This type of programs have only one stage To access the program maintenance module from Apps menu go to Programs Attributes option and click on it Select Program menu To define a new program click the Add new button on the main page Fill all fields with read asterisk and then click the Add button 29 2 1 6 1 1 Basic information 284 Program details section Name The name of the program Description Descriptions meanings explanation etc of about the program Type There are three types of program multi events with registration single event with registration and single event w
72. designing the hierarchy the number of children for any organisational unit may indicate the usefulness of the structure e g having one or 13 Getting started with DHIS 2 Data Elements more 1 1 relationships between two levels is not very useful as the values will be the same for the child and the parent level On the other extreme a very high number of children in the middle of the hierarchy e g 50 districts in a province might call for an extra level to be added in between to increase the usefulness of data analysis The lowest level the health facilities will often have a large number of children 10 60 but for other levels higher up in the hierarchy approx 5 20 children is recommended Too few or too many children might indicate that a level should be removed or added Note that it is quite easy to make changes to the upper levels of the hierarchy at a later Stage the only problem is changing organisational units that collect data the leaf nodes e g splitting or merging health facilities Aggregation up the hierarchy is done based on the current hierarchy at any time and will always reflect the most recent changes to the organisational structure Refer to the chapter on Organisation Units to learn how to create organisational units and to build up the hierarchy 2 5 2 Data Elements 14 The Data Element is perhaps the most important building block of a DHIS 2 database It represents the WHAT dimension it explains what is be
73. details of the new user such as name password etc If you choose this action then enter the following information user name password surname first name E mail OpenID account if any and mobile phone number if any After you finish adding the user the account will be ready for them to use with the user name and password that you supply User management User management District Health Information Software 2 sss Apps Profile Create new user Action Create account wih user details 7 Details Username Password Retype password Surname First name E mail OpenID Mobile phone number e Email invitation to create account Choose this if you would like to send by email an invitation for the user to return to the system and finish setting up their user account The user will then return to the system and fill in most of their personal information The account that the user finishes setting up will be limited according to how you configure it below Note that you may not select this option to create an account with critical system authorities such as All Scheduling Administration Perform maintenance tasks Merge organisation units Eliminate duplicate data elements Sql View Management Change system settings and List Add or Delete user roles If you choose this action then enter the email address to which the invitation should be sent If you want to you may also enter the user name that the ac
74. don t want to display Create new event box to create new event for a repeatable stage after clicking Complete button for an event of the stage in data entry form This field is checked as default e Standard interval days Specify the number of days to repeat the repeatable program stage Form details section e Auto generate event Uncheck this to prevent for creating an event of this program stage automatically when a entity enroll into the program e Open data entry form after enrollment Automatically open the event of this stage as soon as the entity has enrolled into the program e Report Date to use The date is used for report date of the event opened automatically There are two options include Incident date or Enrollment date If the Report date to use is selected as one of those two incident date enrollment date in Dashboard the Report date of the event will be set as one of those two Block entry form after completed Check on it for blocking entry form after completed the event of this stage The data values in the entry form cannot be changed until the status of the event is reset as incomplete e Ask user to complete program when stage is completed If this property is set a popup will come up to ask if user wants to create the event of next stage e Ask user to create new event when stage is complete If this property is set a popup will come up to ask if user wants to create a new event of this
75. dynamic 199 Data Administration Scheduling attribute to an object select Maintenance gt Data administration from the main menu then Attribute from the left side panel and press the Add new button Edit Attribute Details Name Rationale Code Rationale Mandatory Assigned to Data element Data element Group Indicator Indicator Group Data Set Organisation Unit Organisation Unit Group Organisation Unit Group Set User User Group Program Program Stage Tracked Entity Tracked Entity Attribute Category Option Category Option Group Value Type Text Y Save Cancel To create a new attribute assign it a name Each attribute should have a unique name Check the tick box Mandatory if the object should always have the dynamic attribute Next select which object or objects the attribute should be assigned to Lastly select the value type You can choose from Text Yes No Date Number Integer Positive integer and Negative integer If the value supplied for the attribute does not match the value type an error will result Finally click Save to save the attribute The dynamic attribute will now be present in the object which you assigned it to in the respective Edit screen of each the object 22 15 Scheduling The analytics resource tables and data mart can be automatically scheduled to run on regular intervals Simply select the aggregation period types organisation unit group set aggregation level
76. e Accept Accept data that has been approved e Unaccept Return to an unaccepted but still approved state data that has been accepted In order to unapprove data for a given organisation unit you must have the authority to approve data for that organisation unit or to approve data for a higher level organisation unit to which that data is aggregated The reason for this is as follows If you are reviewing data for approval at a higher organisation unit level you should consider whether the data at lower organisation units are reasonable If all lower level data looks good you can approve the data at the higher level If some lower level data looks suspect you can unapprove the data at the lower level This allows the data to be reviewed again at the lower level corrected if necessary and re approved up through the organisation unit levels according to the hierarchy 20 6 Approving by category option group set When defining an approval level you specify the organisation unit level at which data will be approved You may also optionally specify a category option group set This is useful if you are using category option groups to define additional dimensions of your data and you want approvals to be based on these dimensions The following examples illustrate how this can be done within a single category option group set and by using multiple category option group sets 20 6 1 Approving by one category option group set 170 For exa
77. e g lt ogr Name gt Moyamba District lt ogr Name gt lt somePrefix uid gt x7uuia898nJ lt somePrefix uid gt or lt CODE gt OU_12345 lt CODE gt Another common error is not making sure the identifier matches exactly especially when using the name property All matches are performed on exact values meaning that Moyamba in a source GML file would not be matched against Moyamba District in the database Have a brief look at the identifiers and compare them to the corresponding values in the database If they seem to match fairly good it is about time to do a preview in the import export module Go to Services gt Import Export select Preview select the GML file and click Import Look for new updated organisation units Our intention is to add coordinates to already existing organisation units in the database So we want as many updates as possible and 0 new Those listed as new will be created as root units and mess up the organisation unit trees in DHIS 2 If any listed as new click the number and the organisation units in question will appear in the list below If there are any slight misspellings compared to the organisation unit names in the database fix them and do the preview again Otherwise click the discard all button below the list and then the Import all button above the list If the import process completes successfully you should now be able to utilize the geographical data in the DHIS2 GIS If not check the l
78. ee eeeeeeeeeeeaeseeneaees 11 2 2 2 Downloading and installing the server version cccececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeenenes 12 2 3 LOGGING ON 10 DAIS 2 iria a a iexcetinei A O 12 24 LOGGING OU Ol DAIS Z rattaat a a A 12 2 5 Quick intro to designing a DHIS 2 database ccc cceccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenes 13 25 1 The Organisational Merarchy oone ien ae E E 13 DZ Da a EE GINU Sweater lancer en a NA AN 14 2 5 3 Datasets and data entry fOrmS ssssssssssrrsrresrrrsrrrsrrrrrrrsrrrsrrrrrrnerrrsrrrrrrrnre 15 2D ale Data eV TONNS erener a a a e a aat 15 ZA Nadalon TUES siara A a R A A eine ae 16 Pn RE PA Le I EEO EE OE E EE EAE eee E E E E A AA E OE EE E 16 2 936 REDO Cables and reDOrTS i ccs saints ai nA navi aaa eee 16 Ze E MON DY sesso tse ia eet bate ke aee se asa erate aA eg Page asta vata ae 17 2 518 gt CHAS ANG CaSNOOGl sisine iinde EAE Ei 17 3 Data GIMensions in DHISZ arino a reateniaa tant anaemia einer 19 3 1 Data dimensions Core building blocks in DHIS 2 cceccc cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeees 19 3 2 Data elements The What dimension cccccccececeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeaeaseneaeatenentananenes 20 3 2 1 Data element categories ssssssresrersrrrsrrrsrrrsrrnrrrrsrrrerrnerresrrrerrnerrerrreernnn 20 3 2 2 lt Data element Gro p Sets croma E AO A EE AA 21 3 3 The organisation unit dimension cccccceceseececeeeeeseeceeeseeeeeeaesseeeaeseaeeseatatsne
79. element groups to review each data element identified in the integrity check Either remove the data element from all groups except the one that it should be allocated to or see if one of the groups should be placed in a different group set 22 2 4 Data elements in data set but not in form or sections Data elements have been assigned to a data set but have not been assigned to any sections of the data set forms All data sets which use section forms should generally have all data elements in the data set assigned to exactly one section of the dataset 22 2 5 Data elements assigned to data sets with different period types Data elements should not be assigned to two separate data sets whose period types differ The recommended approach would be to create two separate data elements for instance a monthly and yearly data element and assign these to respective datasets 22 2 6 Data sets not assigned to organisation units All data sets should be assigned to at least one organisation unit 22 2 7 Sections with invalid category combinations Data sets which use section forms should only have a single category combination within each section This violation could result from assigning a data element to a section but then changing the category combination of this data element at a later point in time 190 Data Administration Indicators with identical formulas 22 2 0 Indicators with identical formulas Although this rule will not affe
80. elements which are incorrectly entered as they are more easily identifiable when entering data from a paper form Once a custom form has been added to a data set it will be available in data entry and used automatically Note Custom forms are preferentially displayed over section forms If a data set has both a section form and a custom form the custom form will be displayed during data entry Users will not be able to select which method they wish to input data so be sure that your custom form contains all data elements which may be required However if using a mobile interface sections forms will display preferentially over custom forms therefore both can be used to support data collection depending on the method of data entry To add a custom form design to a data set then first locate your data set in the Data set Management window and click on the Design data entry form from the context menu First provide a Name for the form There are a few important buttons in the Editor that you must pay special attention to The icon with four outward arrows is the full screen mode on off button which can be very useful The there is a Source button that shows the HTML code for your form If you already have the HTML for your form then you should start by pasting it in here Click on Source again to go back to preview non HTML mode A blue icon under the editor window Insert data elements allows you to add data elements to the form A
81. entry Screen has the following validation errors please correct Validation rule Left side Operator Right side Slept under LLIN at measles fixed lt 1y cannot be higher than measles doses given fixed lt 1y 7 0 lt 40 10 1 5 Offline data entry The data entry module will function even if during data entry the Internet connectivity is not stable In order to utilize this functionality you must login to the server while Internet connectivity is present but if during data entry the Internet link between your computer and the server becomes unstable data can still be entered into the data entry form saved to your local computer and then pushed to the server once the Internet connectivity has been restored Data can be entered and stored locally while being offline and uploaded to the central server when on line This means that the on line deployment strategy will be more viable in areas with unstable Internet connectivity The total bandwidth usage is greatly reduced since forms no longer are retrieved from the server for each rendering When the server is able to be reached through the Internet connection a message is displayed at the top of the data entry screen below If the Internet connection should disconnect for some reason during the data entry process this will be detected by the application and you will be informed that your data will be stored locally You are offline data will be stored locally 79 Data entr
82. from the dashboard page This will bring up the dashboard sharing settings options To share the dashboard with specific user groups type in their name in the sharing settings dialogue box and click on the sign to add them to the dashboard sharing settings Sharing settings x Antenatal Care Search for user groups Created by Tom Wakiki a External access without login Public access with login None T Cape Town University Research Group Can edit and view T X Africare HQ Can view T X Cancel Save All dashboards have two sharing groups set by default e External access without login This option when selected provides access to the dashboard as an external resource This is useful for when you are creating an external web portal but would like to call information from a dashboard you have made internally within DHIS2 By default this option is not selected Dashboards Messages and feedback e Public access with login This option allows the selected dashboard to be pushed to all users within your DHIS2 instance This can also be hidden from public view by selecting the None option which is the default option for new dashboards User groups which have been added manually can be assigned two types of permissions within the dashboard e Can view Provides the user group with view only rights to the dashboard e Can edit and view Allows the user groups to edit the dashboard in addition to viewing it Edit
83. generalize your geographical data The boundaries in geographical data files are usually very accurate too much so for the needs of a web based GIS This usually does not affect the performance when using GIS files on a local system but it is usually necessary to optimize the geographical data for the web based GIS system of DHIS2 All geographical data needs to be downloaded from the server and rendered in a browser so if the data is overly complex the performance of the DHIS2 GIS will be negatively impacted This optimization process can be described as follows Coordinates The number of significant decimal digits e g 23 02937874993774 should be Shortened to fewer digits e g 23 03 Although this will result in some inaccuracies on the map given the usual scale at which maps in DHIS2 are produced gt 1 50 000 the loss of precision should not be noticeable Normally no more than four significant digits after the decimal point should be necessary Polygons In addition to shortening the number of significant digits the actual number of points should also be reduced to an optimal level Finding this optimal level may take a bit of experimentation Decreasing the precision of the points as well as the number of points through 123 Setting up GIS Importing coordinates 124 generalization will lead to degradation of the polygon However after a bit of experimentation an optimal level of generalization can be found where the accur
84. get based on the date of enrollment of each entity who registered the selected organisation unit and enrolled in the selected program in the interval from start date and end date what health provider entered Program Summary Report Organisation unit boundary Ngelehun CHC Program Child Health Program Tracking vy Star date 2011 09 28 End date 2012 09 28 Use data from level s Selected Children Only All Generate Cancel Result matches the search criteria List All Persons Total number of results Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun C Javier Gassert gt Birth Details gt 9 12moni 2012 07 05 2012 Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun C Jonathan Drake gt Birth Details At6 weeks after bith gt At 10 weeks after birt At14 weeks after bit gt 9 12moni 2012 07 01 2012 04 02 2012 06 01 2012 04 05 2012 Click on an event box to display records for this event Click on the entity box to display the details and history of the selected entity The color highlight the status of the stages e PURPLE Data entered and uncompleted stages e RED Stages open but no data entered while the date estimated for closing completing is over YELLOW Coming stages GREEN Compete stages GREY Skipped stages 29 2 2 5 2 Program Statistics The tool provides a tool for generating a statistics report by program To access Program Statistics module
85. group set and the names of the data element group as values Indicator group set structure _indicatorgroupsetstructure This table provides information about which indicators are members of which indicator group sets The table has one row for each indicator one column for each indicator group set and the names of the indicator group as values Organisation unit group set structure _organisationunitgroupsetstructure This table provides information about which organisation units are members of which organisation unit group sets The table has one row for each organisation unit one column for each organisation unit group set and the names of the organisation unit groups as values Category structure _categorystructure This table provides information about which data elements are members of which categories The table has one row for each data element one column for each category and the names of the category options as values Data element category option combo name _categoryoptioncomboname This table should be regenerated any time there have been changes made to the category combination names It contains readable names for the various combinations of categories Data element structure _dataelementstructure This table provides information about all data elements and which period type frequency they capture data at The period type is determined through the data set membership and hence relies on data elements to be member o
86. implications for how coverage indicators are calculated as the full annual population will be used as denominator value even when doing monthly reports If you want to look at an estimated annual coverage value for a given month then you will have the option of setting the indicator to Annualised which means that a monthly coverage value will be multiplied by a factor of 12 a quarterly value by 4 in order to generate an effective yearly total The annualised indicator feature can therefore be used to mimic the use of monthly population estimates 3 5 Data collection vs data analysis 3 5 1 Data collection and storage Datasets determine what raw data that is available in the system as they describe how data is collected in terms of periodicity as well as spaital exten Data sets define the building blocks of the data to be captured and stored in DHIS 2 For each data dimension we decide what level of detail the data should be collected at namely 1 the data element e g diagnosis vaccine or any event taking place and its categories e g age and gender 2 the period frequency dimension and 3 the organisation unit dimension For any report or data analysis you can never retrieve more detailed data than what is defined in the data sets so the design of the datasets and their corresponding data entry forms the data collection tools dictate what kind of data analysis will be possible 3 5 2 Input does not equal Output It is import
87. in as detailed data element selections This is useful when you want to separate these categories in your analysis 16 10 Selecting chart options 110 You can set various chart options by clicking on the Options button the chart toolbar Using Data Visualizer Selecting chart options Chart options x Data v Show values Hide empty category items show trend lines Target value title 4 gt 4 Base value title sort order None w Aggregation type By data element ia Events Include only completed events Axes Range axis min max 4 Range axis tick steps Range axis decimals lt gt lt gt lt gt Range axis title Domain axis title General Hide chart legend Hide chart title Chart title Hide Update Show values Shows the values above the series in the chart Hide empty category items Hides category items with no data from the chart Show trend lines The trend line will visualize how your data evolves over time e g is performance improving or deteriorating Makes sense when periods are selected as category Target line value title Displays a horizontal line at the given domain value Useful e g when you want to compare your performance to the current target Base line value title Displays a horizontal line at the given domain value Useful e g when you want to visualize how your performance has evolved since the beginning of a process Sort order Allows you to sort the val
88. installing Java The reader is referred to this website for detailed information on getting Java installed 2 2 1 2 Starting up with a blank database The live package comes with a demo database just like what you see on the online demo which is based on the national Sierra Leone HMIS and if you want to start with a blank system database and build up your own system then you need to do the following 1 Stop DHIS2 live if it is already running Right click on the tray icon and select Exit The tray icon is the green symbol on the bottom right of your screen on Windows which should say DHIS 2 Server running when you hover your mouse pointer over the icon 2 Open the folder where the DHIS 2 live package is installed and locate the folder called conf 3 In conf open the file called hibernate properties in a text editor notepad or similar and do the following modification locate the string jdbc h2 database dhis2 and replace the dhis2 part with any name that you want to give to your database e g dhis2 test 4 Save and close the hibernate properties file 5 Start DHIS 2 Live by double clicking on the file dhis2 live exe in the DHIS 2 Live installation folder or by using a desktop shortcut or menu link that you might have set up 6 Wait for the browser window to open and the login screen to show and then log in with username admin and password district 7 Now you will see a completely empty DHIS 2 sys
89. instance was enrolled in the program current_date The current date value count The number of non null values in the expression part of the event zero pos value counthe number of numeric positive values in the expression part of the event event_count The count of events useful in combination with filters enrollment_count The count of enrollments useful in combination with filters tel_ count The count of tracked entity instances useful in combination with filters An example expression that uses the value count variable looks like this AO3MvVHHogjR a3kGcGDCuk6 AO3MvHHogjR wQLfBvPrxqg V value_count An example expression that uses the event_date and incident_date variables looks like this d2 daysBetween V incident_date V event_date 311 Program rules Overview Chapter 31 Program rules This chapter covers how to configure and use program rules Program rules provide a means to control dynamic behavior of the user interface in tracker and event capture Program rules are based on expressions composed of data elements and attributes of tracked entities 31 1 Overview The purpose of program rules is to provide a way to produce complex dynamic behaviors in tracker and event capture The program rules enables the programs to respond to data values entered in a program The behaviors that can be configured as of now is skip logic and validation rules Program rules
90. inteeeaasionus 207 24 2 Mobile browser based data entry ccccccccecececeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeaeseeseeegesteneanananeaes 208 24 2 1 Getting started with mobile browser data entry sssssssessresrrrsrresrrerrne 208 24 33 IZME GPRS SG CHEE e a e a A vies ahhaevet deuce tein te cadedauna iin 236 24 3 1 Data CONNECTION AVAIIADIITY iseseisana 236 24 3 2 J2ME GPRS 3G facility reporting client cece cc ce eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeanees 237 24 3 3 J2ME GPRS 3G program reporting chent ccceeeececeecee sees eeeeeeseaeeeenenes 237 24 3 4 Detailed configuration of data sets and reporting forms 0cecee eee 237 24 3 4 1 The mapping of data sets to form layout on the phone 237 24 53 4 2 SO NA OLOS eere Ea UA 238 24 3 4 3 Versioning of data sets ssessesserssrrssrresnrrerrsrrrrerrrernsrrrrerrrensrne 238 24 3 744 Cangotage SUDDORE oiscn cictces tn evadars e a A mori eiaas 238 2453 5 MODINE application SCEUPD sis ehictscwacisiisienieenleis avai er iasiaem alten 238 24 3 5 1 Installation and initialization cece ececeeeeeee esse eeeeeeeeaeeeeaeataeees 238 24 3 5 2 Logging in for regular use ccccecececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesteneeegestentanaes 240 243 015 FAGIITY REDOING MOODUIG ii ciinsialeacincras a a AA batten 240 24 3 5 4 Community Reporting cccccececeeeeeeceeeseeteeeaeseseeceaegueceeeaesneneaeas 246 2G 4s SMS COMMANA rencr A aa E eaten naan 260 244 1
91. it not edit and delete it e Read and Write All users can edit and delete it 29 2 1 6 1 6 Validation criteria Validation criteria section provides a mechanism for defining criteria which validate if an entity can enrol into the program To access the validation criteria maintenance module click on the program which you would like and select View validation criteria link on context menu to open Validation criteria management form To create a new validation criterion click the Add new button Fill all fields with read asterisk and click Add button To translate the name of a validate criteria click on the program stage which you would like and select Translation link 29 2 1 6 2 Program stage To define a program stage click the row corresponding to the program you would like then View program stages link in context menu In Program stage management form click Add new button 287 Tracker Programs Attributes To sort program stages by scheduled days click Sort by scheduled days button 29 2 1 6 2 1 Base information 288 Program stage details section e Name Name of the program stage e Description The description of the program stage e Scheduled days from start The minimum number of days to wait for starting the program stage Repeatable program stage details section e Repeatable specify the program stage as repeatable or not e Display generate event box after completed Uncheck on it if you
92. map will open full sized in the GIS app e Resize Resizes the dashboard item There are 3 sizes in which to choose from 73 Dashboards Managing the Dashboard Maps charts and tables can be viewed as full size as images in the case of charts and map views or as HTML resources in the case of reports tables and messages To reorder how the dashboard appears simply drag and drop any of the objects to a new position In order to change between the various dashboards which are available simply select the listed items that are available to review The list can be scrolled though by using the lt gt symbols to the left of the dashboard names 9 2 Managing the Dashboard In addition to adding items or modifying the layout of a dashboard further options allow you to add additional dashboards modify their names delete an entire dashboard an share the dashboard with other users These additional items can be managed using the Add Manage and Share links on the top left of the dashboard next to the dashboard names e Add Allows additional dashboards to be added Manage Can change the name of the dashboard add messages to or delete the dashboard This applies to the currently selected dashboard item Share Allows the sharing of dashboard items with user groups User permissions can also be assigned to each user group 9 3 Dashboard Sharing 74 In order to share a dashboard with user groups first select Share
93. mun uideveckonauaec wesw iid audersatavalenvantaauuee 123 18 2 ORUING COOFOINGLES E a Ea E EEE EA 123 19 Setting Up report FUNCTIONALITY 0 0 ccc ccce ce ecec eee eeee esse eseeeeseaeaeeeeaeaeaeeseaeateneseataneneaeas 127 t9 1 Data SOUrCES Tor reporting sirener na T E TE 127 19 1 1 Types of data and aggregation sssssssssrresrrrsrrsrrrerrrrrrrerrrerrrrerrerrrerrnnr 127 TO klt Terminology een A AA A A 127 19 1 1 2 Basic r les Of AGOFEGALION misserrinir rare a 127 19 1 1 3 Dimensions of aggregation ssssssrrsrersrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrrrrrerrrsrrrerrrere 128 19 1 1 4 Aggregation operators methods for aggregation s sssessresres 129 19 1 1 5 Advanced aggregation settings aggregation levels 00 129 T9 12 RESOURCES Ta DIGS 55 picnaataiveas saunuestvavdssiaat A A 130 LO il Se REDON CaDIGS arani ys Marans test A AE 130 t92 HOW tO create report tables curii ainiavandiasid i isaac ate a 130 EO Zs GENEL alr OPTIONS ua okie A EE A ten Mewlaas 131 192 2 SEIECUING datara saw adniwniiny cna aca Dikes avait din ai ean a 132 19 2 3 Selecting report parameters cecccec eee ee eee seseeeeeeeeseeeeaeseeseeesesnentaneeees 132 19 2 4 Data element dimension tableS ccc ccececeeeeceeeeeeseeeeaeseeteseansesneanas 134 19 2 5 Report table best practices ssssssresrrrsrrrrrrrsrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrnrrrsrrrerrnne 135 19 3 Report taple Outcome ao a A A E aA E FAE 136 194 Standard Tepo
94. node can be positioned at level 2 while most other leaf nodes are at level 5 Note that it is quite easy to make changes to the upper levels of the hierarchy at a later Stage the only problem is changing organisational units that collect data the leaf nodes e g splitting or merging health facilities Aggregation up the hierarchy is done based on the current hierarchy at any time and will always reflect the most recent changes to the organisational structure D Important Because the most recent information which is contained in the organisational unit hierarchy is always used for aggregation it is important to keep in mind that changes to it such as the division of districts into two separate districts will not be respected over time As an example District A may be sub divided into District B and District C This is a process which often happens for political reasons Facilities which belong to District A would need to be reassigned to District B and C However any historical data which was entered before the split actually occurred would still be registered as belonging to District B and C and not the defunct District A This temporal representation of the organisational hierarchy across time will be lost 35 Organisation units Organisation unit maintenance 4 2 Organisation unit maintenance 4 2 1 Organisation units This is where you can create organisation units from now on referred to as orgunits and build up the orgun
95. on the remote server The password will be stored encrypted 23 1 10 OAuth2 clients 206 Mobile DHIS 2 Mobile Introduction Chapter 24 Mobile This chapter covers various mobile technologies including Web J2ME SMS Service and SMS Command 24 1 DHIS 2 Mobile Introduction DHIS 2 provides a range of options to allow data entry from mobile devices including a dedicated GPRS 3G J2ME client and two versions of DHIS 2 which have been optimized specifically for mobile browsers Each of these solutions will be described in detail in the following sections DHIS 2 offers several Android clients which are described in detail in other sections of this guid Collection of data in the field can be technically challenging and expensive Mobile phone solutions have the potential to significantly reduce the complexity of deploying a distributed data collection system Using a simple Java client installed on a mobile phone or a web browser which works on the mobile phone field workers can report directly to the DHIS 2 database through their mobile device While mobile phone solutions have a great potential there are complexities with such deployments Phones lack processing power and have a small display they need to be charged and often such deployments make the most sense in areas with poor or intermittent network coverage Each of the mobile solutions are introduced briefly below and the discussed in separate sections in detail e DHI
96. oo Palette Ib x 7 ia an i Designer XML Preview amp Q Q P DejaVu Sans 3 A Alb j u s EER E EN i 4 43 Styles f 7 IIE RF Parameters ti la i a et it hal nb rr ar ra ber 4 i 9 caout Ti Currentdate Pagenumber Page X of Y E H Fields J 2 Percentage Total pages f gt Variables da Scriptets a Title 4 rusia Feedback report new Column Head J Detail 1 Column Foote T F reporting_month_name F param_organisationunit_name Page Foote dpt Properties D gt x Background a 8 Page width 595 _ 74 Page height 842 6 Orientation Portrait 5 IE Margins Left margin 20 4 Right margin 20 a 3 Top margin 20 34 Bottom margin 20 2 Columns 1 Columns 1 0 Column Width 555 Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Column space More c4 Resource bundle P a When Resource Missing Type Type Null x E Query Text BE Indicator 2011 LRR 2011 NBER 2011WR 2011URR 2011 2011 February February February February February February Te language for the dataset query SQL zj a ef a as Fer EXPTESsion 5 je F indicatorname F year_Irr F F year_wr F year_urr F F F F F F F F Properties No properties set o Tf SJ Title on a new page d Summary on a new page Services 4 x 94 Summary with Page Header and Footer a Databases o io Float column footer J Ignore pagination 7 Print order Vertical x eg Column Direction Left to Right When No Data No Pages il Language
97. order to import geospatial data from the feature members of the GML input DHIS 2 must match each of them with an organisation unit in its database The feature member element must in other words contain a reference to its corresponding organisation unit The reference itself must be one of three possible DHIS 2 identifiers uid code or name The identifier of choice must be provided as a property for each feature member element The importer will look for a property with the local name of either Uid Code or Name e g ogr Name or anyPrefix Code If your feature members already contain a property of the identifier you wish to use Such as the name of an area you can use search and replace in a text editor to rename these elements to a name DHIS 2 will recognize see the below table This is typically a workflow which is Setting up GIS Importing coordinates applicable when using the name as the identifier the source shapefile or even GML will usually contain the name for each area it defines Table 18 1 Organisation unit identifiers supported for GML import Matching priority Identifier Valid spellings Guaranteed unique 1 Uid uid Uid UID Yes 2 Code code Code CODE No 3 Name name Name NAME No In the case of renaming properties one would usually find a tag named something like ogr DISTRICT NAME ogr NAME_1 and rename it to ogr Name If using the code or uid identifiers on the other hand look
98. pet eae EEEE E TE Bed Util Ped 7 Bed Utilisation Jaediatric boro La p Ln 6 Col indicatorid Field px numberOfLeading iy organisationunitid Field Integer Ii numberOfTrailing indicatorname Field string bitCount int int B organisationunitname Field String equals Object box L User Defined Express reporting month_name Field String i toString int int Si La Recent Expressions param_organisationunit_name Field String z toString int String Eyf j TH organisation unit is parent Field Stringa i Gl Expression Wizards zani na rim toString String a E F E F indicatorname equals Bed Util All Bed Utilisation All Wards F indicatorname equals Bed Util Mat Bed Utilisation Maternity 145 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport F indicatorname equals Bed Util Ped Bed Utilisation Paediatric F indicatorname From this we can see a pattern that is reusable for more general cases e For each indicator or data element we want to change the name for we need one line e Each line is separated by a colon e We finish the expression with a regular line Each line has the same format where the red text is the shortname the blue text is what we want to insert instead FCindicatornane equals Bed Util ALL Bed Utilisation ALL Wards The sa
99. powerful and robust hardware All of these aspects must be covered in order to create an appropriate hosting environment The hardware requirement is deliberately put last since there is a clear tendency to give it too much attention What is DHIS 2 Difference between Aggregated and Patient data in a HIS Looking back at the three main hosting options experience from implementation missions in developing countries suggests that all of the hosting aspects are rarely present in option one and two at a feasible level Reaching an acceptable level in all these aspects is challenging in terms of both human resources and money especially when compared to the cost of option three It has the benefit that is accommodates the mentioned political aspects and building local capacity for server administration on the other hand can this be provided for in alternative ways Option three external hosting has the benefit that it supports all of the mentioned hosting aspects at a very affordable price Several hosting providers of virtual servers or software as a service offer reliable services for running most kinds of applications Example of such providers are Linode and Amazon Web Services Administration of such servers happens over a network connection which most often anyway is the case with local server administration The physical location of the server in this case becomes irrelevant as that such providers offer services in most parts of the w
100. range for the specific organisation unit and data element combination Comment Min max limits J vin limit 1 fva limit 23 l Average 142 Save Remove Save comment Stored by Tom Wakiki Last updated 2014 03 05 Data element history Audit trail 22 5 200 17 5 15 0 4 12 5 4 i 10 0 4 7 5 5 0 2 5 3 0 0 ie Ss Di v S Di o N e 0 S E P D eo j c Ss Fu s ee s K i yy Ff S S S S gt gt amp amp e pr e a S O e Follow Up In the data history window there is also a feature to tag or star a value E g a Suspicious value that needs further investigation can be kept in the system but marked for Follow Up In the Data Quality module you can run a Follow Up analysis and view all values marked for Follow Up and then later edit the values if proved incorrect Audit trail The audit trail allows you to view other data values which have been entered prior to the current value As an example the following data element was changed from its original value to 120 The audit trail shows when the data value was altered along with which user made the changes Data element history Audit trail On Modified by Value Modification 2014 12 29 09 01 admin 120 Update 2014 12 29 09 00 admin 12 Update Data entry Editing and deleting data 10 1 3 Editing and deleting data If you wish to enter data which has already been entered simply replace the data entry value wi
101. sent up wards as aggregate reports 29 1 2 Getting started with tracker The module supports health providers for registering treatment cases and tracks these cases over time through different forms that are filled for the treatment of each person The process starts with the entity registration When an entity who Is registered in the system the application will guide the health provider the services required for this entity through activity plan and the services from time to time can be updated into the entity s profile Below is an example about the working process of Mother and child health programme described in steps depicted in picture below Name based information tracking process ne TPN pois a weed PROGRAM ENROLLMENT TREATMENT CASE REPORTS PERSON REGISTRATION B Personal Information For example _ MOTHER CARE PROGRAM Activity plans L Identification Details S _ Mother Care program L ANC Individual reports Program Delivery Summary reports Tabular report ot Relationships Child Health program G PNC p L G ai _ Aggregate data for agg a m reports at gt CHILD HEALTH CARE At birth Immunization at different Stages of age The process of creating a new entity in the system is through the registration process The entity is first registered in the system or checked if the entity alread
102. sets of menus at the top e back button this helps to go back to the search and registration page e previous and next buttons these are buttons to acces the previous next TEI details e program selection menu this is to dictate what kind of data to record and track for the selected TEI This also affects the contents of the widgets e a small pin icon at the right corner this allows to pin or stick the right side of the widgets This is useful especially during data entry If for example there are a many data elements or big form to fill sticking the right side helps to remain visible while scrolling data entry part Using Tracker Capture TEI dashboard e a small gear icon at the right corner currently three functionalities are available from this Icon xt Show hide widgets Save dashboard layout as default Set TEI to inactive om 1 Show hide widgets this helps to control which widgets to display From the figure above there are eight widgets on display The widgets are collapsible responsive and draggable this helps to acquire optimal view area as per user needs Widget re arrangments are saved automatically per user per program 2 Save dashboard layout as default widgets arrangement is saved automatically everytime a widget s position or state expand collapse is changed However for the entrie layout to be considered a default layout for the selected program it is required to explicitly save as Default la
103. text expressing some insight about the data If you want to share a chart interpretation you need to first save the chart you want to share as a favorite Then without making any changes to the chart click the Share button the toolbar A window will open up and this is where you write your interpretation When you are done click share button in the bottom right corner of the window The window will close automatically and if the interpretation was shared successfully you will find a notification on the bottom toolbar 16 15 Embed charts in any web page Certain analysis related resources in DHIS like pivot tables charts and maps can be embeded in any web page by using a plugin If you have created a chart in the Data Visualizer you will get the plugin configuration for this chart by clicking the Share button the toolbar and then Embed as plugin You will find more information about the plugins in the web api chapter 16 16 Analysis integration The analysis apps in DHIS 2 are completely integrated so you can easily switch between pivot table chart and map visualization of your data When you have made a chart you can click e g Map in the top right corner and then select Open this table as map 113 Using Data Visualizer Exiting the data visualizer module E Table h Chart E Map Home Go to maps Open this chart as map 5 MH 16 17 Exiting the data visualizer module If you want to exit the module and go back to the
104. the Internet using a web browser This style of deployment currently benefits from the huge investments in and expansions of mobile networks in developing countries This makes it possible to access online servers in even the most rural areas using mobile Internet modems also referred to as dongles This online deployment style has huge positive implications for the implementation process and application maintenance compared to the traditional offline standalone style e Hardware Hardware requirements on the end user side are limited to a reasonably modern computer laptop and Internet connectivity through a fixed line or a mobile modem There is no need for a specialized server for each user any Internet enabled computer will be sufficient A server will be required for online deployments but since there is only one or several servers which need to be procured and maintained this is significantly simpler and cheaper than maintaining many separate servers is disparate locations Software platform The end users only need a web browser to connect to the online server All popular operating systems today are shipped with a web browser and there is no special requirement on what type or version This means that if severe problems such as virus infections or software corruption occur one can always resort to re formatting and installing the computer operating system or obtain a new computer laptop The user can continue with data entry where it w
105. the three dimensions data indicators data elements reporting rates periods relative fixed and organisation units units or groups Note that Last 12 Months from the period dimension and the root organisation unit are selected by default Notice that you can hide and show individual data series in the chart by clicking directly on the series label in the chart they appear either at the top or to the right of the chart If you want to give the chart more space on your screen you can click on the triple left arrow button on the top centre menu This will collapse the left side menu You can get this menu back by clicking on the same button again 16 12 Downloading chart as image or PDF After you have rendered a chart you can download it to your local computer as and image or pdf by clicking on Download on the top centre menu The file will be automatically downloaded to your computer for instance can you now embed the image file into a text document as part of a report You can also download the data source behind the chart in json xml csv or Microsoft Excel format For advanced users two additional options are available under Advanced JXRML will produce a template of a Jasper Report which can be further customized based on your exact needs and used as the basis for a standard report in DHIS2 The Raw data SQL will provide the actual SQL statement used to generate the data visualization This could then be used as a data
106. the average operator the average results from the number of data elements that are actually present therefore NOT NULL within a given aggregation matrix If there are 12 districts within a given province but only 10 of these have submitted data the average aggregate will result from these ten values that are actually present in the database and will not take into account the missing values 19 1 1 5 Advanced aggregation settings aggregation levels 19 1 1 5 1 Aggregation levels The normal rule of the system is to aggregate all raw data together when moving up the organisational hierarchy and the system assumes that data entry is not being duplicated by entering the same services provided to the same clients at both facility level and also entering an aggregated sum of all facilities number at a higher level This is to more easily facilitate aggregation when the same services are provided but to different clients catchment populations at facilities on level 5 and a PHC the parent of the same facilities at level 4 In this way a facility at level 5 and a PHC at level 4 can share the same data elements and simply add together their numbers to provide the total of services provided in the geographical area Sometimes such an aggregation is not desired simply because it would mean duplicating data about the same population This is the case when you have two different sources of data for two different orgunit levels E g catchment popu
107. the new feedback the message feedback will be listed under Messages for further following up 234 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry mis Conversations Error when entering the Maternal Program How can set up my personal dashboard DHIS version 2 7 is deployed Where canldod Navigate to Home 8 Logout to log out the application Menu Tracking Messages 3 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback 9 Desktop version navigate to the desktop version of DHIS2 for administration 235 Mobile J2ME GPRS 3G Client Menu Data Entry Namebased Data Entry Beneficiary Enrollment Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version Here is the GUI of the desktop version which require much memory for loading not recommended for normal mobile The example with DHIS2 Demo from dhis2 org DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone ad atio N ased Data Rec AN jaintain resource tables check data integrity Ri jari se mor el por f ts and Indica 4 Dashboard elements icat Get an ovi arts an categorie writ tasets Data Entry I lata se Enter di cor isory dat validate an e npon dat sel mol lt a l pon data fr ani sys ernal ant formats ani Mobile Acces obi ice opt ion 24 3 J2ME GPRS 3G Client The DHIS2 GPRS 3G mobile module provides a mechanism for remote clients using mobile phones to enter data directly into the DHIS2 system There are
108. the selected categories to the category combination Press Move left to remove any categories that should not be part of the category combination Categories can only be added to a category combination at this step Categories can be removed from category combinations later by editing the category combination however it is not allowed to add additional categories once the combination has been created Ensure that the category combination and its respective categories is final before you create the category combination and assign it to a data element 5 7 Using category combinations as attributes In some deployments of DHIS2 information on attributes such as Implementing partner and Project are important to record as an attribute of each data value To provide an example let us suppose that an NGO is providing ART services in a given facility They would need to report each month on the ART monthly summary which would be reported monthly and contain a number of data elements The NGO and project could potentially change over time In order to be able to effectively attribute data to a given NGO and project at any point in time this information would need to be recorded along with each data value at the time of data entry When categories and category combinations have a type of Attribute they can serve as a means of applying a common set of attributes e g Implementing partner and project to a related set of data values contained
109. the table with the other organisation units listed alphabetically above it 19 4 2 4 3 Hiding other rows Using the expression editor it is also possible to exclude other rows from the table in addition to the parent organisation unit as was explained above In Ghana for example all regions have a fake district which is the name of the region in square brackets This can also be excluded from the table using the Print when expression that was introduced above To to this follow the instructions above to bring up the Expression editor window Then we use Java expressions to test whether or not the row should be hidden 19 4 2 4 3 1 Example removing rows with organisation units starting with Example removing rows with organisation units starting with F organisationunitname charAt 0 T This makes the report skip any rows where the first character of the organisation unit name is It is also possible to combine several of these expressions To do this we put the expressions in a parenthesis with the two characters amp amp in between For example to make a table that leaves both organisation units whose name starts with and the parent organisation unit we can use the following expression F organisationunitname charAt 0 amp amp F organisation unit_is parent equals No 142 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport no Bohs Detail 1 Print When Expression
110. then sorted alphabetically which will order the organisation units perfectly according to the hierarchy Include only completed events Only include completed events in the aggregation process This is useful e g to exclude partial events in indicator calculations Display density Controls the size of the cells in the table Can be set to comfortable normal and compact The compact option is handy in order to fit large tables into the browser screen Font size Controls the size of the table text font Can be set to large normal and small Digit group separator Controls which character to separate groups of digits or thousands Can be set to comma Space and none Legend set Shows a color indicator next to the values Currently the GIS legend sets are being used Once you have set all options as are required just press Update to generate the new pivot table Using Pivot Table 15 5 Favorites and sharing 15 5 1 Managing favorites Favorites and sharing When you have set up a pivot table it is convenient to save it as a favorite To do so click Favorites on the top menu click Add new give the favorite a descriptive name and click Create You can search for favorites through the search input field at the top To load an existing favorite simply click the name of the favorite in the list To rename a favorite click the grey Rename icon next to the favorite in the list change the name and
111. this form to display result Lost to follow up Click on it to display Advanced search form Registering unit Ngelehun CHC Program TEST program v Status Overdue v Show Event List Advanced search Show only Risk cases Select orgunit for search Ngelehun CHC Xx Orgunit search type Selected v Due date from to 1913 10 21 2013 10 20 Search Click on it to search and show result 29 2 2 4 Data entry 29 2 2 4 1 Single event with registration The data to register is defined by a single event with registration program The functionality Supports health providers to register entity information and input data values for a program into one form In order to register an event from the Apps option go to the Individual Records and click it Then select Single event with registration option on left menu to proceed To list all entities in the selected facility click List All entities button To register new entity enroll this entity into the program and fill data values for the event of the entity and the selected program select a program in the combo box And then click Add new button Provider identification Oppo End of raining competency assessment PPD cac FP counseling Gai bidi m L counseling Suprapubie Postplacental inseon Oo owa Omg E Implanon WC0 insertion Challenges in achieving progressive increases in service provision O implant Add Adda Register new Back To update event of a reg
112. to a common set of categories By combining these different categories into a category combination and assigning these combinations to data elements the appropriate disaggregation levels can be applied efficiently and quickly to a large number of data elements To access the category combination maintenance module select Maintenance gt Data element and indicators gt Data element category combinations from the main DHIS2 menu As with the other maintains modules you can filter the listed category combinations by entering the name or portion thereof of the category combination Other operations such as Edit Delete and Information should be familiar to the reader To add a new category combination click the Add new button The following dialogue will be displayed Create new data element category combination Details Name Dimension type Disaggregation v Skip category total in reports Available categories Selected categories Filte Filter Clear Births attended by default EPl nutrition age Gender HIV age lt i HIV paediatric age Labour complications gt gt Sg Location Fixed Outreach oad Location PHU Community Morbidity Age Mortality Age Outcome Point of service Add Cancel 48 Data elements Using category combinations as attributes Type the name of the category combination in the Name field and then select the desired categories from the left panel Press the Move right button to add
113. to reduce initial load time in cases where you have a large number of organisation units typically more than 30 OOO Data analysis std dev factor Sets the number of standard deviations for use in the outlier analysis performed on the captured data in the data entry module The default value is 2 a high value will catch less outlier values than a low value Phone number area code The area code for the area in which your deployment is located Used for sending and receiving SMS Typically this would be a country code for instance 260 which is the country code for Zambia Enable multi organisation unit forms Enable support for entering data forms for multiple organisation units at the same time in data entry click on the parent organisation unit for 203 Settings Server settings the children that you want to enter data for and the dataset list will include datasets that are assigned to the children of that parent Put analytics in maintenance mode Puts the analytics engine Web API resource in maintenance mode implying that 503 Service Unavailable will be returned for all requests This is useful when you need to perform maintenance on the server like rebuilding indexes while the server is running in production in order to reduce load and more efficiently carry out the maintenance Days after period end to qualify for timely data submission Sets the number of days after the end of a period in which a data entry form must be
114. trigger the use of the region itself all its district and all their sub districts e Parent organisation unit Select the parent of all the orgunit children you want listed in the report E g a selected district will trigger the use of the district itself and all its children sub districts Organisation unit This triggers the use of this orgunit in the report No children are listed Example report parameters Continuing with the example on relative periods just above let s say that in addition to Reporting month we have chosen Parent organisation unit as a report parameter when we created the report table When we re running the report table we will be asked to select an organisation unit Now let s say we choose Region R as the organisation unit Region R has the children District X and District Y When the report is run the system will aggregate data for both District X and District Y The data will be aggregated from the lowest level where they have been collected The values for the districts will be aggregated further to give an aggregated value for Region R Thus the report table will generate the six values presented in the previous example for District X District Y and Region R 19 2 4 Data element dimension tables These tables enable the use of data element categories in report tables There are two differences from regular report tables The first is that it is not possible to select
115. two doses of IPT but since none of the other ANC services listed have this dimension it does not seem like a good idea to separate out two data elements from this table and give them another catcombo with both fixed outreach and at PHU by TBA reusing the same catcombo for all the ANC services makes more sense since it will be easier to look at these together in reports etc and also the fact that Data dimensions in DHIS2 From tables to category combinations designing multi l or _ dimensional data sets ere NOL TUCT LO Ose U epeating the at Ph Of D DA InTOormation a oro U c OUdltad element name when it is only for four data elements in a table of eleven data elements DELIVERY table This table is more tricky as it has a lot of information and you can see that not all the rows have the same columns Some columns are merged and a one field is grayed out disabled If we start by looking at the first column Deliveries assisted by that seems to be one dimension but only down to the Untrained TBA row as the remaining three rows are not related to who assisted the delivery at all Another dimension is the place of delivery either In PHU or in Community as stated on the top column headings These deliveries are further split into the outcome of the delivery whether it is a live or still birth which seems to be another dimension So if we disregard the three bottom rows for a moment there seems to be 3 dimensions here 1 assisted by 2 p
116. unit Organisation unit management Click on the name of the orgunit to open the context menu n i 4 4 44 4 4 H4 ZSRRARRR OOS SOoSaSEROSSS aSs op amp go eG 8 s be m Click the name to select the parent org unit Click to exand a branch EHHA Sog F Ee c ES w c The following properties can be defined in the Edit or Create new window Name Define the precise name of the orgunit in this field Each orgunit must have a unique name Short name Typically an abbreviation of the full name This attribute is often used in reports to display the name of the orgunit where there is limited space available Code In many countries orgunits are assigned a code This code can be entered in this field Description A description can be a longer piece of text which can be used to describe the organisationunit Opening date Used to control which orgunits that where existing at a point in time e g when analysing historical data This attribute is required The default date for opening of organisation units is 1900 01 01 but can be set to any date even dates which occur in the future Registers data This property is used to identify which orgunits that can register data or not Sometimes administrative orgunits at higher levels in the hierarchy are not supposed to register any data This can help control the data entry process as onl
117. values that are collected for category option combinations like male lt 5 and male gt 5 See the Pivot Tables section for more examples of how these can be used orgunitstructure is another important table in the database that helps to provide the hierarchy of orgunits together with the data By joining the orgunitstructure table with the data values table you can get rows of data values with the full hierarchy e g on the form OU1 OU2 OU3 OU4 DataElement Period Value Sierra Leone Bo Badija Ngelehun CHC BCG lt 1 Jan 10 32 This format makes it much easier for e g pivot tables or other OLAP tools to aggregate data up the hierarchy 19 1 3 Report tables Report tables are defined cross tabulated reports which can be used as the basis of further reports such as Excel Pivot Tables or simply downloaded as an Excel sheet Report tables are intended to provide a specific view of data which is required such as Monthly National ANC Indicators This report table might provide all ANC indicators for a country aggregated by month for the entire country This data could of course be retrieved from the main datamart but report tables generally perform faster and present well defined views of data to users 19 2 How to create report tables 130 To create a new report table go to the Report tables section of the Reports module Reports gt Report Table Above the list of standard reports use the Add report table or Add Data
118. values type reports only e Show totals Show totals at the end of each column and row in the pivot table e Show sub totals Show sub totals for each column and row in the pivot table e Hide empty rows Hide empty rows in the pivot table e Limit Set a limit on the max number of rows to display in the table combined with a setting for showing top or bottom values e Show hierarchy Include the names of all parents of each organisation unit in labels These style related options apply to both types of reports e Display density Control padding around values inside cells e Font size Control font size of values e Digit group separator Control character to use for splitting digit groups Using Event Visualizer Event Visualizer overview Chapter 27 Using Event Visualizer 27 1 Event Visualizer overview The event visualizer app enables chart analysis of events 27 1 1 Charts with aggregated values An event report is always based on a program You can do analysis based on a range of dimensions Each dimension can have a corresponding filter Dimensions can be selected from the left side menu and includes the following e Data elements Start by selecting the program and program stage for the event report The data elements associated with the selected program will be listed under available items Each data element acts as a dimension and can be selected by double clicking on it After selecting a data element it will
119. values with data elements which belong to the Stage selected are editable 29 2 1 7 Aggregation query builder This is the core functionality for linking data between tracker module and aggregate management module by defining the linking aggregating rules The purpose is to produce aggregated data statistics based on the low level case based data It is based around flexible aggregation query definitions which maps the data elements used for case based data management to data elements used for aggregate data This provides two functions e Apps gt Programs Attributes gt Aggregation query builder is a tool for defining formulas expressions rules for aggregation data from tracker to aggregation module e Apps gt Individual Records gt Manual Aggregation is used for generating routine data values from individual data by period and organization unit 29 2 1 7 1 Basic information To access Aggregation Query Builder module from the Apps menu go to the Programs Attributes option Select Aggregation Query Builder option on left menu to proceed To define a formula click the Add new button Create new aggregation query builder Aggregation query builder details Name Number of girls got 6 doses Vitamin A in Child Health prograr Dataset F Immunisation Data element Number of girls got 6 doses Vitamin A in Child Health p Operator Number of visits Child Health Program Tracking Program Stage 2 years
120. whereas the aggregate data would count how many events of a certain type e g how many outpatient visits with principal diagnosis Malaria or how many maternal deaths where the deceased did not attend ANC or how many cholera outbreaks for children under 5 years In DHIS 2 this data is collected through programs of the type single event without registration What is DHIS 2 Free and Open Source Software FOSS benefits and challenges Patient data is highly confidential and therefore must be protected so that no one other than doctors can get it When in paper it must be properly stored in a secure place For computers patient data needs secure systems with passwords restrained access and audit logs Security concerns for aggregated data are not as crucial as for patient data as it is usually impossible to identify a particular person to a aggregate statistic However data can still be misused and misinterpreted by others and should not be distributed without adequate data dissemination policies in place 1 6 Free and Open Source Software FOSS benefits and challenges Software carries the instructions that tell a computer how to operate The human authored and human readable form of those instructions is called source code Before the computer can actually execute the instructions the source code must be translated into a machine readable binary format called the object code All distributed software includes the object code but
121. will be listed as rows See screenshot for clarification Organisation unit ae aaa AMC f PA rage Jappineh Village OPD 0 0 0 0 Jappineh PHC Circuit 0 0 0 0 Jara Central District 0 0 0 0 If you cross tab on indicators and organisation units the column headers of the table will say lt indicator title gt lt organisation unit gt Now the periods will be listed as rows See screenshot for clarification Period ANC coverage Jarra ANC coverage ANC coverage Central District Jappineh PHC Circuit Jappineh Village OPD 2010 0 0 0 0 0 0 February 2010 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note that the options made here regarding crosstab dimensions may have consequences for what options are available when using the report table as a data source later for example for Standard reports Sort order Affects the rightmost column in the table allows you to choose to sort it low to high or high to low Top limit Top limit allow you to set a maximum number of rows you want to include in the report table Include regression This adds additional columns with regression values that can be included in the report design e g in line charts 131 Setting up report functionality Selecting data 19 2 2 Selecting data Available indicators Select indicator group View all AFP Non polio rate 0 ANC Registrants receiving IPT1 ANC Registrants receiving IPT2 ANC Registrants receiving IPT3 Average number of ANC visits per registrants Average number of visits
122. will need to define the options in the set by clicking the name of the option set and selecting Option management from the context menu Option management Add new Filter Clear Sort options Back Name Code Male Male Female Female N A N A No of pages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to page 1 Go aa 1 p Press Add new to enter a new option and its code You can sort the options within the option set by using the Sort options dialog button Important Option sets must have a code as well as a name Codes of options cannot be changed while the names can Both names as well as codes of all options must be unique even across different option sets 22 13 Cache Statistics This option is for system administrators only to use The cache statistics shows the status of the application level cache The application level cache refers to the objects and query results that the application is caching in order to speed up performance If the database has been modified directly the application cache needs to be cleared for it to take effect 22 14 Attributes Dynamic attributes can be used to add additional information to certain objects namely data elements indicators organisation units and users In addition to the standard attributes each of these objects have it may be required in certain installations to have additional attributes such as a fax number which is associated with an organisation unit To add a new
123. with program indicators all in the same pivot tables For the data element data dimension you are also able to select Totals and Details which will allow you to view different category combination options together on the same pivot table For the period dimension you can choose between using fixed periods or relative periods An example of a fixed period Is January 2012 To select fixed periods start by selecting a period type from the period type list You can then select periods from the list of available periods Relative periods are periods relative to the current date Examples of relative periods are Last month Last 12 months Last 5 years Relative periods can be selected by ticking the check boxes next to each period The main advantage of using relative periods is that when you save a pivot table favorite it will stay updated with the latest data as time goes by without the need for constantly updating it For the organisation unit dimension you can select any number of organisation units from the hierarchy To select all organisation units below a specific parent organisation unit right click and click Select all children To manually select multiple organisation units click and hold the Ctrl button while clicking on organisation units You can tick User org unit User sub units or User sub x2 units in order to dynamically insert the organisation unit or units associated with your user account This is useful whe
124. 00 0008 eVO Al 000 DELIVERY re REACH Deliveries assisted by ANC ete t Biy Geet PHOT H s z s z 3 z zZ ped com m urit Birth UBirth Bith w ist ANC wait 2nd ANC visit 3rd ANC wat 4th or more ANC waits LLITN given at ANC Fon Foia S of wn ata te Albenda ple given at ANC ist IPT dose given at PHU ist IPT dose gen by TBA 2nd IPT dose given amp PHU fl 2nd IPT dose given by TBA Uritraned TBA Complicated Deli venes Low Birth Weight POST NATAL CARE nuts w 2 2 nls oj 2 z j z 5 4 2 a OUT RESCK 2 O o R G E A 5 2nd contact atGwks fitarnin amp given at posin at Pz TT for Pregnant Woman oH oTi TT for Nor Pregnant Women PH UTS im SC Cd a Se T Ta ooo ooo ma o o ooo o Ooo O E M i Bo COMPLICATIONS OF EARLY PREGNANCY feter te tally cheets PHUT T Malaria in Ist trimester treat wath oral quinine gt 22 irefer to tally dieets PHUT 4 s Managed at PHU Ww b z o g a 2 FAMILY PLANNING SERVICES iert tity aeete PHUTS Number of clients METH OD Continuing clierts Oral contr aceptive pilis gt Spermicide This form has many tables and each of them potentially represent a data element category combination from now on referred to as a catcombo As such there is no restriction on a dataset to only have one se
125. 1 Using Data Quality functionality The data quality module provides means to improve the accuracy and reliability of the data in the system This can be done through validation rules and various statistical checks All the functionality described below can be accessed from the left side menu in the Services gt Data Quality module 11 1 Overview of data quality checks Ensuring data quality is a key concern in building an effective HMIS Data quality has different dimensions including Correctness Data should be within the normal range for data collected at that facility There Should be no gross discrepancies when compared with data from related data elements Completeness Data for all data elements for all health facilities should have been submitted Consistency Data should be consistent with data entered during earlier months and years while allowing for changes with reorganization increased work load etc and consistent with other similar facilities Timeliness All data from all reporting orgunits should be submitted at the appointed time 11 2 Data quality checks Data quality checking can be done through various means including 1 At point of data entry the software can check the data entered to see if it falls within the min max ranges of that data element based on all previous data registered 2 Defining various validation rules which can be run once the user has finished data entry The user can also check the
126. 14825 14 488 14482 75974 15 4 Using table options 102 Several table options are available when working with a pivot table Open the options screen by clicking on Options in the top menu The following options are available Show column row totals Display total values in the table for each row and column as well as a grand total for all values in the table Show column row sub totals Display subtotals in the table for each dimension In the screenshot above notice how subtotals are generated for each of the periods in the period dimension Note that subtotals will be hidden for columns or rows if there is only one selected dimension as the values in that case are equal to the subtotals Show dimension labels Show the dimension names as part of the pivot tables Hide empty rows Hides empty rows from the table which is useful when looking at large tables where a big part of the dimension items do not have data in order to keep the table more readable Skip Rounding Skips the rounding of data values offering the full precision of data values Can be useful for finance data where the full dollar amount is required Aggregation type The default aggregation operator can be over ridden here by selecting a different aggregation operator e g Count Min or Max Show hierarchy Shows the name of all ancestors for organisation units e g Sierra Leone Bombali Tamabaka Sanya CHP for Sanya CHP The organisation units are
127. 20 User profiles User settings Chapter 32 User profiles With profiles users can alter the appearance of their DHIS2 change the interface language and enabled SMS and email notifications Users can also enter information into their Profile 32 1 User settings To access the user settings menu select Profile gt Settings You can select the interface language and the database language The interface language refers to the translation of the user interface of the DHIS2 software The database language refers to the translated content of the metadata contained in the system for instance data elements and indicators Different interface styles can be set to alter the apperarnce of the system User can choose to receive their messages via email and or SMS by ticking the appropriate check boxes 32 2 User profile Users can choose to enter more data such as their email and phone number job title gender birthday etc into their profile Just select Profile gt Profile from the main menu 321 DHIS 2 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 33 DHIS 2 Frequently Asked Questions 33 1 have entered data into a data entry form but cannot see the data In any reports pivot tables charts maps Why does data which is entered not show up immediately in my graphs in DHIS2 Data which is entered into DHIS2 must first be processed with the analytics This means that data is not immediately available in the analytics resource
128. 3 3 Data Elements and Categories 128 The data element dimension specifies what is being recorded by a particular data value Data element categories are actually degenerated dimensions of the data element dimension and are used to disaggregate the data element dimension into finer categories Data element categories such as Age and Gender are used to record a particular data element typically Setting up report functionality Types of data and aggregation for different population groups These categories can then be used to calculate the overall total for the category and the total of all categories 19 1 1 4 Aggregation operators methods for aggregation 19 1 1 4 1 Sum The sum operator simply calculates the sum of all data values that are contained within a particular aggregation matrix For instance if data is recorded on a monthly basis at the district level and is aggregated to provincial quarterly totals all data contained in all districts for a given province and all weeks for the given quarter will be added together to obtain the aggregate total 19 1 1 4 2 Average When the average aggregation operator is selected the unweighted average of all data values within a given aggregation matrix are calculated It is important to understand how DHIS 2 treats null values in the context of the average operator It is fairly common for some organisational units not to submit data for certain data elements In the context of
129. 4 3 Western Area Mother maiden name Samuel Welde 1Z 1E0 269 20 6742 375 2 Shukornia Goytiom Search 1Z 4A6 490 87 4291 4355 Nuguse Biniam Male 886602646 1Z 251 61W 82 5896 887 9 Natsnet Habte Female 840024605 1Z 1F2 A84 59 4464 073 6 Mezan Gabriel Female 436816713 1Z 823 1Y2 27 3830 860 0 Mhret Sheshy Female 295881991 1Z 245 173 79 7940 440 2 All searching and registration operations are accessible from the screen shown above 1 Searching there are two modes of searching simple and advanced The simple one works by typing a free text on the provided area What is typed in the input box is applied across all attributes for partial match The advanced one which is accessible when the small drop down button is clicked works when various search criteria are provided in the drop down window Here the match is exact match Both search modes return matching list of TEI displayed in a table If a program is selected the app provides further filtering on the table based on enrollment Status which are All Active Completed Cancelled as shown below Oo v x The advanced search also provides one more additional feature Under normal circumstances advanced search is conducted for the selected orgunit from left hand side tree and scope which could be Selected Immediate children or All children The left hand side tree is generated based on the logged in user s assigned orgunits However there could be cases to search for a TEI
130. 6800 16581 Pujehun S661 9146 443 Tonkolili 12579 13223 12974 Western Area 16022 15470 15675 No of pages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to page 1 Go aa a p ws Data browser By clicking on one of the organisational units two drill down modes are presented to the user e Summary drill down Drill down to the selected organisational units children to see the count of data elements e View raw data at this level View the actual raw data at the selected organisational unit A typical view of the raw data export can be seen below Organisation units Ngelehun CHC From date 2014 01 01 To date 2014 04 30 Period Type Monthly Download as Excel Download as CSV Download as PDF Back Start Sierra Leone Bo Badjia Ngelehun CHC Raw data Data element January 2014 February 2014 March 2014 April 2014 Live births Trained TBA At PHU 0 0 0 Live births Trained TBA In Community 0 0 0 Live births Untrained TBA At PHU 0 0 0 Live births Untrained TBA In Community 0 0 0 Louse Borne Typhus Relapsing fever Deaths lt 5 yrs default 0 45 0 Low birth weight in PHU default 1 4 0 Low birth weight in community default 0 5 0 Data can be exported into Excel CSV and as a PDF report by clicking the appropriate button Note that only data for the current page is downloaded 189 Data Administration Data integrity 22 2 Data integrity DHIS2 can perform a wide range of data int
131. 7 1 2 User role management User management Filter by name Username admin boateng bomballi diawara district donor keita konan lars Inactive for Filter Clear Select Y _ Add new a Name z John Traore kevin Boateng Bombali District Suleimane Diawara John Kamara Donor User Seydou Keita Didier Konan Lars Overland You can search for specific user names in the user list by entering the name in the Filter by name field as shown above Some non standard functions are available by clicking on each user in the list e Replicate This will create an exact copy of the user You will be asked to enter a new username and password for the replicated account e Disable This will disable the user meaning that the account is not deleted but the user will not be able to log in or use it As part of creating a user name you are required to define the user role Do so by clicking on User Role on the left side of the displayed screen This will lead you to the User role management page where you can click on Add new to create a new role 62 User management User role management User role management Filter by name Filter i Clear Add new Role Description Child health program Access to the child health program in tracker Data entry clerk Data entry clerk Facility tracker Tracker user at the facility Guest Read only Inpatient program Access to the inpatient program
132. A A NEE E aa 104 Des DOW MO AGING OC dah ere a aA T anens Hasna eo eee 105 TO CONSUMES Ally COS daca tase eaenipaare dea aa naan Gn evets aa a aa a aa 106 to USNO Data Visual Zer raniona a ov onzanthiadeawiiediehy T RS 107 t 1 Data VISUAIZEr OVEIVIECW sarima a a a san a ivahanaaeie aes 107 16 2 SE CUNO CNAE LY DS rasna or A N teen ered seinen 107 16 3 Selecting series category and filter cece ececeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeaeaeeeeaesnateneanas 108 16 4 Selecting indicators and data elements s ssssssrrssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrnrrrerererrrerre 109 16 5 Selecting reporting HALES isiin iaa a E tans EEA nema 109 16 6 Selecting fixed and relative periodS cccccccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeaeeseeeaesneneanaes 110 16 7 Selecting organisation units s ssesssrrsrresrrrrrrnsrrrsrrrrrrnsrrrsrrrrrrnrrrrerrrrrrnrrreere 110 16 8 Selecting organisation unit group sets and data element group sets 110 16 9 Selecting additional data dimensions ssssssrsssrrsrrrerrrsrresrrrerrnsrresrrnrrrnerreerene 110 16 10 SeLeN Cart OOWONS macia avestaiie A iden eee eae hind meee 110 2 22 V DHIS 2 User Manual Contents LG 4 Le Displaying a CHAM resa ia aan ereaptasna deisel Oran mer aneeieli ad men anes 112 16 12 Downloading chart as image or PDF cccccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeaeseeneanenaes 112 to l3 Savino Ghartas lav On ile nds crecetiantiaes crsdaeseis a mack ges A EA 112 16 142
133. D Dashboard Add Update Public Data F DATAELEMENT PUBLIC ADD Element Add Update Public Data F CATEGORY PUBLIC ADD Element Category Add Update Public Data F CATEGORY COMBO PUBLIC ADD Element Category Combo Add Update Public Data F CATEGORY OPTION PUBLIC ADD Element Category Option Add Update Public Data F CATEGORY OPTION DELETE Element Category Option Add Update Public Data F CATEGORY OPTION COMBO PUBLIC ADD Element Category Option Combo Add Update Public Data F DATAELEMENTGROUP_ PUBLIC ADD Element Groups Add Update Public Data F DATAELEMENTGROUPSET PUBLIC ADD Element Group Sets Add Update Public Data Set F DATASET PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public F DOCUMENT PUBLIC ADD Document Add Update Public Indicator F INDICATOR PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public Indicator F_INDICATORGROUP PUBLIC ADD Group Add Update Public Indicator F_INDICATORGROUPSET PUBLIC ADD Group Sets Add Update Public Option F OPTIONSET PUBLIC ADD Set Add Update Public F_ORGUNITGROUP_ PUBLIC ADD Organisation Unit Group Add Update Public F _ORGUNITGROUPSET PUBLIC ADD Organisation Unit Group Set Add Update Public Program F PROGRAM PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public Report F REPORT PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public Report F REPORTTABLE PUBLIC ADD Table Add Update Public SQL View F_SQLVIEW_PUBLIC_ADD Add Update Public Tracked F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTE PUBLIC ADD Entity Attribute Add Update Pub
134. DHIS 2 User Manual 2 22 2006 2015 DHIS2 Documentation Team Revision 1793 Version 2 22 2015 12 16 13 57 20 Warranty THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS MANUAL AND PRODUCTS MENTIONED HEREIN EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE License Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the source of this documentation and is available here online http www gnu org licenses fdl Atml DHIS 2 User Manual Contents ADOULATNIS GUIS arena a a T A wee da eaten ATON xi L Whati DES 2 cscenvotpeattuseaiaennpaniniey aa a a a ea Teas 1 DA DHIS 2 B
135. District data as their source Chiefdom will use Chiefdom and PHU will use PHU Read more about aggregation levels in the Reporting chapter i the section on data sources for reporting Attributes This section is only applicable if attributes have been defined in Data Adminisrtation gt Attributes As an example Classification Collection Method Rationale and Unit of measure are all data element attributes and are discussed below Data element group sets Data element group sets are only applicable if they have been defined If data element group sets have been defined each will appear in the Data element 43 Data elements Deleting a data element groups section Select each data element group from the list of group sets provided Groups can be selected based on if the data element is of aggregate or tracker type After making all the required changes click Save The Cancel button aborts all changes made 5 1 2 Deleting a data element In order to delete a data element click the name of the data element you wish to delete and then select Remove from the context menu Note that this operation is only possible if there is no data attached to the data element itself The user will be prompted to ensure that the data element should be deleted 5 1 3 Cloning existing data elements Cloning existing data elements is easy by selecting Clone from the context menu Once a data element is cloned you can simply
136. E m Rural Westem Area lt gt Aberdeen Cline Bay dckerill Thematic layer 1 legend Bay Thematic layer 2 legend y Thematic layer 3 legend y Surrounding areas Thematic layer 4 legend y V Show circular area with radius m 500 Goderich ma Chimpanzee Sanctuary L 2km__ aon YA LON 13 16053 LAT 8 41658 Google This layer displays icons that represent facilities based on the facility type Polygons will not show up on the map so make sure to select an organisation unit level that has facilities Click an icon on the map to open the context menu with two options Show information sheet provides you with data for several data elements for this organisation unit The data element group and period type are system settings called Infrastructural data elements and Infrastructural period type The second option in the context menu is Relocate and lets you graphically move the organisation unit to a different location The new coordinate will be stored permanently Browser cache must be deleted to see the change if you reload the page In the Edit layer window will find surrounding areas in addition to group set level and parent This lets you draw a circle around each facility with a desired radius in kilometers 117 Using GIS Boundary layer 17 2 3 Boundary layer Sig 1 I E Favorites Legend Download E Table ih Chart Map Home gt gt gt Layer stack transparency a Bou
137. HIV positwe w received ART for own health PMTCT HIV positwe women received ZDV at ANC PMTCT male partners tested for HIV PMTCT male partners tested HIV positive PMTCT No HIV women who delivered in the health facility Normal PMTCT reported mother death PMTCT wornen counselled for infant feeding PMTCT women HIV positve PMTCT women HIV PMTCT women HIV and HIv2 PMTCT women HI V2 PMTCT women lost to contact PMTCT women received complete ARY for PMTCT PMTCT women received NVP dunng labour PMTCT women receivad post test counselling and result PMTCT women received ZDV amp 3CT after delivery PMTCT women seen for 1st ANC PMTCT women tested for HIV CCT YCCT No positive tast HIV1 and HI v2 VCCT No positive test HIV1 only VCCT No positive test HIV2 only VCCT No receiving positre test results VCCT Ne rare Dra tect cnuncalli hJ hy WB Mise WN ee SW Oh In the table below PMTCT data has been removed from the table and the gender category added to the column area so that you can analyse the data for VCCT and ART by age and gender An optional subtotal for gender has also been added as well as a grand total for all age and gender Female Total Q T enrollment stage 1 ART enrollment stage 2 ART enrollment stage 3 ART new clients started on ARV ART treatment stopped due to death ART treatment stopped due to loss to follow up ART enrollment stage 4 ART clients with new adverse clinical e
138. INE PSIC 1150010 The system will calculated the number of children orgunits of the selected orgunit which have all program stage instances with stage id as 1149293 and 1150010 completed You can find this special formula PSIC xxx by clicking on Completed option in Program tab Description section Show description for the condition above E g To get number of girls who got Vitamin A dose 6 enrolled Child Health program on January 2012 Then query is created as in the figure below Note that January 2012 is period parameter which user will select when generate report It is not set in the query 29 2 1 7 2 Sample of aggregation query builder 292 E g Find the number of the children vaccinated BCG by defining a linking rule between the data elements of aggregate dataset named Number of children BCG and the data element of a program stage named BCG dose given 1 From Apps menu go to Data Element and Indicators option and click on it Select Data Element option to define two new data elements 1 Define a new data element named Number of children BCG with Aggregate option for Domain Type 2 Define a new data element named BCG dose give date with Patient option for Domain Type 2 From Apps menu go to Datasets option and click on it Select Dataset option to create a new dataset named BCG Report and add Number of children BCG data element into the dataset 3 From Apps menu go to Programs Attributes option and click o
139. IR f 79 8 89 1 4 B Bonthe Weste 89 1 98 4 1 f Natior i Park ie ate N Thematic layer 2 legend Es oO Kambia 5 C Kenema Thematic layer 3 legend Ey je Koinadugu B Kono Thematic layer 4 legend y Es fa Moyamba Es Oo Port Loko Esl je Pujehun Update 3 LON 13 60315 LAT 7 56739 Google The four thematic layer panels let you use your data for thematic mapping All you need to do is selecting your desired combination of indicator dataelement period and map combination Then the organisation unit level and parent to define the boundaries If your database has coordinates and aggregated data values for these organisation units they will appear on the map Note that the DHIS2 data mart must be run in order to have aggregated values available You may choose between legend types automatic and predefined Automatic means that the application will create a legend set for you based on your what method number of classes low color and high color you select Method alludes to the size of the legend classes Set to Equal intervals they will be highest map value lowest map value number of classes Set to Equal group count the legend creator will try to distribute the organisation units evenly The legend will appear as an even gradation from the start color to the end color Predefined legend sets are described in Section 17 3 2 Create predefined legend sets Low radius and high radius only have effect on points fa
140. IS 2 Background DHIS 2 is a tool for collection validation analysis and presentation of aggregate and patient based statistical data tailored but not limited to integrated health information management activities It is a generic tool rather than a pre configured database application with an open meta data model and a flexible user interface that allows the user to design the contents of a specific information system without the need for programming DHIS2 and upwards is a modular web based software package built with free and open source Java frameworks DHIS2 is open source software released under the BSD license and can be used at no cost It runs on any platform with a Java Runtime Environment JRE 6 or higher installed DHIS 2 is developed by the Health Information Systems Programme HISP as an open and globally distributed process with developers currently in India Vietnam Tanzania Ireland and Norway The development is coordinated by the University of Oslo with core support from NORAD The DHIS 2 software is used in more than 40 countries in Africa Asia and Latin America and countries that have adopted DHIS 2 as their nation wide HIS software include Kenya Tanzania Uganda Rwanda Ghana Liberia and Bangladesh A rapidly increasing number of countries and organisations are starting up new deployments The documentation provided herewith will attempt to provide a comprehensive overview of the application Given the abstra
141. Imm unization ART pediatric 1st line gt Morbidity ART staging Mortality ART Treatment Nutrition Delivery gt gt PMTCT ICS Children Reproductive health ICS mother lt lt __ Staffing Low birth VCCT New on ART Population Estimates Postnatal Update Cancel Available data element groups are displayed in the left panel They can be moved into the selected data element group set by pressing the Move right 7 button Data element groups that are currently members of the data element group set are displayed in the right hand panel They can be removed from the data element group set by clicking the desired data element group and pressing the Move left button The ordering of the data element groups can be set with the Move Up ip and Move Down ave This ordering will be used in the datamart and reports to order the data element groups Press the Update button to save any changes and the Cancel button to discard all changes 5 5 Categories 46 Categories can be used to disaggregate data elements into individual atomic components They can also be used to assign attributes to all data recorded in a specific dataset such as Implementing partner and Funding agency Data element categories are typically a concept such as Gender Age or Disease Status Data elements such as Number of cases of confirmed malaria are often broken into smaller component parts to determine for instance the number of confirmed
142. In the context of DHIS 2 meta data consists of definitions of data elements indicators the structure and names contained in the organizational hierarchy and other options Click on the Meta data export link from the main Data export screen in order to access this Just select the features format and the compression that you want and click Export This metadata file can then be transmitted just like a data file except it will contain information on the definitions of the various features aS opposed to the values of the data themselves 179 Import and export Meta data detailed export DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone sss Apps pA Profile i em Import Meta Data Export Meta Data Import Attribute Category Sa 4 Category Combo 4 Category Option egory egory Op Category Option Combo Category Option Group Export Category Option Group Set Chart Constant Dashboard ee Dashboard Item Data Approval Level Meta Data Detailed Export Data Element Data Element Group Data Element Group Set Data Set Data Export 2 Document 2 Event Chart Expont to other systems Event Repor indicator indicator Group indicator Group Set Indicator Type 7 Map Map Layer Map Legend Map Legend Set f Map View Option Option Set Organisation Unit Organisation Unit Group Organisation Unit Group Set Organisation Unit Level Program Program Stage Program Stage Section i Program Validation
143. J2ME enabled devices feature phones This solution is described in Section 24 3 J2ME GPRS 3G Client An active GPRS 3G connection is required in order to send data to the DHIS 2 database but data can be entered offline and transmitted when a connection is present This client is intended primarily for low end devices which support J2ME applications although the offline 207 Mobile Mobile browser based data entry Supports adds some memory requirements which limits the handset selection While the solution is primarily tested on Nokia phones it also works on several other J2ME capable handsets The facility reporting J2ME client is described in Section 24 3 2 J2ME GPRS 3G facility reporting client The name based program tracking J2ME client is described in Section 24 3 3 J2ME GPRS 3G program reporting client 24 2 Mobile browser based data entry 24 2 1 Getting started with mobile browser data entry This approach is for data entry on a smart phone with a mobile browser by navigating to the URL of the DHIS2 instance for example the full URL link for demo on dhis2 org http apps dhis2 org dev mobile index action And your mobile browser will automatically detect the DHIS2 application where the server URL is given e g http apps dhis2 org dev Here is the login form to access the application with user name and password Click on Login to continue or Reset to reset Username elmer
144. Measles Fixed gt l y Dec 09 3 CHP doses given Tugbebu Measles Outreach gt l y Dec 09 1 CHP doses given 3 2 2 Data element group sets While the data element categories and their options described above provide the level of detail disaggregation atthe point of data collection and how data values get stored in the database the data element group sets and groups can be used to add more information to data elements after data collection As an example if you are analyzing many data elements at the same time in a report you would want to group these based on some criteria Instead of looking at all the data captured in a form for immunisation and nutrition you might want to separate or group data elements along a programme dimension Known as a data element group set in DHIS 2 where Immunisation or EPI and Nutrition would be the two groups Expanding the report to include data from other programs or larger themes of health data would mean more groups to such a group set dimension like Malaria Reproductive Health Stocks For this example you would create a data element group set called Programme or whatever name you find appropriate and to represent the different programmes in this dimension you would define data elements groups called EPI Nutrition Malaria Reproductive health and so on and add all these groups to the Programme group set To link or tag the data element Measles doses given to such a dimensio
145. NBN no 15782 Storset2010 Leif Arne Storset Integration of Health Management Information Systems The University of Oslo 2010 http urn nb no URN NBN no 25666 ShawScaling2007 Jorn Braa Vincent Shaw Shegaw Anagaw Mengiste Scaling of Health Information Systems in Nigeria and Ethiopia Considering the Options 2007 http heim ifi uio no vshaw Files Published 20Papers 20included 2O0in 20Kappa 6 Shaw_IFP9 4 20Scaling 200f 20HIS Considering 20the 20O0ptions paf Vo2009 Kim Anh Thi Vo Challenges of Health Information Systems Programs in Developing Countries SUCCESS and FAILURE The University of Oslo 2009 http urn nb no URN NBN no 23652 Overland2010 Jan Henrik Overland An Open Source Approach to Improving GIS Implementations in Developing Countries The University of Oslo 2010 http urn nb no URN NBN no 24751 Overland2006 Lars Helge Overland Global Software Development and Local Capacity Building University of Oslo 2006 http urn nbo no URN NBN no 13609 340 Index Index
146. NY cerina an a danas a aa a a nae oes 302 29 22s RODOS geria er eonen 303 2922 60 Manu l aggregation mikra A E ARAA 305 30 Progra IM GICQUONS aardas rea a a aara a r 307 SO ON INVI W e E E E E ee ae eos 307 EOAR E IO AE E E E A V A A AA A gutta vedi TA A AE E T 307 30 3 MNAC Ior evalua Oe E mea 307 303 1 AJOC Oat OIT VDE ais iccieshewsiriars nite iacinaGe E 308 30 3 1 1 CUSTOM aggregation type spiron ne a a T 308 202 EXPOS SION en n a T AA a uaa a 308 30 FUTO a E N AO 309 305 354 JFUNCUOMNS soane aa a a rete ences 310 SOG a VAD VES eraa a A a 311 3 Lle Program CSS iorn a A E E hae erin aaaeaaae 313 311 OVErVIG W morii r aaa reae r T 313 SeA Ur ae se aces a E E E mee eae ete 313 3145 Program UIC anatomy annae a E aua tage utp saiahePadeia A 313 314 AOGING SOUrECE MEIAS nesircine rece a uid ariel nae ame a 314 315 DEMNA VEX DVSSSIOUNS resi anahaiinena tasientecen ii winiawias erat a a A 315 2 22 IX DHIS 2 User Manual Contents 3 146 DENMAT ACEOMS eer a a a a a a einai erat 318 316 L HAS HEIG aACtON aa a a aed 318 302e HAE SCCUOMN ACON seara a a a A E 319 3 k60 SNOW Warning acto iare a E EE aind Agana 319 316 4 SNOW CULO ACUO sorisa nieee eara EE TUE Anri 319 32e USEF POMOS sorrir a AE A E E E A A a 321 B32 L WISCPZSSUUIINGS ara TE E A 321 Sae SOE PORE o aaa A A S N A 321 33 DHIS 2 Frequently Asked Questions sssessssssrssrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrrrrnrrrnsrrrrrrnrrresrrrrrrrrrrrere 323 Bi USEr AUtNONLICS
147. O ernea A TA a A 89 13 2 WIGIC ALON YPE a A E A A ORA 92 1351 MIGICOCON Oros aa a a neo eden 93 134 INGE atl GrOUD SCUS snar EE denies tied TA A E em aes 93 SNAICC OKOUD GAIO piaia a yin neles ae wibnatenedatien ortantaniomra vanes 93 t4 SING reporting TUNCTIONGIILY iseci e r e a e 95 14 1 Reporting functionality In DHIS 2 0 cecccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteaeaeateceeeaneneeeaeenenes 95 142 SING Standard TEPOS casi ats was cashier e E a tin tee eae de aad ot aaa emt 95 14 3 Using Gataset TEPON S aici sajoraytacncetovicun anes cine areas devadee ns A 96 TAA USMO WESOU CSS iia dno uaeitde ac pain veo veneer ig tad aon Vaduaa sda tie A 97 14 5 Using reporting rate SUMMALY s ssssssessrrsrrsrrrssrrrrrrerrrerrrsrrrsrrrerrnsrrnerrrerrrerrrerrnere 97 14 6 Using organisation unit distribution reports sssssssssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrere 98 t92 USING PIVO TaDIG rieien L a A E E A N 99 15 1 Pivot Fable OVerVieW corca a a E 99 15 2 Selecting dimension ITEMS cccccccececeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeaeaeseeetgeatenestaeaneneaeas 99 15 5 Arranging the table layout farea E 101 EO SING tapie OOUONS sssdieniicsprretasiantectstenaventeractconabinrwussenevornatierabiypenenenetivids 102 15S Favortes ano Slat il Or accstasntuneuss vinsage A A A aE TA 103 t Sk Managing TAVOMILES sidisocierrnustentiuencesensedertaiannaretesassopiauutqenteteteseueelevive 103 1D Zo SNNO DIVOU TADES aeaa a E E 103 5c Os ANa SIS INte ratoN iei E
148. ON MANAGEMENT Management Program Tracking F PROGRAM TRACKING MANAGEMENT Management Program Un enrollment F PROGRAM UNENROLLMENT Prune organisation units F PRUNE ORGANISATION UNITS Remove Empty Tracked Entity Events F TRACKED ENTITY REMOVE EMPTY EVENTS Rename Excel Template file F_EXCEL TEMPLATE MANAGEMENT RENAME Report Table External Access F REPORTTABLE EXTERNAL Run validation F RUN VALIDATION Scheduling Administration F SCHEDULING ADMIN Scheduling case aggregate query builder F SCHEDULING CASE AGGREGATE QUERY BUILDER 331 User authorities 332 Scheduling send messages F SCHEDULING SEND MESSAGE Search Activity Plan F ACTIVITY PLAN Search events without F PROGRAM STAGE_INSTANCE SEARCH registration Search events with F PROGRAM TRACKING SEARCH registration Search Tracked Entity F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE SEARCH Instance Search Tracked Entity F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE SEARCH _IN ALL ORGUNITS Instance in All Org Units See API Module M_dhis web api See Apps Maintenance M _dhis web maintenance module appmanager See Browser Cache Cleaner module M_dhis web cache cleaner See Dashboard module integration M_dhis web dashboard integration See Dashboard module M_dhis web dashboard See Data Administration M_dhis web maintenance module dataadmin See Data Elements M_dhis web maintenance and Ind
149. RACKED ENTITY COMMENT DELETE Instance Comment Delete Tracked Entity F PROGRAM STAGE_INSTANCE DELETE Instance Visit Delete Tracked Entity F RELATIONSHIP DELETE Relationship Delete User F USER DELETE Delete User Group F USERGROUP_ DELETE Delete User Role F USERROLE DELETE Delete User Within Managed Group F USER DELETE WITHIN MANAGED GROUP Delete Validation Criteria F_VALIDATIONCRITERIA DELETE Delete Validation Rule F_VALIDATIONRULE_DELETE Delete Validation Rule Group F_VALIDATIONRULEGROUP D LETE Eliminate duplicate data F ELIMINATE DUPLICATE DATA ELEMENTS elements Excel Reporting F_ EXCEL REPORT ADMINISTRATION Administration Execute SQL View F SQLVIEW_EXECUTE Export Activity Plan to XLS file F_ACTIVITY_PLAN_EXPORT Export data F EXPORT _ DATA Export events F_EXPORT_EVENTS Export meta Data F_METADATA_EXPORT Generate Activity Plans F GENERATE ACTIVITY PLANS Generate min max values F GENERATE MIN MAX VALUES Generate Program Statistics Report F_ GENERATE STATISTICAL PROGRAM_REPORT Generate Program Summary Report F GENERATE PROGRAM_SUMMARY_REPORT Generate Tracked Tabular report Entity F GENERATE BENEFICIARY TABULAR REPORT Import data F_IMPORT_DATA Import events F_ IMPORT EVENTS Import from other systems F IMPORT OTHER SYSTEMS Import GML F_IMPORT_GML Import meta Dat
150. Reports Program Summary Generate a summary report for a particular program organisation unit and time frame The report presents a list of tracked entity instances and their records organized based on program stages Upcoming Events Generate a tabular report showing tracked entity instances and their upcoming events for a selected program and time Searching sorting and show hide operations are possible on the columns llil Program Statistics Generate a Statistics report for a particular program The report provides for example an overview of drop outs or completion rates in a given time frame at a particular organisation unit A Overdue Events Generate a list of events for a selected program The report displays list of tracked entity instances and their events that are not conducted on time Filtering and searching is also possible Running any of these repots is very easy one just has to select a program orgnisation unit scope and whenever possible start and end dates Below is a sample program summary report It displays a list of TEI s and their records for MNCH PNC Adult Woman program The records are organized in the form of tabs where each tab is a program stage The columns in the table are data elements which are configured to be displayed in reports under program stage definition Registration and Data Entry Reports Sierra Leone 278 Bo Bad
151. Reports Settings Navigate to Logout Desktop version Click on the Aggregate Reporting then choose an Organisation Unit from the list and the list of the datasets will be appeared for entering aggregate data See the below example Step 1 Select an Organisation Unit from the list Available organisation units Baoma Station CHP Siamawo N CHP Faabu CHP Ngelenun CHC Njandama MCHP Sierra Leone Navigate to Home Step 2 Select a Dataset entry form from the list 209 Mobile 210 Getting started with mobile browser data entry Available data sets Mortality lt 5 years PHUF 6 Staffing PHUF 2 Children s preventive services TB HIV VCCT monthly summary PMTCT monthly summary PHUF 5 Mortality Population Navigate to Available organisation units Home Step 3 Select a period based on the period type of the chosen dataset from the list Step 4 Entering the data Available periods October 2011 September 2011 7 August 2011 July 2011 June 2011 May 2011 April 2011 March 2011 February 2011 january 2011 Navigate to Available data sets Home Mortality lt 5 years Default Measles Deaths lt 5 yrs default ESSERE TI etanus Neonatal Deaths lt 5 yrs defau Animal Bites Rabid Deaths lt 5 yrs default Rabies Deaths lt 5 yrs default Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Step 5 Save the data entered after co
152. S 2 Light A mobile browser optimized data entry module for all devices This module allows for data entry directly with the browser of the mobile device A wide range of devices and mobile browsers are supported including Opera mini 3 amp 4 basic and advanced Opera mini 4 Nokia S40 mobiles Windows Phone 7 Window Mobile 6 Palm Pre Blackberry v5 and v6 Firefox mobile iOS devices iPhone and Android devices This client does not have offline support and an active GPRS 3G connection is required It does not require a new application installation on the phone to support new features but does require a stable data connection for use This solution is described in Section 24 2 Mobile browser based data entry DHIS 2 Smartphone client A mobile browser optimized data entry module for Smartphone devices This module allows for data entry directly with the browser of a Smartphone Offline data entry is supported and it does not require any installation of a special client on the phone itself J2ME GPRS 3G client DHIS mobile includes two separate J2ME clients supporting GPRS EDGE 3G as a transport mechanism One clients supports facility aggregate reporting and the second client supports name based program tracking These clients are split into separate applications to make deployment easier Some health workers may have both applications installed on their phone Both of these clients support offline storage of data and work on
153. S DHMT Data Quality 0 HMIS Province Data Quality 0 HMIS M E Data Quality C District Semi Permanent Dataset C Population Estimates v Export Specifications Import and export Exporting data and meta data 21 2 5 3 Limitations to DHIS 1 4 imports Although it is possible to import and export data between instances of DHIS 1 4 and DHIS 2 there are significant limitations Currently the import of some metadata is not supported from DHIS 1 4 to DHIS 2 This includes e Organisational unit alternate names e Compulsory data element pairings e Custom data entry forms e Dataset data entry levels It is also important that the aggregation operator defined in DHIS 1 4 be set to the correct value Some data such as population should have their aggregation operator set to Average in DHIS2 as this controls how the aggregation of data is handled over time but not within the organisational unit hierarchy 21 3 Exporting data and meta data DHIS2 makes it possible to export various types of data in multiple data formats You can export your data also referred to as measures or facts and your meta data which refers to the information describing your data Data can be exported both in raw non aggregated format and in aggregated format It is also possible to export a combination of data and meta data in case you have special requirements This chapter covers mainly how to export data and meta data through the user inter
154. Set up a user group for personnel in each country e Create global data sets and reports make them viewable for everyone and editable for the global user group only e Create country specific data sets and reports make them viewable and editable for the country user group and the global user group only This way the global indicators and reports could be viewed and analysed by everyone but maintained by the global user group only The country specific data sets indicators and reports could be viewed and maintained by the country and global personnel without being visible or impacting the system for other countries in the organisation A similar approach could work for a scenario with a donor multiple funding agencies and implementing partners in a country where user groups could be set up for each of those Sharing Sharing applied entities That way each implementing partner could create and share their reports within their organisation without affecting or allowing access to others Reports could also be shared with Supervisors and funding agencies at the end of reporting periods Another use case is a country department of health with multiple health programs Typically there is a need for having general reports and charts for the department while allowing the health programs to develop specific reports and charts for internal use This can be achieved by creating user groups for each health program Later when developing reports and
155. a F METADATA_IMPORT User authorities Insert custom Java script and CSS F_INSERT_CUSTOM JS CSS List Excel Template F EXCEL TEMPLATE MANAGEMENT LIST List Tracked Entity Instance F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE LIST List User Groups F USERGROUP LIST List User Roles F_USERROLE LIST Load event reminder messages F PROGRAM STAGE INSTANCE REMINDER Load Tracked Entity Instance History F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE HISTORY Lock Data Set F DATASET LOCK Manage integration routes F MANAGE _ INTEGRATION ROUTES Manage Program Indicators F PROGRAM_INDICATOR_MANAGEMENT Manage Program Rule F PROGRAM RULE MANAGEMENT Manage Program Validation F PROGRAM VALIDATION Manage Tracked Entities F TRACKED ENTITY MANAGEMENT Manage Tracked Entity Instance Reminders F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE REMINDER MANAGEMENT Map External Access F MAP_EXTERNAL Merge organisation units F MERGE ORGANISATION UNITS Move Organisation Unit F ORGANISATIONUNIT MOVE Multiple Individual Data Entry F NAME BASED DATA ENTRY Option Set Management F_OPTIONSET_MANAGEMENT Organisation Unit Registration F_ORGANISATION_REGISTRATION Perform maintenance tasks F PERFORM MAINTENANCE Program Enrollment F PROGRAM ENROLLMENT Program Event Management F PROGRAM_INSTANCE MANAGEMENT Program Stage Section F_ PROGRAMSTAGE SECTI
156. a The event is only completed successfully if all validation is valid 2 Attribute tab Load identifier types and entity attributes which belong to the selected program for users to enter values for this program 3 Reschedule and set status tab Provides function for re scheduling setting status and sending messages comments or deleting for each events Click Update button to update enrollment date and incident date and re schedule visit plan by the new incident date Click Complete button to complete the active program Click Quit button to quite the active program At that time the status of over due events are set as skipped And events scheduled in the future are removed Click Re enroll button to re enroll a completed program If the program enrollment which no stage has data values you can see button Remove next to Re enroll button Click on it to delete this program enrollment 297 Tracker Individual records After entering a comment in the Comment field click Save button to save a comment for the event For sending a reminder message click on Send message icon the first icon under Operations column Note Only allow to edit due dates of events with status as overdue or scheduled in future 4 Messages tab Displays a comment message list of the program 5 Program report tab Summary report for the program Note Belong to the authorities of the user logged some tabs can be hidden The Active programs s
157. a dimension and can be selected by double clicking on it After selecting a data element it will be visible under selected data items Here you can specify a filter for each data element with operators such as greater than in or equal together with a filter value Periods For the period dimension you have three options relative periods fixed periods and start end dates Relative periods can e g be last 12 months and has the advantage that it keeps the data in the report up to date as time goes Fixed periods can e g be January 2014 You can swith to start end dates by selecting from the drop down menu under the periods tab which lets you specify flexible dates for the time span in the report Organisation units The organisation unit dimension lets you select any org unit from the hierarchy You can use the org unit mode selector to select org units explicitly by org unit hierarchy levels and by org unit groups Aggregated values individual cases lt lt lt Update Layout Options Favorites Show aggregated event report Show case based event re v Downlad Sharer Apr to Jun 2014 Jan to Mar 2014 Julto Sep 2013 Octto Dec 2013 Total Program Stage Female Discharged 13 16 1051 29 1 z gt a GN Be BRR o f E g 2 F g a PRR BRERBRR BE Bonthe o g o o N Baers By clicking Layout from the top menu you can control which dimensions should appear as columns rows and filters in the pivot ta
158. a elements become SO Important in describing the data Common properties of data elements can be modelled through what is called data element groups The groups are completely flexible in the sense that they are defined by the user Getting started with DHIS 2 Datasets and data entry forms both their names and their memberships Groups are useful both for browsing and presenting related data but can also be used to aggregate data elements together Groups are loosely coupled to data elements and not tied directly to the data values which means they can be modified and added at any point in time without interfering with the raw data 2 5 3 Datasets and data entry forms All data entry in DHIS 2 is organised through the use of Datasets A Dataset is a collection of data elements grouped together for data collection and in the case of distributed installs they also define chunks of data for export and import between instances of DHIS 2 e g from a district office local installation to a national server Datasets are not linked directly to the data values only through their data elements and frequencies and as such a dataset can be modified deleted or added at any point in time without affecting the raw data already captured in the system but such changes will of course affect how new data will be collected A dataset has a period type which controls the data collection frequency which can be daily weekly monthly quarterly six monthly o
159. a entry Entering data 10 1 2 Entering data 78 Start entering data by clicking inside the first field and type in the value Move to the next field using the Tab button Shift Tab will take you back one step You can also use the up and down arrow keys as well as the Enter key to navigate between the form cells The values are saved immediately and do not require to be saved at a later stage A green field indicates that the value has been saved in the system on the server Input validation If you type in an invalid value e g a character in a field that only accepts numeric values you will get a pop up that explains the problem and the field will be coloured yellow not saved until you have corrected the value If you have defined a min max range for the field data element organisation unit combination a pop up message will notify you when the value is out of range and the value will remain unsaved until you have changed the value or updated the range and then re entered the value Disabled fields If a field is disabled grey it means that the field can and should not be filled The cursor will automatically jump to the next open field Data history By double clicking on any input field in the form a data history window opens Showing the last 12 values registered for the current field organisation unit data element categoryoptioncombo in a bar chart This window also shows the min and max range and allows for adjusting the
160. a to analyse First select the from and to date for the data to include in the analysis Second select the data set from which to pick data elements from Third select all or some of the data elements in the data set by double clicking or marking them and clicking the add remove buttons Fourth select the parent organisation unit to use All children of the organisation unit will be included Fifth select the number of standard deviations This refers to the number of standard deviations the data Is allowed to deviate from the mean before it is classified as an outlier DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone sss Apps amp Profile e gt Validation Rule Std Dev Outlier Analysis Validation Rule From date To date Validation Rule Group 2015 09 02 2015 09 30 Data Analysis Avallable data sets Selected data sets Validation Rule Analysis Filte Filter Clear Std Dev Outlier Analysis Child Health ART monthly summary Clinical Monitoring Checklist EPI Stock Facility Assessment HIV Peadiatric monthly summary Min Max Outlier Analysis Follow Up Analysis Inpatient Morbidity Mortality Summary Life Saving Commodities MNCH Quarterly Report Morbidity Morality lt 5 years Mortality lt 5 years Narratives PMTCT monthly summary Population Select parent organisation unit E Sierra Leone Bo Bombali Bonthe 7 Kailahun E Kambia E Kenema Koinadugu E Kono Moyamba Port Loko Pujehun Tonkolili E Western
161. abel Expression GHD re i 159 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport Expression editor r Ln 1 Col 14 Paramet periodid Field Integer equals Obes SSAA Organisationunitid Field Integer toString F meperiodname Field hashCode J Variable organisationunitname Field String compareT User Def reporting_month_name Field String compareT Recent E param_organisationunit_name Fielc indexOf i indexOfi 5 E Expressi organisation_unit_is_parent Field 5t eanc 1 coverage a Field Double anc 2 coverage a Field Double anc 3 coverage a Field Double indexOf indexOf il valueOfi C valueOfi c 7 lt YalueOfi fl ee Pe m g ie valueOfi liv W T ia Cancel A In the value expression we add the actual data values for our first indicator Use the Expression editor again to do this When we are finished the window should look like the one below only with different names according to the indicator item Hyperlink b F anc 1 coverage a Label Expression Cancel Me You can then Click OK to close the window Follow the same steps to add a series for the other indicators 160 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport af See Type of dataset Category dataset Category series Category series ANC 1 Coverage ee Category series ANC 2 Coverage Category series
162. acCKIrOUNO sapan A A eee daa a oO 1 1 2 Key features and purpose Of DHIS 2 c ccc cceccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaegesseaeeeseeneseaesnenes 1 1 3 Use of DHIS 2 in HIS data collection processing interpretation and analysis 2 14 TECHNICA DG CKONOUNG skiere a AA E ie incaiaa cial EA 3 Nee DAS Se OVE OUI er e oat enaltaypedgiac iar oyun te Gace ov nee dena aan neem eta eae 3 1 4 2 Understanding platform independence cccecccesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeaeenentanas 4 1 4 3 Deployment strategies online VS offline 21 0 cece cc eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaees 5 143 Omne DEPIOVIMEl erara e AEE EE 5 t42 ONMME OCDIOVINGNU anne traced ataearstidaitiavaraarnat lattes 6 1543 30 HYDrid deployment viinciasd ive iniuwlh eai ea vay a aaea A 6 tao Ae DENVER NOSNO nia a r EN neieannan 7 1 5 Difference between Aggregated and Patient data in a HIS ssssssssseesssesrrrrrrrrrrrrerne 8 1 6 Free and Open Source Software FOSS benefits and challenges ccceeees 9 2 Getting Started With DAIS 2 mincement eaa ae a 11 2 1 Using the DHIS 2 demo server si ccdiiatiwicrcineviteesiesaiv vans tase wate catia e ua ae ueaeaaninbans 11 2 2 USINO the DAIS 2 IVE package shiccisciteresseteiisis rere i e aan 11 2 2 1 Starting the DHIS 2 Live PACKAGE cinniri E EAA TE 11 2 2 1 1 Prerequisites for DAIS 2 Live tssistaaaacasedehey siadeads neared 11 2 2 1 2 Starting up with a blank database ec ceccceee
163. ace or a more loosely coupled external application interacting through the DHIS 2 Web API In summary DHIS2 provides a comprehensive HIS solution for the reporting and analysis needs of health information users at any level 1 3 Use of DHIS 2 in HIS data collection processing interpretation and analysis The wider context of HIS can be comprehensively described through the information cycle presented in Figure 1 1 below The information cycle pictorially depicts the different components stages and processes through which the data Is collected checked for quality processed analysed and used The Information Cycle Essential data set Definitions Cis eye Quality Reporting a Collect N Target populations Use Process Interpret Analyse e Comparison A p Self assessment Trends Bai Present Indicators Epidemiological pidemiologica Targets Information culture Feedback Actions thinking e Tables Graphs Population Maps Figure 1 1 The health information cycle What is DHIS 2 Technical background DHIS 2 supports the different facets of the information cycle including e Collecting data e Running quality checks e Data access at multiple levels Reporting e Making graphs and maps and other forms of analysis e Enabling comparison across time for example previous months and space for example across facilities and districts See trends
164. ach form or as a more batch like process on multiple forms at the same time e g for all facilities for the previous reporting month The results of the tests will list all violations and the detailed values for each side of the expression where the violation occurred to make it easy to go back to data entry and correct the values 2 5 5 Indicators Indicators represent perhaps the most powerful data analysis feature of the DHIS 2 While data elements represent the raw data counts being collected the indicators represent formulas providing coverage rates incidence rates ratios and other formula based units of analysis An indicator is made up of a factor e g 1 100 100 100 000 a numerator and a denominator the two latter are both expressions based on one or more data elements E g the indicator BCG coverage lt 1 year is defined a formula with a factor 100 a numerator BCG doses given to children under 1 year and a denominator Target population under 1 year The indicator DPT1 to DPT3 drop out rate is a formula of 100 x DPT1 doses given DPT3 doses given DPT1 doses given Most report modules in DHIS 2 support both data elements and indicators and you can also combine these in custom reports but the important difference and strength of indicators versus raw data data element s data values is the ability to compare data across different geographical areas e g highly populated vs rural areas as the target popul
165. acy of the polygon is visually acceptable and the performance of the GIS is optimal For polygons we need to make the boundary lines less detailed by removing some of the line points Make a backup of your shapefiles before you start One possible method is the use of MapShaper which is an online tool which can be used to generalize geographical data To use MapShaper simply upload your shapefile to the site Then at the center bottom you see a Slider that starts at 0 It is usually acceptable to drag it up to about 80 In the left menu you can check show original lines to compare the result and you may want to give a different simplification method a try When you are happy with the result click export in the top right corner Then check the first of the four options called Shapefile polygons click create and wait for the download buttons to appear Now download the two files to your local computer and overwrite the existing ones Move on to the next step with your new simplified shapefile Step 2 Convert the shapefile to GML The recommended tool for geographical format conversions is called ogr2ogr This should be available for most Linux distributions sudo apt get install gdal bin For Windows go to http fwtools maptools org and download FWTools install it and open up the FWTools command Shell During the format conversion we also want to ensure that the output has the correct coordinate projection called EPSG 4326 wit
166. aggregate or patient type of data element e Value type Defines the type of data this data element will be used to record e Integer Any whole number positive and negative including zero e Positive integer Any whole number greater than but not including zero e Negative integer Any whole number less than but not including zero Positive of zero integer Any positive whole number including zero e Number Any real numeric value with a single decimal point Thousands separators and scientific notation is not supported e Unit interval Any real number greater than or equal to O and less than or equal to 1 e Percentage Whole numbers inclusive between 0 and 100 e Coordinate A point coordinate specified as longitude latitude in decimal degrees All coordinate should be specified in the format 19 23 56 42 with a comma separating the longitude and latitude Since v2 21 e Text Textual value The maximum number of allowed characters per value is 50 000 e Long text Textual value Renders as text area in forms Data elements Editing data elements e File A file resource which can be used to store external files such as documents and photos Since v2 21 e Date Dates will render as calendar widget in data entry e Username This will be populated with the username of the user which performs data entry automatically during the data entry process e Yes No Boolean values will render as drop down lists in data entr
167. alysis each organisation unit should be a member of a single group compulsory and exclusive within a group set Stated somewhat differently a facility should not be both a Community health center as well as a District hospital 3 3 1 1 Alternative orgunit hierarchies advanced use of group sets and groups A more advanced use of organisation unit group sets is to create alternative hierarchies e g use administrative borders from other ministries In Sierra Leone that could mean an alternative hierarchy of 1 MoHS 2 Districts and 3 Local councils instead of the four level hierarchy with chiefdoms and PHUSs For instance if all PHUs are linked to a specific local council it would be possible to look at data aggregated by local council instead of chiefdom Then you would first need to create a group set called Local council and then create one orgunit group for every local council and finally link all PHUs to their corresponding local council group Table 3 4 District OrgUnit Type Data Element Period Value Bo CHC Measles doses Dec 09 121 given Bo CHP Measles doses Dec 09 98 given Bo MCHP Measles doses Dec 09 87 given Bomball CHC Measles doses Dec 09 110 given Bomball CHP Measles doses Dec 09 67 given Bomball MCHP Measles doses Dec 09 59 given 3 3 2 Best practice on the use of group sets and groups As mentioned above all organisation units should be a member of a singl
168. amp above E Person attributes Available values 2 Total of patient registration Gender Filter by name Clear Available values EJ DOB Type Age days Filter by type View all X Child contact type Child contact name a DT 5 dose Vitamin A dose 7 Vitamin A dose 5 Display name Name v Sort by 0 Name Code 4 as t ka b es le l tess ene NULL ISNULL AnD OR COMBINE _DateDiff 200 Incident date DateDiff xxx Enrollment date DateDift xxx Report date Clear rm Condition DE 1149292 1149299 1149286 is not null AND CP gender F m Description Child Health Program Tracking 2 years amp above Vitamin A dose 6 is not null AND CP gender F Add Test condition j Cancel 290 Tracker Programs Attributes Basic information e Name Provide name of query this name is usually same with the name of aggregate data element For example Number of mothers got VAT Number of children got BCG vaccine e Dataset Select dataset contains data elements which will be used to link with individual data e Data element Select aggregate data element which will be used to link with individual data e Operator There are six operators 1 Select Number of tracked entity instances if aggregate based on entities 2 Select Number of visits if aggregate data based on times that entitys received services 3
169. ample when running a standard report or creating a chart A combination is also possible for example to add some organisation units in the report permanently while letting the users choose additional Report parameters is discussed below In general using fixed organisation units and or time periods are an unnecessary restriction Fixed Organisation Units To add fixed organisation units click Toggle fixed organisation units A panel will appear where you can choose orgunits to always include in the report If you leave it blank the users select orgunits when running the report through the use of report parameters Use the drop down menu to filter organisation units by level double click or use the buttons to add remove Fixed Periods To add fixed periods click Toggle fixed organisation units A panel will appear where you can choose periods to always include in the report If you leave it blank the users select periods Setting up report functionality Selecting report parameters when running the report through the use of report parameters Use the drop down menu to choose period type week month etc the Prev and Next button to choose year and double click or use the buttons to add remove Relative periods Instead of using fixed static periods like Jan 2010 or Q1 2010 more generic periods can be used to create reusable report tables e g for monthly reports the period Reporting month will simply pick the current rep
170. anc dropout rate_quarter2_last_year Field Dou eg toString Str B i double te anc dropout rate_quarter3_last_year Field D ible hashCode E WE a ntm i a SEES r Import Export Reset to default C Cancel o pa The chart is now ready 19 4 2 9 2 Line charts Line charts can be useful in many circumstances However to make line charts the report data report table must be suited for it Thus if you want to make a line chart it is important that the report table does not have periods in the crosstab dimension Examples where this is useful is if you are making a report for a single organisation unit with one or more indicators or if you are making a report with one indicator and one or more organisation units Below we will go though the steps needed to make a report with a line chart showing the development of three indicators over one year for one organisation unit We start by making a report table with the choices shown below Crosstab dimensions Indicators data elements data sets wi Organisation units Periods Relative periods Reporting month C Months this year Eil Quarters this year L This year Months last year __ Quarters last year Last year L Report parameters Reporting month M Parent organisation unit C Organisation unit Eal When we open the resulting jrxml file in iReport the default line chart is included Since we want to make a line chart w
171. and year or to make that period parameter more generic with regard to period type somehow The ability to use period as a parameter makes the report table reusable over time and as such fits nicely with report needs such as monthly quarterly or annual reports When a report is run by the user in DHIS 2 the user must specify the values for the report tables that are linked to the report First the report table is re generated deleted and re created with updated data and then the report is run in the background in Jasper report engine Report tables can consist of values related to data elements indicators or data completeness which is related to completeness of reporting across orgunits for a given month Completeness reports will be covered in a separate section There are three dimensions in a report table that identify the data indicators or data elements orgunits and periods For each of these dimensions the user can select which metadata values to include in the report The user must select one or more data elements or indicators to appear in the report The orgunit selection can be substituted with a parameter either one specific orgunit or an orgunit parent making itself and all its children appear in the report If one or more orgunits are selected and no orgunit parameter is used then the report is static with regard to which orgunits to include which in most cases is an unnecessary restriction to a report Using relative peri
172. ant to understand that the data entry forms or datasets themselves are not intrinsically linked to the underlying data value and that the meaning of data is only described by the data element and its categories This makes it perfectly safe to modify datasets and forms without altering the data as long as the data elements stay the same This loose coupling between forms and data makes DHIS 2 flexible when it comes to designing and changing new forms and in providing exactly the form the users want Another benefit of only linking data to data elements and not to forms is the flexibility of creating indicators and validation rules based on data elements and also in providing any kind of output report in pivot tables charts maps etc that can combine data individually or across forms e g to correlate data from different health programs Due to this flexibility of enabling integration of data from various programs forms and sources routine and semi permanent population staff equipment a DHIS database is used as an integrated data repository for many or all parts of the aggregated data in a larger HIS The figure below illustrates this flexibility 25 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Extended examples of data elements and forms Form A Form B Form inl ee al Gr pepe pe ball i ol Ld Ere baal ial al a ao il hail Sa all qe data warehouse F IE e Data analysis in charts Data analysis in GIS Feedback report A pail il
173. approvals It will be added to the list of approval settings You may configure the system for approving data at every organisation unit level or only at selected organisation unit levels Note that when you add a new approval level you may optionally choose a Category option group set This feature is discussed later in this chapter On the System Approval Settings page you may select the option Hide unapproved data in analytics to hide unapproved data in reports pivot table data visualizer and GIS If this option is checked unapproved data will be hidden from users assigned to higher level organisation units compared to where approval is required Users who are assigned to organisation units where data is ready for approval can still view the data as can users assigned to higher level Data approval Data visibility organisation units if they have the Approve data at lower levels authority If this option is not checked then all data is shown whether approved or not 20 4 Data visibility If the option Hide unapproved data in analytics is enabled data will be hidden from viewing by users associated with higher levels When determining whether a data record should be hidden for a specific user the system associates a user with a specific approval level and compares it to the level to which the data record has been approved up to A user is associated with the approval level which matches the level of the organisation unit s she is linke
174. are is taken organisational units can be assigned to multiple groups of a group set This can be checked through the Data Integrity module which will report which organisational units are not members of a compulsory organisational unit group set and which organisational units have been assigned to more than one member of a group set 4 2 2 1 Editing organisation unit group sets Click on the name of the organisation unit group set you wish to modify followed by Edit from the context menu which will appear The following properties can be defined in the Edit or Create new window e Name Provide a precise name for the group set e Description Describe the phenomena the group set is measuring capturing e Compulsory Indicate whether ALL orgunits need to be member of a group in this group set or not e Available groups Selected groups Here you assign groups to your group set by using the arrow buttons to move highlighted groups between the two lists selected If no groups appear in the list then you must go to orgunit groups and create new groups there first Note that assigning groups that will violate the exclusive rule on group sets is not possible e g adding a group that already has assigned an orgunit that again Is already member of a group that has already been selected by this group set will not be possible since one orgunit will end up with two group memberships in the same group set To avoid such situations we recommend f
175. arked with what type they are text or number What we need to make sure of is therefore that the expression class we choose for the text field matches the actual expression AAO Expression editor Ffield Ln 1 Col 9 XE Parameters organisationunitid Field numberOfla numberof Variables Text bitCount ir param_organisationunit_name Field String anisation unit is parent Field String Field Double Field Double equals Obj toString in toString in toString 5 hashCode reverseByt Numbers compareTe compareTc_ E User Defined Exprefore thcuresptumsm 15 yrs_quarter3 Field Double thcuresptumsm 15 yrs_quarter4 Field Double d EE SSS Import C Export Apply Cancel 19 4 2 4 Filtering the table rows In the default table exported from DHIS 2 there are some rows that it might be better to leave out of the table and some that it would be preferable to have at the end For example when 140 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport making a table based on a report table with the parent organisation unit parameter the default table might have a row with the national level somewhere in between all the regions In iReport this can be changed so that the parent organisation unit appears at the bottom of the table This involves two steps that will be explained below Note that this will not work where there is only one organisation units and it is therefo
176. as left and no data will be lost Software application The central server deployment style means that the application can be upgraded and maintained in a centralized fashion When new versions of the applications are released with new features and bug fixes it can be deployed to the single online server All changes will then be reflected on the client side the next time end users connect over the Internet This obviously has a huge positive impact for the process of improving the system as new features can be distributed to users immediately all users will be accessing the same application version and bugs and issues can be sorted out and deployed on the fly e Database maintenance Similar to the previous point changes to the meta data can be done on the online server in a centralized fashion and will automatically propagate to all clients next time they connect to the server This effectively removes the vast issues related to maintaining an upgraded and standardized meta data set related to the traditional offline deployment style It is extremely convenient for instance during the initial database development phase and during the annual database revision processes as end users will be accessing a consistent and standardized database even when changes occur frequently This approach might be problematic in cases where Internet connectivity is volatile or missing in long periods of time DHIS2 however has certain features which requires Internet
177. aset of the report or a sub dataset if you have defined one You can even specify lt lt lt special rules to collect the data for the chart later using the Chart Data dialog Now please select the dataset to use Dataset Main report dataset Ss Se l Finish Cancel f Mg a ao Category Chart Wizard Steps Series 1 Dataset gt cerljes Series 3 Categories and Values A category chart requires three expressions the first identifies the series the second the category and the last the value The categories appear on the X axis The values appear on the Y axis oo E 7 a ks E ms a fa he A 5 ma m 4 h E ee ES 3 Baal AR r 2 E 1 E o One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight i First Second gt Third The series expression is useful when you need to represent several sets of data in your chart If you needa signle series chart set the series expression to a constant value like an empty string a Te a Help lt Back z A PEE EE Eo an Crni D Cancel Next adjust the size and position of the chart in your report Then we will add one data series for each of our three indicators Right click on the chart and choose Chart data If you are making a chart with one indicator and several organisation units you probably want to make a filter expression so that only data from the parameter parent organisation unit is used in the cha
178. at the same organisation unit level for different category option group sets If you have multiple approval levels for different category option group sets at the same organisation unit level you may change the approval ordering in the Settings section under System Approval Settings Just click on the approval level you wish to move and select Move up or Move down If you have an approval level with no category option groups set it must be the highest approval level for that organisation unit level Import and export Meta data import Chapter 21 Import and export In a primary health system the HMIS typically involves a distributed application where the same application is running in different geographical locations PHCs CHCs hospitals districts and state Most of these physical locations do not have Internet connectivity and hence they work off line At some point normally at the district level the data needs to be synchronised in order to have a consolidated database for the a particular geographical region For this it iS important to be able to export data from one location which is working offline say at the health facility level to another one say at the district level where the data would need to be imported This feature of exporting and importing is thus a crucial function of a HMIS This feature also helps us overcome the dependency on Internet to some degree as data updates can be transferred via USB key where there is n
179. ata When you have made a pivot table you can click e g Chart in the top right corner and then select Open this table as chart E Table p Chart E Map Home Go to charts Open this table as chart If you just want to visualize a small part of your pivot table as a chart you can click directly on a value in the table instead A menu will appear If you mouse hover the Open selection as Chart option you can see that some of the dimension headers in the table are highlighted indicating what data will be visualized as a chart Using Pivot Table Downloading data lt lt lt Update Layouts Options Favorites hi hi BCG doses given Pental doses gwen Fuly Immuntedchid Measles Bo 204 1 B68 1351 Bomtali 1438 1757 1219 July 2013 Bonthe 650 702 597 Kailahun 1269 1317 977 5 401 5 644 4144 Bo 2 132 2434 1977 Bombali 1613 1711 1255 lll Open August 2013 Bonthe 792 769 624 Kailahun 1340 1459 1188 5877 6373 5 041 Bo 2243 1865 1460 Bomtali 1526 1726 1344 Bonthe 615 763 792 Kailahun 1164 1214 1201 5 548 5 568 4797 Total 16 826 17 585 13 982 15 7 Downloading data You can download the data in the current pivot table by clicking on Download in the top menu The data can be downloaded in various formats including Microsoft Excel CSV HTML The data table will have one column per dimension and contain names of the dimension items You can easily create a pivot table in Microsoft Excel from the downloaded Excel file by
180. ated as these will change the meaning of the data values already captured in the database if any So this step is one of the more decisive and careful steps in the database design process One best practice when designing data elements is to think of data elements as a unit of data analysis and not just as a field in the data collection form Each data element lives on its own in the database completely detached from the collection form and reports and other outputs are based on data elements and expressions formulas composed of data elements and not the data collection forms So the data analysis needs should drive the process and not the look an feel of the data collection forms A simple rule of thumb is that the name of the data element must be able to stand on its own and describe the data value also outside the context of its collection form E g a data element name like Total referrals makes sense when looking at it in either the RCH form or the OPD form but on its own it does not uniquely describe the phenomena who are being referred and should in stead be called Total referrals from Maternity or Total referrals from OPD Two different data elements with different meanings although the field on the paper form might only say Total referrals since the user of the form will always know where these referrals come from In a database or a repository of data elements this context is no longer valid and therefore the names of the dat
181. ation can be used in the denominator Indicators can be added modified and deleted at any point in time without interfering with the data values in the database 2 5 6 Report tables and reports 16 Standard reports in DHIS 2 are a very flexible way of presenting the data that has been collected Data can be aggregated by any organisational unit or orgunit level by data element by indicators as well as over time e g monthly quarterly yearly The report tables are custom data sources for the standard reports and can be flexibly defined in the user interface and later accessed in external report designers such as iReport or through custom HTML reports These report designs can then be set up as easily accessible one click reports with parameters so that the users can run the same reports e g every month when new data is entered and also be relevant to users at all levels as the organisational unit can be selected at the time of running the report Getting started with DHIS 2 GIS 2 5 7 GIS In the integrated GIS module you can easily display your data on maps both on polygons areas and as points health facilities and either as data elements or indicators By providing the coordinates of your organisational units to the system you can quickly get up to speed with this module See the GIS section for details on how to get started 2 5 8 Charts and dashboard On of the easiest way to display your indicator data is through char
182. avaScript in your report The report template which you can download after selecting report type is a useful starting point for developing HTML based standard reports It gives you the basic structure and suggests how you can use JavaScript and CSS in the report JavaScript and CSS can easily be included using standard script and style tags If you selected relative periods when creating the standard report you can access these in JavaScript like this Varor Todo 9 N e 2 Ke DOm ioe rhode 9 7 e in watmaanye Wien Oe minece merited bikeios Ver period perreds COl If you selected the organisation unit report parameter when creating the standard report you can access the selected organisation unit in JavaScript like this var Odeo Uiguiies So e Sicicioloucie sroucepeicml Gere ae aUiaubic i 7 Yap Cloaiaer var a6 Aaroniero Uliailsies ak lt var name orgUnit name Var Code Orguni ct ycode When designing these reports you can utilize the analytics Web API resource in order to retrieve aggregated data in JavaScript Have a look in the Web API chapter in this guide for a closer Setting up report functionality Designing HTML based standard reports description AS a complete minimal example you can retrieve analytics data after the report has been loaded and use that data to set the inner text of an HTML element like this E E Oo eee giciivzclc ialoiee SG OC Umen i eeacvae TUNO ike mau Y SSCS a sy souk a E Ves dime
183. be command s name code value code value code value the value of course might be changed depends on real data so you have to preapre a SMS text like this example report vo2 vn5 a2 b6 z3 x1 In case the command has a separator for instance the SMS text should be report vo 2 vn 5 a 2 b 6 2Z 3 x 1 or report vo 2 vn 5 a 2 b 6 z 3 x 1 With the J2ME_ PARSER you don t need to prepare those SMS text because the J2ME will do this job fe DHIS Mobile Configuration Edit SMS command Data Set for Mobile Command Details SMS Service Configuration Name report View Sent SMS Parser KEY_VALUE_PARSER View Received SMS Completeness method Receive all data value v SMS Commands i Use current period for reporting Code and value Separator Reply message if no codes are sent only the command J2ME Client Update Wrong format message No user message User belong to more than one OrgUnit message Success Message User can set the custom response message for Wrong format message No User Message User belong to more than one OrgUnit message and Success message If no custom message is being set system will use the default message 24 4 2 2 SMS Command for Alerting Registering 262 In order to alert users or register patients users we use SMS commands which have ALERT PARSER for phone s plain text or UNREGISTERED PARSER for j2me apps Command Details Parser T
184. be sent to either a specific user user group or groups of users who have been assigned to particular organisation units To write a new message simply click Messages from the dashboard screen and then press the Write message button Select an organisation unit or group of organisation units from the Recipients organisational unit tree In the To user box you can select specific users or user groups Provide a Subject and Text To send the message press the Send button You can discard the message by pressing the Discard button as seen in the screenshot below 75 Dashboards Messages and feedback 76 Write new message Organisation Unit Selection Sierra Leone El Bo Badijia Baoma Bargbe Bargbo Bumpe Ngao Gbo Jaiama Bongor Kakua Komboya Lugbu El Mina lLanas To org unit Glo oe amp E x amp Family Planning Program Coordinators Subject Data review meeting We will have a family planning data review meeting at 9am in our main office Please attend To user Text Send Discard To read messages which have been sent to you select Messages from the Dashboard You messages will be displayed as a list Click the desired message to read all of the messages in this particular conversation Messages Write feedback SA Inbox Follow up Unread Sender Subject Date System notification Analytics tabl
185. ble Each data element appears as individual dimensions and can be placed on any of the axes Note that the series and category panels can only have one dimension at the time Note that data elements of continuous value types real numbers decimal numbers can only be used as filters and will automatically be positioned as filters in the layout dialog The reason for this is that continuous number cannot be grouped into sensible ranges and used on columns and rows Using Event Visualizer Options Event charts can be saved as favorites by clicking on Favorites in the top menu Favorites can later be restored by clicking on them in the list of favorites Event charts can be downloaded in various popular formats by clicking on the Download button on the top menu 27 1 2 Options An event report can be customized using a range of options which can be accessed by clicking on Options in the top menu The following options apply to aggregated values type reports only Show values Show values as numbers on top of each series Hide empty category items Hides category items with no data from the chart Show trend lines The trend line will visualize how your data evolves over time e g is performance improving or deteriorating Makes sense when periods are selected as category Target line value title Displays a horizontal line at the given domain value Useful e g when you want to compare your performance to the current target Ba
186. ble Note that each data element appears as individual dimensions and can be placed on any of the axes Note that data elements of continuous value types real numbers decimal numbers can only be used as filters and will automatically be positioned as filters in the layout dialog The reason for this is that continuous number cannot be grouped into sensible ranges and used on columns and rows 269 Using Event Reports Event queries Event reports can be saved as favorites by clicking on Favorites in the top menu Favorites can later be restored by clicking on them in the list of favorites Event reports can be downloaded in various popular formats by clicking on the Download button on the top menu 26 1 2 Event queries By selecting Individual cases from the top left menu you can use the event reports app to make searches or queries for events based on a flexible set of criteria The report will be displayed as a table with one row per event Each dimension can be used as a column in the table or as a filter Each dimension can have a criteria filter Data elements of type option set allows for in criteria where multiple options can be selected Numeric values can be compared to filter values using greater than equal or less than operators 26 1 3 Options 270 An event report can be customized using a range of options which can be accessed by clicking on Options in the top menu The following options apply to aggregated
187. cal Walrutrition 1 T1259 11970 a Diarrhoea With Blood Dysentery 1 Gies 4334 16138 Diarrhoea With Severe Dehydration l 56545 15375 31091 The following table illustrates the benefits of reusing data element categories across datasets and categorycombinations The VCCT ART and PMTCT data are collected in three different datasets the first two with both gender and age breakdown and the PMTCT only age gender is given All three share the same age groups and therefore it is possible to view data elements from all these three datasets in the same table and use the age dimension In the previous example with morbidity and mortality data this was not possible since new cases referrals and deaths all have different age groups 29 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Case study From paper forms to multidimensional datasets lessons learned Sum of value 15 24y 25 49y gt 49y Grand Total ART ART enrollment stage 1 3 10 ART enrollment stage 2 L 2 i 11 ART enrollment stage 3 5 23 31 ART new clients stated on ARY ART treatment stopped due to death ART treatment stopped due to loss to follow up 7 ART clients with new adverse clinical event ART entry point No walk in ART No started Opportunist Infection prophylaxis ART entry ponit No diagnostic testing ART entry point No transfer in ART entry point No old patients ART entry point No other ART No clients who stopped TRT due to TRT failure PMTCT PMTCT
188. cal hierarchy and the GIS module depends on this Non geographical hierarchies are discouraged and would better to be represented through the use of organisational unit groups This dimension to the data is defined as a hierarchy with one root unit e g Ministry of Health or a country and any number of levels and nodes below Each node in this hierarchy is called an organisational unit in DHIS2 The design of this hierarchy will determine the geographical units of analysis available to the users as data is collected and aggregated in this structure There can only be one organisational hierarchy at the same time so its structure needs careful consideration Additional hierarchies e g parallel administrative boundaries to the health care sector can be modeled using organisational groups and group sets but the organisational hierarchy is the main vehicle for data aggregation on the geographical dimension Typically national organisational hierarchies in public health have 4 6 levels but any number of levels is Supported The hierarchy is built up of parent child relations For instance a country might have eight provinces and each province again might have a number of districts as their children Normally the health facilities from which data is typically collected will be located at the lowest level but they can also be located at higher levels e g national or provincial hospitals so skewed organisational trees are supported e g a leaf
189. can be configured as a system setting This allows the system to perform optimally when the database is hosted on a different server than the application server as the analytics engine scales linearly on the number of available cores System notifications email address An email address can be specified to receive system notifications Notifications about failures in processes such as analytics table generation will be sent here This is useful for application monitoring Server base URL The full externally accessible base URL for this server Example https apps dhis2 org demo is the server base URL for the DHIS 2 demo server The URL is used to provide links to this server from external locations such as in emails sent from the system Note that if this URL is not present emails sent from the messaging system will not contain a reply link Google Analytics Universal Analytics Key Set your Google UA key here to provide analytics for your DHIS 2 instance Most places are covered but it will not be provided for custom apps You can read more about Google Analytics at http google com analytics 23 1 3 Appearance settings 204 Application title Sets the application title on the top menu Application introduction Sets an introduction of the system which will be visible on the top left part of the login page Application notification Sets a notification which should be displayed to users Will be visible on the front page under
190. can only be allocated to one organisation unit group within that Group Set For instance one organisation unit cannot normally belong to the both the Hospital and Clinic groups but rather to only to one of them Go to Organisation unit gt Organisation unit groups to review each organisation unit identified in the integrity check Remove the organisation units from all groups except the one that it should be allocated to 22 2 19 Organisation unit groups without group sets The organisation unit groups listed here have not been allocated to a group set Go to Maintenance gt Organisation unit gt Organisation unit group sets and allocate the Organisation unit group to the appropriate group set 22 2 20 Validation rules without groups All validation rules must be assigned to a group Go to Data quality gt Validation rule group and assign the offending validation rule to a group 22 2 21 Invalid validation rule left side expressions An error exists in the left side validation rule definition Go to Data quality gt Validation rule and click the Edit icon on the offending rule Press Edit left side and make the corrections that are required 22 2 22 Invalid validation rule right side expressions An error exists in the left side validation rule definition Go to Data quality gt Validation rule and click the Edit icon on the offending rule Press Edit right side and make the corrections that are required 192 Data Admin
191. charts these can be made viewable and editable to the program user group only This way the reports will not be visible to other programs and users This is beneficial because the reports are kept internal to the program and because the visible list of reports of other users are kept shorter and more relevant 71 Dashboards Setting up the dashboard Chapter 9 Dashboards Dashboards are intended to provide quick access to different analytical objects maps charts reports tables etc to an individual user Dashboards can also be shared with user groups For instance a user or administrator could create a dashboard called Malaria which might contain all relevant information on malaria This dashboard could then be shared with the user group called Malaria control which might consist of all users of the malaria control programme All users within this group would then be able to view the same dashboard 9 1 Setting up the dashboard The dashboard can contain any number of objects charts maps reports tables resources etc These can be freely arranged on the dashboard as you wish Dashboard items can be located and added by searching for favourites resources users or messages in the available search box and clicking on the Add button DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone amp John Traore Write feedback 10 unread messages Share interpretation Add Manage Share lt gt Antenatal Care Delivery Disease Surveillance Immuniza
192. cilities and decides the circle radius for points with the lowest and highest value Thematic layer 1 4 menu have a Filter option in addition to the boundary layer menu options It lets you apply value filters to the organisation units on the map The filter is removed when you close the filter window 17 3 Tools This section describes the available GIS tools 119 Using GIS Favorite maps 17 3 1 Favorite maps _ Manage favorites x i amp Google Streets 100 lt gt a a S Google Hybrid Add new Boundary layer Bow i Thematic 1 layer l z oog F Thematic 2 layer DRH ANC new clients 2012 80 8 is a eee DRH Live births 2012 ARCET i es eee DVI Coverages yearly 80 68 E faund Prev Next A 104 Click the Favorites button on the toolbar to open the Manage favorites window To add a new favorite click the Add new button A new window opens Enter a name and click the Create button You will find your new favorite in the list All favorites have four action buttons on the right hand side Grey Edit favorite name Green Save current map to this favorite overwrite Yellow Add this favorite to dashboard Red Delete this favorite You can search for favorites in the textfield above the favorites The list will be filtered on every character that is entered Click the next and prev buttons in the bottom right corner to navigate between pages 17 3 2 Create predefined legend sets Click the Le
193. cility for a particular service Aggregate district data would result from the aggregate totals of all facilities contained with a particular district An application programming interface is a specification of how different software components should interact with each other The DHIS2 API or WebAPI can be used to interface DHIS2 with other software to build reports or custom data entry forms Refers to a two month period such as January 1st to February 28th Categories are groups of category options The are used in combinations to disaggregate data elements Categories are typically a single type of concept such as Age or Gender Category combinations are used to disaggreate data elements As an example the data element Number of confirmed cases of malaria could be disaggregated subdivided into to categories Age and Gender In turn each of these categories would consist of several category options such as Male and Female for the gender category Category combinations may consist of one or several categories Category combination options are dynamically composed of all of the different combinations of category options which compose a category combination AS an example two categories Gender and Age might have options such as Male Female and lt 5 years gt 5 years The category combination options would then consist of Male lt 5 years Male gt 5 years Female lt 5 years Female gt 5 years
194. click on it and select Attribute Group option To create a new attribute group click the Add button into Tracked entity attribute group Management window to go to Create new tracked entity attribute group window click the Add new button Fill in the Name and Description fields and then select attributes that should belong to the group from the left panel Click the Move selected items button to add the selected attributes to the attribute group Click the Remove selected items button to remove attributes from the group that have been selected in the right panel Finally click the Add button to save changes or the Cancel button to discard any changes The created attribute members will be displayed by the attribute groups into entity registration form To sort order of attribute groups for displaying in entity registration form click Move up and Move down button next to Selected attributes section 29 2 1 3 Relationship type Relationship type section provides a mechanism for defining relationship types and link entities through these relationship types by creating specific relationships To access the relationship type maintenance module from Apps menu go to Programs Attributes option and click on it and select Relationship Type option To define a new relationship type click Add new button into Relationship Type Management window to go to Create new relationship type window 29 2 1 4 Tracked entity This function supports t
195. connectivity to be available only part of the time for the system to work properly such as offline data entry and the MyDatamart tool presented in a separate chapter in this guide which cater to information flow in situations when Internet connectivity may be challenging 1 4 3 3 Hybrid deployment From the discussion so far one realizes that the online deployment style is favourable over the offline style but requires decent Internet connectivity where it will be used It is important to notice that the mentioned styles can co exist in a common deployment It is perfectly feasible to have online as well as offline deployments within a single country The general rule would be that districts and facilities should access the system online over the Internet where sufficient Internet connectivity exist and offline systems should be deployed to districts where this is not the case What is DHIS 2 Deployment strategies online vs offline Defining decent Internet connectivity precisely is hard but as a rule of thumb the download speed should be minimum 10 Kbyte second and accessibility should be minimum 70 of the time In this regard mobile Internet modems which can be connected to a computer or laptop and access the mobile network is an extremely capable and feasible solution Mobile Internet coverage is increasing rapidly all over the world often provide excellent connectivity at low prices and is a great alternative to local networks and poorl
196. contain operators which include multiply divide plus and minus The expression will be evaluated per event then aggregated according to its aggregation type Program Indicators Filter Expression The expression defines how the indicator is calculated T Filte Clear Incident Date Date of enrollment Current date Value count Zero or positive value count Expression Tip use abs x sin x cos x tan x In x log x sqrt x mod x y oizp x Zing x goDWUB999qk QWGHKLmBIIE go0DWUB999qk bL64HiqQkSX goDWUB999qk VI9cmohwziZ goDWUB999qk NPin4NxZrGE I Expression description DHS 2010 CHILDREN DHS 2010 CHILDREN Antibiotics pour la diarrh e DHS 2010 CHILDREN DHS 2010 CHILDREN ORS diarrhea DHS 2010 CHILDREN DHS 2010 CHILDREN ORT continued feeding for children with diarrhoea DHS 2010 CHILDREN DHS 2010 CHILDREN Zinc pour la diarrh e An example expression that includes both attributes data elements and constants looks like this A GPkGfbmArby mCXR7u4kNBW NFkjSNiQ9PH C bCqv PR02Im An example expression which uses the custom aggregation type and hence can use inline aggregation types looks like this sum mCXR7u4kNBW KOA4BauXJD1 mCXR7uU4kNBW NFkjJSNiQ9PH sum mCXR7u4kNBW NFkjJSNiQ9PH 100 Notice how the sum aggregation operator is used inside the expression itself 30 3 3 Filter The filter is applied to events and filters the data source used for the ca
197. could not be found in the existing database Its important to note that even if a reference could not be found the object will still be imported but you might have to fix this directly in DHIS2 later if the reference should have pointed to something else 175 Import and export Importing CSV meta data 21 1 1 2 Matching identifiers in DXF2 The DXF2 format currently support matching for two identifiers the internal DHIS2 identifier known as a UID and also using an external identifier called called a code When the importer is trying to search for references like the one above it will first go to the UID field and then to the code field This allows you to import from legacy systems without having a UID for every meta data object l e if you are importing facility data from a legacy system you can leave out the ID field completely DHIS 2 will fill this in for you and the put the legacy systems own identifiers in the code field this identifier is required to be unique This not only works for organisation units but for all kinds of meta data allowing for easy import from other systems 21 1 2 Importing CSV meta data To import CV meta data go to import export module and select CSV Meta Data Import form the left side menu You must select the object type which your CSV file contains You can only upload one type of objects at the time Upload your file and click update For the CSV format please visit the Web API chapter gt CSV
198. count will have If you leave the username empty then the user may choose their own username when they respond to the invitation as long as it is not taken already for another user After you finish adding the new user two emails will be sent to the address you provided One contains a unique web link by which the user can return to the system and activate their account by entering the rest of their user information The other email contains a unique code that they must enter into the system in order to complete the registration after following the link in the first email The user must finish setting up the account within three months or the invitation becomes invalid District Health Information Software 2 sss Apps Profile Create new user Action Email invitation to create account Details E mail Username 3 Select the Interface language for the user You may choose a language into which fixed elements of the DHIS2 user interface have been translated 4 Select the Database language for the user You may choose a language into which implementation supplied items have been translated in the database for example data element names organisation unit level names etc 5 Users must be assigned to at least one data capture and maintenance organisation unit Users will have access to all children of the organisation units which have been assigned to them For instance if a user has been assigned to a district which has severa
199. creen that provides information about the data elements included in the validation rules and their corresponding data values This information can be used in order to fix incorrect data The validation violations can be exported to a PDF document by clicking on the Download as PDF button and to a Microsoft Excel workbook by clicking on the Download as Excel button Run validation Validation alerts Baoma Start date 2015 09 01 Download as PDF Download as Excel End date 2015 09 30 Download as CSV Done 25 values found Perlod Organisation unit Importance Validation Rule Baoma Station CHP September 2015 Medium Baoma Station CHP September 2015 Medium ANC 3 canno t be higher than ANC 2 Blamawo MCHP September 2015 Medium Blamawo MCHP September 2015 Medium Slept under LLIN at measles fixed lt 1y cannot be higher than measles doses Injectable Antibiotics balance ordered quantity is lower than the average cons Injectable Antibiotics balance ordered quantity is lower than the average cons umption for last 10 months Please increase your order to an umption for last 10 months Please increase your order to an given fixed lt 1y Blamawo MCHP September Blamawo MCHP September Blamawo MCHP September Faabu CHP September Gerehun CHC September Golu MCHP September 2015 Medium 2015 Medium 2015 Medium 2015 Medium 2015 Medium 2015 Medium Exclusive breastfeeding at time of penta 3 fix
200. cribed in the previous section DHIS 2 also Support relative periods for use in the analysis modules 23 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Aggregation of periods When creating analytical resources within DHIS 2 it is possible to make use of the relative periods functionality The simplest scenario is when you want to design a monthly report that can be reused every month without having to make changes to the report template to accommodate for the changes in period The relative period called Last month allows for this and the user can at the time of report generation through a report parameter select the month to use in the report A slightly more advanced use case is when you want to make a monthly summary report for immunisation and want to look at the data from the current reporting month together with a cumulative value for the year so far The relative period called This year provides such a cumulative value relative to the reporting month selecting when running the report Other relative periods are the last 3 6 or 12 months periods which are cumulative values calculated back from the selected reporting month If you want to create a report with data aggregated by quarters the ones that have passed so far in the year you can select Last four quarters Other relative periods are described under the reporting table section of the manual Table 3 5 Organisation Data Element Reporting So far this year Reporting Unit month month nam
201. crosstab dimensions as the columns will always be the disaggregations from the category combinations The other is the actual choice of data Only one category combination can be added per report and only data elements from the same category combo can be selected Subtotals and the total will also be included in the table e g a gender male female EPI age lt 1 gt 1 category combo would give the following columns male lt 1 male gt 1 Female lt 1 female gt 1 male female lt 1 gt 1 total Selecting data Available data elements Select category combination EPl Hepatitis B Immunization Measles Immunization Meningitis Immunization Oral Polio Virus Immunization Penta Immunization Pneumococcus Virus Immunization Add selected 3 Add all 3 Remove selected Remove all Selected data elements 134 Setting up report functionality Report table best practices Use the drop down menu to choose category combinations The data elements using this category combination will be listed Double click to add to the report or use the buttons 19 2 5 Report table best practices To make the report tables reusable over time and across orgunits they can have parameters Four types of parameters are allowed orgunit parent orgunit for listing of orgunits in one area grand parent orgunit and reporting month As a side note it can be mentioned that we are looking into expanding this to include reporting quarter
202. cs module provides an overview of the number of objects stored in the DHIS2 database 196 Data Administration Data Statistics Objec t type Data elements Data element groups Indicator types Indicators Indicator groups Data sets Organisation units Validation rules Periods Users Data values Users logged in Last hour Today Yesterday Last 7 days Last 30 days Data values Today Yesterday Last 7 days Last 30 days Data statistics Number 714 79 5 59 15 18 1332 36 57 19 3907860 Number 1 3 3 4 2 Number ao DO O amp The total number of each type of object is presented in a series of tables with summary Statistics of each object 197 Data Administration Lock exceptions 22 9 Lock exceptions Lock exceptions provide fine grained control over exemption from a locked data set After the expiry of the data set data entry will be denied by default unless an exception has been granted through the Lock exception interface To enable a lock exception select the desired organization units data sets and time period and press Add By granting a lock exception data entry will be enabled even after the expiry period of the data set has passed Create new lock exception Organisation Unit Selection Selectatlevel Federal Governn Un selectatlevel Unselectall Selectingroup AlDSRelief Un selectin group Selectchildren
203. ct data quality it generally does not make sense to have two indicators with the exact same definition Review the identified indicators and their formulas and delete or modify any indicator that appears to be the duplicate 22 2 9 Indicators without groups All data elements and indicators must be assigned to at least one group so these Indicators need to be allocated to their correct Data Element and Indicator Group From the main menu go to Data elements Indicators gt Indicator Groups and allocate each of the Orphaned indicators to its correct group 22 2 10 Invalid indicator numerators Violations of this rule may be caused by an incorrect reference to a deleted or modified data element Review the indicator and make corrections to the numerator definition 22 2 11 Invalid indicator denominators Violations of this rule may be caused by an incorrect reference to a deleted or modified data element Review the indicator and make corrections to the denominator definition 22 2 12 Indicators violating exclusive group sets Some indicators have been allocated to several indicator groups that are members of the same indicator group set All group sets in DHIS2 are defined as exclusive which means that an indicator can only be allocated to one indicator group within that group set Go to Maintenance gt Data elements and indicators gt Indicator groups to review each indicator identified in the integrity check Either remove the in
204. ct nature of the application this manual will not serve as a complete step by step guide of how to use the application in each and every circumstance but rather will seek to provide illustrations and examples of how DHIS2 can be implemented in a variety of situations through generalized examples Before implementing DHIS 2 in a new setting we highly recommend reading the DHIS 2 Implementation Guide a separate manual from this one alSo available at the main DHIS2 website 1 2 Key features and purpose of DHIS 2 The key features and purpose of DHIS 2 can be summarised as follows e Provide a comprehensive HIS solution based on data warehousing principles and a modular structure which can easily be customised to the different needs of the health systems and Supports the idea of an integrated HIS at all levels of the health hierarchy e Customisation and local adaptation through the user interface No programming required to Start using DHIS 2 in a new setting country region district etc e Provide data entry tools which can either be in the form of standard lists or tables or can be customised to replicate paper forms What is DHIS 2 Use of DHIS 2 in HIS data collection processing interpretation and analysis HOH Che Het Hoch F ara aalaiga alaare v A CA CA V CA CA 1 1 1 D a Yer fC A ara A ATA a a v T A A A v v v v A A Provide easy to use one click reports with charts and tables for selected in
205. d choose between including the selected organisation unit only or the selected organisation unit with all children in the analysis Fourth select the organisation unit Finally click validate DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Using Data Quality functionality Std Dev Outlier Analysis SES Apps AA Profile ae Validation Rule Validation Rule Validation Rule Group Data Analysis Validation Rule Analysis Std Dev Outlier Analysis Min Max Outlier Analysis Follow Up Analysis Validation results The analysis process will run for a while depending on the amount of data that is being analysed If there were no violations of the validation rules a message saying validation passed Run validation Select parameters Start date 2015 09 01 End date 2015 09 30 Validation Rule Group AIl validation rules Send alerts Select parent organisation unit E Sierra Leone El Bo Badjia Baoma Bargbe Bargbo Bumpe Ngao Gbo Jaiama Bongor Kakua Komboya Lugbu Niawa Lenga Selenga Tikonko Valunia Validate successfully is displayed If validation violations were found they will be presented in a list The organisation unit period left side description and value operator and right side value and description for each validation violation are displayed The show details icon can be clicked in order to get more information about a validation violation This will open a popup s
206. d analysis To assign indicators to groups simple press Maintenance gt Data elements and indicators gt Indicator groups See the section on Data element groups for detailed instructions of how to use this module 13 4 Indicator group sets Similar to data element group sets indicator group sets serve to create combined groups of similar indicators For instance you might have a group of indicators called Malaria and Leishmaniasis Both of these groups could be combined into a group set called Vector borne diseases Indicator groups sets are used during analysis of data to combine similar themes of indicators To access this module choose Maintenance gt Data elements and indicators gt Indicator group sets from the main menu and then press Add new The following dialogue will appear Create new indicator group This object will be created with public edit and view rights Details Name Available indicators Group members Filte Filter Clear ANC 1 Coverage ANC 1 3 Dropout Rate ANC 2 Coverage ANC 3 Coverage ANC gt 4 Coverage ANC IPT 1 Coverage ANC IPT 2 Coverage gt gt ANC LLITN coverage ANC TT2 coverage ANC visits per clinical professional BCG coverage lt 1 y BCG Stock PHU Births attended by skilled health personnel estimat Add Cancel Supply a name for the indicator group set and then move the desired members from the Available Indicator Groups to the Group members Click Add to save y
207. d to or If no approvel level exists at that level the next approval level linked to an organisation unit level below herself A user will be allowed to see data which has been approved up to the level immediately below her associated approval level The rationale behind this is that a user must be ablet to view the data that has been approved below so that she can eventually view and approve it herself Note that if the user has been granted the View unapproved data or the ALL authority she will be able to view data irrespective of the approval status Lets consider the following example There are four organisation unit levels with approval levels associated with level 2 and 4 User A at country level 1 gets associated with approval level 1 since the approval level exists at the same level as the organisation unit level User B gets associated with approval level 2 since there is no approval level directly linked to her organisation unit level and approval level 2 is the immediate level below User C gets associated with approval level 2 User D is below all approval levels which implies that she can see all data entered at or below her organisation unit level Country 1 S Approval level 1 User A Province 2 User B District 3 Approval level 2 lt User C Facility 4 User D Figure 20 3 Hiding of unapproved data Using this example lets consider some scenarios e Data is entered at facility level Only User D ca
208. d visit coverage by orgunit last year 000a ANC 1st to 3rd visit drop out rate by orgunit last year QeoesB ANC 4 visits by Facility Type last year 000a ANC 4 visits by Facility this year 000a ANC 4th visit coverage by orgunit last year BB88 Periods ANC ANC 1 coverage all chiefdoms this year Bees Organisation units 30 4 ANC ANC 1 coverage western chiefdoms this year ooa Commoditics ANC ANC 2 coverage this year gauge 0000 p Diegos ANC ANC 3 coverage this year gauge 0000 24 ANC ANC LLITN coverage this year gauge 000o Donor ANC ANC visits by fixed outreach this year BBB EP nutrition age Prana A Bean e sS an Facility Ownership 18 41 ANC Coverages with baseline target last 12 months 2 8 6 Facility Type ANC Fixed vs Outreach last year Q2eoe88 Funding Agency ANC IPT 1 and 2 trends 8868 Gender 12 ANC Key Coverages 68868 LLITN HIV age ANC LLITN Coverage 000a ANC LLITN coverage last month Implementing Partner 2 g 8 G 6 ANC LLITN districts comparison 0008 Location Fixed Outreach e x Location Rural Urban Main data element groups 2 j i E Morbidity Age RS r lt CY s amp a lt S u N os S X 48 ee amp bi K oe SF S Morbidity Mortality E gt Q z 4s x g g K oe PMTCT 16 14 Sharing interpretations For certain analysis related resources in DHIS like pivot tables charts and maps one can Share a data interpretation An interpretation is simply a link to the relevant resource together with a
209. data set is collected monthly A data set s period type collection frequency is defined in data set maintenance First select the period type Monthly Quarterly Yearly etc in the drop down next to Prev and Next buttons and then select one of the available periods from the dropdown list below Use Prev and Next to jump one year back or forward Use data for selected unit only Use this option if you want a report for an orgunit that has children but only want the data collected directly for this unit and not the data collected by its children If you want a typical aggregated report for an orgunit you do not want to tick this option Reporting Organisation unit Here you select the orgunit you want the report for This can be at any level in the hierarchy as the data will be aggregated up to this level automatically if you do not tick the option above When you are done filling in the report criteria you click on Generate The report will appear as HTML in a printer friendly format Use the print and save as functions in the browser to print or save as HTML the report You can also export the data set report in Excel and PDF formats 96 Using reporting functionality Using resources 14 4 Using resources The resource tool allows you to upload both files from your local computer to the DHIS server and to add links to other resources on the Internet through URLs If you want to share a direct link to the DHIS2 resources you can right
210. datasets which have data elements defined into Aggregate Query Builder formulas Based on the period types of datasets the system runs formulas at the end of end date of current period E g if today is on 1A M in 2013 02 01 the system gets a monthly dataset and other period type datasets with aggregate formulas then system will only run aggregate formulas of the monthly dataset with period as Jan 2013 Select an option in Task strategy to set way to get period list for aggregating There four options 1 Last month Get period list by period types of data sets from last month to current date E g for daily datasets if current date is 2013 03 09 period list is get from 2013 02 09 to 2013 03 09 For month datasets periods list is Feb 2013 and Mar 2013 2 Last 3 month Get periods by from last 3 month to current date 3 Last 6 month Get periods by from last 6 month to current date 4 Last 12 month Get periods by from last 12 month to current date Click Start button to enable the scheduled job to run at mid night or can be run immediately by pressing Execute button 29 2 2 Individual records Each of the options for the services will be described in the following section Find Add Instance Register edit and search private information of entities Support entity dashboard for managing relationships program enrollment entering case entry form Visit Schedule Visit Schedule provides for the user at a facility or in an ar
211. date for sending the message by scheduled Just enter a number for this field in the case Send base on with value as Days schedule Recipients Specify the kind of persons who will receive the message There are 5 options include 1 Tracked entity instance SMS only 2 Attribute users 3 Organisation unit phone number SMS only 4 All users in organisation unit 5 User group User group Select one user group if Recipients field is selected as User group Message type This is the types of message There are 3 options include 1 Direct SMS This kind of SMS message is linked to the program of an entity after sending to recipients 2 Message 3 Both 289 Tracker Programs Attributes e Parameters Provide parameters which are used for generating a message for each entity The parameters include entity name program name incident date days since incident date enrollment date days since enrollment date organisation unit name Double click on an option to insert it into template message field below e Message Content of template message E g Dear patient name please come to your appointment at due date Note A custom data entry form can have data elements which belong to other stages of the program This form can be reused for the stages of program When the form is opened to enter data the data values which belong to other events will be displayed if any but user can not modify them Just only data
212. dation is done and there were one or more violations Event Data set ID dhis2 ou event orgUnithayec ed when one or more organisation units are selected in the org unit web tree Event Org unit IDs Org unit names Sub org unit IDs To register for such an event LECIE E ype Lex javascrdor dhs Ay iE leon dhwsA7de seven tOrmReady 4 sf Unceironkt evenu 9ds 3 4 conso ken kon a Ene TOE a edna si Glet et eC e se aor ales Pe chis2z uctil onl chisz2 e evyent cdacavalueSaved rtunetcionl event s vy 4 console log Data value dv value pee Cre 7s sutil gni console log oe dhis2 de event completed Form was completed for org unit 4 SCO eS was saved with data element CuUnNECTLON 1 r GIN Cr gt yin len E ol er ns GNC O NE ee ver 59 Data sets and data entry forms Data set assignment editor Be careful to only use namespaced events like the ones in the example above and not general ones like click as the dhis2 util on method will unregister the event first If your function only applies to certain data sets you can use the supplied data set identifier and shortcut your function for unwanted data sets like this cnis2 0e 0n ehis2 0e 6vent valicdarcionsgucceess rcunertcLionl event 0S 1 fits a EAE a S e ET A ERE crab Ay oC sity ES alle sy nerin alse Ome outers hogs a E Clit ce Clown a Niele ee e UG Gers cdr Ulllila
213. definition Only SQL SELECT statements are allowed and certain sensitive tables i e user information are not accessible Press Save to store the SQL view definition 22 6 2 SQL View management In order to utilize the SQL views simply press the Execute query button O from the SQL View management page Once the process is completed you will be informed that a table has been created The name of the table will be provided and is composed from the Description attribute provided in the SQL view definition Once the view has been materialized click on the View button F 22 Duplicate data elimination This function is useful when data has been entered mistakenly for two data elements which represents the same phenomena 195 Data Administration Data statistics Start by selecting the data element to eliminate from the list and click confirm Then select the data element to keep and click confirm again Finally verify the selection and click merge In the situation where data exists for the data element to eliminate and not for the one to keep the data will be moved to the one to keep When data exists for both data elements the data which was updated last will be used When data exists only for the one to keep no action will be taken The data element to eliminate will eventually be deleted except when it is a multidimensional data element and has other data registered 22 8 Data statistics The data statisti
214. dget While the enrollment widget displays both active and historical enrollment for the selected program active programs widget displayes all other programs that the selected TEI has active enrollments Relationship this helps to relate the selected TEI the one whose dashboard is shown to another TEI Adding a relative is possible by either searching from existing or registering 2 7 Using Tracker Capture Basic reports a new one If a program is selected while registering a new one the new one will be automatically enrolled to the selected program Another interesting feature in the relationship widget is attribute inheritance For example take Mother Child relationship and assume there are two programs Antenatal care for the mother and Immunization for the child If among others first name last name and address attributes are required for both programs it is possible to configure last name and address attributes as inheritable Then during child registration there is no need to refill these inheritable attributes they can be automatically populated based on the mother s value If for some reason a different value is required for the child it is possible to override 28 4 Basic reports Tracker capture app also provides some basic reports These reports are accessible by clicking on the Reports link on the left hand side Below is a description for some of the reports Registration and Data Entry Reports Tracker
215. dicator from all groups except the one that it should be allocated to or see if one of the groups should be placed in a different group set 22 2 13 Duplicate periods If periods have been imported from external applications it may be possible that some periods will be duplicated If you have any periods which appear to be duplicated here you will need to resolve these directly in the DHIS2 database All data which has been assigned to the duplicated period should be moved to the correct period and the duplicate period should be removed 22 2 14 Organisation units with cyclic references Organisation units cannot be both parent and children of each other directly nor indirectly If this situation occurs you will need to resolve the cyclic reference directly in the DHIS2 datrabase in the organisationunit table by reassigning the parentid field of the organisation units 22 2 15 Orphaned organisation units All organisation units must exist within the organisation unit hierarchy Go to Organisation units gt Hierarchy Operations and move the offending organisation unit into the proper position in the hierarchy 191 Data Administration Organisation units without groups 22 2 16 Organisation units without groups All organisation units must be allocated to at least one group The problem might either be that you have not defined any compulsory OrgUnit Group Set at all or that there are violations of the compulsory rule for som
216. dicators or Summary reports using the design of the data collection tools Integration with popular external report design tools like iReport allows super users to flexibly add more custom reports accessible to all users Flexible and dynamic on the fly data analysis in the Data Visualizer and the GIS modules A user specific dashboard for quick access to the relevant monitoring and evaluation tools including indicator charts and links to favourite reports maps and other key resources in the system Easy to use user interfaces for metadata management e g for adding editing datasets or health facilities No programming needed to set up the system in a new setting Functionality to design and modify calculated indicator formulas User management module for passwords security and fine grained access control user roles Messages can be sent to system users for feedback and notifications Messages can also be delivered to email and SMS Users can share and discuss their data in charts and reports using Interpretations enabling an active information driven user community Functionalities of export import of data and metadata supporting synchronisation of offline installations as well as interoperability with other applications Integration with other software systems using the DHIS 2 Web API and the Integration Engine Further modules can be developed and integrated as per user needs either as part of the DHIS 2 portal user interf
217. ding on March 31st of the calendar next year 9 Financial July Financial year period beginning on July 1st and ending on June 31st of the calendar next year LOFinancial Oct Financial year period beginning on October 1st and ending on September 31st of the calendar next year 11Six monthly April Six month periods beginning on April 1st with a duration of six calendar months As a general rule all organisation units should collect the same data using the same frequency or periodicity A data entry form therefore is associated with a single period type to make sure data is always collected according to the correct and same periodicity across the country It is possible however to collect the same data elements using different period types by assigning the same data elements to multiple data sets with different period types however then it becomes crucial to make sure no organisation unit is collecting data using both data sets period types as that would create overlap and duplication of data values If configured correctly the aggregation service in DHIS2 will aggregate the data together e g the monthly data from one part of the country with quarterly data from another part of the country into a national quarterly report For simplicity and to avoid data duplication it is advised to use the Same period type for all organisation units for the same data elements when possible 3 4 2 Relative periods In addition to the fixed period types des
218. displaying data in time series to see their min and max levels As a first step DHIS 2 serves as a data collection recording and compilation tool and all data be it in numbers or text form can be entered into it Data entry can be done in lists of data elements or in customised user defined forms which can be developed to mimic paper based forms in order to ease the process of data entry As a next step DHIS 2 can be used to increase data quality First at the point of data entry a check can be made to See if data falls within acceptable range levels of minimum and maximum values for any particular data element Such checking for example can help to identify typing errors at the time of data entry Further user can define various validation rules and DHIS 2 can run the data through the validation rules to identify violations These types of checks help to ensure that data entered into the system is of good quality from the start and can be improved by the people who are most familiar with it When data has been entered and verified DHIS 2 can help to make different kinds of reports The first kind are the routine reports that can be predefined so that all those reports that need to be routine generated can be done on a click of a button Further DHIS 2 can help in the generation of analytical reports through comparisons of for example indicators across facilities or over time Graphs maps reports and health profiles are among the outpu
219. ditor FcK Editor for the form designer and you can either design the form in the UI or paste in your HTML directly using the Source window in the editor In the custom form you can insert static text or data fields linked to data elements category in any position on the form and you have complete freedom to design the layout of the form Once a custom form has been added to a dataset it will be available in data entry and used automatically You can switch back to default and section if exists forms in the top right corner of the data entry screen 2 5 4 Validation rules Once you have set up the data entry part of the system and started to collect data then there is time to define data quality checks that help to improve the quality of the data being collected You can add as many validation rules as you like and these are composed of left and right side expressions that again are composed of data elements with an operator between the two sides Typical rules are comparing subtotals to totals of something E g if you have two data elements HIV tests taken and HIV test result positive then you know that in the same form for the same period and organisational unit the total number of tests must always be equal or higher than the number of positive tests These rules should be absolute rules meaning that they are mathematically correct and not just assumptions or most of the time correct The rules can be run in data entry after filling e
220. dule M_dhis web maintenance program See Tracker Capture module M_dhis web tracker capture See User Maintenance M _ dhis web maintenance module user See Validation Analysis M_dhis web validationrule module local in See Validation Rule module M_dhis web validationrule Send message F SEND MESSAGE Send SMS F MOBILE SENDSMS Set mobile settings F MOBILE SETTINGS Single Event Without Registration Data Entry F ANONYMOUS DATA ENTRY Single Event With Registration Data Entry F SINGLE EVENT DATA ENTRY Sql View External Access F SQLVIEW_EXTERNAL Sql View Management F SQLVIEW_MANAGEMENT Tracked Entity Aggregation F TRACKED ENTITY AGGREGATION Tracked Entity Form F TRACKED ENTITY FORM MANAGEMENT Management Tracked Entity Instance F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE DASHBOARD Dashboard Tracked Entity Instance F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE MANAGEMENT Management Tracked Entity Relationship Management F RELATIONSHIP_MANAGEMENT Update Facility F FRED UPDATE Update Organisation Unit Level F ORGANISATIONUNITLEVEL_ UPDATE Update Program Rule F PROGRAM RULE UPDATE Update Relationship Type F RELATIONSHIPTYPE_UPDATE Update Tracked Entities F TRACKED ENTITY UPDATE Update Tracked Entity Attribute F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTE EDIT Upload Excel Template F EXCEL TEMPLATE MAMAGE MENT UPLOAD 333 Us
221. e Create new report Detalls Name Demo Report AVallable report tables InPatients Fa Add he Y Remove Selected rept Add bles If selecting no report table the user is responsible for providing the data source table The report is now available as a Standard Report in DHIS 2 Standard Report Filter by name e ae A ae aa Add new Filter Clear Name a Operations Demo Report gt o a rm 162 Setting up report functionality Designing SQL based standard reports 19 4 2 11 Some final guidelines e Use the same version of iReport and DHIS 2 s version of Jasper reports See the About page in DHIS 2 for the Jasper version in use e Use report tables with cross tab dimensions as your data source for your report designs This will make it a lot easier to design reports where you need to put specific indicators periods or orgunits on columns e Learn from others there are many DHIS 2 report designs for Jasper on launchpad see http bazaar launchpad net DHIS 2 devs core DHIS 2 trunk files nead resources 19 4 3 Designing SQL based standard reports A standard report might be based on SQL queries This is useful when you need to access multiple tables in the DHIS database and do custom selects and joins This step is optional but handy when you need to debug your reports and when you have direct access to the database you want to use Click on the report datasources button
222. e Gerehun CHC Measles doses 15 167 Oct 09 given Tugbebu CHP Measles doses 17 155 Oct 09 given 3 4 3 Aggregation of periods While data needs to be collected on a given frequency to standardise data collection and management this does not put limitations on the period types that can be used in data analysis and reports Just like data gets aggregated up the organisational hierarchy data is also aggregated according to a period hierarchy so you can create quarterly and annual reports based on data that is being collected on a Monthly basis The defined period type for a data entry form data set defines the lowest level of period detail possible in a report 3 4 3 1 Sum and average aggregation along the period dimension When aggregating data on the period dimension there are two options for how the calculation is done namely sum or averge This otion is specified on a per data element in DHIS 2 through the use of the aggregation operator attribute in the Add Edit Data Elements dialog Most of the data collected on a routinely basis should be aggregated by summing up the months or weeks for instance to create a quarterly report on Measles immunisation one would sum up the three monthly values for Measles doses given Other types of data that are more permanently valid over time like Number of staff in the PHU or an annual population estimate of Population under 1 year need to be aggregated differently Th
223. e 190 22 2 8 Indicators with identical formulas s ssesssesssesrrssrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrsrrrsrrrere 191 22 2 9 Indicators WItNOUCGroOUPS i nciiiiviainhd rei I E E aE 191 22210 IVAN IMGICALOF numerator ncara a A A AA 191 22 2 11 Invalid indicator denominators sssssssesrresrrrrrresrrerrrrrrrerrrerrrrrrrerrrerre 191 22 2 12 Indicators violating exclusive group Sets sssssseessrrsrrrerrrsrrrrrrrerresrne 191 2220032 DUPICATC PENOS sonsir a A vec conneeiauasreaeeialals 191 22 2 14 Organisation units with cyclic references sssssssssssrresrrerrrsrrreerrerrrne 191 22 2 15 Orphaned organisation units sesssssrsssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrsrrnsrrnerrrerrrrrrrerre 191 22 2 16 Organisation units without groups ssssssssrssrresrrerrrrrrrerrrerrrnrrrserrerrnne 192 22 2 17 Organisation units violating compulsory group Sets ssssssserererrrrrsn 192 22 2 18 Organisation units violating exclusive group sets s sssessresrresrresrrne 192 22 2 19 Organisation unit groups without group Sets ssssssrsseresrererrrerresrene 192 2 22 vii DHIS 2 User Manual Contents 22 2 20 Validation rules without GrOUDPS cccccccceceeeeeec eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeaeananees 192 22 2 21 Invalid validation rule left side expressions ccccecececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneaees 192 22 2 22 Invalid validation rule right side expressions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 22o Manteno LOG ae
224. e OrgUnits NOTE If you have defined no compulsory OrgUnit Group Sets then you must first define them by going to Organisation units gt Organisation unit group sets and define at least one compulsory Group Set the group set Type are nearly universally relevant If you have the relevant group sets go to Maintenance gt OrgUnit Groups to review each OrgUnit identified and add the relevant Group allocation 22 2 17 Organisation units violating compulsory group sets These organisation units have not been assigned to the any organisation unit group within one of the compulsory organisation unit group sets When a group set is defined as compulsory it means that an organisation unit must be allocated to at least one organisation unit group within that group set For instance all organisation units must belong to one of the groups in the Type group set It might belong to the Hospital or the Clinic or any other type group but it must belong to exactly one of them Go to Organisation units gt Organisation unit groups to review each organisation unit identified in the integrity check Allocate all organisation units to exactly one compulsory group 22 2 18 Organisation units violating exclusive group sets Some organisation units have been allocated to several organisation unit groups that are members of the same organisation unit group set All group sets in DHIS are defined as exclusive which means that an organisation unit
225. e SQL query using parameters which will create a report displaying raw data values at the fourth level in the org unit hierarchy is select district name as district chiefdom name as chiefdom ou name as facility bcg value as bcg yellowfever value as yellowfever measles value as measles TEOM Organi SoTi ONIE O IEEE FOULO JOL S eoruni oe EEr ONOS E EE a E e eS O EO oa e E n e eae extheeuc E E e E E E S E EE OMe OUS e d evo lE ra ee One Cram nelle ONU e ed left outer join organisationunit chiefdom on ous idlevel3 chiefdom organisationunitid left outer join select sourceid sum cast value as double precision as value from datavalue where dataelementid 359706 and periodid SP periods GisOUlpw by tSOUrCenG Tas eC Om OCC SOU eeu OU One aims ae onn e 163 Setting up report functionality Designing HTML based standard reports left outer join select sourceid sum cast value as double precision as value from datavalue where dataelementid 35 and periodid SP periods group by sourceid as yellowfever on yellowfever sourceid ou organisationunitid where ous level 4 and OUuswor Organ e ae T ONUN le eco unin oP Ono ein satires order by district name chiefdom name ou name Notice how all parameters are used in the query along with SQL joins of resource tables in the DHIS database Finally back in the add new report screen we click on Use JDBC data source This enables you to select any relative period and
226. e a data dimension on rows the pivot table will display one row per dimension item in a similar fashion The dimensions you select as filters will not be included in the pivot table but will aggregate and filter the table data based on the selected filter items The work flow for creating a simple pivot table is 1 Select dimension items in the left menu for instance a few data elements or indicators 2 Click Layout on the top menu and arrange the data dimensions as columns rows and filters You can leave the selection as it is if desired 3 Click Update Based on the demo database a pivot table approximately as below will be displayed Notice how indicators are listed on columns and periods as rows Data lt lt lt Update Layoute Options Favorites Download Share Data elements R Periods Data BCG doses given Fully Immunized child Measles doses given OPV3 doses given Penta3 doses given Total Immunization Y Totals v October 2014 16 691 14065 15 763 14006 14 106 74631 Mak GC pia lt Snot November 2014 17 400 14 812 16 679 15 866 16034 80791 PVO doses given BCG doses given December 2014 13 634 11743 11798 10 292 10812 58279 OPV1 doses given Fully Immunized child January 2015 20 031 14579 16 379 14446 14646 80 081 OPV2 doses given Measles doses given February 2015 20 483 15732 18 208 15992 16 245 86 660 radars aie en March 2015 19 396 16 200 17 563 15 304 15600 84063 Penta2 doses given Penta3 do
227. e column header we can instead move it to the Group header This will make the heading show up above each individual table Furthermore we can add a heading to each table with the name of the indicator Move the column headers from the Column header band to the Indicator group header band Organisation unit Jan Feb detar daril EMay Bune uly Aue Sept Oct d Nov d Dec u to a ee w t Ti iT iay gt Bic i E T E Ta cs x Fi Pray FifulyF Next add a text field to the Indicator group heading band and edit it s expression to display the indicator name m Fifield sien Jan Feb Mar April May June July Aug Sept Oct Now Dec F F F F F SFimay F SFijulyk F F F F F Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport ae Expression editor F indicatorname SS Ln 1 Col 17 TE Parameters indicatorid Field Integer ym equals Object a B Fields organisationunitid Field Integer toString String f amp Variables IDG a ERA LTE Hek oe hashCode int S organisationunitname Field String compareTol Strii C User Defined Expressions reporting month_name Field String Recent Expressions _param_organisationunit_name Field Strir E Expression Wizards corganisation_unit_is_ parent Field String january Field Double february Field Double E me er Fial ne z om compareTo Obj indexOf int int indexOf String indexOf String indexOfi int int siaa n a daakla l
228. e delete this chart and drag a new chart element into the report from the Palette panel 155 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport i a ee PF Briard tek a Hyperlink bP Copy ob Cut ob Xx Paste Delete Copy format Paste format Transform to P Seven Eit Group selected element s Ungroup selected element s Dn BB rinn Ta Erant w eaea i SansSerif mei 12 ds AA b fi darn SUL oS el ld Break Chart E Crosstab lt Ellipse Frame Image Test line chart WM Barcode Generic Element List 4 Spider Chart re porting_month_named F param_organisationunit_name Y Table Line LI Rectangle Round Rectangle bel Static Text Subreport Text Field l Y Tools J Properties Ik y Properties Left 265 Tarn AT As soon as we drag the Chart element into the report a window will appear We choose the Line chart as shown below uat Lute ra nea TS J T L al Laisi J Ci t ct co u Cancel A A chart wizard will appear Click next in the first step then Finish in the next we will add the data later 156 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport aoe Category Chart Wizard Steps Dataset 1 Dataset a ee Category dataset chart 3 Categories and Values This chart uses a Category dataset which can handle different series of values To fill this chart you can use the main dat
229. e fields 2 Expression evaluate the source fields Family history of hypertension historichypertension historichypertension Systolic blood pressure systolicfirststage Age at marriage agemarried _Data element A elementafirststage _Data element B elementbfirststage ZJ gt gt lt lt l Add source field amp amp l 3 Actions that is executed when expression is true Hide field Systolic blood pressure was blanked as there is Systolic blood pressure Hide field Diastolic pressure was blanked as there is no his Diastolic blood pressure 7 Add more action Update Cancel 31 4 Adding source fields 314 Source fields represent a uniform way to include data values and attribute values in expressions The source fields is defined as needed when creating expressions When creating your first expression you will typically have to define one or more source fields first as expressions usually contain at least one data element or attribute value to be meaningful The source fields is shared between all rules in your program and by creating several rules these will share the same library of source fields To add a source field click the Add source field button under the source fields list This will open the following dialog Ae SIINAI OGE FIs Eon ELARI CGSN T Add source field x Source type Data element newest event program Source program stage All Source Da
230. e group within a group set If an organisation unit is not present in any group or is present in multiple group 22 Data dimensions in DHIS2 The period dimension in DHIS2 members in a group set this can lead to unexpected results in the analysis modules DHIS 2 has integrity checks to identify organisation units which are not present in any organisation unit group set member or which is present in multiple groups 3 4 The period dimension in DHIS2 The period dimension becomes an important factor when analysing data over time e g when looking at cumulative data when creating quarterly or annual aggregated reports or when doing analysis that combines data with different characteristics like monthly routine data annual census population data or six monthly staff data 3 4 1 Period Types In DHIS 2 periods are organised according to a set of fixed period types described below The following list is for the default ISO 8601 calendar type 1 Daily 2 Weekly These are defined as ISO weeks beginning on Monday and and ending on Sunday Note that other week definitions are not currently supported Monthly Refers to standard calendar months BiMonthly Two month periods beginning in January Quarterly Standard ISO quarters beginning in January SixMonthly Six month periods beginning in January Yearly This refers to a calendar year CON ODO U A W Financial April Financial year period beginning on April 1st and en
231. e issues with certain browsers due to the length of the URL when many dimension members are selected A special All checkbox is available for dynamic dimensions which allows you to include all available dimensions implicitly in your pivot table without specifying each and every dimension member 15 3 Arranging the table layout After selecting data dimensions it is time to arrange your pivot table Click Layout in the top menu to open the layout screen In this screen you can position your data dimensions as table columns rows or filters by clicking and dragging the dimensions from the dimensions list to the respective column row and filter lists You can set any number of dimensions in any of the lists For instance you can click on Organisation units and drag it to the row list in order to position the organisation unit dimension as table rows Note that indicators data elements and data set reporting rates are part of the common Data dimension and will be displayed together in the pivot table For instance after selecting indicators and data elements in the left menu you can drag Organisation Unit from the available dimensions list to the row dimension list in order to arrange them as rows in the pivot table Table layout x Excluded dimensions Report filter Column dimensions Assigned categories Data Facility Ownership Funding Agency Gender Row dimensions Periods Organisation units Hide Update After you have set
232. e list to open the context menu and click Remove Click OK in the confirmation dialog to remove the indicator e gt Tracked Entity Program indicator management form Attribute DHS 2010 Attribute Group Add new Back Relationship type Tracked Entity CERS Name Description Tracked Entity Form Children lt 5 with diarrhea no water connection iaag hold f aioe ae Edit Programs Children lt 5 with diarrhea water connection in Translate Program HH owns a treated mosquito net wealth 1 2 pc Aggregation Query Builder Ww Remove HH owns a treated mosquito net wealth 3 5 m Show details Scheduling Literacy among women wealth 1 poorest 30 3 Indicator evaluation Program indicators are evaluated based on the assigned aggregation type expression and filter The order of evaluation is as follows 1 The filter will filter the events which become part of the evaluation aggregation routine 2 The expression will be evaluated per event 3 All evaluated expression values will be aggregated according to the aggregation type of the program indicator 307 Program Indicators Aggregation type 30 3 1 Aggregation type The aggregation type determines how the program indicator will be aggregated The following aggregation types are available e Average e Sum e Count e Standard Deviation e Variance e Min e Max e Custom 30 3 1 1 Custom aggregation type The custom aggregation ty
233. e process failed 2015 03 02 Ww System notification Resource table process failed 2015 02 12 Tom Wakiki Alerts as of 2014 08 19 09 49 High 12 Medium 0 Low 0 2014 08 19 Ww Data entry Chapter 10 Data entry 10 1 Data entry with DHIS 2 Data entry with DHIS 2 To open the data entry window hover over the Apps button A drop down menu will appear listing the apps provided by DHIS 2 Click on the Data Entry option The data entry module is where aggregated data is manually registered in the DHIS 2 database Data is registered for an organisation unit a period and a set of data elements data set ata time A data set often corresponds to a paper based data collection tool 10 1 1 Selecting the data entry form To start entering data the first step is to open the correct form by following these steps 1 Locate the orgunit you want to register data for in the tree menu to the left Expand and close branches by clicking on the symbols A quick way to find an orgunit is to use the search box just above the tree the green symbol but you need to write in the full name to get a match 2 Select a data set from the dropdown list of data sets available to your selected orgunit 3 Select a period to register data for The available periods are controlled by the period type of the data set reporting frequency You can jump a year back or forward by using the arrows above the period By now you should see the data entry form F
234. e rarely used and are very big you can consider setting it to yes to Speed up initial loading of the data entry module e Render sections as tabs For section based data forms this option will allow you to render each section as a tab horizontally above the data set This is useful for long datasets as it allows appropriate sections to be selected quickly without going through the entire form Your data set will then be ready to be used within the Data Entry App for the org units that you have assigned and for periods according to your selected frequency period type 6 1 1 Data set management 54 The data set management function allows you to create new data sets and manage existing ones The dialog can be reached by choosing The Data Set App from the App menu along with the Data set option A sample dialog is displayed below Data set management Filter by name Filter Clear Add new Name ART monthly summary Child Health Clinical Monitoring Checklist EPI Stock Facility Assessmen t Translate HIV Peadiatric monthly summary Design data entry form Inpatient Morbidity Mortality Summary Get PDF for Data Entry Life Saving Commodities Edit compulsory data elements MNCH Quarterly Report Remove Morbidity Show details Mortality lt 5 years Click on the name of the dataset you would like to alter and a context menu will be displayed You can sort the datasets in ascending descending alphabetical ord
235. e resource tables are generated all of them will first be dropped and then re created If any SQL views depend on these tables an integrity violation exception will be thrown and the process will be aborted The SQL views are dropped in reverse alphabetical order based on their names in DHIS 2 and created in regular alphabetical order This allows you to have dependencies between SQL views given that views only depend on other views which come earlier in the alphabetical order For instance ViewB can safely depend on ViewA Otherwise having views depending on other view result in an integrity violation error 22 6 1 Creating a new SQL view To create a new SQL view choose Maintenance gt SQL view and click the Add new button Add new Sql view Details Name Total malaria deaths Jv Get all aggregated data values from the database for the data element named CDE Deaths malaria Description confirmed total V SELECT FROM aggregateddatavalue where dataelementid SELECT DISTINCT dataelementid from dataelement where name CDE Deaths malaria confirmed total SQL Statement Save Cancel The Name attribute of the SQL view will be used to determine the name of the table that DHIS2 will create when the view is materialized by the user The Description attribute allows one to provide some descriptive text about what the SQL view actually does Finally the SQL statement should contain the SQL view
236. e that viloates the rule Together with the rules engine expression evaluation on the fly indicator expression evaluation is also supported If a program has indicators defined for it and the moment all values related to the indicator expression are filled the system will calcualte indicator and display the result A figure below demonstrates this Inpatient morbidity and mortality Section Incident date Indicators o Patient details Validation Warnings Data element Value Gender Comments Save and add new Save and go back Cancel Using Event Reports Event Reports overview Chapter 26 Using Event Reports 26 1 Event Reports overview The event reports app enables analysis of events in two fashions Pivot table style analysis with aggregated values of events Lists of events based on queries filters 26 1 1 Pivot tables with aggregated values By selecting Aggregated values from the top left menu you can use the event reports app to create pivot tables with aggregated numbers of events An event report is always based on a program You can do analysis based on a range of dimensions Each dimension can have a corresponding filter Dimensions can be selected from the left side menu and includes the following Data elements Start by selecting the program and program stage for the event report The data elements associated with the selected program will be listed under available items Each data element acts as
237. e the same user name and password as the web based application Make sure that the user is assigned to the correct organization unit In short if a user is able to enter data for activity reporting in DHIS2 web based application he she is able to download and enter data in mobile application 24 3 4 Detailed configuration of data sets and reporting forms Though the previous steps is all that should be needed for testing the solution more detail configuration of the datasets may be required and are described in the following sections 24 3 4 1 The mapping of data sets to form layout on the phone By default a data set is mapped to a single form on the phone If the data set is divided into sections each section is displayed as a separate page on the phone If a data element has more than one category option combo it will be displayed as a heading with the category combination options following Table 24 1 Form design element DHIS2 Metadata Metadata element Form title Data set Short Name if it exists otherwise Name Page tile Section Section name or form name if no sections 237 Mobile Mobile application setup Question Data element Alternative name if it exists otherwise Name Question name if combos Category option combo name 24 3 4 2 Sorting of forms By default data elements will be sorted according to the global sorting assigned in DHIS2 If sections are used their section specific so
238. e the users authorized to approve at one level from the users authorized to approve at levels below e Approve data at lower levels Allows you to approve data for all lower levels below the organisation units assigned to you This is useful if for example you are a district level user whose role includes approving the data for all the facilities within that district but not for the district itself If you are assigned this as well as the Approve data authority you may approve data at the level of the organisation unit s to which you have been assigned and for any level below e Accept data at lower levels Allows you to accept data for the level just below the organisation unit s assigned to you This authority can be given to the same users as approve data Or it may be given to different users if you want to have some users who accept data from the level below and a different set of users who approve data to go up to the next level above 20 3 Configuring data approval 168 When you add or edit a data set you specify whether or not data entered for that data set will be available for approval This is done with the Approve data option when adding or editing a data set You can configure the organisation unit levels at which you want to approve data in these data sets This is done in the Settings section under System Approval Settings Click the Add new button on this page and select the organisation unit level at which you want
239. e will be displayed to alert the user The third column specifies which data element that the hide field action should hide 31 6 2 Hide section action A hide field action is defined by selecting Hide section in the first column of the action row Hide section The fields in section C was blanked because the value of A i C and the rest The second column is optional and it allows defining a custom message to the end user in case the rule hides a section that contains a field that again has a value If a hide section action hides a section with one or more fields that contains a value these fields will always be removed If no message Is defined a standard message will be displayed to alert the user The third column specifies which section that the hide section action should hide 31 6 3 Show warning action A show warning action is defined by selecting show warning in the first column of the action row A show warning action is used to give the user a warning about the data being entered but at the same time allowing the user to save and continue Warnings can be used to help the user avoid errors in the data entered while at the same time allowing the user to consciously disregard it and save a value that is outside preset expectations Show waming The clinically estimated due date is less than 250 days after LMP date WHOMCH Clinical estimate of due date The second column is mandatory and is used to define the message show
240. ea a list of upcoming visits to better plan for daily weekly activities Lost To Follow Up Support the work practices around tracking entities within a health program that have not Shown up for a scheduled visit stage e g that are lost to follow up Single Event With Registration The data to register is defined by a single event with registration program Program summary View the summary report to get an overview of the services provided for a program Program Statistics Program statistics on program performance e g drop out rates how many completed every month year counts percentages etc Program stage completeness Monitor the completeness of events and produce completeness reports for each program Manual Aggregation Generate routine data values from patient data by month or other intervals if desired and organisation unit 294 Tracker Individual records 29 2 2 1 Find Add instance The first step in the tracking is the registration of entity case in the application In the registration process the details which are related to the entityal information identification contract and location details amp health provider details are entered in the application In the registration itself entity is provided with the unique identification number This number will be unique and will not match with the identification number of any entity in the state jurisdiction The issue of identification number will be the respon
241. ear plus the preceding 2 weeks plus the following 2 weeks This makes a total of 17 past periods 2 immediate past periods plus 5 periods for each of the 3 preceding years Be aware that when you have many past periods like this evaluating the surveillance rule may take significant time and system resources e Enter a number of High outliers of past data that you wish to exclude from comparison This is useful if some past periods may have had unusually high data values and you wish to compare against the average of all but the highest past period values This gives the number of highest past period values to exclude before the past period values are averaged and compared with the current value e Enter a number of Low outliers of past data that you wish to exclude from comparison This is like High outliers except that it gives the number of lowest past period values to exclude before the past period values are averaged and compared with the current value You may use the high and low outliers in combination but the sum of high outliers and low outliers must be less than the total number of past samples as determined by the sequential and annual sample counts In the example above where there are 17 past periods the sum of high and low outliers must be 16 or less 87 Setting up Data Quality Validation Rule Group functionality If data is not found for all the desired past periods the high and low outliers will be reduced in proportion t
242. earching of TEI a key component of the tracker capture app 28 2 TEI Searching Registration To proceed with the tracker capture one needs to have a TEI As shown in the screenshot below the first page of the app provides two features for this searching an existing one or registering a new one Sierra Leone Bo Registration and Data Entry Person Search ZJO v ax Total 63 amp Reports a B List all Register Print First n Last v TB number Yusef Gebre Selected 1Z 1F2 W93 74 8896 505 3 Badjia Orgunit scope to use Immediate children Ngelehun CHC Dahlak Selam g P 1Z 750 731 43 1257 255 3 Njandama MCHP All children HBaoma Haile Rezene 1Z 2F5 194 99 7580 055 7 Bargbe Enrollment date Is v Exact date Bargbo Adonay Goytiom 1Z 13F 522 85 5307 407 3 Bumpe Ngao Fi L Gbo Robel Temesgen Saag 1Z 93E 702 05 7867 898 7 Jaiama Bongor Kakua Awet Yohannes Last name 1Z W25 971 33 8261 912 4 Komboya Lugbu Haylom Saare Gender 1Z W63 319 01 8310 756 4 Niawa Lenga Selenga Gimja Fesahaye Aiiess 1Z 461 765 44 2540 545 1 Tikonko Valunia Abrha Iggi 1Z 042 63W 17 3205 606 1 Wonde City Bombali Neftalem Efrem 1Z Y98 37A 23 7471 477 4 Bonthe State M Kailahun Makda Dahlak 1Z 471 141 26 5916 8410 ia a Saba Osman Zip code v 1Z 984 191 27 9751 593 0 Koinadug ono Massawa Fethawi Email 1Z 711 8E7 67 3258 8675 Moyamba Port Loko Mugues Elias 1Z 394 3E7 43 7427 4535 ehun Phone numi ber Tonkolili Filmon Abrha 1Z F89 14W 33 3513 10
243. ecececeececeeeeeseeeeeeseesecegeseeeeaeaeseeeeaeaeeneetssanenes 35 4 2 Organisation unit MAINTENANCE ssssssssssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrsrrrerrrerrrerrnrrrnerrrerrnrrrnere 36 42 Organica oM UNAS srera Eee TTE 36 4 2 dds EQIting Organisation UNIS oraire a E A E AANS 36 4 2 2 OfganiSatlOnm UNIT group Sets aiee a E O 37 4 2 2 1 Editing organisation unit group Sets s sssssrssrrrerrssrrerrrrrrrserrerre 38 A23 OLGAMISAE OM UNI FOU Sesera a A axa eas 38 4 2 3 1 Editing organisation unit grouUpS ssssssessersrrrerrrsrrrerrrerrrsrrrerrrerreere 38 424 Organisation UNE TOVE ea e a 39 42o Meric ODCLOLIONS iiaa a a a ukerene wae 39 5e PATOMA air a e panera ee adamaenaaan an aeaedaniate ena 41 Fe 1 Data Elements sxe vides vains vaccine E Pateaeeuced sua een anon ede aeons 41 bids EGIting data Clements scsicniieninciendre tte ania ee ee 42 5 1 2 Deleting a Gata element ss sssssrsssrrrrrrsrrrsrrrrrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrsrrnrrrnerrnerrnerrnne 44 5 1 3 Cloning existing data elements sssssssrssrrsrrrrrrrerrrsrrrrrrrerrrerrrrrrrerrrerrrre 44 5 1 4 Displaying data element detallS cccccccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeseeneeeseseenes 44 D2 Data element OrOUDS aaie T E ieee aes atic 44 52e Data Clement group editor aTi e a peru e em vies eeervig a aasieaaa T NA 45 54 Data element Group SEUS raira erage atea a aei hada doen A Coveseal 45 Dia WALCO ONO anna suas waeanaenuad natu canaaeiuoancad a A
244. ection in Dashboard consists of active programs of the entity Click on a program to show detail information below Besides there are two link in this tab 1 The Active programs section provides links for activity program and the next visit of entity for this program 2 The Completed programs section provides a completed program list with links to load events flow of the program 3 To enroll the entity into a program click Enroll link The Relationship section consists of relationships of the entity Click on an entity in list to open his her dashboard Besides there are two link in this tab 1 To open Relationship management section click Add relative link 2 If the selected program in Program section has a related program defined the link name of this related program is displayed next to Add relative link Click on this link to register a entity who which has relationship of the entity we are working on and enrol the new entity into the related program Besides the system audits user s information who accessed on the dashboard Click on the View access log link on the top right of Dashboard 29 2 2 1 2 Enrollment After the registration the entity needs to be enrolled in any available program To enroll 1 Click on Enroll link from Dashboard of the entity to open the Enrollment form 2 Select a program from the list Enroll into program x Program Child Health Card iw Date of 1st visit 7012 09 22 Date of Bir
245. ed lt 1y cannot be higher than penta 3 doses given fixed lt 1y Slept under LLIN at measles outreach lt 1y cannot be higher than measles doses given outreach lt 1y Exclusive breastfeeding at time of penta 3 outreach lt 1y cannot be higher than penta 3 doses given outreach lt 1y Injectable Antibiotics balance ordered quantity is lower than the average consu Injectable Antibiotics balance ordered quantity is lower than the average consumption for last 10 months Please increase your order to an ANC 2 cannot be higher than ANC 1 11 4 Std Dev Outlier Analysis mption for last 10 months Please increase your order to a appropriate quanti appropriate quanti n appropriate quanti appropriate quanti You can access Outlier analysis from the Apps gt Data Quality menu 82 Value Operator Value Detalls 94 6 H a a e D o eeeeooo Using Data Quality functionality Std Dev Outlier Analysis The standard deviation based outlier analysis provides a mechanism for revealing values that are numerically distant from the rest of the data Outliers can occur by chance but they often indicate a measurement error or a heavy tailed distribution leading to very high numbers In the former case one wishes to discard them while in the latter case one should be cautious in using tools or interpretations that assume a normal distribution The analysis is based on the standard normal distribution Select what dat
246. ed not yet finish complete a many program e Single Event single Event List Death Single Event Navigate to Activity T Home 2 3 Person Registration Registry a new Person e Step 1 Entry personal information 216 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Person Registration Full Name Nakata Sasuke Gender Male Date of Birth Verified 1990 05 19 i National Health ID Number Child contact name Chiki contact type e Step 2 Enroll program for the person just been registered then click Enroll Cli A Nakata Sasuke No Enrolled Programs Select Program Details Gender Male Date of Birth 1990 5 Organisation Unit Nge CHC Change National Health ID Nunaber 19 ehun Enroll In Program Child Health Program Tracking e Step 3 Entry required information for the chosen program then click Enroll 217 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Enroll Nakata Sasuke to Child Health Program Tracking Date of 1st visit yyyy MM dd 2012 08 03 Date of Birth yyyy MM dd 2012 08 03 Navigate to Program List Home Here is the result Nakata Sasuke Details Gender Male Date of Birth 1990 5 19 Organisation Unit Ngelehun CHC Change National Health ID Number Relationships No Relationships 2 4 Anonymous Entries for anonymous person based on specific programs 218
247. ed for improved analysis Data Element Group Editor Easily add or remove data elements to and from data element groups as well as deleted data elements Data Element Group Set Create modify view and delete data element group sets Group sets are used for improved analysis Data Element Category Option Create modify view and delete data element category options Category Option are fine grained break downs of catagory Data Element Category Create modify view and delete data element categories Categories are fine grained break downs of data elements Data Element Category Combination Create modify view and delete data element category combinations Data Dictionary Create modify view and delete data dictionaries A data dictionary is a set of meta data Concept Create modify view and delete concepts A concept can be used by a category Indicator Create modify view and delete indicators An indicator is a formula consisting of data elements and numbers From the left side menu or by scrolling down the central area you can access the various sections on Indicators Indicator Indicator Type Indicator Group Indicator Group Editor and Indicator Group Set Indicator maintenance functions essentially the same as each of the respective sections in the previous section on data elements The basic operations will be described in this section but the reader should refer to the corresponding sections above for deta
248. ed wath antibiotics pneumonia follow up ARI treated with antibiotics pneumonia nev ARI treated with antibiotics pneumonia referrals ARI treated without antibiotics cough follow up ARI treated without antibiotics cough new They both show the same data some of the rows have been cut in the screenshot due to image size albeit in a different way e The dataelement field used in the bottom figure displays each diagnosis as three elements one follow up one new and one referrals This is the way the data elements have been defined in DHIS as this makes sense for aggregation You would not like to aggregate follow ups and new thus these have not been made as categories the whole point of is to ease aggregation and disaggregation e The diagnosis group set has instead been made to lump these three follow up new referrals together which can then be split with another group set namely the one called morbiditymortality This allows us to organize the data as in the first of the two figures where we have the single diagnosis per row and the groups new follow up referrals as rows The idea of using group sets is that you can combine in any set different data elements Thus if we add the mortality data by checking it from the drop down menu of the main_de groups field and moving this field out of the table we can see also the deaths since the mortality data elements have been included as a death group in the m
249. edit the details which need to be changed and then press Save This can save time when creating many similar data elements which differ in only a few details 5 1 4 Displaying data element details This operation displays an in line panel in the browser which displays all metadata about a given data element Click the name of the data element and then select Show details from the context menu 5 2 Data element groups 44 Data element groups provide a mechanism for classifying related data elements into a common theme For instance two data elements Measles immunisation and BCG Immunisation might be grouped together into a data element group Childhood immunisation To access the data element group maintenance page click Maintenance gt Data elements and Indicators gt Data Element Group Similar to the Data element maintenance page data elements groups can be searched with by entering a search string in the Filter by name field To add a new data element group click the Add new button and the following screen will be displayed Data elements Data element group editor Create new data element group Details Name Shorn name Code Available data elements Group members Filter Filter Clear Accute Flaccid Paralysis Deaths lt 5 yrs Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP follow up Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP new Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP referrals z Additional notes related to
250. ee parameters for the program 1 Incident date The incident date of an entity the entity registered this date when this entity enrols into the program 2 Date of enrollment The enrollment date of an entity the entity registered this date when this entity enrols into the program 3 Current date The system date when this indicator is run 29 2 1 6 1 4 Program template reminder 286 This module also supports to define template message reminders which are sent to users entities for multi events registration and single event with registration programs To access to this function click on the program which you would like to define template message reminder and select View template reminder message link e Name Name of description Send base on There are three options include 1 Days scheduled The message Is sent in day 2 Complete program The message is sent when the program of TEI is completed 3 Program enrollment The message is sent when TEI enrols into the program e Date to compare This is the date used for calculating the date to send the message There are 2 options include 1 Enrollment Date 2 Incident Date e Send message X days before after scheduled date The number of days needs to calculate the date for sending the message by scheduled Just enter a number for this field in the case Send base on with value as Days schedule Tracker Programs Attributes Recipients Specify the
251. eed to create a map first Using GIS Share map interpretation 17 3 4 Share map interpretation Open a favorite or save a new map as a favorite Then click the Share button on the map toolbar Type in your interpretation and click Share 17 3 5 Embed maps in any web page Certain analysis related resources in DHIS like pivot tables charts and maps can be embeded in any web page by using a plugin If you have created a map in the GIS app you will get the plugin configuration for this map by clicking the Share button the toolbar and then Embed as plugin You will find more information about the plugins in the web api chapter 17 3 6 Analysis integration The analysis apps in DHIS 2 are completely integrated so you can easily switch between pivot table chart and map visualization of your data When you have made a map you can click e g Chart in the top right corner and then select Open this map as chart E Table p Chart Map Home gt gt gt Go to charts A Open this map as chart i Y J 121 Setting up GIS Context Chapter 18 Setting up GIS 18 1 Context Setting up the GIS simply means storing coordinates for the organisation units you want to Show on the map in the database Coordinates are often distributed in proprietary formats and will need to be converted to a format which DHIS2 understands ESRI shapefiles are the most common geospatial vector data format for desktop applications You mi
252. egative number of months between the two dates The static date format is yyyy MM dd d2 yearsBetw date date Produces the number of years between the first and second argument If the second argument date is before the first argument the return value will be the negative number of years between the two dates The static date format Is yyyy MM dd d2 addDays date number Produces a date based on the first argument date adding the second argument number of days An example calculating the pregnancy due date based on the last menstrual period d2 addDays lastMenstrualDate 283 d2 count Sourcefield Counts the number of values that is entered for the source field in the argument The source field parameter is the name of one of the defined source fields in the program see example Example usage where previousPregnancyOutcome is one of the source fields in a repeatable program stage previous pregnancy d2 count previousPregnancyOutcome d2 countlfValueourcefield text Counts the number of matching values that is entered for the source field in the first argument Only occurrences that matches the second argument is counted The source field parameter is the name of one of the defined source fields in the program see example Example usage where previousPregnancyOutcome is one of the source fields in a repeatable program stage previous pregnancy The following function will produce t
253. egories where it should be collected organisation units and how frequently it should be collected periods This meta data needs to be created in the DHIS 2 database before it can be used This can be done through the user interface and requires no programming or in depth technical skills of the software but does require a good understanding of the processes which you are trying to collect data form This section will provide a very quick and brief introduction to DHIS 2 database design and mainly explain the various steps needed to prepare a new DHIS 2 system for use How to do each step is explained in other chapters and best practices on design choices will be explained in the implementers manual Here are the steps to follow 1 Set up an organisational hierarchy Define data elements Define data sets and data entry forms Define validation rules Define indicators Define report tables and design reports Set up the GIS module oO N OO A A W N Design charts and customise the dashboard 2 5 1 The organisational hierarchy The organisational hierarchy defines the organisation using the DHIS 2 the health facilities administrative areas and other geographical areas used in data collection and data analysis This dimension to the data is defined as a hierarchy with one root unit e g Ministry of Health and any number of levels and nodes below Each node in this hierarchy is called an organisational unit in DHIS 2
254. egories and category combinations to Attribute To assign a category combination to a data set you can select it while creating or updating the data set from the Combination of categories drop down box When a data set is linked to a category combination those categories will be displayed as drop down boxes in the data entry module Data captured in the form will then be linked to the selected category options from those drop down boxes An scenario for when data set categories are useful is when you need to capture a data entry form for a implementing partner organisation and a project In that case start by creating category options and categories for all partner organisations and projects before linking these in a new category combination Then link the category combination to the data set form for which you need to capture this information When opening this data set in data entry module the partner organisation and project categories will automatically be rendered as drop down boxes allowing you to select a specific implementing partner organisation and project before continuing to do data entry 55 Data sets and data entry forms Data Entry Forms DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone tS a Keo X Ngelehun CHC January 2015 ART enrollment stage 1 lt 15y Female a Data Entry EHBo Run validation El Badjia Organisation Unit Ngelehun CHC Print form Data Set ART monthly summary Print blank form Njandama MCHP Per
255. egrity checks on the data contained in the database Identifying and correcting data Integrity issues is extremely important for ensuring that the data used for analysis purposes is valid Each of the data integrity checks that are performed by the system will be described along with general procedures that can be performed to resolve these issues 22 2 1 Data elements without data set Each data element must be assigned to a data set Values for data elements will not be able to be entered into the system if a data element is not assigned to a data set Choose Maintenance gt Datasets gt Edit from the main menu and then add the orphaned data element to the appropriate data set 22 2 2 Data elements without groups Some Data Elements have been allocated to several Data Element Groups This is currently not allowed because it will result in duplication of linked data records in the analytics record sets that provide aggregated data Go to Maintenance gt Data Element Groups to review each Data Element identified and remove the incorrect Group allocations 22 2 3 Data elements violating exclusive group sets Some data elements have been allocated to several data element groups that are members of the same data element group set All group sets in DHIS2 are defined as exclusive which means that a data element can only be allocated to one data element group within that group set Go to Maintenance gt Data elements and indicators gt Data
256. el Until it is approved at the next higher level it may be unapproved at the first level For 167 Data approval Authorities for approving data example if the data was approved my mistake this allows the approver to undo their mistake Once the data is approved at the next higher level it may not be unapproved at the lower level unless it is first Unapproved at the higher level In the two step process data is approved at one level and then the approval is accepted at the same level This acceptance is done by a user who is authorized to approve data at the next higher level Once the data is accepted it may not be changed or unapproved unless it is first unaccepted The two step process Is not required by DHIS2 It is an optional step for a user reviewing data at the next higher level It has the benefit of locking the acceptance from the level below so reviewer does not have to worry that the data could be changing from below while it is being reviewed It can also be used by the higher level user to keep track of which lower level data has already been reviewed 20 2 Authorities for approving data TO approve data you must be assigned a role containing one of these authorities e Approve data You may approve data for the organisation unit s to which you are assigned Note that this authority does not allow you to approve data for lower levels below the organisation unit s to which you are assigned This is useful to Separat
257. el below Vice versa goes for floating up The layer menu also offers to put on labels and to locate an organisation unit in the map The final option in the layer menu is Close This completely resets the layer content the edit layer form and the legend panel 118 Using GIS Thematic layer 1 4 17 2 4 Thematic layer 1 4 it 2 3 4 Favorites Legend Download E Table ih Chart Map Home gt gt gt Layer stack transparency N EJ Thematic layer 1 x Fria G u i n e a aa 08 F Facility layer Data options Z Boundary layer ee Value type Indicator v Pi ee ae Z EB Thematic tayer 1 80 4 Kini NA wA Faranah i Indicator group Immunization v Ban EP aara Thematic layer 2 4 f wn E Thematic layer 3 Indicator Fully Immunized Coverage N 4 Dubtk i lt 7 Dubreka x er lt gt lt y FJ Thematic layer 4 Period type Yearly wal lt gt AY OpenStreetMap amp Google Hybrid v amp Google Streets 100 Facility layer legend Me Period 2013 Legend options Legend type Automatic lt gt A Classes method 7 w Equal intervals lt gt lt gt E lt JES Low color size I 5 Thematic layer 1 legend a z 2013 Organisation units 33 2 42 5 1 i N 42 5 51 8 0 District bA t i we SGueckedou 51 8 61 1 1 jG Siena Leone Freet Mirig aoe 61 1 70 5 4 a Bo d DA A L LU 70 5 79 8 2 B Bombali S ae ne 3
258. element Dimension Table buttons A regular report table can be used to hold data on data elements indicators or dataset completeness while Dataelement dimension tables are used to include data element categories in report tables Creating the tables are done in the same way however the only exception being when choosing data To create a report table you start by making some general choices for the table the most important of which is the crosstab dimension Then you choose which data elements indicators datasets or data element dimensions you want to include Finally you select which organisation units and time periods to use in the report table Each of these steps are described in detail below Setting up report functionality General options 19 2 1 General options Report Table Crosstab dimensions Indicators data elements data sets Name Sort order None Organisation units e OU Top limit None Periods Include regression _ Cross tab dimensions You can cross tab one or more of the following dimensions data element indicator orgunit and period which means that columns will be created based on the values of the dimensions chosen e g if indicators is selected you will get column names in the table reflecting the names of the selected indicators For example if you cross tab on indicators and periods the column headers will say lt indicator title gt lt period gt The organisation units
259. em gets active events based on the these dates 3 Use data from level s Specify the level which you need to get events If the option is Children only individual data will be get from the children of the selected organisation unit If the option is Selected individual data will be get from the selected organisation unit If the option is All individual data will be get from both selected organisation unit and its children 4 Click Show Event List button to generate visit schedule The result is displayed below Click Events icon first icon under Operations corresponding to the entity which you would like to open event list according to the search criteria Then click on a date in event list to open the data entry screen Click Dashboard icon the secord icon under Operations corresponding to the entity which you would like to open dashboard of the entity Click Tracked entity instance details and history icon the third icon under Operations corresponding to the entity which you would like to open the entity history 29 2 2 3 Lost to follow up This function supports the work practices around tracking entities within a health program that have not shown up for a scheduled visit e g that are lost to follow up To access Lost to follow up module from the Apps menu go to the Individual Records option and select Lost to follow up option on left menu To get tracking for a program please do as follows 1 Select organisation u
260. en click Add button and enter values for the fields in form to create a new one A validation rule is based on an expression which defines 285 Tracker Programs Attributes a relationship between data element values The expression has a left side and a right side and an operator which defines whether the former must be less than equal to or greater than the latter The expression forms a condition which should assert that certain logical criteria are met For instance a validation rule could assert that an admitted date given is before the discharged date 29 2 1 6 1 3 Program Indicator To define a program indicator click on the program which you would like and select Program Indicator management menu Basic information e Name Name of program indicator Short name Short name of program indicator Code Code of program indicator Description Description of program indicator Value Type The value type of indicator It specifies the value of the indicator as a Number or Date e Program Stage Select an program stage to load the data elements which belong to the program selected These data elements are used to define an indicator formula e Data element tab The data elements which belongs to the selected program They are used to define an formula By double clicking on the data element you want in the box the formula of the selected data element will be displayed into Expression field Program tab Includes thr
261. en users enter data on the phone but cannot send it to the server This may be because of the configuration of the phone lack of credit on the phone or lack of coverage Usually an error message Is displayed as shown below Users should be informed that if they see this error then it means that their data has not been transmitted 24 3 5 4 Community Reporting The community based reporting function works in a similar manner as the aggregate reporting function but patient based data elements 24 3 5 4 1 Regular Use 1 Activity Main Menu 246 Mobile Mobile application setup WOK 1A To L2 d2 hair dor Current Activity Plan et Sent activities e Current Activity Plan Contain all new activities that need to be completed e Sent Activity Plan Contain all the activities that have been completed and sent to server This list is for review only 2 Choose Village or Location 247 Mobile Mobile application setup MOK LA oo amp 10 13 PEM ELEL ELE Name l Select From Activity main menu select Current Activity Plan You will be navigated to Grampanchayat Name screen where you can select the village Use the Up or Down button on your mobile phone to focus on a village Use Select button to select a village 3 Choose Beneficiary 248 Mobile MOK 1A Tu 10 19 Beneficiary List mahak mayank a nidhi pawan ranu Select Mobile application s
262. ent Registering unit Siera Leone Ane Selected After selecting a type for searching entering keyword and clicking on Search button the search result will display on the screen and then user can interact with these entities Tracked entity instance management Registering unit Ngelehun CHC Add new Program View all v List All Instances Advanced search Select orgunit for search Sierra Leone x Orgunit search type Selected v First name v john Clear Add filter Search The following tracked entity instances found in Ngelehun CHC For enrollments in Program Total number of results 3 Tracked entity First name National identifier Last name TB number Operations 1 Person Johnathan Weeler 7 Ba HO 2 Person John Doe 7 kM HO 3 Person John Doe lt 4 8 j HO 1 Tracker Individual records 29 2 2 2 Visit Schedule This will be used to provide the user at a facility or in an area with a list of upcoming visits to better plan for daily weekly activities This can also be used as quick navigation to the data entry screen when using the system as a live real time data entry system To access Visit Schedule module from the Apps menu go to the Individual Records Select Visit Schedule option on left menu Visit schedule management form is opened To get visit schedule for a program please do as follows 1 Select a program Specify program for getting events 2 Select start date and end date The syst
263. entered data for a particular period and Organization Unit s against the validation rules and display the violations for these validation rules 3 Analysis of data sets i e examining gaps in data 4 Data triangulation which is comparing the same data or indicator from different sources 11 3 Running Validation Rule Analysis You can access Validation Rule Analysis from the Apps gt Data Quality menu A validation rule is based on an expression which defines a relationship between a number of data elements The expression has a left side and a right side and an operator which defines whether the former must be less than equal to or greater than the latter The expression forms a condition which should assert that certain logical criteria are met For instance a validation rule could assert that the total number of vaccines given to infants is less than or equal to the total number of infants The validation rule analysis function will test validation rules against the data registered in the system Validation violations will be reported in cases where the condition defined through the validation rule expression is not met i e the condition is false Selecting what data to validate First enter a start date and an end date for which data should be included in the analysis The date picker widget may be used to select dates 81 Second choose between including all validation rules or all validation rules from a single group Thir
264. eport will show 300 pregnant women registered for ANC and 120 women given IFA tablets or 90 women given TT injection In an aggregate system it is not possible to ascertain that if a particular pregnant woman registered for ANC has also been given IFA and TT as data only shows aggregate numbers To understand the quality of services given to each pregnant woman registered for ANC immunization cycle of each child or treatment of each leprosy person etc it is important that treatment information of each person is maintained as an individual case The DHIS tracker module also Known as DHIS Community Module is an integrated module in DHIS2 built to support community health systems and facilitate a smooth integration between the community health data and aggregated data management The module supports definition of types of entities which can be tracked through the system which can be anything from persons to commodities e g medicine person For the types of entities defined users can manage community health programs such as child immunization maternal health and e g allows tracking of individuals enrolled in various programs and activity planning for community health workers The following are the major things 1 Administrating meta data The module supports flexibly to create meta data which need for entities defined includes attributes attribute groups relationship types registration form health programs program stages corres
265. er authorities View and Search Tracked F ACCESS TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTES Entity Attributes and Identifiers View data browser F_ VIEW_DATABROWSER View Program Stage F PROGRAM STAGE COMPLETENESS Completeness Report View program tracking F PROGRAM_TRACKING LIST View Report F REPORT VIEW View Tracked Entity Attribute F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTE VIEW View unapproved data F_ VIEW UNAPPROVED DATA View User F USER VIEW View User Group Managing F USERGROUP MANAGING RELATIONSHIPS VIEW Relationships View User Within Managed F USER VIEW_WITHIN MANAGED GROUP Group 334 DHIS2 Glossary DHIS2 Glossary A Aggregation Aggregate data Application programming interface B Bimonthly C Category Category combinations Category combination options Category option In the context of DHIS2 aggregation refers to how data elements are combined within a particular hierarchical relationship As an example all the health facilities in a particular district would contribute to the total value for the particular district in question Different aggregation operators are supported within DHIS2 such as SUM AVERAGE and COUNT In the context of DHIS2 aggregate data refers to either data elements or indicators that have been derived from other hierarchical data sources For instance aggreagte facility data would result from the aggregate totals of all patients that have attended that fa
266. er using the arrow under the Add new button Each of the available functions are described below e Add new Adds a new data set When pressing this button you can create a new data set You need to provide a name short name and frequency The Code attribute is optional Data elements can be added to the Selected data element list by selecting them individually and gt pressing the button Indicators can also be added to data sets and will be available to Data sets and data entry forms Data set categories be placed in custom data entry forms when they need to be shown along with data elements on the same data entry form Press Save to add the new data set e Assign organisation units to data sets This function will allow you to assign individual organisational units to a data set Only organisational units which have been assigned to a data set will be allowed to enter data into the data set e View sections Allows you to add or remove sections to the dataset as required These sections do not apply to custom forms e Sharing settings Assign different rights to the dataset based on user groups and user roles e Edit data set This will allow you to edit existing data sets for instance when you need to add or remove data elements and indicators to a given data set Translate Allows the dataset name to be translated to another language as required Translate Allows you to translate the name of a data set t
267. ere bars representing multiple categories are stacked on top of each other Useful e g for displaying trends or sums of related data elements 3 Bar chart Same as column chart only with horizontal bars 107 Using Data Visualizer Selecting series category and filter 4 Stacked bar chart Same as stacked column chart only with horizontal bars 5 Line chart Graph which displays information as a series of points connected by straight lines Also referred to as time series Useful e g to visualize trends in indicator data over multiple time periods 6 Area chart Chart which is based on line chart with the space between the axis and the line filled with colors and the lines stacked on top of each other Useful for comparing the trends of related indicators 7 Pie chart Circular chart divided into sectors or slices Useful e g to visualize the proportion of data for individual data elements compared to the total sum of all data elements in the chart 8 Radar chart Displaying multivariate data on axes starting from the same point Also known as spider chart 9 Speedometer Chart Semi circle chart which displays values out of 100 Sometimes referred to as a gauge Chart 16 3 Selecting series category and filter The series category and filter can be defined by selecting the Layout option in the data visualizer app Chart layout x Excluded dimensions Report filter Series dimensions Assigned categores Organisati
268. es that have submitted their data for a given dataset and period Here you can get both the counts and the percentages showing the reporting rate for all or single data sets Web based pivot tables The built in pivot table tool is a web based tool to display indicator data by orgunit and period in a typical pivot table view and allows for pivoting manipulations of the tables It allows for large amounts of data to be downloaded offline for analysis as well GIS Present and analyse your data using thematic maps You can view both data elements and indicators and given that you have coordinates for all your orgunits you can drill down the hierarchy and view maps for all levels from country polygons to facility points See the separate chapter on GIS for more details All the map information is built into DHIS 2 and all you need to do is to register coordinates for your organisation units and the maps will be available 14 2 Using standard reports You access the available reports by navigating to Apps gt Reports In the report menu in the left bar click Standard Report A list of all pre defined reports will appear in the main window 95 Using reporting functionality Using dataset reports Standard Report Filter Clear Add new Name a ANC ist Visit Cumulative Chart ANC Coverages This Year gt Create Sharing settings ANC Overview Report HTML based Tu C Edit report ANC Visits This Year w Remove Feedback Indicat
269. ese values are static for all months as long as there are valid data For example the Estimated population under 1 calculated from the census data is the same for all months of a given year or the number of nurses working in a given facility is the same for every month in the 6 months period the number is reported for This difference becomes important when calculating an annual value for the indicator morbidity service burden for a facility The monthly head counts are summed up for the 12 months to get the annual headcount while the number of staff for the PHU is calculated as the average of the two 6 monthly values reported through the 6 monthly staff report So in this example the data element OPD headcount would have the aggregation operator SUM and the data element Number of staff would have it set to AVERAGE 24 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Data collection vs data analysis Another important feature of average data elements is the validity period concept Average data values are standing values for any period type within the borders of the period they are registered for For example an annual population estimate following the calendar year will have the same value for any period that falls within that year no matter what the period type If the population under 1 for a given facility is 250 for the year of 2015 that means that the value will be 250 for Jan 15 for Q3 15 for Week 12 of 2015 and for any period within 2015 This has
270. et Paste dataset Ene eee Advanced options o ae Designing Standard reports in iReport Under details you see the list of series for the chart By default one series is created per crosstab column In this case we are looking at data for one indicator for the whole of 2010 for a number of districts The indicator is along the crosstab dimension 151 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport ae Chart details Type of dataset Category dataset Ea Category series Category series ANC Dropout Rate d S r eee Remove zee Advanced options _ C Close fo To make changes to a series select it and click modify Another window will appear where there are four areas that can be edit The three first are required but it is sufficient to add an empty quote in one of the first two AnS Data lata Item Hyperlink Series expression required ANC Dropout Rate a Category expression required Value expression required F anc dropout rate a Label Expression a Cancel ae The first box is a text field where the name of the series can be inserted or edited This is the field that will be used to fill the text in the legend box shown below 152 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport E ANC Dropout Rate However if you want to have the name of each bar along the x axis of the chart i
271. ether How data is aggregated depends on the dimension of aggregation see further down Along the orgunit level dimension data is always Summed up simply added together Note that raw data Is never percentages and therefore can be summed together Indicator values that can be percentages are treated differently re calculated at each level never summed up Along the time dimension there are several possibilities the two most common ways to aggregate are sum and average The user can specify for each data element which method to use by setting the aggregation operator see further down Monthly service data are normally Summed together over time e g the number of vaccines given in a year is the sum of the vaccines given for each month of that year For population equipment staff and other kind of what is often called semi permanent data the average method is often the one to use as e g number of nurses working at a facility in a year would not be the sum of the two numbers reported in the six monthly staffing report but rather the average of the two numbers More details further down under aggregation operators 19 1 1 3 Dimensions of aggregation 19 1 1 3 1 Organisational units and levels Organisational units are used to represent the where dimension associated with data values In DHIS 2 organisational units are arranged in a hierarchy which typically corresponds to the hierarchical nature of the organisation or cou
272. etup In a village beneficiary name will be display in a list User can use the Select button to view the activities of the selected name 4 Choose Activity 249 Mobile Mobile application setup NMOKTLA Fa 11 15 elect act 7 anu 2011 03 03 ranu o PECIEZINI T ranu 011 03 03 Details Select Each Activity is represented by the name of the Beneficiary Select the name of the beneficiary you want to view Note that the name start with means that this is a late Activity 5 Beneficiary Detail 250 Mobile Mobile application setup MOKIA Tai 0 10 15 ANC dth check wo 20 10 06 Name SREEJA SUBADRA Age Z7 gt Election Card Number KKL1805316 r Select the Detail command on the left of the activity screen a Beneficiary Detail screen will be displayed The detail screen may contain personal information and some additional information of the Beneficiary depends on the setting from server Select OK to go back to activity screen 6 Fill in values Entry screen 251 Mobile Mobile application setup MOK 1A To Sms 10 47 ANC 3rd check w IFA tablets is gi f ANC Complications Select option Anemia Save Comple On the top of the screen is the name of the Program Stage Below is the form a form include many fields for user to input data Focus on a field by press the Up or Down button on
273. evel in the hierarchy e g all districts Datasets If you assign a dataset to an organisational unit group all organisation units which are currently assigned to the dataset will be also present in this organisation unit group Organisation units Organisation unit level 4 2 4 Organisation unit level Here you specify a contextual name for each level in the hierarchy e g Country Province District Health Facility and these names will be used all over the application where levels are referred to This page will take some time to load if the orgunit hierarchy is very big 4 2 5 Hierarchy operations Here you can move orgunits around in the hierarchy by changing the parent of a selected orgunit This process is done in three steps 1 Select the orgunit you want to move in the hierarchy in the left side menu and click Confirm under the Select an organisation unit to move label 2 Select the new parent orgunit again by using the hierarchy in the left side menu If no parent is selected then the orgunit will be moved up to root level top of the hierarchy Click on the Confirm button under the Select the new parent organisation unit for the one to move label 3 Click on the Move button to apply your changes to the hierarchy Your changes will be immediately reflected in the left side menu hierarchy At any time in the process before hitting the Move button you can click on the Reset button to deselect orgu
274. f data quality checks esssessessrrssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrrrrrsrrrerrrsrrnere 81 TrZ Data quat CNECKS raima a E a a O A eee eR Ree ee 81 11 3 Running Validation Rule Analysis cccccccececceeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeaeeseataesteneananans 81 det 4 Sta DEV OUTIIEr AN aly SIS eroii a a AA 82 11 5 Min Max Outlier AnalySiS cccccccceecececeeeseeeeeeeseeaeseaeeseeeesteneanaeeseatsestentatataneaeas 84 TL6 FOMOW U DYANGIVSIS 4 azrenustecaaiascpniunveunainanatscden nines emaendanues es aden eae amadaareetrageaes 84 12 Setting up Data Quality functionality 00 ccc cccece ee ecee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeseeneaneenenes 85 12 1 OVerview of data Quality CHECK sisitiadcdwin Hac tear hte mwa ee 85 12323 Data GUGIILY CHECKS tiicisscassiaceectavvatipeiete iene esweiutitcerepie era e 85 12 3 Data quality check at the point of data entry ce ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenes 85 12 3 1 Setting the minimum and maximum value range manually 0008 85 12 3 2 Generated min max values cccceesceceee sees ee eeseseeceaeeteeeeeaeseeseaeaeeneseananenes 86 T24 NAC ACIONY RUE xi gercisaatared jotiesteres R shana hak vane lpaerannrat tne ads Gedeadaangndes 86 LA Div SURV IMALICS RUC aeaa Gcovan tava anata ecard vais nes ia tune nans os cartes mane tinee wins 87 126 Valda on RUIE GrOUD asire inaa a aa a aay nian esnten aaa 88 TDs INAC AOS a a T AA A O bese tuR eran ae uewarea aun 89 LANAC It
275. f data sets with similar period types to have a defined behavior Period structure _dataperiodstructure This table provides information about all periods and which period type they are associated with For each period type with lower frequency than itself it contains information about which period it will fall within Data element category option combinations _dataelementcategoryoptioncombo This table provides a mapping between data elements and all possible category option combinations Locale Management It is possible to create custom locales in DHIS2 In addition to the locales available through the system you might want to add a custom locale such as English and Zambia to the system This would allow you to translate metadata objects to local languages or to account for slight variants between countries which use a common metadata definition Create New Locale Locale Details Language English Country Zambia Add Cancel The locale is composed of a language along with a country Select the desired values and press Add This custom locale will now be available as one of the translation locales in the system 194 Data Administration SQL View 22 6 SQL View The SQL View functionality of DHIS2 will store the SQL view definition internally and then materialize the view when requested Database administrators must be careful about creating database views directly in the DHIS 2 database For instance when th
276. face of the import export DHIS 2 module Data can also be exported programmatically through the DHIS 2 Web API and it is useful to be aware of the various options available e Export raw non aggregated data through the user interface Covered in this chapter e Export aggregated data programmatically through the Web API Please refer to the Web API chapter section on Analytics e Export a combination of data and meta data Please refer to the SQL view sections in the Data administration chapter and Web API chapter e Export meta data through the user interface Covered in this chapter e Export meta data programmatically through the Web API Please refer to the Web API chapter section on meta data Data can be exported on various formats including DXF 2 the DHIS 2 meta data and data exchange format based on XML CSV PDF MS Excel and the DHIS 1 4 XML format Another aspect of data export is the type of DHIS 2 deployment In the case of online deployment all data is saved into a single database only In an offline deployment each instance will store data in a separate database in their local system In an offline deployment after the data entry is finished data will have to be manually sent to the next level in the organizational hierarchy In an on line application this is not required as all data is captured over an Internet connection and stored in a central location 21 3 1 Metadata export Meta data is data about data
277. facility Admission Date Age gt gt Albendazole given at ANC 2nd trimester All access routes are clearly marked and safe All other deaths All other follow ups All other new All other referrals Add Cancel Fill in the Name field and then select all data elements that should belong to the group from the left panel Click the Move selected 7 lbutton to add the selected data elements to the data element group Click the Remove selected button to remove all data elements from the group that have been selected in the right panel Finally click the Add button to save changes or the Cancel button to discard any changes 5 3 Data element group editor The data element group editor provides advanced functionality to the administrator to allow multiple data elements to be added or removed from a group It is also possible to create new data element groups rename existing groups and delete groups entirely To access the data element group editor go to Maintenance gt Data elements and Indicators gt Data Element Group Editor The following screen will appear Data element groups area listed alphabetically in the leftmost panel By clicking on a data element group the current members of that group data elements are listed in the centre panel Available data elements that can be added to the data element group appear are listed alphabetically in the rightmost panel To remove an existing data element from the group
278. form more complex conditions An example that produces the gestational age in weeks based on last menstrual date d2 floor d2 daysBetween lastMenstrualDate V event_date 7 31 6 Defining actions Each program rule has one or more actions attached These are the behaviors that is triggered in the user interface when the expression see previous chapter is true Actions will be applied at once if the expression is true and will be reverted if the expression is no longer true To add a new action click the add action button at the bottom of the program rule page Once actionshas been added they can be removed again by clicking the button at the right side of the actions row 3 Actions that is executed when expression is true Add more action There are several types of actions and the type is selected individually for each action row 31 6 1 Hide field action 318 A hide field action is defined by selecting Hide field in the first column of the action row Program rules Hide section action Hide field The field for family history of hypertension was ble Family history of hypertension The second column is optional and it allows defining a custom message to the end user in case the rule hides and blanks out the field after the end user typed in or selected a value If a hide field action hides a field that contains a value the field will always removed If no message is defined a standard messag
279. forms In custom data entry form you can use javascript to create dynamic behavior and customziations The DHIS 2 data entry module provides a range of events which you can register for and use to perform actions at certain times The events are registered on the document element The jQuery event object and the data set identifier are always the first two arguments provided to the callback functions The table below provides an overview of the events and when they are triggered Table 6 1 Data entry events Key Description Arguments dhis2 de event formLbadeered after the data entry form is rendered but before data values are set in entry fields Event Data set ID dhis2 de event dataVEtiqaxieadefter data values are set in entry fields Event Data set ID dhis2 de event formReeagyered when the data entry form is completely rendered and loaded with all elements Event Data set ID dhis2 de event dataVEtigefesreddwhen a data value is saved successfully Event Data set ID Data value object dhis2 de event completgdered when a data set is successfully marked as complete Event Data set ID Complete registration object dhis2 de event unconipbayeced when a data set is successfully marked as Event Data set ID incomplete dhis2 de event validatrongearecessvhen validation is Event Data set ID done and there were no violations dhis2 de event validakrong red when vali
280. forms Section forms allow for a bit more flexibility when it comes to using tabular forms and are quick and simple to design Often your data entry form will need multiple tables with subheadings and sometimes you need to disable grey out a few fields in the table e g some categories do not apply to all data elements both of these functions are supported in section forms After defining a dataset you can define it s sections with subsets of dataelements a heading and possible grey fields i the section s table The order of sections in a dataset can also be defined In Data Entry you can now start using the Section form should appear automatically when sections are available for the selected dataset You can switch between default and section forms in the top right corner of the data entry screen Most tabular data entry forms should be possible to do with sections forms and the more you can utilise the section forms or default forms the easier it is for you If these two types of forms are not meeting your requirements then the third option is the completely flexible although more time consuming custom data entry forms 2 5 3 1 2 Custom Forms When the form you want to design is too complicated for the default or section forms then your last option is to use a custom form This takes more time but gives you full flexibility in 15 Getting started with DHIS 2 Validation rules term of the design In DHIS 2 there is a built in HTML e
281. forms either on line or off line sory data elements Users a i trends v gt Mobile configuration 7 Maintain data sets plus settings for mobile lt Import Export y Import and export data from DHIS or third party reporting and SMS configuration formats using internal and common Beneficiaries and Programs EZA GIS Maintain beneficiaries and programs including Fy Visualize data on maps using polygons attributes and identifiers Be points symbols with customizable legends Mobile Access a mobile device optimized version of data entry settings messages and analysis Organisation Units k y Maintain organisation units and its hierarchy I groups and group sets S Settings Reports 5 Maintain user and system settings related to a Analyse data using predefined and dynamic DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leo Mobile Configuration gt gt Data Set for Mobile Define and son the data sets which are available for facility reporting on the mobile client v gt Person Mobile Settings Define what person information will be sent to the mobile device Usually each SMS command has it own property then the setting up process may be different from each other Currently we have 4 types of SMS command dhis DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone A DHIS MOBILE CONFIGURATION Add command Person Mobile Settings Command Details Data Set for Mobile f Name Parser KEY_VALUE_PARSER A PARSER View
282. from another orgunit which is not neccessarily part of the assigned orgunits To Support such use case advanced search provides another orgunit tree The tree displayed here depends on the role that the logged in user has If the user has role Search Tracked Entity Instance in All Org Units or ALL a tree with all available orgunits 275 Using Tracker Capture TEI dashboard is provided other wise the tree displayed in advanced search is the same as the one on the left hand side Whichever tree or hierarchy of orgunits is provided if an orgunit is selected in advanced search the searching is conducted against this selected orgunit and scope While in the TEI table clicking on any row takes to the selected TEl s dashboard 2 Registration this is accessible through the Register button During registration it is possible to stay on the same page and keep doing more registration or go straight to the dashboard of the registered TEI Selecting a program and doing registration also performs enrollment at the background If a TEI is registered without a program then enrollment is possible from the TEI dashboard Both skip logic and validation error warning messages are Supported during registration Both search and registration are dictated by a selected program It is program attributes which are being used as Search criteria registration attributes and also as columns names for tracked entity list If no program is selected the system
283. from the Apps menu go to the Individual Records Select Program Statistics option on left menu Program statistics form is opened 303 Tracker Individual records To get statistics report for a program please do as follows 1 Program Specify program for generating report 2 Select start date and end date The system will aggregate report based on start date and end date 3 Use data from level s Specify the level which you need to get events If the option is Children only individual data will be aggregated from the children of the selected organisation unit If the option is Selected individual data will be aggregated from the selected organisation unit If the option is All individual data will be aggregated from both selected organisation unit and its children 4 Click Generate button to generate report The result is displayed below And click Export XLS button to export the result to excel file Program summary report Organisation unit boundary Sierra Leone Program Normal program M B This is enrollment details of a Start date 2013 03 09 program in 2013 03 09 End date 2013 03 09 Use data from level s Selected Children Only All C canei Total number of results 5 What do colors mean Sierra Leone Sierra Leone Sierra Leone Normal 11 gt Stage 1 gt Stage 2 gt Stage 3 2013 03 09 2013 03 09 2013 03 09 Programs completed Sierra Leone Sierra Leone Sierra Leone Normal 12
284. g a data mart export or report table generation process will appear properly formatted and will therefore not require an additional multiplier e g 100 in the case of percents for the values to appear correctly formatted The indicator type maintenance panel has all of the same functions Add new Edit Translate Delete and Information as the Indicator maintenance section There are only two fields that need to be filled in to create an indicator type Name and Factor as seen below Name refers to the Indicator type e g Per cent Per thousand Per ten thousand etc The factor is the numeric factor that will be multiplied to the indicator formula during the calculation of the indicator Create new indicator type Details Name Factor Number No Add Cancel Note As of version 2 4 of DHIS2 the Calculated data element object has been deprecated Instead a calculated data element can be created by creating an indicator type with Indicators Indicator groups a factor of 1 and by setting the Number option to Yes The effect of setting the Number option to Yes will be that the indicator will effectively not have a denominator You will therefore only be able to define a numerator which will serve as the formula of the calculated data element 13 3 Indicator groups Indicator groups function essentially the same as data element groups Multiple indicators can be assigned to a group for easy filtering an
285. g medicine person A program must have one tracked entity And entity registered must be specified an tracked entity To enrol a tracked entity instance into a program the tracked entity of an entity and tracked entity of a program must be the same Tracked Entity Form Create custom tracked entity data capture forms with tracked entity attributes Program Create modify and view programs A program has program stages and defines which actions Should be taken at each stage Aggregation Query Builder Set up aggregation rules for the process of aggregating tracked entity data to statistical data Automated Message Reminder Set reminders to be automatically sent to enrolled tracked entity instances before scheduled appointments and after missed visits Automated Aggregation Schedule an automated tracked entity aggregation process e g to run all pre defined aggregation queries every midnight 29 2 1 1 Attribute Create modify and view entity attributes An attribute can be used to register extra private information for a entity or information when that entity enrolled into a certain program 281 Tracker Programs Attributes After click on Add new button into Tracked entity attribute management window to go to Create new tracked entity attribute window Fr om App menu go to Programs Attributes option and click on it Select Attribute option to create a new attribute for entities 29 2 1 29 2 1 1
286. gend button on the map toolbar To create a new set click the Add new button Example usage vaccination coverage Firstly give the legend set a name Then create the legends you want in your legend set The first one could be Low bad name O start value 50 end value red color Click Add legend and appears in the list below Then create Medium 50 80 yellow High good 80 100 green and finally Too high 100 10000 grey Now click the Create button in the bottom right corner If your legend set has overlapping legends e g 0 50 and 40 80 you will not be allowed to proceed If your legend set has a gap between the legends e g 0 50 and 60 80 you will get a warning but are allowed to proceed NOTE Continuous legends are supposed to end and start on the same value e g 0 50 and 50 80 This will automatically be taken care of by the application Do not try to do this yourself by setting legends to e g 0 50 and 51 80 This will cause a usually unwanted gap in your legend set You can assign a legend set to an indicator or a data element in the Indicator Data element module This legend set will then be automatically selected when such an indicator data element is selected in the GIS 17 3 3 Download map as image 120 Click the Download button on the map toolbar Enter a name in the textfield and click Download The browser will download a PNG image If the toolbar Download button is disabled you n
287. ght find shapefiles for your country here or in many other geospatial data repositories on the web Some amount of work needs to be done in order to use these coordinates in DHIS 2 GIS namely transforming the data into a suitable format and ensuring the name which are contained in the geospatial data match exactly with the names of the organization units which they should be matched to If you go to the organisation unit module and edit one of the units you can see a text field called Coordinates Here you may fill in its coordinates directly geojson format which is useful if you just want to update a couple of units An example point facility coordinate 29 341 11 154 An example polygon area coordinates string 29 343 11 154 28 329 11 342 28 481 10 239 29 833 10 412 However If you are going to e g add coordinates for all units at a certain level you don t want to do that manually This is where the automatic GML import comes into play and the following section explains the preferred way of using it D Important The only co ordinate reference system supported by DHIS2 is EPSG 4326 also known as geographic longitude latitude Coordinates must be stored with the longitude east west position proceeding the latitude north south position If your vector data is ina different CRS than EPSG 4326 you will need to re project the data first before importing into DHIS2 18 2 Importing coordinates Step 1 Simplify
288. gn sharing privileges to user groups Edit Edit an existing indicator e Translate Translate an existing indicator to a different language e Remove Delete an existing indicator Show details Get detailed information about this indicator To add a new indicator click the Add new button The following screen is displayed Create new indicator This object will be created with public edit and view rights Details Name Short name Code Description Annualized No T Indicator Type Select Legend set Please select T URL Edit numerator Edit denominator Add Cancel Indicators Indicators Each of the fields marked with an asterisk are compulsory A description of each field is provided below Name The full name of the indicator such as Incidence of confirmed malaria cases per 1000 population Short name An abbreviated name of the indicator such as Inc conf malaria per 1000 pop The short name must be less than or equal to 25 characters including spaces Code In many countries indicators are often assigned a particular code This code can be entered here Description A brief informative description of the indicator and how it is calculated can be entered here Annualized Determines whether or not an annualization factor is applied during the calculation of the indicator Typically annualized indicator s numerator are multiplied by a factor of 12 and the denominator is for insta
289. gregated values ssesssssrresrrrrrrerrrrsrrrrrrnrrreerrrrrrnrrreerrne 271 2ed OP UON a A AA ene rn ener ee 273 20 USING Tracker Capture monsen AE A E a N 275 2O te OV EIVICW reier a E E O A 275 20 2 TEL SearcHINO REQISAHON oenen a a e AEA A AR 275 25 5 TE GaSMOOALlO oorsee a een cbaniep al ceneereewnenere ern 2 6 2GA BASIC TODOS arraren a anew E E eran a a es eee 278 DOs ACKO SEE E OR TA E E E E ree ee 279 AS ANTOU O aa T E E a eae ee 279 ZO Aol IBACKOROUING irai A a A ins atsaeaa tas 279 29 1 2 Getting started with tracker ssesssesssssrrrsrrerrrerrrrrrrsrrrsrrnrrrrsrrrsrrrrrrnere 280 292 USE r Ode ori e E A A A E AAE 280 29 2 1 Programs ATIDUTES siriana E S 281 292 Ved ADU oe a A E eaa eae 281 292 2 AOUE OrOUD cerra A A O TO 283 292515352 REIGUONSHID YDE aoaaa A A A EEA 283 29 2 Aa MICKEL ENUY irder a ae an aa 283 29 2 1 9 TRACK Entity TONT ereat a a a AE EA a 283 29 21 60 Program and Program Stage nirus a a 284 29 2 1 7 Aggregation query builder ssssssssssrsssrrsrrrsrrrrrrerrresrrrrrrrrrrsrrrrrene 290 29 2 1 8 Schedule automated message reminder ssssssssssrrsrrrsrrrerrrsrrrsre 293 29 2 1 9 Schedule automated aggregation sssssesserssrrsrrrsrrrerrrsrrrerrrerrree 294 29 22 INGQIVIGUalFOCOLOS ariii a a a a a a neta 294 29252 1 FING AGG INSTANCE ariaa E a OA AA 295 29 2 22 VISIE SCH COULC or enr E A a Neen 301 22 23 LOSE TO TOMOW UD raain E RA A AE AA 301 292 2 Data CU
290. h Hybia Welde option Step 4 Choose a current and active program stage for entering the data Activity List Details 16 24 months after birth Navigate to Beneficiary List Home the screen shot with an example with 16 24 months after birth option You can also see the beneficiary s information ID gender Date of Birth and Blood Group by clicking on the Details on top of the list appeared 225 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Activity List 16 24 months after birth Navigate to Beneficiary List Home The details information of the chosen beneficiary Detail For Hyiab Welde ID 1149367 Gender Female Date of Birth 2010 11 3 Blood Group A Navigate to Activity List Home 2 Beneficiary Registration Registry a new beneficiary 226 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Menu Data Entry Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version Step 1 Choose an OrganisationUnit Please select organisation unit Ngelehun CHC Navigate to Home Step 2 Fill in the Beneficiary Registration form 227 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Beneficiary Registration FullName Gender Male Date of Birth yyyy MM dd Blood Group Please select Navigate to Organisation Unit Home There necessary information Full Name Gender Date of Birth and Blood Group
291. h Certificate users only need to input treatment case and then export reports 29 2 User guide 280 There are two additions for tracker module Tracker Programs Attributes 1 Programs Attributes Definition meta data include attributes attribute groups relationships custom registration form program and program stages validation for program and formula to generate aggregate data value 2 Individual records Support main functions for entity registration tracking information and individual reports 29 2 1 Programs Attributes The content in this part is for the expert users or administrative users who are capable and responsible for development and change Each of the options for the maintenance will be described in the following section The options for the maintenance will be described in the following section Attribute Create modify and view entity attributes An attribute can be used to register extra information for a entity and shared to one many health programmes Attribute Group Create modify and view entity attribute groups Groups makes it more convenient to display attributes into default registration form by groups Relationship Type Create modify and view relationship types A relationship is typically wife and husband or mother and child Tracked entity Create modify types of entities which can be tracked through the system which can be anything from persons to commodities e
292. h geographic longitude and latitude For a more detailed reference of geographic coordinates please refer to this site If you have already reprojected the geographic data to the geographic latitude longitude EPSG 4326 system there is no need to explicitly define the output coordinate system assuming that ogr2ogr can determine the input spatial reference system Note that most shapefiles are using the EPSG 4326 system You can determine the spatial reference system by executing the following command ogrinfo al so filename shp Assuming that the projection is reported to be EPSG 27700 by ogrinfo we can transform it to EPSG 4326 by executing the following command ogr2ogr s_srs EPSG 27700 t_srs EPSG 4326 f GML filename gml filename shp If the geographic data is already in EPSG 4326 you can simply transform the shapefile to GML by executing the following command ogr2ogr f GML filename gml filename shp You will find the created GML file in the same folder as the shapefile Step 3 Prepare the GML file Unfortunately the GML file is not ready for importation yet Open it in a robust text editor like Geany Linux or Notepad Windows GML is an XML based format which means that you will recognize the regular XML tag hierarchy In the GML file an organisation unit is represented as a lt gml featureMember gt Inside the feature members we usually find a lot of attributes but we are just going to import their coordinates In
293. he University of Oslo 2005 http urn nb no URN NBN no 11506 jJacucci06exploringtensions Ved Anfinsen Edoardo Jacucci Cover Inger S EXPLORING TENSIONS IN INFORMATION SYSTEMS STANDARDIZATION Two Case Studies from Healthcare in Norway and South Africa 2006 http folk uio no edoardo MatNatAvh Jacucci rettet pdf Gjendem2008 Anders Gjendem Recruitment training communication and Open Source The University of Oslo 2008 http urn nb no URN NBN no 19821 Gjerull2006 Nils Fredrik Gjerull Open Source Software Development in Developing Countries The University of Oslo 2006 http urn nb no URN NBN no 13117 Heldre2006 Thor Helge Heldre Study of a Health Information System pilot project in Tanzania The University of Oslo 2006 http urn nb no URN NBN no 12362 jJacobsen2006 Petter Jacobsen Design and development of a global reporting solution for DHIS The University of Oslo 2006 http urn nb no URN NBN no 12659 BraaStandards2007 Arthur Heywood Woishet Mohammed Vincent Shaw J rn Braa Ole Hanseth DEVELOPING HEALTH INFORMATION SYSTEMS IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES THE FLEXIBLE STANDARDS STRATEGY MIS Q 31 1 2007 http neim ifi uio no vshaw Files Published 20Papers 20included 20in 20Kappa 4 Braa Flexible 20standards pdf BraaSahayPowerToUsers Sundeep Sahay J rn Braa Integrated Health Information Architecture Power to the Users Matrix Publishers 384 2012 Lewis2005 Joh
294. he format of those command will be command s name text for example alert one emergency case in A town Commands which has ALERT PARSER will be received from users only Mobile SMS Service 24 5 SMS Service SMS Service is generic service used for sending receiving sms Any other Dhis2 module can include this service and utilize it to send and receive sms from users or workers in the field 24 5 1 Setting up SMS service There are few pre requisite steps in order to make this service functional There are two way to complete these steps One way is to configure gateway from GUI in Mobile Configuration Module The other way is to use SMS Web Api e Configure SMS Gateway e Start SMS Service 24 5 1 1 Configure SMS Gateway There are five different types of Gateways supported by SMS Service SMS can be sent if any one of the gateway is configured If more than one gateways are present then they will be used in round robin fashion for load balancing There are different parameters for different type of gateway Gateway can be configured in GUI in Mobile Configuration Module as shown in the figure More information about parameters needed to configure gateway can be found in Gateway Configuraitons 24 5 1 2 Start SMS Service Once gateway configuration is in place then SMS service can be started stopped from Mobile Configuration Module as shown in the figure This can also be done using SMS web api 24 5 2 Gateway Configurati
295. he number of previous pregnancies that ended with abortion d2 countlfValue previousPregnancyOutcome Abortion d2 countifZerdBosrcefield Counts the number of values that is zero or positive entered for the source field in the 317 Program rules Defining actions Function Arguments Description argument The source field parameter is the name of one of the defined source fields in the program see example Example usage where fundalHeightDiscrepancy is one of the source fields in program and it can be either positive or negative The following function will produce the number of positive occurrences Z couneIEZCrOoros Fundalleci ght Diserepancy d2 hasValue sourcefield Evaluates to true of the argument source field contains a value false if no value is entered Example usage to find if the source field currentPregnancyOutcome ts yet filled in d2 hasValue currentPregnancyOutcome d2 zpvc object object object Returns the number of numeric zero and positive values among the given object arguments Can be provided with any number of arguments d2 condition boolean expr true val false val Evaluates the conditional expression and if true returns the true value if false returns the false value The conditional expression must be quoted i Tip unctions can be nested within each other and with subexpressions to
296. he pregnancy There is no clear divide between early and late complications in the form and therefore we gave up trying to make this distinction in the database Family Planning Services table This table has 2 dimensions the family planning method contraceptive and whether the client is new or continuing We ended up with one data element only Family planning clients and then added two categories FP method with all the contraceptives as options and another category FP client type with new or continuing as options This way it will be easy to get the total number of family planning clients which is the major value to look at in data analysis and from there you can easily get the details on method or how many new clients there are 3 8 2 Step by step approach to designing datasets 34 1 Identify the different tables or sub datasets in the paper form that share the same dimensions 2 For each table identify the dimensions that describe the data fields 3 Identify the key dimension the one that makes most sense to look at in isolation when the others are collapsed summed up This is your data element dimension the starting point and core of your multidimensional model sub dataset The data element dimension can be a merger of two or more dimensions if that makes more sense for data analysis The key is to identify which total that makes most sense to look at alone when the other dimensions are collapsed 4 For all other add
297. hen you want to track longitudinally the progress of a patient over time For example if we want to track how a patient is adhering to and responding to the process of TB treatment typically taking place over 6 9 months we would need patient based data Aggregated data is the consolidation of data relating to multiple patients and therefore cannot be traced back to a specific patient They are merely counts such as incidences of Malaria TB or other diseases Typically the routine data that a health facility deals with is this kind of aggregated statistics and is used for the generation of routine reports and indicators and most importantly strategic planning within the health system Aggregate data cannot provide the type of detailed information which patient level data can but is crucial for planning and guidance of the performance of health systems In between the two you have case based data or anonymous patient data A lot of details can be collected about a specific health event without necessarily having to identify the patient it involved Inpatient or outpatient visits a new case of cholera a maternal death etc are common use cases where one would like to collect a lot more detail that just adding to the total count of cases or visits This data is often collected in line listing type of forms or in more detailed audit forms It is different from aggregate data in the sense that it contains many details about a specific event
298. hey work in different ways and should be used for different purposes The main point is that text fields are just placeholders that will be filled with the correct text from the report table when the report is run while text labels will stay the way they are when the report is run 19 4 2 3 1 Static text Static text are text plain text labels that can be edited normally There are two ways to edit text labels e By double clicking in the text box e By using the Static text properties in the Properties panel v Static text properties Text TBcureSptumsm _ 19 4 2 3 2 Text fields Text fields are formulas that will be filled from the report table when the report is run Unlike Static text these can not be edited in a normal way However they can be manipulated in various ways to ensure that the desired output will be produced There are three ways to edit the text fields e By right clicking on the text box and selecting Edit expression e By double clicking the text field not recommended as this will not bring up the expression editor e By using the Text field properties in the Properties panel y Text field properties Text Field Expression F organisationu Expression Class java lang String Blank When Null v 139 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport Field pattern i Padding And Borders Hyperlink Text fields can represent either numbers or text so that they can
299. hich makes them ideal for printing as well as sharing offline Dataset reports Dataset reports are simply a printer friendly way to look at the data entry forms with either raw or aggregated data over time or place The design used in data entry will be used also in the data set reports This will work only for data sets that has a custom data entry form set up Dashboard The fastest way to view your data The dashboard can display up to four updated charts as well as shortcuts to your favourite reports report tables and map views Each user can configure a personal dashboard Data Visualizer Do flexible visualizations of your data as charts and data tables Any number of indicators and data elements can be included Several chart types are available such as column stacked column line area and pie charts The charts can be saved in order to be easily retrieved later and can also be put on your personal dashboard Charts can be downloaded as image and PDF files to your local computer Orgunit distribution reports These reports are generated off the orgunit group set information and can show what types and how many of each type of health facilities that are located ina given area any level in the hierarchy These reports are automatically generated and display the information in both tables and charts and downloads in PDF excel and CSV are available Reporting rate summary These reports provide a nice overview of how many faciliti
300. hide dataelement C Aggregation Query Builder Hide systolic followup Translate tapoint if it was OK below 120 in the first visit Scheduling Biker Show details Automated Message Reminder Automated Aggregation 31 3 Program rule anatomy During data entry program rules expressions are evaluated each time the user interface is displayed and each time a data element is changed Most types of actions will take effect immediately as the user enters values in tracker or event capture Each program rule is given a name and description see section Program rule details These fields are not shown to the end user and are only meant for the program administrator 313 Program rules Adding source fields The active part of a program rule consists of an expression consult Section 31 5 Defining expressions for details more actions see section Section 31 6 Defining actions for details that will be performed if the expression is true The expression is built from operators user defined static values and and source fields see Section 31 4 Adding source fields for details The source fields represent attribute and data element values which will be evaluated as part of the expression District Health Information Software 2 see Apps Profile Edit program rule TrackerTest Program rule details Name Hide blood pressure fields Description Hide the blood pressure fields in case the 1 Sourc
301. higher levels only after it has been approved for all that organisation unit s descendants at lower levels for the same data set and period After a data set period and organisation unit combination has been approved the form will be locked and any further data entry or modification will be prohibited unless it is later un approved For example the following diagram illustrates that data has already been approved for organisation units C and D for a given data set and period It may now be approved for organisation unit B for the same data set and period But it is not ready to be approved for organization unit A Before it can be approved for organisation unit A it must be approved for B and for any other children of organisation unit A for that data set and period Organisation units A Not ready to approve B Ready to approve C Approved D Approved Figure 20 1 Approving at organisation units 20 1 Approving and accepting DHIS2 supports two different types of approval processes either a one step process where the data is approved at each level or a two step process where data is first approved and then accepted at each level This is illustrated in the following diagram ia Approve nn Approve 1 step per approval level 2 steps per approval level Approve Approve Accept Figure 20 2 Approving and accepting In the one step process data is approved at one level and then approved at the next higher lev
302. his year when we created the report table If the reporting month selected automatically or by the user is for example May 2010 the report table will calculate the values for the three selected indicators for May 2010 the Reporting month and the accumulated values for the three selected indicators so far in 2010 so far This year Thus we will end up with six values for each of the organisation units Indicator A May 2010 Indicator B May 2010 Indicator C May 2010 Indicator A so far in 2010 Indicator B so far in 2010 and Indicator C so far in 2010 Report parameters Report parameters make the reports more generic and reusable over time and for different organisation units These parameters will pop up when generating the report table or running a report based on the report table The users will select what they want to see in the report There are four possible report parameters and you can select none all or any combination e Reporting month 133 Setting up report functionality Data element dimension tables This decides which month will be used when the system is choosing the relative periods If the box it not checked the user will not be asked for the reporting month when the report is generated the current month will then be used e Grand parent organisation unit Select the grand parent of all the orgunit children and grand children you want listed in the report E g a selected region will
303. hould describe data about the infrastructure of organisation units Examples of such infrastructural data elements could be population doctors beds Internet connectivity and climate This infrastructural data can currently be viewed in the GIS module in the facility information sheet Infrastructural period type Sets the frequency for which the data elements in the infrastructural data elements group are captured This will typically be yearly When viewing the infrastructural data you will be able to select the time period of the data source Default relative period for analysis Defines the relative period to use by default in analytics apps such as pivot table charts and GIS This relative period will be automatically selected when the apps are opened and should likely be the most commonly used relative period among your users Feedback recipients This setting defines a user group where the members will receive all messages being sent through the function for writing feedback in the dashboard module This will typically be members of the super user team who are able to support and answer questions coming from end users Maximum offline organisation unit levels This setting defines how many levels in the organisation unit hierarchy will be available offline in the organisation unit tree widget Under normal circumstances you can leaves this on the lowest level which is default behavior Setting it to a higher level might be useful in order
304. ht change over time Days A special operator D is available in formulas This operator will always provide the number of days for a given indicator calculation As an example if you wish to calculate the Percentage of time vaccine refrigerator was non functional you could define the numerator as D Number of days vaccine refrigerator was available D For example if the fridge was available 25 days in June the indicator would be calculated as 30 25 25 100 17 If you were however to calculate the total for Quarter 1 the number of days D would be equal to 31 28 31 90 Thus the D parameter will always be the number of days in the period of interest Org unit group counts Org unit groups can be utilized in formulas and will be substituted by the number of organisation units in the group During aggregation the org units in the group will be intersected with the part of the org unit hierarchy being requested As an example this lets you use the number of public facilities in a specific district in indicators This is useful e g when creating facility infrastructure surveys and reports Constants Indicators may make use of constants Constants are static values which will be applied uniformly to the indicator formula Constants are applied AFTER data element values have been aggregated Indicator types Indicator types simply define a factor that will be applied during aggregation Indicator values that are calculate durin
305. i ii aye Tt anje e E Feedback report B DE 1 DE11 DE4 DES Indicator 1 a z i gt ez A DE 15 DE15 A i In this example we see that data elements from multiple forms can be combined to create a given indicator As a more concrete example one might collect Population under one year of age in an annual data set by district and then collect a data element like Fully immunized children by month at the facility level By annualizing the population we can generate an approximation of the effective monthly population and combining this with the aggregate total of the number of fully immunized children by month it would be possible to generate an inidicator Fully immunized coverage consisting of the aggregated total of children who are fully immunized divided by the effective monthly population 3 6 Extended examples of data elements and forms 26 The table below combines data element the two group sets Diagnosis all the diseases and Morbidity Mortality New cases Follow ups Referrals Deaths with the data element category PHU Community Deaths are captured in a separate form with other dimensions e g the PHU Community than morbidity PHU Diarrhoea With Blood Dysentery Saws o o ooo This output table combines the two data element categories HIV_Age and Gender with the data element group set ART Group The group enables subtotals for staging and entry points summing up the data elements
306. i colons The file can be opened in a text editor as well as in a spread sheet program such as Excel e Download as PDF Downloads a generated PDF file The data will be presented in a similar layout as the generated table you are already viewing in DHIS 2 e Download as Report Downloads a styled PDF file In addition to present the data in a table layout this file also presents a chart showing the aggregated data from all the chosen periods and the parent organisation unit chosen for the report table The report is generated using the Jasper report engine Download as JRXML Downloads the design file for the generated Report described in the previous bullet The design file with the file ending jrxml can be opened in the Jasper iReport Designer software If you plan to design standard reports this is the starting point Setting up report functionality Standard reports 19 4 Standard reports 19 4 1 What is a standard report A standard report is a manually designed report that presents data in a manually specified layout Standard reports can be based either on report tables or SQL queries Both approaches are described in the following sections The main advantage of using report tables is that of simplicity no special development skills are required In cases where you have special requirements or need to utilize additional parts of the DHIS database you might want to use a SQL based standard report In any case you w
307. icare HQ Can edit and view T x Cancel Save You can share your report with everyone or with a number of user groups External access can be enabled to allow this resource to be shared with everyone including users which cannot logon to DHIS2 This is useful for sharing public resources with external systems Note that if objects are shared externally then they are visible to anyone who has access to the URL which provides the resource without any login credentials Next to Public access you can choose your public access option None Can view or Can edit and view Public access refers to users which are logged into the system Edit also implies deleting the report To share with a group simply start typing the name of the group and the Search for user groups input field and select your desired group Click on the icon next to the input field to share with that group For each group you can set an access option similar to public access Sharing with a user group implies that all users in that group will get access to the shared object To create a user group you can go to the dashboard module and click on Groups This will lead you to the list of groups where you can click Add new in the top right corner Creating user groups is open for everyone from the dashboard module 69 Sharing Sharing and access control 8 2 Sharing and access control The objects which support sharing are indicator indicator group indicato
308. icators Maintenance module datadictionary See Data Entry module M_dhis web dataentry See Data Mart module M_dhis web datamart See Data Set Maintenance module M_dhis web maintenance dataset See Data Visualizer module M_dhis web visualizer See Event Capture module M_dhis web event capture See Event Reports module M_dhis web event reports See Event Visualizer module M_dhis web event visualizer See Excel Report module M_dhis web excel reporting See Export Data Mart Module M_dhis web exportdatamart See FRED API Module M_dhis web api fred See GIS module M_dhis web gis See GIS module M_dhis web mapping See Import Export module M_dhis web importexport See Individual Records M_dhis web caseentry See Light module M_dhis web light See Line listing DataEntry module M_dhis web dataentry national See Mobile Maintenance module M_dhis web maintenance mobile See NRHM Reports module M_dhis web reports User authorities See Organisation Unit Maintenance module M_dhis web maintenance organisationunit See Pivot Table module M_dhis web pivot See Report module M_dhis web reporting See Settings Maintenance module M_dhis web maintenance settings See Smartphone module M_dhis web mobile See SMS module M_dhis web sms See Tracked Entity And Programs mo
309. ies that only values which is completely identical to your search query will be returned For data elements of type option set you can select any of the options from the drop down box by using the down wards arrow or by start typing directly in the box to filter for options The event layer also requires you to select the time span for when the events took place using the start date and end date date pickers under the Periods section as well as the organisation units to include in the query under the Organisation units section To get information for an event you can simply click on it This will open a dialog which displays all available information for that event The layer menu also offers to put labels on the map and to close the layer which completely resets the layer content Using GIS Facility layer 17 2 2 Facility layer 8 B B aots Legend download share E Table ih Chart Map Home gt gt gt Layerstack transparency w E Faciity layer x 7 Organisation unit group set lt gt 01 gt 2 vv Type NA ceed Organisation units ws 7 2s 7 PHU bd ae qrer e E m as g Siera Leone government W nof B y n m fe Piaje aay One whit y f Pelican z E E Bonthe 4 Water Taxi Q Es oOo Kailahun B Kambia Es a Kenema 4 we Koinadugu Es ea Kono 4 Oo Moyamba J Port Loko 4 Oo Pujehun S Tonkoli E 3 Westem Area 4 lanl Freetown
310. igned to at least one organisation unit will be shown in this list 305 Tracker Individual records 2 Select a date range from From and To fields 3 Select organisation unit level where entity data will be select to aggregate There are 3 options All Individual data will be aggregated from both selected organisation unit and its children Children only Individual data will be aggregated from the children of the selected organisation unit Selected Individual data will be aggregated from the selected organisation unit 4 Click on the Aggregate and Save button to execute aggregate function and save data values into database directly Besides click Preview button to preview data values and you can check select any data values you want to input them into database The entity aggregation result page is shown after running successfully Manual aggregation Tracked entity instance aggregation result Back Save selected values Save all values Ngelehun CHC January 2012 w Data element Category option combo Organisation unit Value Operator Number of children BCG default Ngelehun CHC z In Manual entity aggregation result preview page e Click Save all values button to save all aggregated data values e Click Orange arrow icon next to period name for showing list of aggregated data values at this period Select only necessary data values and click Save selected values to save them e Click Show details ic
311. ile Import process When you are done selecting Method and LastUpdated you can begin the import by clicking on the Import button This process might take a long time depending on how many data values you are importing On a reasonable spec computer the import takes about 2 million records per 30 minutes 21 2 5 2 DHIS 1 4 XML Import 178 Import though XML data from DHIS 1 4 is also possible using the standard DHIS 1 4 export format Just be sure that the DHIS 1 4 export format has been set to DHIS 2 as illustrated in the screen shot below After the data has been exported by DHIS 1 4 you can import the data by choosing Services gt Import Export gt DHIS 1 4 Import gt DHIS 1 4 XML Import and proceeding via the procedure outline in the previous section Export Import Export to XML Text Enter Export criteria include Data Sets All OrgUnits below C Routine PHC Dataset HIA2 zm Zambia Ministry of Health Browse C Disease Reports HIA1 Page 1 Part 1 C Disease Reports HIA1 Page 1 Part 2 C Disease Reports HIA1 Page 2 Part 1 Export Period C Disease Reports HIA1 Page 2 Part 2 l Deco e C Disease Reports HIA1 Page 1 F C Disease Reports HIA1 Page 2 w sis _ Facility Semi Permanent Data Include records modified since 2011 02 01 C Equipment Standard Prices C Equipment Standard List Export File Format C Equipment Inventory All O HMIS HF Data Quality OHIS14 DHIS13 O HMI
312. ile can be used to transmit meta data information to DHIS 1 4 systems Simply select the data elements and indicators that you want and click Export to begin the export process 183 Import and export Exporting data to other systems DHIS 1 4 XML Detailed Metadata Export Available Data Elements Filter Selected Data Elements f iter Filter Clear All dataelement group v Additional notes related to facility Accute Flaccid Paralysis Deaths lt 5 yrs Admission Date Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP follow up Age gt Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP new Albendazole given at ANC 2nd trimester Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP referrals All access routes are clearly marked and safe Sanna All other follow ups All other new All other referrals lt lt All sterilisation equipment is validated licensed An alternative to communicate if telephone line is off is Anaemia follow up Anaemia new Anaemia referrals gt gt Available Indicators Filter Selected Indicators iter Filter Clear All indicator group v ANC gt 4 Coverage ANC 1 Coverage ANC IPT 1 Coverage ANC 1 3 Dropout Rate ANC IPT 2 Coverage gt ANC 2 Coverage ANC LLITN coverage ANC TT2 coverage ANC visits per clinical professional BCG Coverage lt 1y ANC 3 Coverage gt gt BCG Stock PHU lt lt Births attended by skilled health personnel estimated pr Births attended by skilled health personne
313. iled instructions 13 1 Indicators Indicators are composed of multiple data elements and typically consist of a numerator and denominator Calculated totals do not have a denominator Indicators are never entered directly in DHIS2 through data entry but are derived from combinations of data elements and factors Indicators are used to calculate coverage rates incidence and other values are a result of data element values that have been entered into the system To access the Indicator maintains page press Maintenance gt Data Element and Indicators and then pressing Indicator from the left pane or the main dialog Similar to data elements you can add delete modify and view extra information about the indicators in the system 89 Indicators Indicators 90 Indicator management Filter by name Filter Clear Selectdata dictionary Sort Add new Name E ANC 1 Coverage Sharing settings ANC 1 3 Dropout Rate L7 Edit ANC 2 Coverage Translate ANC 3 Coverage W W Remove ANC gt 4 Coverage Show details ANC IPT 1 Coverage ANC IPT 2 Coverage ANC LLITN coverage Indicators can be filtered by entering the name or a part of the indicator name in the Filter by name field Similar to data elements indicators can be added by pressing the Add new button Other operations available from the context menu available by clicking on the indicator name are as follows e Sharing settings Assi
314. ill be able to utilize report parameters in order to create dynamic reports The following guide will use the report table approach while the SQL approach is covered towards the end 19 4 2 Designing Standard reports in iReport Jasper iReport Designer is a tool for creating reports that can be used as Standard Reports in DHIS 2 The tool allows for the creation of standard report templates that can easily be exported from DHIS 2 with up to date data The process of creating reports involves four major steps 1 A report table must be created in DHIS 2 with the indicators data elements datasets to be used in the report 2 You have to run the report table and download the design file Click the Download as JRXML button 3 Open the downloaded jrxml file using the free software Jasper iReport Designer to edit the layout of the report 4 The edited report can then be uploaded to DHIS 2 to be used as a Standard report If you want to preview your report during the design in iReport you actually have to upload your file to DHIS 2 to see how it looks These four steps will be describe in detail in the coming sections In general when you are making standard reports you should have a clear idea of how it should look before you even make the report table as how the report table is designed has implications for how the report can be formatted in iReport For example what crosstab dimensions are selected in the report table has consequence
315. ill be listed Just click on the program for enrollment by specifying the date of enrollment and the date of incident See the example Enroll Nguyen Van Ato Child Health Program Tracking Enrollment Date yyyy MM dd Navigate to Program List Home After clicking on the ENROLL button if successful the program enrolled will be listed under Enrolled Programs for lt Name of the beneficiary gt see the example Enrolled Program s for Nguyen Van A Successfully Saved Child Health Program Tracking Other Programs Navigate to Beneficiary Search Home 4 Messages Manage the messages and discussions from the server Message reply is available 230 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Menu Data Entry Messages 2 Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version The number showed is the unread messages Click on that to view the list of the messages the unread messages are in bold and dark blue color dashboard Navigate to Home Then you can pick up the message topic for the discussions by leaving the reply message see this example 231 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser DHIS version 2 7 is deployed data entry Reply from Administrator DHIS Hi all version 2 7 of DHIS is deployed It contains a range of new functionality including chart options translation of databas content locking of data entry forms and pre defined options i
316. ill be saved locally and can be uploaded to the server the next time the machine Is online and the user has logged into the server If the selected program s program stage is configured to capture GPS coordinate the app provides two ways of capturing coordinates The first is two simple text boxes so that a user can fillin proper latitude and longitude values The second option is using google map where it is possible to point and click for coordinates The google map option also displays polygons and points that are defined for organisation units Another feature availble in the Event capture app is skip logic and validation functionality Using program rules engine it is possible to put some rules for a program and take some actions when the rules are met Currently supported actions are skipping hiding a dataelement or an entire section display warning for some soft validations or display error for hard validations For example if a rule defined says DataElementA gt 100 and has action as show warning and message Datalelement A can not have value more than 100 What will happen during data entry is the moment a value greater than 100 is entered for data element A the warning message will be dsiplayed Because it is just a warning it is still possible to keep the value more than 100 However if the action is Show error the error message will be displayed and the system will also ignore the value i e it is not possible to store a valu
317. in a dataset Let us Suppose we create two categories called Implementing partner and Projects Each of these categories would be created with a dimension type of Attribute Finally a category combination called Implementing partners and projects would be created with these two categories and assigned a dimension type of Attribute Finally we can use this dimension to apply an attribute to the dataset ART monthly summary by choosing the Implementing partners and projects as the Combination of categories The following screen shot of an example data entry screen illustrates all of these concepts a Geol Data Entry x Ngelehun sie January nat ART enrollment stage 2 Male 15 24y EbSierra Leone CHB Run validation ElBadjia Organisation Unit Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC Print fom Njandama MCHP Print blank form HHEBaoma Bargbe Bargbo HBumpe Ngao HHGbo HHJaiama Bongor HHakua Komboya HEALTH SECTOR RESPONSE GROUP ARGIMOHS H ugbu HNiawa Lenga ART CLINICAL CARE FORM MONTHLY DATA COLLECTION SUMMARY FORM GSelenga Tikonko MALE FEMALE GHValunia Los Clinical Carel ART Indicators Wonde Bombali lt 15 15 24 25 49 gt 49 lt 15 15 HBonthe HHKailahun STAGE tKambia aKenema STAGE Il Note that when data is entered an Implementing partner and Project can be selected Each data value recorded in this data entry screen would be assigned a specific combination of these categories as an attribute These att
318. in that group Subtotals for either age groups and gender would be other possible columns to easily include here Data dimensions in DHIS2 How this works in pivot tables a ae E enrollment stage 1 OF SP amp ART staging total ART entry points ARTe ntry point Old HRE we i A ah ART entry point Other ART entry point Transfer in ART entry point PMTCT ART entry point transfer out ART entry point Walk ART entry points total 3 How this works in pivot tables When doing data analysis in Excel pivot tables or any other OLAP based tool the dimensions become extremely powerful in providing many different views into the data Each data element category or group set become a pivot field and the options or groups become values within each of these fields In fact categories and groupsets are treated exactly the same way in pivot tables and so are orgunits periods and data elements All these become dimensions to the data value that can be used to rearrange pivot filter and to drill down into the data Here we will show some examples of how the data dimensions are used in pivot tables Using the example of morbidity and mortality data a pivot table can show how the dimensions can be used to view data for different aggregation levels The completely aggregated number is viewed when none of the pivot fields are arranged in the table area as column or row fields but are listed above the table itself a
319. in tracker M and E Officer M and E Officer MNCH PNC Adult Woman program Access to the MNCH program in tracker SUpPeruser SUPeruser System administrator ALL System administrator TB program Access to the TB program in Tracker No of pages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to page 1 Go aa a p pp The following screen will open and here in the first text box you need to give a Name of the Role such as Super User Admin User etc The second text box called Description gives more information about the type of User Role that is being created for e g State Admin User District Data Entry 63 User management User management Create new user role This object will be created with public edit and view rights Details Name Description Available Selected Filter Filter Clear ART monthly summary Child Health Clinical Monitoring Checklist EPI Stock Facility Assessment Data sets HIV Peadiatric monthly summary Inpatient Morbidity Mortality Summary Life Saving Commodities MNCH Quarterly Report Morbidity Mortality lt 5 years am lasinn Filter Filter Clear ALL Accept data at lower levels Search Activity Plan Add Update Program Indicator Add Tracked Entity Form Authorities Single Event Without Registration Data Entry Approve data Approve data at lower levels Archive data Add Update Attribute Delete Attribute Delete Data Element Category Combo Adal indnen Men snen Masa Mla mane One
320. ing allows for altering the layout resizing and removing items renaming deleting the dashboard etc 9 4 Messages and feedback DHIS2 has certain functions to facilitate communication between different users and user groups This type of communication is important to facilitate feedback regarding data quality timeliness of submissions or to simply answer a question which a particular user may Nave Feedback messages are sent to a particular group of users and can be sent by all users who have access to the dashboard module In order to enable the receipt of feedback messages sent from the dashboard you must set the system setting Feedback recipients which is available from the Maintenance gt System settings dialog Be sure to define a user group e g Feedback recipients with all of the users who should receive feedback messages Refer to the section in this manual on User groups for more information of how to do this Once the Feedback recipients user group has been defined each time a feedback message is sent it will appear aS a message in each of the Feedback recipients message queue within DHIS2 Note that messages will not be sent to users email addresses but will only appear within the DHIS2 application To send a new feedback message simply select Write feedback from the dashboard Provide a subject and text in the respective text boxes The message will appear in all of the specified users message queue Messages can
321. ing collected or analysed In some contexts this is referred to an indicator but in DHIS 2 we call this unit of collection and analysis a data element The data element often represents a count of something and its name describes what is being counted e g BCG doses given or Malaria cases When data is collected validated analysed reported or presented it is the data elements or expressions built upon data elements that describes the WHAT of the data As such the data elements become important for all aspects of the system and they decide not only how data is collected but more importantly how the data values are represented in the database which again decides how data can be analysed and presented It is possible to add more details to this WHAT dimension through the disaggregation dimension called data element categories Some common categories are Age and Gender but any category can be added by the user and linked to specific data elements The combination of a data element s name and its assigned category defines the smallest unit of collection and analysis available in the system and hence describes the raw data in the database Aggregations can be done when zooming out of this dimension but no further drill down is possible so designing data elements and categories define the detail of the analysis available to the system on the WHAT dimension Changes to data elements and categories at a later Stage in the process might be complic
322. ing system which is not as prone for virus infections as MS Windows Software application Being able to distribute new functionality and bug fixes to the health information software to users are essential for maintenance and improvement of the system Relying on the end users to perform software upgrades requires extensive training and a high level of competence on their side as upgrading software applications might a technically challenging task Relying on a national super user team to maintain the software implies a lot of traveling e Database maintenance A prerequisite for an efficient system is that all users enter data with a standardized meta data set data elements forms etc As with the previous point about software upgrades distribution of changes to the meta data set to numerous offline installations requires end user competence if the updates are sent electronically or a well organized super user team Failure to keep the meta data set synchronized will lead to loss What is DHIS 2 Deployment strategies online vs offline of ability to move data from the districts and or an inconsistent national database since the data entered for instance at the district level will not be compatible with the data at the national level 1 4 3 2 Online deployment An online deployment implies that a single instance of the application is set up on a server connected to the Internet All users clients connect to the online central server over
323. ing up the correct values in the DHIS 2 database and going through the GML file adding the properties for each corresponding feature member might be necessary In any of the cases it is important to realize that the identifier used must uniquely identify an organisation unit e g if there are two organisation units in the database of the same name or code these cannot be matched properly on either As uid is the only guaranteed to be unque identifier it is the most robust choice However as matching on name is usually easier given that the name is already part of your data a viable approach to solving uniqueness conflicts can be to match any non uniquely named organisation units on a different identifier uid preferrably and the rest on their names As can be seen in the above table there is a matching priority meaning is any two or more identifiers are provided for the same feature member matching will be performed on the highest priority identifier Note also the valid properties which can be used in you GML The namespace prefix is not important as only the local name is used A common pitfall of performing preparation of the GML files is syntax or element naming errors Therefore please make sure that all properties of the GML file are started and terminated with correctly corresponding tags Also make sure the properties follow either of the given valid spellings of the property name The identifying properties are supposed to look like
324. inipins reise A 62 Zde User Managemen ces et e A E E a a a 64 FiA SCE Dy Organisat ONUN ersa a a eae a 67 llas Managed USOS arrr a E a ek 67 FGO OPENID SUDPOTE eria A E A SR 68 o oNN oeo E E OE TAE a O E 69 oal SNOMNGOr OD CClS sirai a a a a a a teseuiaaiads 69 9 2 Sanno and ACCESS CONTON prso iina veda a ATA EEANN 70 82 Salva DIE cri T A a NA 70 DTD ASO OU OS zmei a A E 2a Sate eae A pane ae aad ba Pana cana 73 9 1 Setting UD TNE GaSNDOOLC kina vixviaisaiwiawnineienedrbiee dan siaeieiewev dian vaxaie law anne 73 9 2 Managing tne DaSNDO al G citi asicsctonerresetoceivesteaiduethibansenennecdrenseraesthrorispewearseny ltt 74 2 Dasnpoard SNANG eea E A A ee oleWh 74 94 Messages and TCCUDACK asia insicaseyvtuivs a iaennpdaanderigeeraatih AE A 75 VODEN y a E E E E ne nee eee eens eee meta 71 Os Data eN WwW DAIS 2 eeni a AE A AE A Beads 77 DHIS 2 User Manual Contents 10 1 1 Selecting the data entry form ccccccccceceeceeeceeeeeseeeeaeaeseeseaeseeneaeaeanenes 77 TOL Z IENECHING data aenn nne a ania aad mune tesa N 78 10 1 3 Editing and deleting data ssssesssssrrssrrsrrrrrrrsrrrerrnsrrnsrrrsrrnrrrnerrrsrrnerrnne 79 10 154 Valiaating data In LAE TOn oucirirara aiea a EE E A A 79 tO LS OMINe Gatay CAY erriren an reer eare 79 10 1 6 Multi organisation unit data entry sssssessrssrresrrrsrrrrrrrrrreerrerrrrrrreerrerrne 80 ti Using Data Qualty TUMCTION GME seie A E E a aoe 81 11 1 Overview o
325. iod January 2015 v Prev year Next year Baoma Bargbe Implementing Partner Hope Worldwide T Bargbo Project Improve access to clean water HEALTH SECTOR RESPONSE GROUP ARG MOHS Lugbu ART CLINICAL CARE FORM MONTHLY DATA COLLECTION SUMMARY FORM Cc MALE FEMALE Clinical Care ART Indicators STAGE 10 15 30 20 ooo STAGE II STAGING STAGE III 6 2 Data Entry Forms Once you have assigned a data set to an orgunit that data set will be made available in Data Entry for the orgunits you have assigned it to A default data entry form will then be shown which is simply a list of the data elements belonging to the data set together with a column for inputting the values If your data set contains data elements with a non default categorycombination such as age groups or gender then additional columns will be automatically generated in the default form based on the different options dimensions If you use more than one dataelement category combination you will get multiple columns in the data entry form with different column headings for the options In addition to the default list based data entry form there are two more alternatives the section based form and the custom form 6 2 1 Section forms Section forms allow for a bit more flexibility when it comes to using tabular forms and are quick and simple to design Often your data entry form will need multiple tables with subheadings and sometimes you need
326. iods than the rule period For surveillance rules the skip for missing option is given an additional meaning when data is being collected and aggregated from lower levels of the organisation unit hierarchy When this option is selected and the data is present for some descendants at a lower level but not all descendants at that level the rule is skipped 12 6 Validation Rule Group 88 A validation rule group provides a mechanism for classifying related validation rules Another advantage of using validation rule groups is that it can later be run separately instead of running all validation rules You can also use a validation rule group to configure how users are notified of alerts from scheduled validation runs To do this you should identify a set of validation rules you want to evaluate regularly and a group of users who should be notified of any exceptions to these rules Then e Be sure that one or more user groups are defined containing all the users you wish to notify e Define a validation rule group for a set of validation rules In the section User groups to alert select one or more user groups to be notified By repeating these two steps you can build any set of relations between validation rules and users to fit your needs When you create or edit a validation rule group there is an option called Only organisation unit related users are alerted If this is set to Yes then each user in the group s will be alerted on
327. ion account user role Defines which user role should be given to self registered user accounts To enable self registration of users select any user role from the list To disable it select Do not allow self registration When enabled a link to the self registration form will be displayed on the login page Do not require recaptcha for self registration Whether or not to use reCAPTCHA for user registration Self registration account organisation unit Defines which organisation unit should be associated with self registered users Any organisation unit must be selected in order to enable self registration Enable user account recovery Defines whether users are allowed to restore the password of their account if they forgotten it When enabled a link to the account recovery form will be displayed on the front page User account recovery requires that you have configured email settings SMTP Allow users to grant own user roles Defines whether users should be allowed to grant the user roles they are granted themselves to others Allow assigning object to related objects during add or update Defines whether to allow users to assign an object to a related object in the add or updated object screens As an example you can allow users to assign an organisation unit to data sets and org unit group sets when creating or updating the org unit Require user account password change Require that users change their password every 3 6 12 months P
328. ion to the constraints put on the design of modules by the DHIS portal solution Also these modules must What is DHIS 2 Understanding platform independence be included in the DHIS software when the software is built and deployed on the web server not dynamically during run time In order to overcome these limitations and achieve a looser coupling between the DHIS service layer and additional software artifacts the DHIS development team decided to create a Web API This Web API complies with the rules of the REST architectural style This implies that e The Web API provides a navigable and machine readable interface to the complete DHIS data model For instance one can access the full list of data elements then navigate using the provided hyperlink to a particular data element of interest then navigate using the provided hyperlink to the list of forms which this data element is part of E g clients will only do state transitions using the hyperlinks which are dynamically embedded in the responses e Data is accessed through a uniform interface URLS using a well known protocol There are no fancy transport formats or protocols involved just the well tested well understood HTTP protocol which is the main building block of the Web today This implies that third party developers can develop software using the DHIS data model and data without knowing the DHIS specific technology or complying with the DHIS design constraints e All data i
329. irst adding groups to group sets and then orgunits to groups 4 2 3 Organisation unit groups This function will allow you to add new and manage existing organisation groups and their memberships It can be accessed by choosing Maintenance gt Organisation units gt Organisation Unit group from the main menu To add a new orgunit group click on the Add new button in the top right corner of the list of groups 4 2 3 1 Editing organisation unit groups 38 Click on name of the orgunit group that you want to modify and then select Edit from the context menu which will appear The following properties can be defined in the Edit or Create new window e Name Provide a precise unique and descriptive name for the orgunit group e Short name This name should be less than 25 characters and will be used in certain places in DHIS2 when the number of characters needs to be restricted due to space constraints e Symbol Select a symbol which will be used to display the organisation unit points only when the layer is displayed in the GIS Organisation unit tree selection This is where you assign orgunits to the group The tree Supports multiple selection so select all the orgunits that you want to add the selected ones appear with orange color and click on Save Click on Cancel to undo your changes and return to the list of orgunit groups Use the Select at level button and dropdown if you want to select all orgunits at a specific l
330. is consisting of one expression and one or more actions that is triggered in the user interface when the expression is true 31 2 Setup Program rules can be managed from the Programs and Attributes app Once in the app navigate to Programs A program rule belongs to exactly one program so click on the program for which you want to manage rules and from the context menu navigate to View program rules This will open the list of existing rules if any for this program To add a rule click the Add new button in the top right corner This will open the new rule screen Provide a name short name code description value type expression and list of actions for the rule To edit a rule click on the relevant rule in the list to open the context menu and click Edit This will open the edit rule screen where you can modify the relevant values To remove a rule click on the relevant rule in the list to open the context menu and click Remove Click OK in the confirmation dialog to remove the rule District Health Information Software 2 sss Apps amp Proiile Tracked Entity Program rule management Attribute TrackerTest Attribute Group Add new Relationshi e P typ Filter by name Filter Clear Back Tracked Enti ipti racked Entity Name a Description Hide blood pressure fields Hide the blood pressure fields in case there is no family history of hypertension Programs Program Hide C if low A B Edit age married
331. isation unit S e et etl Sierra Leone Bo Bombali Bonthe Kailahun Kambia Kenema Koinadugu Get report Get chart Kono Moyamba Download as PDF Download as Excel Port Loko __ Download as CSV Pujehun Using Pivot Table Pivot Table overview Chapter 15 Using Pivot Table 15 1 Pivot Table overview The pivot table app enables users to create pivot tables using all available data dimensions in DHIS 2 A pivot table is a dynamic tool for data analysis which lets you quickly summarize and arrange data according to its dimensions Examples of data dimensions in DHIS 2 are data dimension itself e g data elements indicators and events periods representing the time period for which the data represents and the organisational hierarchy representing the geographical location of the data From these dimensions you can freely select dimension items to include in the pivot table Additional dimensions can be created in DHIS2 using the group set functionality to allow for different aggregation pathways such as aggregation by Partner or facility type A pivot table can arrange data dimensions on columns rows and as filters When you place a data dimension on columns the pivot table will display one column per dimension item If you place multiple data dimensions on columns the pivot table will display one column for all combinations of the items in the selected dimensions When you plac
332. istered entity 1 Click Advanced search button Then enter criterion for searching available entities The search result is displayed below User can read the user guide for Advanced search function in entity registration section 2 Click on Data entry icon the first icon under Operations corresponding to the entity you would like to edit to update data values for the event 302 Tracker Individual records 29 2 2 5 Reports The sub module provides two functions for individual reports e Program Summary View the summary report to get an overview of the services provided for a program e Statistical Program Statistical reports on program performance e g drop out rates how many completed every month year counts percentages etc e Program stage completeness Monitor the completeness of events and produce completeness reports for each program 29 2 2 5 1 Program summary The function provides a tool for generating summary list of individual information with color Shown on program stages to identify status of receiving services in each stage To access the program summary report choose Apps gt Individual Records gt Program summary Select a organisation unit which provides services on the left menu Then on the main page select Program Start date End date to get period After select Use data from level s There are three levels Selected Children Only and All Finally click Generate button The result is
333. istration Maintenance 22 3 Maintenance The data maintenance module has five options each described below 22 4 Clear analytics tables Completely empties the analytics tables These tables are used to generate aggregate data for the pivot tables GIS and reports Clear data mart aggregated indicator and data value values The data mart is where DHIS 2 stores aggregated data produced during the export to data mart process This function empties the database table which contains aggregated indicator and data element values Rebuild data mart index Rebuilds the database indexes on the aggregated data generated during a data mart process Clear zero values This function removes zero data values from the database Values registered for data elements with aggregation operator average is not removed as such values will be Significant when aggregating the data contrary to values registered for data elements with aggregation operator sum Reducing the number of data values will improve system performance Clear dataset completeness This function empties the aggregated dataset completeness value table This data is produced and used by report tables Prune periods This function removes all periods which have no registered data values Reducing the number of periods will improve system performance Remove expired invitations Will delete users which represent user account invitations that now have gone past their expiry
334. it hierarchy Orgunits are added one by one as either root unit or a child of a selected unit The left side menu represents the current organisational hierarchy and if you select a unit there you will see its children listed in the main list of orgunits in the middle of the screen When an orgunit is selected in the left side menu you can also add new child units to it To locate an orgunit in the hierarchy you can either navigate through the tree by expanding the branches click on the symbol or search for it by opening the search field click the green symbol above the root of the hierarchy In search you can either search for the orgunit name or its code both will only show exact matches case insensitive To add a new orgunit first select its parent and then click on the Add new button in the top right corner of the list of orgunits To add a new root orgunit make sure no orgunit is selected in the menu and click on Add new The details of adding a new orgunit are explained in Section 4 2 1 1 Editing organisation units 4 2 1 1 Editing organisation units 36 To edit the properties of an existing orgunit first select its parent if any in the left side menu then locate the orgunit in the listed orgunits and click on the name of the orgunit that you want to modify A context menu will appear and you should select Edit Refer to the screen shot below to see how it works DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone aKa Organisation
335. ithout registration Data entry method Used for displaying option set data elements in case entry form as drop down list or radio buttons If this option is selected as radio buttons just option set data elements which the number of option values is less then 8 are displayed as radio buttons Others are displayed as drop down lists Tracked Entity Specify an tracked entity for the program Enrollment details section e Allow future enrollment dates e Allow future incidence dates e Only enroll once per tracked entity instance lifetime Check on it if a entity only can enroll the program one time For example Child Vaccination Program Post mortem examination PSI s IPC process This will avoid a entity enrolling more than one into a program when it doesn t make sense e Show incident date Set show hide incident date field when a entity enroll in this program Tracker Programs Attributes e Description of incident date The date when the entity got the disease or he she has just been committed to an equivalent program for being followed up E g In the Immunization program for child under 1yr old the incident date is the birthday in the maternal program the incident date is the date of last menstrual period LMP e Description of enrollment date The date in which a entity is registered to the system For example the date in which a entity enrolls to the system e Allow enrollment at all orgunits Check on it if user wa
336. itional dimensions identify their options and come up with explanatory names for dimensions and their options 5 Each of these additional dimensions will be a data element category and their options will be category options 6 Combine all categories for each sub dataset into one category combination and assign this to all the data elements in your table or sub dataset if you like 7 7 When you are done with all the tables sub datasets create a new dataset and add all the data elements you have identified in the whole paper form to that dataset 8 8 Your dataset will then consist of a set of data elements that are linked to one or more category combinations Organisation units The organisational hierarchy Chapter 4 Organisation units 4 1 In this section you will learn how to e Create a new organisation unit and build up the organisation unit hierarchy e Create organisation unit groups group sets and assigning organisation units to them e How to make changes to the organisational unit hierarchy The organisational hierarchy The organisational hierarchy defines the organisation structure of the DHIS2 instance such as how the health facilities administrative areas and other geographical areas are arranged with respect to each other It is essentially the where dimension of DHIS2 similar to how periods represent the when or time dimension DHIS2 is structured so that the organisational unit hierarchy is a geographi
337. ive a success message Activity uploaded successfully 256 Mobile Mobile application setup MOK 1A e A finished activity activity that is completed and data is send to server will be move to Completed Activity and it will be display as Uneditable Form User can go to Completed Activity at Activity Main Menu to review 8 Sent Activities 257 Mobile Mobile application setup MWMOKIA From Activity Main Menu screen select Sent Activities to go to the list of all activities you sent to server The structure of this screen is exactly the same as Activity Plan List Select Detail to see the detail of the activity of select Select to go to the Uneditable Screen 258 Mobile Mobile application setup WOK LA LA oS yb Sy planning method E Post Partum fees Contraception Method Injectibles In this screen user can only review the form they sent to server No edit or change is allowed Select Back to go back to Sent Activities screen 24 3 5 4 2 Updating Activity Plan and Program Form After some days weeks or months new Activities may automatically generated from server some Program Stage Data Element may be removed from original form In order to update these new changes we have a Automatic Update Activity Plan and Program function 259 Mobile SMS Command MWMOKIA To amp 11 78 Activity Plan its updating empty 1 This function is completely automatic
338. jia Baoma Bargbe Bargbo Bumpe Ngao Gbo GKakua Komboya Lugbu Niawa Lenga Selenga Tikonko amp Valunia LWonde Bombali Bonthe Kailahun Kambia Kenema Koinadugu Kono Moyamba Port Loko Pujehun Tonkolili Western Area Ngelehun CHC Njandama MCHP WJaiama Bongor Program Summary Report Organisation unit Ngelehun CHC Organisation unit scope Selected Immediate children All children Program MNCH PNC Adult Woman v 2013 04 10 2015 04 20 Go ANC 1st visit ANC Visit 2 4 Delivery PNC Visit Person Event date Organisation unit mnch ANC Visit mnch Weight g mnch Blood Pressure mnch HB mnch Tetatus First name Evelyn 2015 01 01 Ngelehun CHC Last name Jackson 2015 03 10 Ngelehun CHC 4 2015 04 08 Ngelehun CHC 2015 04 15 Ngelehun CHC 3 First name Woman2 2015 03 25 Ngelehun CHC Last name Woman2 First name Baby name 2015 03 17 Ngelehun CHC Last name Father name 2015 04 16 Ngelehun CHC 10 40 Tracker Introduction Chapter 29 Tracker 29 1 Introduction 29 1 1 Background Conventionally public health systems have been recording and reporting aggregate data of the services provided across various health programmes This is crucial in monitoring reach and availability of public health services but it lacks the ability of tracing the persons being provided with these services and quality of these ones For example the aggregate r
339. kind of persons who will receive the message There are 5 options include 1 Tracked entity instance SMS only 2 Attribute users 3 Organisation unit phone number SMS only 4 All users in organisation unit 5 User group e User group Select one user group if Recipients field is selected as User group Message type This is the types of message There are 3 options include 1 Direct SMS This kind of SMS message is linked to the program of an entity after sending to recipients 2 Message 3 Both e Parameters Provide parameters which are used for generating a message for each entity The parameters include entity name program name incident date days since incident date enrollment date days since enrollment date organisation unit name Double click on an option to insert it into template message field below e Message Content of template message E g Dear patient name please come to your appointment at due date 29 2 1 6 1 5 Program sharing To set authority for sharing the program click on the program which you would like and select Sharing Settings menu You can see two parameters for authority include External access without login and Public Access in the form with three authorities There are three options for the public access as follows e None The program is private one Just the user who created it can see and use it e Read Only The user who are not owner of this program only can see
340. l affect the completeness of the data when analysing data using group sets Compulsory means that ALL orgunits must be member of a group in that group set We recommend that you approach the orgunit grouping in the following sequence and one group set at a time 1 Define a new group set such as Location 2 Add new groups such as Urban Rural and Peri urban Once all groups have been defined return to the organisational unit group set and assign each of the desired groups to the group set 3 Go back to each group one by one go to edit mode and assign the orgunits that should be member of the group Should you follow this route you can place multiple organisation units at a time in a group However you must be careful not to place the same organisational units in two groups which itself is a member of an organisation unit group set This will result in a data integrity violation If you have organisation unit groups which are not exclusive they should not be members of a group 37 Organisation units Organisation unit groups 4 A better way to ensure that you do not mistakenly assign an organisation unit to multiple members of a group set is you can use the edit feature of each organisational unit to assign memberships to each group set You will only be able to assign a single organisation unit at a time however It is important to keep in mind when using the Organisational unit group set function that unless great c
341. l disable the organisation unit tree and give you the organisation unit that is related to the current logged in user instead This is also useful for administrators as they can create a meaningful system favorite with this option checked and all users will find their respective organisation unit when they open it The the same concept goes for User sub units and User Sub x2 units The second mode is called Select levels Here you can select all organisation units at one or more levels However at the same time you also have the option to select parent organisation units in the tree which makes it easy to select e g all facilities inside one or more districts The same thing goes for the third mode called Select groups Here you can select all organisation units inside one or more groups and parent organisation units at the same time 16 8 Selecting organisation unit group sets and data element group sets Dimension tabs listed below Organisation units are organisation unit group sets and data element group sets You are free to add groups from any of these group sets to your chart Remember to add the group set in either the series category or filters combobox 16 9 Selecting additional data dimensions Following the organisation unit group sets and data element group sets additional data dimensions which have been configured to be used in analysis are found Here you can add dimensions such as age sex etc without having to add them
342. l facilities contained in the district the user would have access to the district s data as well as all of the facilities contained within the district The data approval organisation units control for which organisation units the user can do data entry 65 User management 66 User management 6 Users can be assigned to any number of data view organisation units This controls which organisation units the user can view aggregated data for in analysis modules Giving access to an organisation unit implicitly gives access to all organisation unit below it in the organisation unit hierarchy Note that data view organisation units are optional If you do not specify any the user will have access to the full organisation unit hierarchy for viewing aggregated data In several places in the analysis modules one can select user organisation unit for the organisation unit dimension This mechanism will first attempt to use the data view organisation units linked to the current user If not found it will use the data capture organisation units Interface English language Database Use database locale no translation language Available roles Selected roles Search Data Entry Clerk M amp E Officer Superuser gt System Administrator lt User Administrator x Data capture and maintenance organisation units Data output and analysis organisation units or Kenya Kenya Show more options Add Cancel 7 Click on Sho
343. lace of delivery and 3 delivery outcome The key decision to make is what to use as the data element the main dimension the total that you will most often use and want easily available in reports and data analysis In this case the outcome dimension as Total live births is a very commonly used value in many indicators maternal mortality ratio births attended by skilled health personnel etc In this case the Assisted By dimension could also have been used without any problem but the added value of easily getting the total live births information was the decisive point for us This means that from this table or sub table of row 1 to 6 there are only two data elements Live births and Still births Next there are two more dimensions the PHU Community with its two options and a Births attended by with options MCH Aides SECHN Midwives CHO Trained TBA Untrained TBA These two categories make up the catcombo Births which is assigned to the two data elements Live births and Still births Considering the final three rows of the delivery table we can see that Complicated Deliveries does not have the assisted by dimension but has the place and the outcome Low birth weight also does not have the assisted by dimension and not the outcome either The LLITN given after delivery does not have any additional dimension at all Since not any of the three rows can share catcombo with any other row we decided to repre
344. languages Click the name of the data element you wish to translate and select Translate from the context menu which will appear The following dialogue will be displayed Data elements Data element translation Translate Details Locale Reference English 7 Name Accute Flaccid Paralysis Deaths lt 5 yrs Short name Accute Flaccid Paral Description Form name Save Cancel The reference language is displayed in the upper right portion of the dialogue Choose a locale to translate the data element into by selecting an option from the locale drop down menu Specify the name short name description and form name in the target language Press Save to save your changes 51 Data sets and data entry forms Data sets Chapter 6 Data sets and data entry forms 6 1 Data sets All data entry in DHIS2 is organised through the use of data sets You can add and edit data sets by selecting the Data Sets App A data set is a collection of data elements grouped together for data collection and data export between instances of DHIS2 e g from a district office local installation to a national server A data set has a data collection frequency which can be set through the period type property The frequency can be daily weekly monthly quarterly six monthly or yearly Which data elements to include in the data set and the frequency are set in the Add Edit Data set window In order to use a data set to collect data for a specific orgunit
345. lation for facilities can come from a different source than district populations and therefore the sum of the facility catchment populations do not match the district population provided by e g census data If this is the case we would actually want duplicated data in the system so that each level can have as accurate numbers as possible but then we do NOT want to aggregate these data sources together In the Data Element section you can edit data elements and for each of them specify how aggregation is done for each level In the case described above we need to tell the system NOT to include facility data on population in any of the aggregations above that level as the level above in this case the districts have registered their population directly as raw data The district population data should then be used at all levels above and including the district level while facility level should use its own data 19 1 1 5 2 How to edit data element aggregation This is controlled through something called aggregation levels and at the end of the edit data element screen there is a tick box called Aggregation Levels If you tick that one you will see 129 Setting up report functionality Resource tables a list of aggregation levels available and selected Default is to have no aggregation levels defined then all raw data in the hierarchy will be added together To specify the rule described above and given a hierarchy of Country Province District
346. lculation of the indicator l e the filter is applied to the set of events before the indicator expression is being evaluated The filter must evaluate to either true or false It filter is applied to each individual event If the filter evaluates to true then the event is included later in the expression evaluation if not it is ignored The filter can in a similar way as expressions contain references to data elements attributes and constants The indicator filter can in addition use logical operators including the following Table 30 1 Operators Operator Description and Logical AND or Logical OR Equal to l Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than V VIAJA Greater than or equal to 309 Program Indicators Functions These operators can be used to form logical expressions which ultimately evaluate to either true or false For example one can assert that multiple data elements must be a specific value or that specific attributes must have numerical values less or greater than a constant Filter The filter is applied to events and filters the data source used for the calculation of the indicator The filter must evaluate to either true or false Data elements Attributes water Clear DHS 2010 source of drinking water DHS 2010 time to get to water source DHS 2010 Water connection in the household DHS 2010 Improved drinking water source Filte
347. lease note that for 2 14 release they will have to login through the desktop to change passwords OpenID provider Defines the Openld provider OpenID provider label Defines the label to display for the specified OpenID provider 23 1 6 Approval Hide unapproved data in analytics Defines whether unapproved data should be visible or hidden in analytics Acceptance required before approval Defines whether to include an acceptance step before the approval step in the approval workflow 205 Settings Calendar settings 23 1 7 Calendar settings Calendar Defines which calendar system should be used throughout the system There are currently eight calendar systems which are supported namely Coptic Ethiopic Gregorian Julian Islamic ISO Nepal and Thai Note that this is a system wide setting It is not possible to have multiple calendars within a single DHIS2 instance Date format Defines which date format should be used throughout the system 23 1 8 Data import These settings apply to the data import process and provide optional constraints on what Should be considered a conflict during import The constraints are applied to each individual data value in the import Require periods to match period type of data set Require period of data value to be of the Same period type as the data sets for which the data element of data value Is assigned to Require category option combos to match category combo of data element Re
348. lected data elements Facility layer legend y Age 10 Thematic layer 1 legend lt gt B Gender Thematic layer 2 legend One of MA vs Mal Thematic layer 3 legend S _Lofa Me Thematic layer 4 legend y Periods e bd Organisation units Update B The purpose of the event layer is to display the geographical location of events registered in the DHIS 2 tracker This layer enables you to drill down from the aggregated data displayed in the thematic layers to the underlying individual events or cases To work with this layer click the event layer icon on the map toolbar and select Edit layer Select a program and then select a program stage If there is only one stage available for the selected program the stage will be automatically selected A list of data elements and attributes will appear in the Available data elements panel You are free to select and use any data element or attribute from this list as part of your query To select you can either double click a data element or multi select and use the single arrow downward button The double arrow button will select all data elements in the list All selected data elements will get their own row in the Selected data elements You can also use an element multiple times in your query by clicking the button For data elements of type text you will get two choices Contains implies that the query will match all values which contains your search value and Is exact impl
349. lements Reporting rates can be selected by choosing Reporting Rates from the Data header Reporting rates are defined by data sets It can be selected by double clicking in the list of available data sets to the left 109 Using Data Visualizer Selecting fixed and relative periods 16 6 Selecting fixed and relative periods Click on the Periods header For fixed periods select a period type from the combo box You can select any number of fixed periods from any period type Below the fixed period you will find the relative period checkboxes and you may select aS many as you like The names Should be fairly self descriptive and they are relative to the current date meaning that if the current month is March and you select Last month the month of February will be included in the chart You are also free to combine fixed periods and relative periods in the same chart Overlapping periods will be filtered so that they only appear once 16 7 Selecting organisation units You can select which organisation units to include in the chart by clicking the Organisation units header This section features three ways of selecting organisation units which can be selected by clicking on the gear icon directly below the organisation units header The default mode is called Organisation units and lets you select the organisation units you want to appear in the chart from the tree This mode also features three checkboxes Checking User org unit wil
350. lic User F USERGROUP PUBLIC ADD Group Add Update Public User Role F_USERROLE PUBLIC ADD Add Update Public Validation F VALIDATIONRULEGROUP_ PUBLIC ADD Rule Group Add Update Section F SECTION ADD 327 User authorities 328 Add Update Tracked Entity F TRACKED ENTITY ADD Add Update Tracked Entity Attributes F ALLOW EDIT TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTES Add Update Tracked Entity Data Value F TRACKED ENTITY DATAVALUE ADD Add Update Tracked Entity Instance F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE ADD Add Update User F USER ADD Add Update User Group F USERGROUP MANAGING RELATIONSHIPS ADD Managing Relationships Add Update User Within F USER ADD WITHIN MANAGED GROUP Managed Group Add Update Validation F_ VALIDATIONCRITERIA_ADD Criteria Add Update Validation Rule F VALIDATIONRULE ADD Add Validation Rule Groups F VALIDATIONRULEGROUP_ADD Administrate data mart F DATAMART ADMIN Administrate data mart F DATA MART ADMIN Administrate data vizualiser F DV ADMIN Administrate GIS F_GIS ADMIN Approve data F_APPROVE_DATA Approve data at lower levels F APPROVE DATA LOWER LEVELS Archive data F_ARCHIVE_DATA Change GIS Configuration F_ GIS CONFIGURATION UPDATE Change Location of Tracked Entity Instance F TRACKED ENTITY INSTANCE CHANGE LOCATION Change order in Data Set F DATASET ORDER CHANGE Change system se
351. ll the input fields need to have a link to a data element or indicator To add new data elements to the form double click them from the data element indicator box as shown below You can also select a data element indicator and press the Insert button You can switch between either data elements totals for or indicators by pressing the respective buttons inser dam temene totals CAOS Filter Filter Clear ART clients with new adverse clinical event 25 49y Female ART clients with new adverse clinical event 25 49y Male ART clients with new adverse clinical event lt 15y Female ART clients with new adverse clinical event lt 15y Male ART clients with new adverse clinical event gt 49y Female ART clients with new adverse clinical event gt 49y Male ART clients with new adverse clinical event Female 15 24y ART clients with new adverse clinical event Male 15 24y ART defaulters 25 49y Female ART defaulters 25 49y Male ART defaulters lt 15y Female ART defaulters lt 15y Male ART defaulters gt 49y Female Data elements Totals Indicators Insert Grey field You can save by clicking on the Save button and this will not close the window It is recommended to save often to ensure you do not loose your work When you are done or want to test your form in data entry click on lt Save and close gt Data sets and data entry forms 6 2 4 Scripting in custom forms Scripting in custom
352. ly for validation exceptions for an organisation unit to which the user has been assigned through user management or for any lower level organisation unit under that organisation unit If this is set to No then each user in the assigned user group s will be alerted for all validation exceptions in the group regardless of organisation unit To enable routine scheduling of data validation runs choose Data Administration from the Maintenance menu Then click on Scheduling If scheduling is active click on the Stop button then select the Data monitoring strategy of All daily Finally enable scheduling by clicking on the Start button Indicators Indicators Chapter 13 Indicators Indicators can be maintained by choosing Maintenance gt Data elements and indicators from the main menu The following screen will appear ft Kel Data Element Data Element Data Element Group Data Element Group Editor Data Element Group Set Category Option Category Category Combination Data Dictionary Concept Indicator Indicator Indicator Type Indicator Group Indicator Group Editor Indicator Group Set x 2 DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Maintenance Services Profile Data Elements and Indicators Data Element Create modify view and delete data elements Data elements are phenomena for which will be captured and analysed Data Element Group Create modify view and delete data element groups Groups are us
353. ly it is not possible to do sorting from serverside 5 Filtering this is done by clicking the small search icon shown to the right of each column header Clicking them provides an input field to type a filtering criteria The system starts applying the filter the moment a user starts to type During filtering it is possible to define 267 Using Event Capture Capturing events 268 Start and end dates for date type data elements and lower and upper limits for number types Server side filtering is not support at the moment 6 Paging The list of events can be paged by using the paging section at the bootom of the list Paging allows you to quickly move between pages of events and to change the page size i e the number of events per page 7 Printing The Print list button allows to print the list of events This button also changes its label accordingly for example Print details and Print form and does the printing functionality The event capture app works offline in the sense that if Internet connectivity drops during your working session you can continue to capture events which will be stored locally in your web browser client When connectivity has returned the system will ask to upload locally stored data and sends it to the server where it is stored Note that if the Web browser is closed while in offline mode it is not possible to reopen a new browser window and continue the working session however the data will st
354. m 4 In Data Entry you can now start using the Section form which will appear automatically when sections are available for the selected data set Data sets which have section forms will automatically display the section form 5 Certain data elements may need to be disabled for data entry Within Data set section management choose the section which contains these data elements and select Section grey field management from the context window Pressing the Disable button will prevent data from being entered into this specific data element category option during data entry Be sure to press Done to save your changes Section grey field management Section Details Name ART Enrollment Data Set ART monthly summary Combination of categories HIV age gender Female Male lt 15y 15 24y 25 49y gt 49y lt 15y 15 24y 25 49y gt 49y ART enrollment stage 1 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable ART enrollment stage 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable ART enrollment stage 3 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable ART enrollment stage 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Done A sample section form is displayed in the next figure Notice how each data element category has been separated into a separate section and a data entry table has been automatically generated by the system Use of section forms in combination with da
355. m Saved will be display Select Done or Dismiss to go back to Entry Screen e Your data will not be sent to server It is stored in the Record Store of your mobile phone To see the data again Go back to step 2 and select the name of the Beneficiary that you have just entered data Repeat step 3 and 4 If you feel that you are ready to send data to server Select Complete 254 Mobile Mobile application setup MOK TA Fo es 10 28 ANC ath check up 2 IFA tablets Fees Ves ANC Complications Options Comple Clear e Complete you may use this option when you fill the entire field on the form and make sure that your data is correct e Select Menu or Option at the bottom of your screen The name Menu or Option depend on your mobile phone and then select Complete e If you did not fill all the field in the form a warning message will be display x fields is not filled Do you want to complete anyway With x is the number of empty field s Select Yes if you want to send data to server select No if you do not want to send and go back to Entry screen again e After select Yes a security message will appear and inform that the application will connect to server Select Yes to give the permission for the application to do so 255 Mobile Mobile application setup Allow network access This application e User will rece
356. malaria cases of particular age groups As an example three data element categories Under 1 1 5 and Over 5 could be created They could be assigned as categories to the data element which would then create in the data entry screens three separate fields for this data element namely e Number of confirmed malaria cases Under 1 e Number of confirmed malaria cases 1 5 e Number of confirmed malaria cases Over 5 Effective use of data element categories greatly simplifies the process of setting up the DHIS2 system as the data element categories can be reused to disaggregate many different Data elements Categories data elements Otherwise each of the data elements listed above would need to be created separately Judicious use of data element categories will greatly simplify the DHIS2 implementation and allow for subsequent advanced analysis Where possible category options should be recycled For instance there might be two categories which might share a particular category option e g lt 1 year of age When creating the categories this category option could be reused This is important if particular category options or category option combinations need to be analyzed together 1 All possible category options should be defined 2 Categories should be composed of multiple category options created in Step 1 3 Category combinations should be composed of either one or multiple categories 4 Data elements should be created a
357. marked as complete in order to be considered timely This affects the reporting rate tool in the reporting module which lists forms marked as complete as well as marked as complete in time The default value is 15 Omit indicator values with zero numerator value in data mart Defines whether aggregated indicator values with zero as the numerator value should be written to the indicator data mart table Having such values written is required for instance when connecting Excel pivot tables to the data mart as Excel will need the numerator data to correctly aggregate up inthe organisation unit hierarchy If third party tools like Excel are not used with the application this will reduce the total number of values written to the data mart which again will improve performance and could safely be set to omit 23 1 2 Server settings Cache strategy Decides for how long reports and responses related to analysis should be cached If you are using the scheduled nightly data mart tasks it makes sense to put this on Cache until 6 AM tomorrow This is because we know that data in reports change at that time and you can safely cache data up to the moment when the data mart is updated If you are loading data continuously into the datamart you should set it to No cache If you load data very infrequently into data mart you should consider setting it to Cache for two weeks Number of database server CPUs The number of CPU cores of your database server
358. me expressions can be used for example when having indicator names along the category axis of a chart 19 4 2 7 Adding horizontal totals By using the expression editor it is possible to add a column to the table with totals for each row In the following example we will make a table with three months as columns as well as a column with the totals for the three months We start by dragging a text label into the table header and changing its text to Total and dragging a text field into the details row As was discussed in the section on Text field we have to change the properties of the new text field so that it can display numbers To do this change the Expressions Class in the properties panel to java lang Double Right click the text field and choose Edit Expression This will bring up the Expressions editor As the expression we want to sum up all the columns In this case we have three value expressions we want to sum up September October 2010 November 2010 The name of these fields will vary depending on the crosstab dimension you have chosen in the report table In our case the expression we make is f September f October 2010 f November 2010 Each row of the table have a totals column to the right 19 4 2 8 Groups of tables 146 There are cases when it can be useful to have several tables in one report This can be done using Report groups Using this functionality one can for example create a
359. meta data import in the developer guide 21 1 3 GML data import The GML import function can be used to import data prepared in the Geography Markup Language GML GML can be used to update the coordinates both polygons and points Once you have prepared your GML file as detailed in the chapter on Importing coordinates you can load the file with this function Importing the organisation unit hierarchy from GML is not supported Therefore you should create the organisation unit hierarchy separately and then use GML to update the coordinates once the hierarchy has been created 21 2 Importing data The import option allows different instance of DHIS 2 to receive standardised sets of data in the absence of a networked system The functionality can also be used to import data produced by another system perhaps on a regular basis or to import legacy data which has been transformed into a format which DHIS2 can understand Typically a data set is exported from one DHIS2 instance e g a district level system to another system e g a provincial level system DHIS 2 is alSo capable of importing data directly from a DHIS 1 4 Access database Each of these options will be discussed in the following sections 21 2 1 XML data import To import data in XML format simply select Services gt Import export gt XML data import Similar options to the XML meta data import facility are available Please refer to the Developer guide gt Web API g
360. minute e You can see the time of last successful synchronization with remote server in the scheduling screen next to the Last success label 202 Settings System settings Chapter 23 Settings The settings module provides a set of application configuration options There are two main groups of settings the system settings apply to the whole system and all its users while the user settings apply to the environment of the currently logged in user The system settings can be accessed from the maintenance menu settings module The user settings can be accessed under the profile menu settings page 23 1 System settings The system settings section provides general configuration options and options specifically for appearance and email 23 1 1 General settings Maximum number of analytics records This number can be increased to provide more records from the analytics The default is 50 000 and can be increased Note that setting the maximum number of analytics records to unlimited should be used with caution as it might result in very high load on your server Infrastructural indicators This setting defines an indicator group where the member indicators should describe data about the infrastructure of organisation units This infrastructural data can currently be viewed in the GIS module in the facility information sheet Infrastructural data elements This setting defines a data element group where the member data elements s
361. mns display information about the events more specifically they display data for data elements which are part of the program DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone a gt a Event capture Registering unit v Baoma ii an Registered events Total 94 igs Incident date Valunia Bonthe Kambia 2014 12 15 wx 12345 All event related operations are accessible from the screen shown above The operations currently available are 1 Capturing data this available by clicking the Register event button 2 Showing hiding colums this is to allow users decide which columns to show hide in the table of events This feature is especially important when we have a long list of data elements assigned to a program stage 3 Editing the rows in the table are clickable clicking them shows three menus Edit Edit in grid and Remove The edit function takes you to a new page where information for the selected event can be updated The edit in grid function allows you to edit the selected event within the table but only those columns data elements visible in the grid If more columns are required it is possible to add using the Show Hide columns button to speficy which columns should be displayed in the list 4 Sorting this can be done by clicking the sorting icon of each column header A red sorting icon implies the current sorting column However the sorting functionality works only within the page displayed Current
362. mory for loading not recommended for normal mobile The example with DHIS2 Demo from dhis2 org Name Based Data Records Register beneficiaries enter data for encounters and events and view reports Dashboard Get an overview of favorite charts reports and maps and view or write messages Data Entry Namebased Data Entry Beneficiary Re Beneficiary Enrollment Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version 223 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry After clicking on the Namebased Data Entry the next will guiding to the selections in the following steps Step 1 Choose an Organisation Unit Available organisation units Ngelehun C Navigate to Home Step 2 Choose the Activity Type Navigate to Organisation Unit Home the screen shot with an example with Current Activity Plan option There will be normally these two type of Activity Current Activity Plan the list of the beneficiaries registered enrolled not yet finish complete a many program and there is at least a program stage open for data entry All Activity Plan the list of all beneficiaries registered enrolled not yet finish complete a many program Step 3 Choose a Beneficiary for entry 224 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Hyiab Welde Bisirat Michael Abc Navigate to Activity Type Home the screen shot with an example wit
363. mple suppose you define a category option group set to represent NGOs who serve as healthcare partners at one or more organisation units Each category option group within this set represents a different partner The category option group for Partner 1 may group together category options such as funding account codes that are used by that partner as a dimension of the data So data entered by Partner 1 is attributed to a category option in Partner l s category option group Whereas data entered by partner 2 is attributed to a category option in Partner 2 s category option group Table 20 1 Example Category Option Groups Category option group set Category option group Category options Partner Partner 1 Account 1A Account 1B Partner Partner 2 Account 2A Account 2B Data approval Approving by multiple category option group sets Each partner could enter data for their accounts independently of the other for the same or different data sets at the same or different facilities So for example data can be entered and or aggregated at the following levels for each partner independently of each other Country C Partner 1 Country C Partner 2 District D Partner 1 District D Partner 2 Facility F Partner 1 Facility F Partner 2 Figure 20 4 Example category option groups i Tip You can use the sharing feature on category options and category option groups to insure that a user can enter data and or see
364. mpleting the data choose the option for data completeness if having Cholera Deaths lt 5 yrs default 1 Typhoid Deaths lt 5 yrs default 2 Accute Flaccid Paralysis Deaths lt 5 yrs default 5 Meningitis Deaths lt 5 yrs default 0 i TEE lt 5 T DataSet is complete Save 2 Tracking Find Add Person Visit Schedule Person Registration Anonymous Menu Aggregate Reporting Tracking Messages 1 Reports Settings Navigate to Logout Desktop version 2 1 Find Add Person find person based on Name Phone Number or ID and Organization unit e Step 1 insert Name Phone Number or ID and select the Organization Unit then click Search 211 212 Mobile e Step 2 select a person Getting started with mobile browser data entry Person Search Search By Name or ID or Phone Number fa Select Organisation Unit Ngelehun CHC Navigate to Person Registration Tracking Menu Home Person List Bisirat Michael Nile Bisrat Total found 2 Navigate to Then all the information of that person will be displayed e Step 3 choose the next program stage for entering the data Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Bisirat Michael Details Gender Male Date of Birth 2010 3 17 Organisation Unit Ngelehun CHC Change National Health ID Number 440 66 9017 Relationships No Relationships
365. must be quoted d2 zing number Evaluates the data element attribute of type number to zero if the value is negative otherwise to the value itself Program Indicators Variables Function Arguments Description d2 oizp number Evaluates the data element attribute of type number to one if the value is zero or positive otherwise to zero d2 zpvc object object Returns the number of numeric zero and positive object values among the given object arguments Can be provided any number of arguments An example expression that uses the zing and oizp functions looks like this d2 zing A GPkGfbmArby d2 0izp mCXR7U4kNBW NFkjJSNiQ9PH An example expression that uses the daysBetween function looks like this d2 daysBetween mCXR7u4kNBW k8ja2AiflAe 2015 06 01 An example expression that uses the condition function looks like this Oe COMGnGE HO Tinea qn Gone En RNE Waihi en SiN ok Oe Eat O alles a An example expression that uses the zpvc function looks like this d2 zpvc A GPkGfbmArby mCXR7u4kNBW NFkjJSNiQ9PH 4 1 30 3 5 Variables The indicator expression and filter Support a range of variables Table 30 3 Variables Variable Description event date The date of when the event took place due date The date of when an event is due incident_date The date of the incidence of the event enrollment_date The date of when the tracked entity
366. n event registration This messaging functionality now supports marking messages for follow up paging of the message list an improved navigation Navigate to Messages Home 5 Reports The output reports from the server Navigate to Feedback will be updated 6 Settings User information e g First name Surname Phone number E mail and the Interface language 232 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Data Entry Namebased Data Entry Beneficiary Enrollment Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version Here is the form for setting the user account access and the interface language Click on SAVE for completing the settings see the example below Mobile Phone number E mail nterface Language English United Kingdom Navigate to Home 7 Feedback the extra function for creating a new message to send to the server The new created feedback from this will be listed under Messages 233 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Menu Tracking Messages 3 Reports settings Navigate to ogou After clicking on the Feedback there will be a form for editing sending out a new message discussion See the example below Send feedback Subject Error when entering the Maternal Program Text Can t load the entry form for beneficiaries Send Navigate to Home After sending out
367. n Lewis Design and development of spatial GIS application for primary healthcare sector The University of Oslo 2005 http urn nb no URN NBN no 11504 Mangset2005 Lars Mangset DHIS 2 A Globally Distributed Development Process The University of Oslo 2005 http urn nb no URN NBN no 10640 Ngoma2007 Caroline Ngoma Cultivation Strategies in the Implementation of Health Management Information System in Zanzibar The University of Oslo 2007 http urn nb no URN NBN no 16911 Nguyen2007 Thanh Ngoc Nguyen OSS For Health Care in Developing Countries The University of Oslo 2007 http urn nb no URN NBN no 17859 339 Bibliography Saeb2009 E K Golly Kobrissa R T Titlestad O Braa J Saeb J Kossi Integrating health information systems in Sierra Leone 379 391 2009 ShawComplexitylnspried2009 Vincent Shaw A complexity inspired approach to co evolutionary hospital management information systems development 2009 http folk uio no vshaw Files VShaw 20Kappa 20Final 20Version 2_V_ Shaw 20Intro 20Chapter_no 20annex pdf Staring Titlestad 2008 Knut Staring and O H Titlestad Development as a Free Software Extending Commons Based Peer Production to the South ICIS 2008 Proceedings 50 2008 http aisel aisnet org icis2008 50 Store2007 Margrethe Store Explore the challenges of providing documentation in open source projects The University of Oslo 2007 http urn nbo no URN
368. n by selecting Organisation units from the Browse by drop down menu The organisational hierarchy present in the database will now be displayed Organisational units can be expanded by clicking on the plus symbol in the organisational tree view 187 Data Administration Data Browser Period Type Monthly From date 2014 01 01 To date 2014 03 31 Browse by Organisation units Display zeros Select parent organisation unit E Sierra Leone Bo Bombali Bonthe Kailahun Kambia Kenema Koinaduqu Kono Moyamba Port Loko Pujehun Tonkolili Western Area Browse data at this level only Data browser By clicking on an organisational unit and the clicking the Browse button a summary of Submitted data elements present in the database is returned for all immediate children of the selected organisational as shown below 188 Data Administration Organisation units Sierra Leone From date 2014 01 01 To date 2014 03 31 Period Type Monthly Download as Excel I Download as CSW Download as PDF Back Stan Sierra Leone Recorded values Organisation unit January 2014 February 2014 March 2014 Bo 17563 15810 15843 Bombali 15140 15369 15281 Bonthe 6503 6462 6177 Kailahun 11945 12169 12330 Kambia 9374 9345 so Kenema 19020 18941 20077 Koinadugu ga04 8538 9407 Kono 5517 9380 52 Moyamba 14169 14237 13717 Port Loko 16533 1
369. n it Select Program option to create a program named Child Health Program with a stage named Birth Details and add the BCG dose given data element into this stage 4 Create a new aggregation query builder named Number of children BCG Builder to linking between the data elements 5 From Services menu go to Individual Records option and click on it Select entity option below Registration header in the left menu to register three entities named Micheal Alice and Tom in Ngelehun CHC and enroll them into Child Health Program 1 For Micheal open the Birth Details stage into Child Health Program Enter value for BCG dose give date data element as 2012 01 18 2 For Alice open the Birth Details stage into Child Health Program Enter value for BCG dose give date data element as 2012 01 18 3 For Tom no enter any data value for Birth Details stage Tracker Programs Attributes Warning Before entering data value for the stage choose Report Date as 2012 01 18 6 From Services menu go to Individual Records option and click on it Select Manual entity aggregation option to run Number of children BCG Builder to get data value and save it into database Manual aggregation Data set list BCG Report From 2012 01 01 To 2012 01 31 Use data from level s All r Organisation Unit Selection E Siera Leone z O Bo O Badjia Ngelehun CHC Njandama MCHP Baoma Bargbe Bargbo Bumpe Ngao Gbo Jaiama Bongor Kak
370. n see the data as the data has not yet been approved at all e Data is approved by User D at facility level Data becomes visible to User C and User B as the data is now approved at their level e Data is approved by User C at district level Data becomes visible to User A as data is now approved at the level immediately below herself 169 Data approval Approving data 20 5 Approving data TO approve data go to Reports and choose Data Approval When this report shows data that is configured for approval it shows the approval status of the data in the report The approval status will be one of the following e Waiting for lower level org units to approve This data is not yet ready to be approved because it first needs to be approved for all the child organisation units to this organisation unit for the same data set and period e Ready for approval This data may now be approved by an authorized user e Approved This data has already been approved e Approved and accepted This data has already been approved and also accepted If the data you are viewing is in an approval state that can be acted upon and if you have sufficient authority one or more of the following actions will be available to you on the Data Approval form e Approve Approve data that has not yet been approved or that was formerly approved and has been unapproved e Unapprove Return to an unapproved state data that has been approved or accepted
371. n to the user when the expression is true and the action is triggered The third column specifies which data element or attribute to link the warning to and is meant to be a recommendation to the user regarding where the cause of the warning can be rectified In case several data elements or attributes are involved when defining the rule you should choose the one that is most likely that the user would need to consider 31 6 4 Show error action A show error action is defined by selecting show error in the first column of the action row A show error action is used whenever there are rules which must strictly be adhered to The show error action prevents the user from continuing until the error is resolved Such a strict validation should only be used whenever it is certain that the evaluated expression is never true unless the user has made a mistake in data entry Show error LMP date entered is after the date of the antenatal care visit WHOMCH LMP date The second column is mandatory and is used to define the message shown to the user when the expression is true and the action is triggered The third column specifies which data element or attribute to link the error to and is meant to be a cue for the user regarding where the cause of the error can be rectified In case several 319 Program rules Show error action data elements or attributes is involved choose the one that is most likely that the user would need to change 3
372. n you must in our example add it to the EPI group Which groups you add Measles doses given to does not affect how health facilities collect the data but adds more possibilities to your data analysis So for the group set dimensions there are three levels the group set e g Programme the group e g EPI and the data element e g Measles doses given Indicators can be grouped into indicator groups and further into indicator group sets dimensions in exactly the same way as data elements Table 3 3 Organisation Data Element Programme Period Value Unit Gerehun CHC Measles doses EPI Dec 09 22 given Gerehun CHC Vitamin A given Nutrition Dec 09 16 Tugbebu CHP Measles doses EPI Dec 09 18 given Tugbebu CHP Vitamin A given Nutrition Dec 09 12 Gerehun CHC Malaria new Malaria Dec 09 32 cases Tugbebu CHP Malaria new Malaria Dec 09 23 cases 3 3 The organisation unit dimension Organisation units in DHIS2 should typically represent a location such as a Community Health Centre or referral hospitals or an administrative unit like MOHS Sierra Leone Bo District or Baoma Chiefdom In non health sector applications they could be schools or water points 21 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Organisation unit group sets and groups Orgunits are represented in a default hierarchy usually the default administrative hierarchy of a country or region and are therefo
373. n you save a pivot table favorite and want to share it with other users as the organisation units linked with the other user s account will be used when viewing the favorite Periods Monthly Prev year Next year Available Po P H 4 Selected November 2015 October 2015 May 2015 April 2013 March 2015 February 2015 July 2015 June 2015 August 2015 September 2015 January 2015 Weeks Months This month Last month Bi months This bi month Last bi month This week Last week Last4 weeks Last 12 weeks Last 52 weeks Quarters This quarter Last quarter Last 4 quarters Years This year Last year Last 5 years Last 3 months Last 6 months Last 12 months Six months This six month Last six month Last 2 six months Last 6 bi months Financial years This financial year Last financial year Last 5 financial years Dynamic dimensions can consist of organisation unit group sets data element group sets or category option group sets which have been configured with the type of of Disaggregation Once the group sets have been configured they will be come available in the pivot tables Using Pivot Table Arranging the table layout and can be used as additional analysis dimensions for instance to analyze aggregate data by Type of organisational unit or Implementing partner Dynamic dimensions work the same as fixed dimensions i Tip Some dynamic dimensions may contain many members This can caus
374. nce a yearly population figure This allows for monthly coverage values to be calculated with yearly population figures Indicator type This field will determine a factor that will automatically be applied during the calculation of the indicator Possible choices are determined by the Indicator Types described below For instance a Percent indicator will automatically be multiplied by a factor of 100 when exported to the data mart so that it will display as a percentage Legend set Define a legend set for this indicator Refer to the section on GIS for more information about legend sets URL Can be used as a link to an Indicator registry where a full metadata description of the indicator can be made available To define the numerator and denominator simply press the respective button and the following dialogue will be displayed Description Constants Organisation unit counts BCG doses given Commodity ordering overhead CHC Pi Chiefdom Tip use abs x sin x cos x tan x In x log x CHP SOx mod x y Clinic Formula Data elements s46mSMSOhxu beg Filter Clear B CG doses given Total BCG doses given Fixed lt 1y BCG doses given Fixed gt 1y BCG doses given Outreach lt 1y BCG doses given Outreach gt 1y mnch BCG Q Early breastfeeding within 1 hr after delivery at BCG Total Q Early breastfeeding within 1 hr after delivery at BCG Fixed lt 1y DAG k Description BCG do
375. ncluding meta data reports maps and charts known as resources in REST terminology can be retrieved in most of the popular representation formats of the Web of today such as HTML XML JSON PDF and PNG These formats are widely supported in applications and programming languages and gives third party developers a wide range of implementation options Information Systems Dashboards Mash ups Visualizers Web Portal Document Repository Reports Plans Guidelines FAQs Clients Mobiles Smart Phones Tablets Operational Systems Logistics Registries EMRs Web API Resource Abstraction Layer Pradetined Data Web Sites News Weather Health vs Discussion Forums Data View Engine Charts Maps Data Tables Data Store 1 4 2 Understanding platform independence All computers have an Operating System OS to manage it and the programs running it The operating system serves as the middle layer between the software application such as DHIS 2 and the hardware such as the CPU and RAM DHIS 2 runs on the Java Virtual Machine and can therefore run on any operating system which supports Java Platform independence implies that the software application can run on ANY OS Windows Linux Macintosh etc DHIS 2 is What is DHIS 2 Deployment strategies online vs offline platform independent and is extremely useful in the context of public health where multiple operating systems may be in use Furthermore DHIS 2 i
376. nd assigned a particular category combination A category option consists of a name along with an optional code and a concept Categories can be added by accessing the Data Element Category Option dialog Maintenance gt Data Elements and Indicators gt Data Element Category Options as seen below The category option must consist of a name an optional code and a concept Create new data element category option Details Name lt 1 year of age Code DS2132 Concept name default Add Cancel Once all category options have been defined for a particular category the category can be defined with the Data Element Category dialog Maintenance gt Data Elements and Indicators gt Data Element Category Enter the name of the data element category and press Save Once you have defined the name of the category you can assign category options to it by selecting the category which you have just defined clicking its name and then selecting Edit from the context menu as seen below Create new data element category Details Name Gender Use as data dimension Concept name default v Dimension type Disaggregation v Available category options Selected category options Male Filter Clear Female Male gt gt lt lt Add Cancel Type the name of the new data element category in the Name field in the Details region and assign a concept to the category Category options can be added
377. nd date For instance January 2011 would refer to the time interval of January 1st 2011 January 31st 2011 A unique identifier UID is a semi random series of letters and numbers used by DHIS2 to identify specific resources UIDs begin with a letter and are followed by exactly 10 letters or digits 337 Bibliography Bibliography AlSaid2010 Said Salah Eldin Al Said The health information system in Sudan The University of Oslo 2010 http urn nb no URN NBN no 27062 Berg2007 Eivind Anders Berg The challenges of implementing a health information system in Vietnam The University of Oslo 2007 http urn nbo no URN NBN no 15021 BraaHedeberg2002 J rn Braa and Calle Hedberg The Struggle for District Based Health Information Systems in South Africa Information Society 18 113 127 2002 http search ebscohost com login aspx direct true amp db aph amp AN 6 705438 amp site ehost live BraaNetworksAction2004 Eric Braa Jorn Monteiro and Sundeep Sahay Networks of Action Sustainable Health Information Systems Across Developing Countries MIS Quarterly 28 3 2004 http aisel aisnet org misg vol28 iss3 3 Brucker2007 yvind F Brucker Internationalization and localization A case study from HISP The University of Oslo 2007 http urn nb no URN NBN no 15774 Damitew2005 Hirut Gebrekidan Damitew and Netsanet Haile Gebreyesus Sustainability and optimal use of Health Information Systems T
378. ndary layer x Tonkolili J Facility layer A Organisation units v X Boundary layer 8 fy District v J Thematic layer 1 J4 Siera Leone J Thematic layer 2 a Bo E m Bombali Ei wal Bonthe E ee Kailahun a Kambia Ei m Kenema Ei Koinadugu Ei m Kono gi n Moyamba i A Port Loko 5 Pujehun 5 Tonkolli E m Westem Area I Thematic layer 3 Thematic layer 4 OpenStreetMap 8 Google Hybrid v amp Google Streets 40 Facility layer legend Thematic layer 1 legend y Thematic layer 2 legend y Thematic layer 3 legend y Thematic layer 4 legend y Update 100 km LON 11 70252 LAT 8 92645 Google The purpose of the boundary layer is to display the boundaries coordinates in the system No data will be shown This layer is useful if you are offline and thus have no background map Click the boundary globe icon on the toolbar and select Edit layer You can select the organisation units you want to show on the map by selecting a level and a parent That means show all organisations units at this level that are children of this parent When there are visible organisation units on the map you can easily navigate up and down in the hierarchy without using the level parent user interface By clicking one of the organisation units a context menu will open then select drill down or float up The drill down option will be disabled if you are already on the lowest level or if there are no coordinates available on the lev
379. nen eman anha Add Cancel Next you will specify the particular data set s that are to be made available to the particular role You will also need to specify the type of Authority to be given to the particular user For each of the three options namely Datasets Reports and Authorities user can select multiple options from the scroll down menu provided against each field A user can choose multiple options either by moving them one by one In order for particular users to be able to enter data you must add them to both a dataset as well as an organisational unit level You can also select multiple datasets individually by pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard and clicking on individual datasets Finally when you have entered the required fields click on Save which is located on the lower part of the displayed screen The desired user role and related authorisation will be saved to the database and can then be assigned to a particular user 7 1 3 User management 64 Under particular user role there can be more than one user To manage users click on User on the left side of the screen This will lead you to the User management page To add a new user follow these steps 1 Click on the Add New button 2 Choose whether you want to fill in all the personal user information now or invite the user by email to complete the rest of the user information e Create account with user details Choose this if you would like to enter all the
380. nerally be composed of mutually exclusive category options such that the sum of individual category options results in a coherent total Different levels of dimensions 1 disaggregation and 2 grouping Disaggregation dimensions dictate how you collect and how detailed you store your data so plan these carefully The group dimension is more flexible and can be changed and added to even after data collection think of it as tagging It is best to think of how the data would be used in an integrated data repository and not how it will actually be collected on forms or by programs when designing the meta data model Ideally the same type of disaggregation should be used across forms and datasets for data elements which will be analysed together or used to build indicators Reuse definitions so that the database can integrate even though the forms themselves might be duplicated which in practice is often the case In order to better explain the approach and the possibilities we present an example paper form and will walk through it step by step and design data elements categories category options and category combinations 31 Data dimensions in DHIS2 From tables to category 32 combinations designing multi dimensional data sets MINISTRY OF HEALTH AND SANITATION PHU MONTHLY SUMMARY OF REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH SERVICES PHUF3 DOE E REEERE T O O T la ENEE CMON cairn ee cic ccc S IGNAR annananmamnanncnassss Month
381. ngle screen with the name of the section in the title window To navigate from screen to screen push Next e Forms without section Datasets without sections All fields are displayed on one screen with the title that is the name of DataSet The user simply fills in each data element with the appropriate value 241 Mobile Mobile application setup Can refills 6 Number ITM T People protected DJ Rooms found 56 Rooms sprayed 1245 sachets used Unsprayed roams locked 4 Save and Complete After finishing data entry the user can choose to save the data locally on the phone or to upload the data directly to the DHIS2 server Can refills E Number ITM Ei People protected B32 Rooms found a 245 Sachets used Unsprayed room 242 Mobile Mobile application setup If the user saves the data form they can edit the form at a later point in time if they need to When selecting a period once again the period will be marked as Saved as seen in the next screen shot Select Period If the user selects Complete and the data entry form is not complete the user will be asked if they are certain they wish to submit the form as incomplete Once the form has been submitted a message should be displayed informing the user that the transmission was successful eport sent sucesstully 24 3 5 3 2 Notes 1 Period list Periods marked with an asterisk is the period that is comple
382. nical information about the definition and measurement of the data element Category combination Defines which category combination the data element should have also known as the disaggregation Option set for data values Option sets are predefined lists of options which can be used in data entry Option set for comments Option sets for comments are predefined list of options which can be used to specify standardized comments for data values in data entry Legend set Legend sets can be used in the GIS module to display certain data elements with certain icons Refer to the GIS module documentation for more information on legend sets Aggregation levels The Aggregation Levels option allows the data element to be aggregated at one or more levels When the user clicks on the Aggregation levels option a drop down menu appears which displays available aggregation levels The desired aggregation level is then selected by clicking the Add Selected button By default the aggregation will start at the lowest assigned organisation unit If e g Chiefdom is selected below it means that Chiefdom District and National aggregates will use Chiefdom the highest aggregation level available as the data source and PHU data will not be included PHU data will still be available for the PHU level but not included in aggregations to the levels above If District and Chiefdom are both selected then the District and National level aggregates will use
383. nisation units and category options Once you have specified all options as required press Export as along with the format which you would like to export the data as XML JSON or CSV Data Export Organisation unit Siera Leone Available data sets Selected data sets cet Les ART monthly summary Child Health Clinical Monitoring Checklist EP Stock a Facility Assessment HIV Peadiatric monthly summary Inpatient Morbidity Mortality Summary Life Saving Commodities at MNCH Quarterly Report Morbidity Mortality lt 5 years Mortality lt 5 years Narratives PMTCT monthly summary Options Start date 2014 12 28 End date 2014 12 28 More options Data element ID scheme UID T Org unit ID scheme UID T Category ID scheme UID T Export as XML Export as JSON Export as CSV A pop up save option will appear on the displayed screen see picture below prompting the saving of the exported data You may save the export folder on your desktop or any other folder by selecting the Save to Disk option from the pop up prompt 21 3 4 Event data export 182 Event or tracker data can be exported by accessing the Event data export function by choosing Services gt Import export gt Event data export from the main menu Choose the organisation unit of interest along with the Programs and Program stages and start and end dates The Inclusion option has three options e Selected organisation unit Export event data o
384. nit to move and the new parent 39 Data elements Data elements Chapter 5 Data elements When the Data Elements and Indicators options is chosen from the main Maintenance menu the following screen appears dhis2 DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone tS Ke I Data Element Data Elements Indicators Data Element Data Element Data Element Group Data Element Group Create modi Create modify view and delete data element groups Groups are view and delete data elements Data elements are A X used for improved analysis Data Element Group Editor phenomena for which will be captured and analyzed Data Element Group Set rs o Data Element Group Editor Data Element Group Set Easily add or remove data elements to and from data element modify view and delete data element group sets Group Category Option Combination F groups as well as deleted data elements sets are used for improved analysis Category Option Category Option Combination V n r L Category Option ategory eB Create modify iew and edit data element category option combinations Category E view and delete data element category options option combinations are break downs of categor Category options are options with in categor Category Combination i ai gay P gory Category Option Group Category I Category Combination E Create 5 modify view and delete data element categories E Create modify view and delete data element category Category Opti
385. nit on the left panel 2 Select a program in list on the main panel 3 Select a status event you want to get 4 Check on Show only Risk cases if you only want to show risk cases in result 5 Click Show Event List button Lost To Follow Up Registering unit Ngelehun CHC Program GTB program rt Status Overdue v Show Event List Advanced search Show only Risk cases Total number of results 45 National identifier First name Last name Gender TB number Operations 1 Scott Kelley E 7 2 Jimmy Lloyd E MO 3 Santiago Joseph Ga 7 4 Lynn Moreno E F AO 5 Drew Vaughn E MO 6 Jeanette Zimmerman F a 7 10 301 Tracker Individual records Click Events icon first icon under Operations corresponding to the entity which you would like to open event list according to the search criteria Then click on a date in event list to open the data entry screen Click on Dashboard icon the second icon under Operations to open his her dashboard Click on Edit icon the third icon under Operations to edit program tracking information Click Tracked entity instance details and history icon the forth icon under Operations corresponding to the event which you would like to open the entity history To search events by due date click on Advanced Search button A advanced search criteria is shown After selecting the organisation unit type and filling the due date range which you would like click on Search button on
386. nly for the selected organisation unit e Include children of organisation unit Export event data for the children of the organisation unit as well as the selected organisation unit itself e Include descendants of organisation unit Export event data for the descendants of the organisation unit as well as the selected organisation unit itself Event data can be exported either as XML or JSON and either compressed or uncompressed in a ZIP file Once you have set all options press Export The export file will now by downloaded to your local computer Import and export Exporting data to other systems 21 3 5 Exporting data to other systems 21 3 5 1 DHIS 1 4 Meta data export The DHIS 1 4 Meta data export functionality provides the same functionality as the standard DHIS2 meta data export except that the resulting file can be used to transmit meta data information to DHIS 1 4 systems DHIS 1 4 XML Meta Data Export Elements Data elements Data element groups Data element group sets Indicators Indicator groups Indicator group sets Data dictionaries Data sets Organisation units Organisation unit groups Organisation unit group sets Organisation unit levels Validation rules Reports Report tables Charts Export fi Select all Select none 21 3 5 2 DHIS 1 4 Detailed Metadata Export The DHIS 1 4 Metadata export functionality provides the same functionality as the detailed DHIS 2 metadata export except that the resulting f
387. nsion dx FnYCr2EAzZws eTDtyyaSA7f amp dimension pe THIS_YEAR amp filter ou ImspTQPwCqd 1 AHeEaON aS oSA a So Woes E arevona eens 0 2s Ss We sealies yy ere cto acter Lg ee hoe EE E Sony gt BEG e O Vora En a ET lt Soam lt a diy EO COV era en opa e e A Soana a A few other tips To include graphics you can convert an image to SVG and embed that SVG content directly in the report DHIS 2 is based on HTML 5 where SVG tags are valid markup To include charts and maps in your report you can use the charts and maps resources in the Web API You can use the full capability of the Web API from JavaScript in your report it may be useful to read through the Web API chapter to get an overview of all available resources 165 Data approval Approving and accepting Chapter 20 Data approval DHIS 2 has an optional feature that allows authorized users to approve data that has been entered It allows data to be reviewed and approved at selected levels in the organisation unit hierarchy so the approval follows the structure of the hierarchy from lower levels to higher levels Data is approved for a combination of a data set b period and c organisation unit Data may be approved for the organisation unit for which it is entered as well as for higher level organisation units to which the data is aggregated As part of system settings you can choose the organisation unit level s at which data is approved It can be approved at
388. nstead of using the legend this can be done by adding whatever text you want to present in the Category expression field or by inserting an expression to have it filled automatically when the report is run In this case we want to have one bar for each organisation unit We therefore edit the category expression by clicking on the button to the right item Hyperlink Series expression required Dropout Rate Category expression required Value expression required Ffane dropout rate Label Expression 2 Cancel As the expression we chose organisationunitname as shown below ANANO Expression editor Ln 1 Col 24 Parameters periodid Field Integer W equals Object boole D organisationunitid Field Integer toString Sti ing f gt Variables periodname Field String hashCode i organisationunitname Field compareTol Shin Yir C User Defined Expres reporting_month_name Field String ye ile sat yi Recent Expressions param_organisationunit_ name ip indexOf int i nt Gal Expression Wizards PE Aiaia When we are finished the series editor should look like below Click OK then Close to close the Chart Details window 153 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in 154 iReport aree Data Item Hyperlink Series expression required Hale a eee m p y DE oa a L l Category expression required F organisationunitname Value ex
389. nt to use the program on all organisation units no mater what the program is assigned to the organisation unit or not Unchecnk if the program is only used on organisation units assigned Dashboard shortcut to add relative section Define a program and a relationship type which has related to the program It s used for registering a new entity enroll into an other program and create relationship between entity who user is working on and the new entity E g after delivery a baby is born then in the Delivery event of the mother user can register this baby and enroll him her into the Child program After that create a relationship as Mother Child for this mother and her baby e Shortcut link label e g Add Child The label for this shortcut link which is displayed in Relation tab of entity dashboard Relationship Select a relationship type defined e g Mother Child e Who is the new relative to the existing entity e Program for new relative to be enrolled in Specify a program that new relatives of the entity who was enrolled in the program will be enrolled into this program when this relative registers the information Scheduling of events section e Skip generation of events that are overdue before enrollment date When a entity enrolls into the program the events corresponding to the program stages are created If this field is checked the system will ignore to generate overdue events Attributes section Specify the d
390. ntry Organisational unit levels correspond to the distinct levels within the hierarchy For instance a country may be organized into provinces then districts then facilities and then sub centers This organisational hierarchy would have five levels Within each level a number of organisational units would exist During the aggregation process data is aggregated from the lower organisational unit levels to higher levels Depending on the aggregation operator data may be summed or averaged within a given organisational unit level to derive the aggregate total for all the organisational units that are contained within a higher level organisational unit level For instance if there are ten districts contained in a province and the aggregation operator for a given data element has been defined as SUM the aggregate total for the province would be calculated as the sum of the values of the individual ten districts contained in that province 19 1 1 3 2 Period Periods are used to represent the when dimension associated with data values Data can easily be aggregated from weeks to months from months to quarters and from quarters to years DHIS 2 uses known rules of how these different intervals are contained within other intervals for instance Quarter 1 2010 is known to contain January 2010 February 2010 an March 2010 in order to aggregate data from smaller time intervals e g weeks into longer time intervals e g months 19 1 1
391. o a different language e Design data entry form Refer to the section on custom data entry forms for detailed information of how to use this function e Get PDF for Data Entry Download a PDF file which can be used for offline data entry e Edit compulsory data elements This dialog will allow you to add or remove data elements which will be marked as compulsory during data entry e Remove Completely removes a data set from the system Warning Any data set which is deleted from the system is irrevocably lost All data entry forms and section forms which may have been developed will also be removed Ensure that you have made a backup of your database before deleting any data set in case you need to restore it at some point in time Show details Display some informative information about the data set including the number of data elements the frequency and which data entry form has been assigned to the data set 6 1 2 Data set categories Before reading this section it is recommended to familiarize oneself with the sections on categories in the data element chapter Whereas data element categories can be used for capturing disaggregations of data elements data set categories are used to capture information which is common to an entire form To set up categories for data set start by creating category options categories and category combinations like described in the data element chapter Make sure that you set the type of cat
392. o connectivity or through email where there is limited Internet connectivity DHIS 2 provides robust export import functionality to fulfill these needs To access the main Import Export module choose Services gt Import Export A number of services are available all of which will be described in detail in respective sections below sen DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone ses Apps amp Protiie fs Kap Import Import Export Meta Data Import Data Import Meta Data Import Import meta data like data elements and organisation units using the standard DHIS 2 exchange format called DXF 2 Export Data Import Import data values on the DXF 2 XML JSON CSV and PDF formats DXF 2 is the standard exchange format for DHIS 2 Meta Data Export Meta Data Detailed Export Data Export Meta Data Export Export meta data like data elements and organisation units to the Export to other systems standard DHIS 2 exchange format Meta Data Detailed Export Export filtered meta data like data elements and organisation units to the standard DHIS 2 exchange format Data Export Export data values This is the regular export function which exports data to the DHIS 2 exchange format called DXF 2 Export to other systems Export data and meta data to formats such as PDF Excel and the DHIS 1 4 exchange format VY YH YH 4 21 1 Meta data import 21 1 1 Meta data import Meta data objects can be easily imported by accessing Import Export gt Meta Data im
393. o define types of entities which can be tracked through the system which can be anything from persons to commodities e g medicine person A program must have one tracked entity And the entity registered must be specified an tracked entity To enrol an entity into a program the tracked entity of an entity and tracked entity of program must be the same To access the tracked entity maintenance module from Apps menu go to Programs Attributes option and click on it and select Tracked Entity menu 29 2 1 5 Tracked entity form The tracked entity form section provides a mechanism for defining custom registration form for each available program in system or for normal registration form which is used to register any entity without having program information and this entity can enroll into a certain program after that To access the entity registration form maintenance module from Apps menu go to Programs Attributes option and click on it and select Tracked Entity Form option 283 Tracker Programs Attributes To define a custom registration form please select a program in list and click on the row corresponding the program you want to design Then select Design registration form link on context menu Note Check on Auto save registration form checkbox in Design tracked entity form to save the custom registration form to being designed automatically 29 2 1 6 Program and Program stage The section provides a mechanism for
394. o the PDF Data Import item in the left side menu Upload the completed PDF file and click Import After the import process is finished you can follow the link to the import summary which will inform you about the outcome of the import process in terms of number of records imported updated and ignored and potential conflicts 21 2 5 Importing data from DHIS 1 4 There are two ways to import data from a DHIS 1 4 database 1 through the 1 4 XML based export files or 2 directly from the DHIS 1 4 data file mdb Both are accessible from the DHIS 1 4 Import menu under Import in the Import Export module It is critical that all data integrity violations which are present in the DHIS 1 4 database be fully resolved before attempting an import into DHIS2 You can check the data integrity of DHIS 1 4 through the CORE Module gt Advanced gt Data integrity checks A report will be generated of all data integrity violations which should be resolved prior to importing into DHIS2 Warning When data is imported from DHIS 1 4 both the meta data as well as data are imported You should therefore be exceedingly careful that the meta data present in DHIS 1 4 is compatible with your DHIS2 data otherwise during a DHIS 1 4 data import the meta data in the DHIS2 system will be potentially overwritten by the i 21 2 5 1 DHIS 1 4 File database Import This method is recommend when doing large imports from 1 4 and especially when importing into a ne
395. o the number of periods for which data is found For example say we are looking for 17 past periods with high outliers set to 4 and low outliers set to 2 If data is found for only 9 of these past periods only 2 high outliers will be discarded and only 1 low outlier will be discarded When a surveillance rule is evaluated the left side of the equation is evaluated for the current period and the right side is evaluated for each of the past periods The right side values for past periods are averaged and the average is compared to the left side value according to the operator Any high or low outliers are removed before the right side average is taken A surveillance rule may contain data elements for periods that are longer than the period given for the rule This is useful for example if you want to divide a data element value by the population count and the population count is entered annually The data for the longer period type e g population count must be entered for a period that overlaps with the start of the period being evaluated For example if the period being evaluated is the week starting January 6 2014 the yearly population count must be entered for the year containing January 6 2014 If the data element is from a longer period type than the rule period type it must have an aggregation operator of average not sum In other words only data elements that don t sum through time like population count can be used from longer per
396. observed or recorded which is further characterized by a number of dimensions As an example the data element Number of fully immunized children would refer to the number of children that received this particular service Data elements are always linked to a period as as well as an organizational unit They optionally may be linked to other dimensions Data element groups are used to categorize multiple data elements according to a common theme such as Immunization or ART Typically they are used during reporting and analysis to allow related data elements to be analyzed together Data element groups are used to categorize multiple data element groups into a common theme A dimension is used to categorize data elements during analysis Dimensions provide a mechanism to group and filter data based on common characteristics Typically related data elements may be aggregated or filtered during analysis with the use of dimensions Dimensions may be a member of a hierarchy For instance the Period dimension may be broken down into Day gt Month gt Quarter gt Year See Data exchange format Typically an electronic database system that is used to record aggregated data on service delivery disease incidence human resource data and other information used to evaluate the performance of delivery of health services Typically an HMIS does not contain the highly detailed data of electronic medical record systems or individual patient da
397. ods The period selection is more advanced as it can in addition to specific periods like Jan 09 Q1 08 2007 also contain what is called relative periods As report usually is run routinely over time a specific period like Jan 09 is not very useful in a report Instead if you want to design a monthly report you should use the relative period called Reporting Month Then you must also include Reporting Month as one of your report parameters to let the system know what exactly is the Reporting Month on the time of report generation There are many other relative periods available and they all relate to the report parameter Reporting Month E g the relative period called So far this year refers to the accumulative value for the year incl the Reporting Month If you want a trend report with multiple periods in stead of one aggregated period you can select e g Months this year which would give you values for each month so far tn the year You can do a similar report with quarters The idea is to support as many generic report types as possible using relative periods so if you have other report needs please suggest new relative periods on the mailing list and they might be added to the report table options Cross tabbing dimensions Cross tabbing is a very powerful functionality in report design as the typical DHIS 2 data table with references to period data element indicator and orgunit makes more advanced report design very difficult as y
398. og for hints and look for common errors such as Name duplicates in the GML file The name column in the database is unique and does not accept two organisation units with the same name The shortname column in the organisationunit table in your database has a too small varchar definition Increase it to 100 125 Setting up GIS Importing coordinates Special name characters in the GML file Be sure to convert these to appropriate XML equivalents or escape sequences Wrongly formatted input GML non matching tags 126 Setting up report functionality Data sources for reporting Chapter 19 Setting up report functionality 19 1 Data sources for reporting 19 1 1 Types of data and aggregation In the bigger picture of HIS terminology all data in DHIS are usually called aggregated as they are aggregates e g monthly summaries of medical records or some kind of service registers reported from the health facilities Aggregation inside DHIS however which is the topic here is concerned with how the raw data captured tn DHIS through data entry or import are further aggregated over time e g from monthly to quarterly values or up the organisational hierarchy e g from facility to district values 19 1 1 1 Terminology e Raw data refers to data that is registered into the DHIS 2 either through data entry or data import and has not been manipulated by the DHIS aggregation process All these data are stored in the table
399. ommunity Reporting to mobile and on mobile there will be a screen to choose whether displaying Facility Reporting or Community Reporting Errors 24 3 5 2 Logging in for regular use After starting the application the PIN form is displayed e PIN Enter the four digit number PIN e Reinitialize Command this function will clear all data on mobile and we start from the login screen with username and password e Errors Invalid PIN If the user has entered an invalid PIN they will need to enter the correct PIN or reinitialize the application with the correct username and password 24 3 5 3 Facility Reporting Module 24 3 5 3 1 Entering data 240 After selecting an aggregate dataset from the Select report form window the user will need to select an appropriate time period A list of available time periods is automatically generated 1 After the user has entered their PIN they can select from a list of available datasets Select the appropriate dataset and press Next Fall Select report form RS 2 Choosing periods A list of available periods will be automatically displayed to the user They can select the appropriate period from the list Mobile Mobile application setup Period So are Week 06 2011 Week 05 2011 Week 04 2011 Cancel 3 Fill in values After choosing the period the form can be displayed in two modes depending on the e Form with sections Each form section is displayed in a si
400. on Group Set mbinations A Categories are used for disaggregation of data elements Indicator Category Option Group Category Option Group Set Create modify view and delete category option groups which can E Create modify view and delete category option group sets which si Indicator be used to classify category options can be used for improved data analysis Indicator Type Indicator Indicator Type Indicator Group 7 Create modify view and delete indicators An indicator is a formula Create modify view and delete indicator types An indicator type is consisting of data elements and numbers a factor for an in e dicator like percentag Indicator Group Editor Indicator Group Set Indicator Group Indicator Group Editor iy Create modify view and delete indicator groups Groups are used 7 Easily add or remove indicators to and from indicator groups as for improved analysis Indicator Group Set Create modify view and delete indicator group sets Group sets are q used for improved analysis From the left side menu or by clicking on the sections listed in the central area you can access the various sections on data elements and indicators Each of the options for maintenance of data elements will be described in the following section e Data element Create modify view and delete data elements e Data element group Create modify view and delete data element groups e Data element group editor Easily add or remo
401. on the toolbar A window will open up and this is where you write your interpretation When you are done click share button in the bottom right corner of the window The window will close automatically and if the interpretation was shared successfully you will find a notification on the bottom toolbar Embed in web page This option will generate a HTML fragment which can be used to display the pivot table in an external web page Certain analysis related resources in DHIS like pivot tables charts and maps can be embedded in any web page by using a plugin If you have created a table in the Pivot Table app you will get the plug in configuration for this table by clicking the Share button the tool bar and then Embed as webpage You will find more information about the plugins in the web api chapter Favorite link Provides a URL for the favorite This can then be easily shared with other users or colleagues via email or chat API Link Provides a URL of the API resource By default this is a HTML resource but by modifying the suffix of html to json or csv other data types are available This option is most useful when you need an API link to the pivot table resource Consult the DHIS2 developers guide for details about the different types which are available 15 6 Analysis integration 104 The analysis apps in DHIS 2 are completely integrated so you can easily switch between pivot table chart and map visualization of your d
402. on to view detail information which aggregated 306 Program Indicators Overview Chapter 30 Program Indicators This chapter covers how to configure and use program indicators Program indicators are expressions based on data elements and attributes of tracked entities which can be used to calculate values based on a formula 30 1 Overview The purpose of program indicators is to provide a way to produce calculated values based on data elements and attributes Program indicators have an aggregation type an expression and a filter which in combination determines how the indicator will be evaluated 30 2 Setup Program indicators can be managed from the Programs and Attributes app Once in the app navigate to Programs A program indicator belongs to exactly one program so click on the program for which you want to create an indicator and from the context menu navigate to View program indicators This will open the list of existing indicators if any for this program To add an indicator click the Add new button in the top right corner This will open the new indicator screen Provide a name short name code description value type expression and filter for the indicator To edit an indicator click on the relevant indicator in the list to open the context menu and click Edit This will open the edit indicator screen where you can modify the relevant values To remove an indicator click on the relevant indicator in th
403. on units Data Category dimensions Pernod Hide Update This section lets you define which dimension of the data you want to appear as series category and filter by dragging and dropping these options to the appropriate space Only one dimension can be in each section This asks for a closer explanation Dimension in this regard refers to the elements which describe the data values in the system We have three main dimensions in the system 1 Data Includes data elements indicators and datasets reporting rates describing the phenomena or event of the data 2 Periods Describes when the event took place 108 Using Data Visualizer Selecting indicators and data elements 3 Organisation units Describes where the event took place The visualization module lets you use these dimensions completely flexible in terms of appearing as series categories and filter Understanding these concepts is most easily done by looking at the screenshot from the opening page below Example chart I Series1 JJ Series2 JJ Series3 J Series 4 0 T T T A 2 Co gt i se re er CG CG CG More formally this can be described as following a A o w N o 1 Series A series is a set of continuous related elements e g periods or data elements which you want to visualize in order to emphasize trends or relations in its data 2 Categories A category is a set of elements e g indicators
404. oncise tables which are easier to understand and which address a particular analysis Using Data Visualizer Data Visualizer overview Chapter 16 Using Data Visualizer 16 1 Data Visualizer overview The data visualizer module enables users to easily create dynamic data analysis and visualizations through charts and data tables You can freely select content like indicators periods and organisation units for your analysis This module can be accessed by selecting Data Visualizer from the app menu The image below shows the viewport of the module For a quick start 1 Look under the Data heading and select an indicator group from the list of groups 2 Look under Available indicators and select a few indicators from the list by double clicking on them 3 Click Update in the top bar and see the chart unfold The data visualizer is designed firstly to be easy to use you can simply select the indicators data elements periods and organisation units you want to include and click Update to get your visualization Secondly it is designed to be fast and work well over poor Internet connections charts are generated in the web browser and very little data is transferred over the Internet a 7 lt lt lt Update Layout Options Favorites Download Share Tabie ih Chart E Map About Home ve W i E ELLE a a 3 Data Sierra Leone M ANC 1 Coverage ME ANC 2 Coverage W ANC 3Coverage Indicators v
405. ons Below tables shows the papameters required for configuring gateway Table 24 2 Gateway Configuration Parameters Parameter BulkSMS Clickatell Generic Modem SMPP Description Gateway Gateway HTTP Gateway Gateway Gateway Gateway Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Used as Name gateway identity Default name will be stored in case this parameter 263 Mobile Gateway Configurations Parameter BulkSMS Clickatell Generic Modem SMPP Description Gateway Gateway HTTP Gateway Gateway Gateway IS not configured Its use Is recommended User Name Required Required Required Not Required Used for Applicable API authentication API ID Not Required Not Not Not Used to Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable identify specific sms account on Clickatell Server Address Not Not Not Not Required Systemid Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable required for SMPP communication Port Not Not Not Required Required Serial Port Applicable Applicable Applicable in case of Modem for example COMI or dev ttySO Application Port in case of SMPP for example 2775 Region Required Not Not Not Not The Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable BULKSMS region servers you wish to use Should be one of the following UNITEDKINGDOM SOUTHAFRICA SPAIN USA GERMANY Leave the setting empty to use the INTERNATIONAL setting
406. or Java object if you prefer called DataValue Aggregated data refers to data that has been aggregated by the DHIS 2 meaning it is no longer raw data but some kind of aggregate of the raw data Indicator values can also be understood as aggregated data but these are special in the way that they are calculated based on user defined formulas factor numerator denominator Indicator values are therefore processed data and not raw data and are located in the aggregatedindicatorvalue table object Indicators are calculated at any level of the organisational hierarchy and these calculations are then based on the aggregated data values available at each level A level attribute in the aggregateddatavalue table refers to the organisational level of the orgunit the value has been calculated for Period and Period type are used to specify the time dimension of the raw or aggregated values and data can be aggregated from one period type to another e g from monthly to quarterly or daily to monthly Each data value has one period and that period has one period type E g data values for the periods Jan Feb and Mar 2009 all of the monthly period type can be aggregated together to an aggregated data value with the period Q1 2009 and period type Quarterly 19 1 1 2 Basic rules of aggregation 19 1 1 2 1 What is added together Data raw can be registered at any organisational level e g at national hospital at level 2 a health facility at level
407. or Report Show details Immunization Overview HTML based wi Immunization Raw data by district and chiefdom SQL based Nutrition Breastfeeding and malnutrition No ofpages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to page 1 Go ae 1 You run view a report by clicking on the name of the report and then selecting Create from the contextual menu If there are any pre defined paramaters you will see a report parameter window where you must fill in the values needed for orgunit and or reporting month depending on what has been defined in the underlying report table s Click on Get Report when you are ready The report will either appear directly in your browser or be available as a PDF file for download depending on your browser settings for handling PDF files You can save the file and keep it locally on your computer for later use 14 3 Using dataset reports Dataset reports are printer friendly views of the data entry screen filled with either raw or aggregated data These are only available for data sets that have custom data entry forms and not for default or section forms You can access data set reports from Apps gt Reports A Criteria window will appear where you fill in the details for your report Dataset The data set you want to display Reporting period The actual period you want data for This can be aggregated as well as raw periods This means that you can ask for a quarterly or annual report even though the
408. or organisation units for which you want to compare its data 3 Filter Since most charts are two dimensional a filter must be used on the third dimension in order to use only a single element for the chart to become meaningful 16 4 Selecting indicators and data elements The visualizer module can display any number of indicators and data elements in a chart and data table Both indicators and data elements can be selected and appear together in the same chart with their order of appearance the same as the order in which they are selected You can select indicators by choosing Indicators from the Data header and selecting an indicator group from the list of groups below it This will make the indicators in the selected group appear in the list under Available indicators to the left From that list you can double click on any indicator in order to select it this will move it to the list under Selected indicators Alternatively you can mark one or more indicators and click the single arrow button To select all indicators you simply click on the double arrow button To deselect indicators you can do correspondingly in the Selected indicators list To select data elements choose Data Elements from the Data header The same principle for selecting and deselecting indicators applies for data elements 16 5 Selecting reporting rates The visualizer can display reporting rates in a chart by itself or together with indicators and data e
409. orbiditymortality group set The result is shown below All All AJ all Ally ji ii Multiple terns All ac dlii aijai Sum of value Mew Cases Followup Referrals Deaths Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP 29 12 All Others B2044 3 2 1543 Anaemia 14 4 2 0 ARI Treated With Antibiotics Pneumonia 35474 4 2 353 ARI Treated Without Antibiotics Cough 14 Burme d 4 2 Cholera 310 Clinical Malnutrition 93081 34 2 176 Diarrhoea With Blood Dysentery 25341 4 12 rg Diarrhoea With Severe Dehydration 4 2 Diarrhoea Without Severe Dehydration 4 4 Eye Infection 4 4 2 The result is a much more user friendly pivot table Now another figure shows the relationship between the group sets and elements these are fake data values Data dimensions in DHIS2 How this works in pivot tables This small detail of the pivot table show how the actual data elements link to the group sets e The four data elements as defined in DHIS are Measles death Measles follow up Measles new and Measles referrals e They all belong to the group set diagnosis where they have been lumped together in the group Measles e The group set morbiditymortality contains the groups New cases Follow up Referrals and Deaths e Only the data element Measles deaths has data related to the group Deaths thus this is where the data value 20 is shown at the upper right corner The same for Measles new the value 224 is shown
410. orld This solution is increasingly becoming the standard solution for hosting of application services The aspect of building local capacity for server administration is compatible with this option since a local ICT team can be tasked with maintaining the externally hosted server but with not being burdened with worrying about power supply and bandwidth constraints which usually exist outside of major data centres An approach for combining the benefits of external hosting with the need for local hosting and physical ownership is to use an external hosting provider for the primary transactional system while mirroring this server to a locally hosted non critical server which is used for read only purposes such as data analysis and accessed over the intranet 1 5 Difference between Aggregated and Patient data ina HIS Patient data is data relating to a single patient such as his her diagnosis name age earlier medical history etc This data is typically based on a single patient health care worker interaction For instance when a patient visits a health care clinic a variety of details may be recorded such as the patient s temperature their weight and various blood tests Should this patient be diagnosed as having Vitamin B 12 deficiency anaemia unspecified corresponding to ICD 10 code D51 9 this particular interaction might eventually get recorded as an instance of Anaemia in an aggregate based system Patient based data is important w
411. ormula can be created without any program stage like DE 1 3 Attribute tab List all available fixed attributes such as gender DOB type Age days and user defined attributes Besides provide a formula for calculating number of entities who registered in system However if a program without registration is selected entity attributes aren t displayed Program tab Provide formulas for calculating data value related to the selected program and program stage e The number of entities who enrolled the selected program e The number of entities times that Date of enrollment Date of incident is greater then a certain number 291 Tracker Programs Attributes e The number of entities who visited the selected program stage OR the number of visits what are registered in the system e The number of entities by age at the report time Condition section This section contains comparing operations lt lt gt gt calculation operation priority operation boolean values Yes No status operations NULL NULL DateDiff xxx Incident date DateDiff xxx Enrollment date DateDiff xxx Report date relation operations AND OR COMBINE These operations are used for Supporting in setting condition for query Note COMBINE operator is used for calculate number of children organidation units completed all program stage instances E g For the formula like this PSIC 1149293 COMB
412. ort query window will appear Click on the Sort options button 143 Setting up report functionality ANOO Report query JavaBean Datasource Query language SOL DataSource Provider Designing Standard reports in iReport CSV Datasource E Load query save query Drag a parameter add a parameter Parameter as quer Available paramet Fields provider for sql queries ready W Automatically Retrieve Fields Read Fields Query Field type jaVa lang Integer java lang String java lang String Field name organisationunitid organisationunitname reporting_month_name Filter expression Sort options Preview data a Refresh Preview Data First 100 records E thcurespt tbcurespt tbcurespt organisati tbcurespt param or Description f OK Cancel Ready 1 records read organisati reporting_ organisati A Sorting window as show below will appear Here we can add our sorting options Click the Add field button Another small window will show up with a drop down menu where you can choose Sort by organisationunitname to have the table sorted alphabetically by name Sort by Sorting Add field D Modify field Asc Dese Add modify parameter Sort by organisationunitname Field Sa Sort type Ascending B Click OK Close OK to close the three windows The table
413. ortant thing to have in mind while designing datasets is that the dataset and the corresponding data entry form which is a dataset with layout is a data collection tool and 30 Data dimensions in DHIS2 From tables to category combinations designing multi 10 Spo O Alia OO ere dle OLUIE g NOC ophi j ALCO A ETIN and reporting in DHIS than the data entry forms Paper forms are often designed with both data collection and reporting in mind and therefore you might see things such as cumulative values in addition to the monthly values repetition of annual data the same population data reported every month or even indicator values such as coverage rates in the same form as the monthly raw data When you store the raw data in DHIS every month and have all the processing power you need within the computerised tool there is no need in fact it would be stupid and most likely cause inconsistency to register manually calculated values such as the ones mentioned above You only want to capture the raw data in your datasets forms and leave the calculations to the computer and presentation of such values to the reporting tools in DHIS 3 8 1 From tables to category combinations designing multi dimensional data sets As we have seen in the examples above data element categories and category options are helpful in representing tabular data when adding dimensions to a field in a paper form We have also seen how the data element is one of the req
414. orting month selected by the user when running the report Note that all relative periods are relative to a reporting month The reporting month is either selected by the users otherwise the current month is used Here is a description of the possible relative periods e Reporting month Use this for monthly reports The month selected in the reporting month parameter will be used in the report e Months Quarters this year This will provide one value per month or quarter in the year This is well suited for standard monthly or quarterly reports where all month quarters need to be listed Periods that still have no data will be empty but will always keep the same column name e This year This is the cumulative so far in the year aggregating the periods from the beginning of the year up to and including the selected reporting month e Months Quarters last year This will provide one value per month or quarter last year relative to the reporting month This is well suited for standard monthly or quarterly reports where all month quarters need to be listed Periods that still have no data will be empty but will always keep the same column name e Last year This is the cumulative last year relative to the reporting month aggregating all the periods from last year Example relative periods Let s say we have chosen three indicators A B and C and we have also chosen to use the relative periods Reporting month and T
415. ou cannot put e g specific indicators periods or orgunits on specific columns E g by cross tabbing on the indicator dimension in an indicator report table you will get the indicator names on the column headers in your report in addition to a column referencing orgunit and another column referencing period With such a table design you could drag and drop indicator names to specific columns or chart positions in the iReport software Similarly you can cross tab on orgunits or periods to make their names specifically available to report design E g by cross tabbing on periods and selecting the two relative periods Reporting month and This year you can design reports with both the last month and the accumulative annual value for given month as they will be available as column headers in your report table 135 Setting up report functionality Report table outcome It is also possible to combine two dimensions in cross tabbing e g period and indicator which makes it possible to e g look at three selected indicators for two specific relative periods This would e g make it possible to make a table or chart based report with BCG DPT3 and Measles coverage both for the last month and the accumulative coverage so far in the year All in all by combining the functionality of cross tabbing relative periods and report table parameters you should have a tool to support most report scenarios If not we would be very happy to receive sugge
416. our changes and Cancel to discard any changes Note Similar to data element and indicator group sets typically indicator groups should be exclusive meaning that one indicator group should not belong to multiple indicator group sets 13 5 Indicator group editor The indicator group editor module functions essentially the same as the data element group editor module except on indicators You can easily rearrange the groups that indicators belong to with this module To access it choose To assign indicators to groups simple press 93 Indicators Indicator group editor Maintenance gt Data elements and indicators gt Indicator group editor from the main menu See the section on Data element group editor for further instructions 94 Using reporting functionality Reporting functionality in DHIS 2 Chapter 14 Using reporting functionality 14 1 Reporting functionality in DHIS 2 The reporting module in DHIS 2 provides a range of reporting alternatives and this section will explain how to use them to view and analyse data Another section explains how to configure and set up the various reporting tools Standard reports Standard reports are built on pivot tables but are more advanced in its design allowing for more cosmetics and styles These reports can also combine multiple tables and charts in the same report and be made available as one click reports that are very easy to use These reports can be downloaded as PDF files w
417. pe is special as it allows you to specify the aggregation type in line in the expression All other aggregation types are applied to the entire expression Using the custom aggregation type might lead to an exception of the order of evaluation described above where individual parts of the expression can be evaluated and aggregated as opposed to the entire expressio being evaluated prior to aggregation The following aggregation type operators can be used within expressions sum count stddev variance min max 30 3 2 Expression 308 The expression defines how the indicator is being calculated The expression can contain references to various entities which will be substituted with a related values when the indicator IS calculated e Data elements Will be substituted with the value of the data element for the time period and organisation unit for which the calculation is done Refers to both program stage and data element Attributes Will be substituted with the value of the attribute for the person tracked entity for which the calculation is done Variables Will be substituted with special values linked to the program including incident date and date of enrollment for the person current date and count of values in the expression for the time period and organisation unit for which the calculation is done e Constants Will be substituted with the value of the constant The expression is a mathematical expression that can
418. penID identifier on the user For every user that should be able to login with his openid identifier you will need to set this on the user itself This can be done in user management under the email field there is noe a field called OpenID which can be used to fill in the OpenID identifier Sharing Sharing of objects Chapter 8 Sharing 8 1 This chapter discusses the sharing of entities feature in DHIS 2 Sharing of objects Many objects in DHIS 2 like reports charts maps and indicators can be shared Sharing means making an object like a report available for reading or modification to a group of users or to everyone For instance for reports the sharing dialog can be opened by clicking on the Sharing settings button next to each report in the list Implementers can use this feature to allow access to certain objects to only certain user groups Users can use the feature to decide who they would like to share objects such as pivot tables charts dashboards etc with If sharing is Supported for a particular class of objects a dialog will be available called Sharing settings usually available by clicking on the name of the object or in the analytics tools through an icon Share with other people Once you have accessed the sharing settings for the object you wish to share a dialog similar to the one below will be shown Antenatal Care m Wakik External access without login Public access with login None Afr
419. per client Add selected X Add all 4 Remove selected X Remove all Selected indicators Indicators Data elements Here you select the data elements indicators that you want to include in the report Use the group filter to more easily find what you are looking for and double click on the items you want to include or use the buttons to add remove elements You can have both data elements and indicators in the same report Data sets Here you select the data sets that you want to include in the report Including a data set will give you data on the data completeness of the given set not data on its data elements Double click on the items you want to include or use the buttons 19 2 3 Selecting report parameters 132 Toggle fixed organisation units Toggle fixed periods Relative periods Reporting month C Months this year O Quarters this year _ This year L Months lastyear __ Quarters last year Lastyear Report parameters Reporting month C Grand parent organisation unit O Parent organisation unit C Organisation unit _ There are two ways to select both what organisation units to include in a report and what time periods should be included relative or fixed Fixed organisation units and or periods means that you select the units periods to include in the report table when you create the report table Using relative periods you can select the time and or units as parameters when the report table IS populated for ex
420. picks default attributes If no search criteria is assigned for an attribute then the attribute has no effect on searching However to control the appearance or not of an attribute as a column list one has to go through a menu available under the small gear icon Once a TEI is obtained either through searching or registration the app presents the selected TEI s dashboard 28 3 TEI dashboard 276 All operations on a tracked entity are available from this dashboard Anticipating multiple usecases or operations on registered TEI we have structured the dashboard as a collection of widgets more widgets can be added This helps to scale and handle complexity while staying Simple and clean DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Back 4 MNCH PNC Adult Woman Y Z 2 Enrollment ao Profile Edit ao Enrolling orgunit Ngelehun CHC Date of enrollment 2014 08 31 Last name Thompson LMP Date 2014 08 31 f Email sarah gmail com Complete EJ Date of birth 2001 01 01 a Indicators ao Service provider dU2P0v8JDco Ey w Data Entry eacoo i Ngelehun CHC i i Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC i i Ngelehun CHC i No active program other than selected i 2014 11 30 i 2015 08 20 2015 04 23 i 2015 08 20 i Relationships Add child Add ao Report ao 3 3 7 7 aa z Relationship National identifier First name Last name MNCH PNC Adult Woman Child Alan Thompson w Notes ao As shown in the figure above the dashboard starts with four
421. ponding to the program validations and formulas for aggregating data value from individual cases 2 Administrating entity registration Registering a new entity setting relationships enrolling this entity into a program and management of entity location Data entry for inputting individual data for treatment of each entity Reports for individual cases Linking data between tracker system and aggregate management system Ou BR W Provide a list of upcoming visits to better plan for daily weekly monthly activities at a facility or in an area 7 Support the work practices around tracking entities within a health programmes Advantages of tracker module 1 Facilitate the health service provider in person s treatment follow up by recording all treatment related information in one place and in effective monitoring of different health services and drill down to individual person information 2 Facilitate the health service provider at a facility or in an area a list of Upcoming visits to better plan for daily weekly activities 3 Help the person in recording treatment history in one place which could be used later in case of referral 4 Facilitate in recording entire treatment information of each entity 279 Tracker Getting started with tracker 5 Help strengthen the quality and fidelity of data The data in primary registers at sub center level is recorded and maintained by individual data or treatment cases and
422. port Select the file to import by pressing Select and choose the file from your local file system When importing XML and JSON files the system will automatically detect which type of objects which should be imported When importing CSV metadata you will need to specify the object type Consult the corresponding section in this manual on CSV Metadata import for more specific information on how the CSV file should be created 173 Import and export Meta data import DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Ses Apps amp Profile fat Ka Import Meta Data Import Meta Data Import File Choose File No file chosen Data Import Aa Format XML Dry run No v Export Strategy New and Updates v Meta Data Export Import Meta Data Detailed Export Data Export Export to other systems There are two separate options for importing data e Dry run This is similar to the old preview option this will do a dry run import and give you information about any errors e Strategy There are three options here New and Updates New only and Update only New and updates tells the importer to expect both new meta data and updates to existing ones New only will only accept fresh meta data usually you would use this on a empty database Updates only will only allow the meta data to match meta data that is already there Same identifiers new name etc Note It is highly recommend always using the Dry run option when importing data to make S
423. pression required F anc dropout rate Label Expression a A If you add a good description in the Category expression area you can leave out the legend box This is done in the Report properties panel of iReport where you can also edit many other details of the chart Bar3DChart Properties Thx Subtitle Color E 0 0 0 m Legend Font Sansserif 10 ea Legend Color E 0 0 0 pe Legend Background Col O 255 255 255 Legend Position We can also add a title to the chart for example the name of the indicator This is also done in the Chart properties panel under Title expression Title Expression ANC Dropout Ratel Title Font SansSerif 12 Title Color E 0 0 0 Title Position Subtitle Expression m Subtitle Font SansSerif 10 pe The Expression editor window will appear where you can enter the title Note that the title must be in quotes as shown below Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport ANO Bar 3D Chart Title Expression Ln 1 Col 18 Parameters organisationunitid Field T numberofLep organisationunitname Field String numberOfTi Deen reporting _month_name Field String bitCount int i Varian les l param_organisationunit_name Field String equals Obje L User Defined Expressions grganisation_unit_is_parent Field String LtoString int Recent Expressions anc dropout rate_quarterl last_year Field Double toString nt E Expression Wizards
424. proved See the Data approval chapter e Skip data mart aggregation Define whether data for this data set should be skipped during data mart generation You should leave this on no which is the default behavior in most situations Can be useful if you have limited server resources and are setting up new experimental data sets e Enable for Java mobile client Sets whether or not the dataset can be used within the Java mobile DHIS2 application All fields for data elements required Defines whether it is mandatory to fill all values for a data element in data entry if one or more values have been filled This means that if the user enters one data value for a data element in an entry field i e for a category option combination then she must enter data for all fields belonging to that data element i e all category option combinations e Complete allowed only if validation passes Controls whether it should be possible to mark a data entry form as complete only if the validation of that form is successful Default behavior is yes If set to no then a user cannot mark the form complete if validation fails e Missing values requires comment on complete Sets whether or not any missing values require comment to justify their absence e Skip Offline Controls whether this data entry form should be downloaded and saved in the user s web browser Normally you should leave this on no which is the default behavior If you have forms which ar
425. quire category option combo of data value to be part of the category combo of the data element of the data value Require organisation units to match assignment of data set Require organisation unit of data value to be assigned to one or more of the data sets which the data element of data value is assigned to Require attribute option combos to match category combo of data set Require attribute option combo of data value to be part of the category combo of the data set which the data element of data value is assigned to Require category option combo to be specified Require category option combo of data value to be specifed By default it will fall back to default category option combo if not specified Require attribute option combo to be specified Require attribute option combo of data value to be specifed By default it will fall back to default attribute option combo if not specified 23 1 9 Synchronization settings Remote server URL The URL of the remote server running DHIS 2 to upload data values to Use of SSL HTTPS is recommended since username and password is sent with the request using basic authentication The system will attempt to synchronize data once every minute Note that you must enable data synch from Data administration gt Scheduling Remote server username The username of the DHIS 2 user account on the remote server to use for data synchronization Remote server password The password of the DHIS 2 user account
426. r Tip use abs x sin x cos x tan x In x log x sqrt x mod x y oizp x Zing x j I And Or i lt lt gt gt z Filter description DHS 2010 Water connection in the household 1 and DHS 2010 Improved drinking water source 2 You can switch between data elements attributes variables and constants by using the tabs You can include such items into expressions and filters by double clicking in the list The buttons below the expression area can be used to insert operators An example filter that uses both attributes and data elements looks like this A cejWyOofXge6 Female and A03MvHHogjJR a3kGcGDCuk6 lt 2 i Tip DHIS 2 is using the JEXL library for evaluating expressions which supports additional syntax beyond what is covered in this documentation See the reference at the project home page to learn how you can create more sophisticated expressions 30 3 4 Functions 310 The indicator expression and filter support a range of functions The functions can be applied to data elements and attributes Table 30 2 Functions Function Arguments Description d2 daysBetwe mate date Produces the number of days between two data elements attributes of type date The static date format is yyyy MM dd d2 condition boolean expr true val Evaluates the conditional expression and if true false val returns the true value if false returns the false value The conditional expression
427. r an entity you have to click on Search available entity link to navigate to search page 299 Tracker Individual records To register a new entity and create relationship with the selected entity click Register new entity link To set a relative entity as representative click on the Set as representative icon the first icon under Operations according to the entity you would like 29 2 2 1 5 Change entity location and View entity details and history You can change entity location by clicking the Change entity location icon under Operations or click on Change location link on Demographics section in Dashboard In addition you can view all entity details and history by click on entity details and history icon under Operations Furthermore you can download all entity details and history in the format of XLS or PDF by clicking Download as Excel or Download as PDF button 29 2 2 1 6 Advanced search entities 300 The Advanced search function is used for searching available entities based on full name identifiers and entity attribute values To access Advanced search function from the Services menu go the Individual Records option and click on it Select Find Add entity option on the left menu to proceed Then after selecting organisation unit click on the Search button on the right side A search form is appeared after clicking User has to select criteria and input values into the Person managem
428. r by organisation unit The User by organisation unit function allows you see which users have been assigned to a particular organisation unit Simply select the organisation unit from the tree on the left and a list of users which have been assigned to this particular organisation unit will be displayed 7 1 5 Managed users DHIS 2 supports a concept for user management referred to aS managed users which which allows to explicitly define which users should be allowed to manage or modify which users To manage a user implies that you can see and modify that user The basic concept for user management is that you can see and modify users which you have been granted all of the authorities in other words you can modify users which have a subset of your own authorities The managed users concept gives you greater control over this The managed users concept allows you to define which users should be able to manage which users This is configured through user groups and memberships within such groups A user group can be configured to be allowed to manage other user groups from the standard add and update user interface The effect is that a specific user can manage all users which are members of user groups which can be managed by a user group that the user is member of In other words users can be managed by all members of user groups which are managing user groups they are member of To enable this concept you should grant users the authority to
429. r group set data dictionary data set program standard report resource report table chart map and user group Out of those objects report table chart map and user group are open for everyone to create privately Private means that the objects are available only to yourself or potentially to a number of user groups if you choose to share the object These objects are referred to as open objects and can be created by all users The remaining objects require that your user account has the authority to create them These objects are referred to as non open objects A user can be granted the authority to create publicly accessible objects or privately accessible objects In order to create a publicly accessible object available for viewing or editing by anyone your user account must have the authority to do so As an example to create a publicly accessible chart your user must have the Create public chart authority granted The authority to create private objects applies only to non open objects For example to allow a user to create indicators which will only be accessible to that user and not to everyone the user can be issued with the Create private indicator authority Sharing a non open object with another person and let her edit the object requires that the person s user account has the authority for updating that type of objects granted For instance if you want to let another person edit your indicator that person s user accoun
430. r in messages section After sending out the new feedback the message feedback will be listed under Messages for further following up 4 Reports The output reports from the server Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Messages 3 Reports ettings Y Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version will be updated 5 Settings User information e g First name Surname Phone number E mail and the Interface language Menu Data Entry Namebased Data Entry Beneficiary Enrollment Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version Here is the form for setting the user account access and the interface language Click on SAVE for completing the settings see the example below 221 Mobile Mobile Phone number E mail nterface Language English United Kingdom Navigate to Home 6 Logout to log out the application Getting started with mobile browser data entry Menu Data Entry Tracking Messages 3 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout JES version 7 Desktop version navigate to the desktop version of DHIS2 for administration 222 Mobile Getting started with mobile browser data entry Menu Data Entry Namebased Data Entry Beneficiary Enrollment Messages 2 Reports Settings Navigate to Feedback Logout Desktop version Here is the GUI of the desktop version which require much me
431. r yearly Both which data elements to include in the dataset and the period type is defined by the user together with a name short name and code In order to use a dataset to collect data for a specific orgunit you must assign the orgunit to the dataset and this mechanism controls which orgunits that can use which datasets and at the same time defines the target values for data completeness e g how many health facilities in a district expected to submit RCH data every month A data element can belong to multiple datasets but this requires careful thinking as it may lead to overlapping and inconstant data being collected if e g the datasets are given different frequencies and are used by the same orgunits 2 5 3 1 Data entry forms Once you have assigned a dataset to an orgunit that dataset will be made available in Data Entry under Services for the orgunits you have assigned it to and for the valid periods according to the dataset s period type A default data entry form will then be shown which is simply a list of the data elements belonging to the dataset together with a column for inputting the values If your dataset contains data elements with categories such as age groups or gender then additional columns will be automatically generated in the default form based on the categories In addition to the default list based data entry form there are two more alternatives the section based form and the custom form 2 5 3 1 1 Section
432. re assigned an organisational level AS an example Sierra Leone has four organisation unit levels National District Chiefdom and PHU and all orgunits are linked to one of these levels An orgunit hierarchy in DHIS can have any number of levels Normally data is collected at the lowest level at the health facility but can be collected at any level within the hiearchy such as both the districts as well as the facility level When designing reports at higher levels with data aggregated at the district or province level DHIS 2 will use the hierarchy structure to aggregate all the health facilities data for any given unit at any level The organisation unit level capturing the data always represents the lowest level of detail that is possible to use in data analysis and the organisational levels define the available levels of aggregation along a geographical dimension 3 3 1 Organisation unit group sets and groups While facility level is typically the lowest geographical level for disaggregation in DHIS 2 there are ways to flexibly group organisation units into any number of dimensions by using the organisation unit groups and group set functionality AS an example if all facilities are given an official type like Community health center or District Hospital it is possible to create an organisation unit group set called Type and add groups with the names of the types mentioned above ln order for the group sets to function properly in an
433. re most useful when using the parent organisation unit or grand parent organisation unit parameters in the report table 19 4 2 4 1 Hiding the parameter organisation unit from the table We exclude the parameter organisation unit from the table by using a property in the Details band called Print when expression To set a Print when expression start by selecting the Detail band in the Report inspector then edit the Print when expression in the properties panel hae dpt A Styles fe or Parameters gt Fields gt Variables P Scriptlets gt Title Page Header Column Header gt Column Footer i Page Footer a Summary t Background Detail 1 Properties Ik Y Band properties Band height 21 Print When Expression F organisation_un C Split Type Stretch Split allowed wi The Expression editor window should now appear What we must do is to create an expression that checks if the row being generated is the row with the organisation unit given as a parameter The report table contains a column that we can use for this called organisation_unit_is_parent To exclude the row with the parameter organisation unit double click on organisation_unit_is_parent in the list to copy it to the expression area then add equals No at the end so that the code is F organisation_unit_is_parent equals No This tells the report engine to only print table rows where the organisation
434. report group wizard Select a name for the group in this case we choose Indicator In the drop down menu we can select what columns in the report table we want the groups to be based on So if we wanted one table for each organisation unit we would choose organisation unit name as the report object to group according to However 6 5 6 New group wizard Steps Group criteria 1 Group criteria 2 Details Group name Indicator Group by the following report object indicatorname Field String O Group by the following expression Help lt Back Finish Cancel fi 147 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in 148 iReport The next step is to select whether or not we want a separate Group header and Group footer band for each report group In this case we choose to include both Click Finish and the group bands should appear in the report aoe New group wizard Steps Details l Group criteria 2 Detail a iw Add the group header WI Add the group footer tee i O ar elp lt Back Jext gt Cancel ee ieee If you upload and run the report it will now create one table for each indicator However it will not look very good as there will be no header row over each table only one header at the top of each page Also there is no indication as to which table is showing which indicator In the following we will fix this Instead of having the title row in th
435. report one table for each indicator or one table of each organisation unit In the following we will go through the steps needed to make a report with three indicators each represented in one table It is important that the report table does not crosstab on indicators when we want to make groups of tables based on indicators In our example the jrxml file downloaded from DHIS 2 will by default have one column for organisation unit and on for indicators assuming we have chosen periods as the only crosstab dimension We start by removing the indicator column since this in not needed in our case and realign the other fields to fit the report Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport i Padding And Borders 7 Copy ob 6 Cut ae x 5 d Paste 44 Delete 34 oe ee OY COTAL Copy format i Paste format nd n Transform to p One roup selected elements Group selected element s Ungroup selected element s Bring Forward ndicator EF Send Backward Flindicatorname oF Send To Back i Next we create out Report group Go to the report inspector right click on the report name dpt is the default and choose Add Report Group Page format Remove Report Margins Properties Edit Query qvvVVVV VY ve dp EE x Compile Report H H H Add Report Group Add Dataset Paste oe Open Report Folder in Favorites Ibas LE CTF T A window will appear with a
436. report parameters for your report Relative periods are relative to today s date Report parameters will cause a prompt during report creation and makes it possible to dynamically select organisation units and periods to use for your report during runtime For the example above we must select reporting month under relative periods and both reporting month and organisation unit under report parameters Click save This will redirect you to the list of reports where you can click the green create icon next to your report to render it 19 4 4 Designing HTML based standard reports 164 A standard report can be designed using purely HTML and JavaScript This requires a little bit of development experience in the mentioned subjects The benefit of HTML based standard reports is that it allows for maximum flexibility Using HTML you can design exactly the report you want positioning tables logos and values on the page according to your design needs You can write and save your standard report design in a regular text file To upload your HTML based standard report to DHIS 2 do the following e Navigate to standard reports and click Add new e Give the report a name e Select HTML report as type e If you want to you can download a report template by clicking on Get HTML report template e Select desired relative periods these will be available in JavaScript in your report e Select report parameters these will be available in J
437. ributes when specified as a dimension can be used in the analysis modules similar to other dimensions such as the period and orgunit In Summary when category combinations are used as attribute they effectively serve as another dimension similar to Period and Organisationion unit which can be used for analysis 49 Data elements Category option combination maintenance 5 8 Category option combination maintenance Category option combinations can be assigned a code which allows for easier data exchange between DHIS2 and external systems Simply select the category option combination from the list and provide the code Note that all codes of category option combinations must be unique 5 9 Category option groups and group sets Category options can be groups and classified using category option groups Category option groups can be created from Category option group gt Add new and contains a set of category options Category option groups can be included in category option group sets Category option group sets can be created from Category option group set gt Add new and contains a set of category option groups The main purpose of the these entities is to be able to add more dimensionality to your captured data for analysis in apps such as pivot table and data visualizer An example of where this becomes useful In a system data is collected by projects where projects is modeled as category options The system
438. right number e lt Left number less than or equal to right number 315 Program rules Defining expressions e Left side equal to right side Supports numbers text yes no and yes only e Left side not equal to right side Supports numbers text yes no and yes only e Negates the following value Can be used for yes no yes only or a subexpression in parenthesis e Parenthesis is used to group subexpressions In addition to the standard mathematical operators a number of custom functions are also available Table 31 1 Fu nctions Function Arguments Description d2 ceil number Rounds the input argument up to the nearest whole number Example GA Cente themoc obamy aliiie d2 floor number Rounds the input argument down to the nearest whole number An example producing the number of weeks the woman is pregnant Notice that the subexpression gestationalAgeDays 7 is evaluated before the floor function is executed d2 floor gestationalAgeDays 7 d2 round number Rounds the input argument to the nearest whole number d2 modulus number number Produces the modulus when dividing the first with the second argument An example producing the number of days the woman is into her current pregnancy week d2 modulus gestationalAgeDays 7 d2 zing number Evaluates the argument of type number to zero if the value is negative other
439. rom a form design perspective there are three types for forms default forms section forms and custom forms If a custom form exists it will be displayed followed in order of precedence by a section form and finally a default form DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone sss Apps pA Profile lSierra Leone EBO El Badjia fi Baoma 1 Bargbe 1 Bargbo Gbo fi Kakua i Komboya GH_ugbu 1 Selenga 1 Tikonko Valunia Wonde Bombali Bonthe Kailahun Kambia Kenema HHE A Q D a oe Zamm Ngelehun CHC Njandama MCHP Bumpe Ngao Jaiama Bongor 1Niawa Lenga Data Entry Organisation Unit Ngelehun CHC Data Set Mortality lt 5 years Period December 2014 default Filter in section Accute Flaccid Paralysis Deaths lt 5 yrs Animal Bites Rabid Deaths lt 5 yrs Cholera Deaths lt 5 yrs Dysentery Deaths lt 5 yrs Louse Borne Typhus Relapsing fever Deaths lt 5 yrs Malaria Deaths lt 5 yrs Measles Deaths lt 5 yrs Meningitis Deaths lt 5 yrs Plague Deaths lt 5 yrs Rabies Deaths lt 5 yrs Tetanus Neonatal Deaths lt 5 yrs Tetanus Other Deaths lt 5 yrs Typhoid Deaths lt 5 yrs Yellow Fever Deaths lt 5 yrs X Ngelehun CHC December 2014 No Data Element Selected Run validation Print form T Print blank form v Prev year Next year Value Complete ncomplete Run validation 77 Dat
440. rt To do this add this line to the Filter expression area 157 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport F organisation_unit_is_parent equals Yes In our example we only have on organisation unit so this is not necessary Next click the details tab to see a list of the series in the chart For now this list is empty but we will add one series for each of our three indicators To add a series click the Add button OOO Chartdetails _ _ _ _ _ Type of dataset Category dataset Details Reset type Reset group Report HH s Increment type increment group E None LH z Filter expression 7 E L Dataset run Sub dataset l B m Copy dataset Paste dataset EEEE Advanced options 158 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport Type of dataset Category dataset H Dataset Category series Add Modify _ Remove Advanced options In the window that appears enter the name of the first of the indicators in the Series expression window Remember to put the name in quotes In the category expression along the x axis we want the months so we use the button next to the field to open the Expression editor and Dat Item Hyperlink Series expression required ANC 1 Coverage Category expression required Value expression required L
441. rted 1336 Updated 0 Ignored Type Summary Type Imported Updated Ignored OrganisationUnit 1 1332 O0 OrganisationUnitLevel 0 4 0 Here you can see that the import dry run was successful and the import contained 1 new organisation unit 1332 updated and 4 organisation unit levels Below you can see another example dhis Import Meta Data Import DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Maintenance Services Help Profile Meta Data Import XML Data Import CSV Data Import DHIS 1 4 import Export Meta Data Export ree New and Updates Unknown reference to IdentifiableObject id 0 uid aaaU6Kr7Gtpidn code null name null created null lastUpdated null OrganisationUnit on object IdentifiableObject id 0 uid aBfyTUSWgds code OU_ 8388 name Nduvuibu MCHP created Fri Feb 17 09 54 39 CET 2012 lastUpdated Tue Mar 19 09 12 00 CET 2013 Data Export Export to other systems Import summary Configuration Import count DHIS 1 4 File Configuration 1 Imported Integration ad 0 Ignored Integration Configuration Type Summary Type Imported Updated Ignored OrganisationUnit 1 1332 0 OrganisationUnitLevel 0 4 0 Conflicts Type Element Description OrganisationUnit Nduvuibu MCHP OrganisationUnit Here you can see that the organisation unit Nduvuibu MCHP had a unknown reference to an object with ID aaaU6Kr7Gtpidn which means that an object with this ID was not present in your imported file and it
442. rting order will be used In some cases when sections are not used a data element might be used in multiple data sets and conflict in the way it should be sorted in individual data sets A work around for this situation is to wrap the whole dataset in one section note that this will only work if the data elements have the same category option combo 24 3 4 3 Versioning of data sets To make it possible to compare and update the data sets on the mobile phone with the version on the server data sets are automatically versioned when you edit the data set structure Some changes which occur on the DHIS2 server will cause the mobile client to update its forms with a new version Changes that currently trigger a new data set version e Create DataSet e Edit DataSet e Create edit delete Section in DataSet e Sort Section Order e Update DataElement affect many related DataSets e Delete DataElement affect many related DataSets e Edit DataElement Category e Edit DataElement Category Combo 24 3 4 4 Language support Multi language support is available DataSet and DataElement are translated through web based function Default language on server is used on mobile in cases requested language from mobile is not available Dataset management Filter by name Filter Clear Sot Add new Name a Operations Aggregation Dataset Z A i i No of pages 1 No of rows per page 50 Jump to page 1 Go 1
443. run once the user has finished data entry The user can also check the entered data for a particular period and Organization Unit s against the validation rules and display the violations for these validation rules 3 Analysis of data sets i e examining gaps in data 4 Data triangulation which is comparing the same data or indicator from different sources 12 3 Data quality check at the point of data entry Data quality can be checked at the point of data entry through setting the minimum and maximum value range for each element manually or generating the min max values using the DHIS 2 if there is historical data available for that data element 12 3 1 Setting the minimum and maximum value range manually If you are using the default entry screen click on the element for which you want to set the min max value A pop up window will appear in which you can enter the values On subsequent data entry if the value entered does not fall within the set min max range the text box will change colour to red The user will also get a pop up as shown below This change in colour is a prompt to check the data entered and make necessary correction On the data entry screen the users also have the option to add a comment on how the discrepant figure might be explained if required This you can do by using the drop down menu of the comment box In case you are using the custom data entry screen which is displayed when you deselect the default da
444. rveillance rules To add a Surveillance rule follow the steps above for validation rules choosing a rule type of Surveillance This adds the following validation rule options e Choose an Organisation unit level for this surveillance rule If the data you wish to monitor is not entered at this level it will be aggregated from lower level organisation units in the organisation unit hierarchy e Enter a Sequential sample count This is the number of time periods immediately preceding against which you wish to compare the data For example if the period type is Weekly and this count is 2 the current data will be compared with past data averaged over each of the 2 previous weeks e Enter an Annual sample count This is the number of preceding years over which you will compare the data from periods at the same time of preceding years For example if the period type is Weekly and the count is 3 data for a week starting on the first of September will be compared with data averaged over the week containing September 1 in each of the past 3 years The sequential sample count or annual sample count must be at least 1 You may use the sequential and annual sample counts together For example say the period type is Weekly the sequential count is 2 and the annual count is 3 The data will be compared with the average of the following time periods the 2 weeks immediately preceding and for each of the previous 3 years the data at the same time of y
445. s Multiple user roles can be created each with their own set of permissions and then assigned to users which grant them certain privileges within the system This chapter describes how to manage users and user roles 7 1 Creating new users and roles This section will describe how to add new users and manage existing users to the DHIS2 application You can create as many user names as you need Each user can be assigned certain privileges and can be assigned to certain organisation units for which they will be enabled to enter data on behalf of To access the user module choose Users from the Apps menu and then click User from the menu items on the left hand pane 7 1 1 User maintenance DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone se Apps amp Poe fat Kap User Users 2 User by Organisation Unit User by Organisation Unit Create modify view and delete users which are assigned to a given organisation unit User Self Registered User User Role User Create modify delete and view all users A user is associated with user roles and an organisation unit Delete Current User Self Registered User View and manage users who have self registered for a personal user account in the system gt gt fs User Role Create modify view and delete user roles A user role has a set of authorities in the system Hs User acconts already registered will appear as a list as seen below 61 User management User role management
446. s such as reports pivot tables data visualizer GIS etc after it has been entered If scheduling is active the analytics process will run automatically at midnight each day After that new data which was entered since the last time the analytics process ran will become visible Other factors which can affect the visibility of data are 1 Data approval 2 Sharing of metadata objects and 3 Caching of analytics resources If you are still having problems seeing your data be sure that caching is turned off that your user actually has access to the data element category option combination which you wish to view data for and that your data has been approved to the level which is appropriate 323 User authorities Appendix A User authorities Table A 1 Accept data at lower levels F ACCEPT DATA LOWER LEVELS Access my data mart F MYDATAMART_ VIEW Add Facility F FRED CREATE Add Locale F LOCALE ADD Add Option Set F_OPTIONSET_ADD Add Organisation Unit Group Set F ORGUNITGROUPSET ADD Add Program Rule F PROGRAM RULE ADD Add Public Map F MAP PUBLIC ADD Add Relationship Type F_RELATIONSHIPTYPE_ADD Add Remove Members In F USER GROUPS READ ONLY ADD MEMBERS Read Only User Groups Add SQL View F SQLVIEW_ADD Add Tracked Entities F TRACKED ENTITY ADD Add Tracked Entity Attribute Value F TRACKED ENTITY ATTRIBUTEVALUE ADD Add Tracked Entity Form
447. s also platform independent when it comes to the Database Management System DBMS DHIS 2 uses the Hibernate database abstraction framework and is compatible with any DBMS supported by Hibernate such as PostgreSQL MySQL H2 MS SQL Server Oracle and many more PostgreSQL is the recommended DBMS for DHIS 2 Lastly and perhaps most importantly since DHIS2 is a browser based application the only real requirement to interact with the system is with a web browser DHIS2 supports most web browsers although currently either Google Chrome Mozilla Firefox or Opera are recommended 1 4 3 Deployment strategies online vs offline DHIS 2 is a network enabled application and can be accessed over the Internet a local intranet and as a locally installed system The deployment alternatives for DHIS 2 are in this chapter defined as i offline deployment ti online deployment and iii hybrid deployment The meaning and differences will be discussed in the following sections 1 4 3 1 Offline Deployment An offline deployment implies that multiple standalone offline instances are installed for end users typically at the district level The system is maintained primarily by the end users district health officers who enters data and generate reports from the system running on their local server The system will also typically be maintained by a national super user team who pay regular visits to the district deployments Data is moved upwards in the hierarchy
448. s for what crosstabs are available for the standard report and it has consequences for what types of charts you can make 19 4 2 1 Download and open the design file Note If you have not created a report table yet you have to do so See section How to create report tables to do so Locate your desired report table and run it by clicking the green circle with a white arrow inside When the report is shown click the Download as JRXML button to download the design file Then open that file in the Jasper iReport Designer software 19 4 2 2 Editing the report You are now ready to edit the layout of the report The main iReport window consists of a Report Inspector to the left the report document in the middle a Palette area on the upper right hand side and a Properties area on the lower right hand side The Report Inspector are used for selecting and examining the various properties of the report and when selecting an item in the inspector the Properties panel changes to display properties relating to the selection The Palette is used for adding various elements e g text boxes images and charts to the document 137 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in 1 iReport Ta Jaspersoft iReport Designer 400 O File Edit View Format Preview Window Tools Help Report Inspector 4 x Feedback report new jrxml x Si p
449. s page field filter r j ka AlN All A o S Sum of value Total oo Morbidity me Here we have selected to look at the Morbidity total The various data elements on morbidity have been ordered into the main_de groups Morbidity we will get back to Mortality later The fields above the table itself are all set to All meaning that the totals in the table will contain data from all Countries Districts Chiefdom ou_type year months the various categories as listed in the red fields and all data elements in the Morbidity group As we have seen this is not a very useful representation as Morbidity is organized into new cases follow ups referrals and then again in age groups Also we do not see the various diagnoses The first step is to include the diagnoses field which is a group set which is done by dragging the diagnosis field down to be a row field as shown in the figure below and to 27 Data dimensions in DHIS2 How this works in pivot tables 28 add the group set called morbiditymortality in the column field to display new cases follow up and referrals Sum of value New cases ollov up Referrals Morbidity Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP follow up Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP new Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP referrals All other follow ups All other new All other referrals Anaemia followup Anaemia new Anaemia referrals ARI treat
450. s which can be set to alter how the validation rule will be evaluated if there is any missing data e Skip if any value is missing The rule will be skipped if any of the values which compose the expression are missing This is the default option e Skip if all values are missing The rule will be skipped only if all of the operands which compose it are missing e Never skip The rule will never be skipped in case of missing data and all missing operands will be treated effectively as a zero Save each expression by clicking Save then save the validation rule by clicking Save Setting up Data Quality Surveillance Rule functionality To edit a validation rule click the name the relevant validation rule in the list and select Edit from the context menu Then follow the same procedures as above when creating a new rule To delete a validation rule click the name of the validation rule to be deleted and select Remove from the context menu Validation rule names can be translated to other languages by selecting the name of the validation rule and selecting Translate from the context menu To view validation rule details click the name of the validation rule and then select Show details from the context menu 12 5 Surveillance Rule As well as checking for correct data you can use a validation rules to find unexpected data values when compared with data from previous time periods This kind of validation rules are called su
451. sage 11 6 Follow Up Analysis The follow up analysis function will list all data values which are marked for follow up A data value can be marked for follow up in the data entry module and in the other validation analysis variants in this module As can be seen in the screen shot below simply select an organisation unit from the tree All data values with a follow up status will be displayed here for the descendants of the selected organisation unit Follow Up Analysis Select parent organisation unit Sierra Leone 84 El Bo Badjia Baoma Bargbe Bargbo Bumpe Ngao 10 values found Gbo a Download as PDF Download as Excel Download as CSV Data element a Organisation unit Period Min Value Max Mark ART enrollment stage 1 Male lt 15y Ngelehun CHC January 2014 1 12 23 4 BCG doses given Fixed lt 1y Ngelehun CHC July 2014 0 13 0 d Complicated deliveries in community live birth Ngelehun CHC January 2014 1 3 23 d Fully Immunized child Fixed gt 1y Ngelehun CHC April 2014 1 4 11111 4 LLITN given at ANC 1st Fixed Ngelehun CHC January 2014 5 90 70 g LLITN given at Penta3 Fixed lt 1y Ngelehun CHC July 2014 0 233 0 e OPV1 doses given Outreach lt 1y Ngelehun CHC June 2014 0 3 0 d PCV1 doses given Outreach gt 1y Ngelehun CHC July 2014 5 18 24 4 Weight for age between middle and lower line yellow Fixed lt 1y Ngelehun CHC July 2014 0 20 0 A Weight for height below
452. se line value title Displays a horizontal line at the given domain value Useful e g when you want to visualize how your performance has evolved since the beginning of a process Range axis max min Defines the maximum and minium value which will be visible on the range axis Range axis tick steps Defines the number of ticks which will be visible on the range axis Range axis decimals Defines the number of decimals which will be used for range axis values Range axis title Displays a label next to the range axis also referred to as the Y axis Can give context information to the chart e g the unit of measure being used Domain axis title Displays a label below the domain axis also referred to as the X axis Can give context information to the chart e g the type of periods being listed Hide chart legend Hides the legend and leaves more room for the chart itself Hide chart title Hides the title of your chart Chart title Type any title you like and it will appear above the chart 273 Using Tracker Capture Overview Chapter 28 Using Tracker Capture 28 1 Overview Tracker capture is an advanced version of the event capture app While the event capture deals with single event without registration tracker capture deals with multiple events including Single event with registration The implication of this is that any event capturing has to be for a registered tracked entity instance TEI This makes registration s
453. seanaes 21 3 3 1 Organisation unit group sets and groupS s ssssseresrrerrrrrrrsrrrerrrrrrrerrrerrrere 22 3 3 1 1 Alternative orgunit hierarchies advanced use of group sets and OUDS aa nec ae ec a AEE T 22 3 3 2 Best practice on the use of group sets and grouUpS s sssseserssrrserrserrerrnne 22 3 4 The peri d dimension IN DAIS Z ien a a a a a 23 3 Aa PeRIOG WV D CS ariii AE A G 23 342 RElAUVE DENlOOS eiro aE n a ey iain E E 23 34 3 A0Ircga tOn Or Pernod aana a a A 24 3 4 3 1 Sum and average aggregation along the period dimension 24 3 5 Data conection VS Gata ANalYSIS secenario a a aaa A A 25 3 5 1 Data Collection and storage ssssssresrrrsrrerrrrsrrrsrrrrrresrrnsrrnrrrrsrrrsrrerrrrene 25 3 5 2 INDUE GOeS not egual OUD UT s aeinn a a a AA E aetna 25 3 6 Extended examples of data elements and fOrmS sssssssssssrreerrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrne 26 3 7 HOW TAIS WOFKS IN DIVOE LADIES monena ae AA A EE EA 27 3 8 Case study From paper forms to multidimensional datasets lessons learned 30 3 8 1 From tables to category combinations designing multi dimensional data RES oc ane ne E A E E oa ere 31 DHIS 2 User Manual Contents 3 8 2 Step by step approach to designing datasets cccececeseeeeseeeeeeeeeetsneensnees 34 4 Organisation UNS aiceissssnbicustia yas aernad ect tenael deta lan ierereus atest a aot 35 4 1 The organisational hierarchy cccccc
454. sed for later offline analysis This can be done by clicking on the arrow beside the update button Update Layout Download data Bj CSV be 15 8 Constraints and tips 106 When selecting and arranging dimensions there are a few constraints that apply All of these constraints are validated and the pivot table module will provide feedback if any constraint is violated e At least one dimension must be selected on columns or rows e At least one period must be included in the pivot table e Data element group sets and reporting rates cannot appear in the same pivot table e A table cannot contain more than the maximum number of analytics records which have been specified through the system settings The maximum number of records could also be constrained by the maximum RAM which is available to your browser Considering making more smaller tables instead of one table which displays all of your data elements and indicators together i Tip Pivot tables in DHIS2 are limited to a system set paramater which controls the number of data values which can be returned The reason for this is two fold First it would be easy to overwhelm the server with a very complicated request for a large pivot table Second the amount of data which is able to be rendered in a browser is fairly limited If you are having problems with very large or complex tables consider to try and reduce the number of items It is usually more useful to have smaller c
455. sent these fields as so called flat data elements meaning data elements with no categories at all and simply adding the additional information from the column headings to the data element name and therefore ended up with the following data elements with the default same as none catcombo Complicated deliveries in PHU live birth Complicated deliveries in PHU still births Complicated deliveries in community live birth Complicated deliveries in community still births Low birth weight in PHU Low birth weight in community and LLITN given after delivery POST NATAL CARE table This table is simple and we used the same approach as for the ANC table 3 data elements listed in the first column and then link these to the catcombo called fixed outreach Reusing the same category fixed outreach for these data elements enables analysis on fixed outreach together with ANC data and other data using the same category TT table This table is somewhat more complex than the previous examples We decided to use TTL TT2 TT5 as data elements which makes it easy to get the total of each one of these There is fixed outreach dimension here but there is also the In school place that is only applied to the Non Pregnant or more correctly to any of the two as the school immunisation is done whether the girls are pregnant or not We consulted the program people behind the form and found out that it would be OK to register all school TT imm
456. ses given April 2015 20 410 15 526 17 422 15335 15790 84 483 May 2015 22 402 17 765 19 386 16711 17 191 93 455 Yellow Fever doses given June 2015 23 243 15 762 17 875 16 143 16 601 89 624 July 2015 21589 15705 17 063 16741 16 622 87 720 August 2015 20 485 17 499 19 144 18 024 18 247 93 399 September 2015 21 130 17 841 19 645 17 924 18 108 94 648 Periods Total 236 894 187 229 206 925 186 784 190 002 1 007 834 15 2 Selecting dimension items The left menu will list sections for all available data dimensions From each section you can select any number of dimension items As an example you can open the section for data elements and select any number of data elements from the available list You can select an item by marking it and clicking on the arrow in the section header or simply double clicking on the item Before you can use a data dimension in your pivot table you must at least select one dimension item If you arrange a dimension as columns or rows but do not select any dimension items the dimension will be ignored At least one member of the data dimension is required for all pivot tables Available types include the following e indicators 99 Using Pivot Table 100 Selecting dimension items e Data elements e Reporting rates e Event data items e Program indicators These dimensions can be combined together so that you can display for instance aggregate data with reporting rates or event data items together
457. ses given Total Save Cancel Essentially an indicator is a formula that can be composed of multiple data elements constants organisation unit group counts and mathematical operators In order to define a new indicator proceed with the following steps L 2 A description of the numerator denominator must be provided in the Description field This Should provide a clear description of the numerator denominator This field is required Define the formula of the indicator by selecting the data elements that should compose the numerator from the Data elements field Simply select the data element and double click it It will now appears as part of the formula You formula must be mathematically valid including the proper use of parentheses when necessary You can double click on each of the mathematical operator buttons below the indicator formula definition to add them to your formula 91 13 2 92 Indicators Indicator types 3 Click the Save button to save all changes to the numerator Click cancel to discard any changes that you have made 4 Follow the same procedure in order to define the denominator The components of an indicator formula are listed below Data elements Will be substituted by the data value captured for the data element Constants Constants are numerical values which will remain the same for all indicator calculations This is useful in order to have a single place to change values that mig
458. should now be sorted 144 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport 19 4 2 6 Changing indicator data element names By default the reports from DHIS 2 uses the short names for indicators and data elements in reports and charts In some cases these are not always very meaningful for third parties but with some work they can be given custom names through iReport This is useful for example if you are making a report with indicators as rows and periods as column or for charts with indicators Indicator Jan to Mar 2 Indicator Jan to Mar 20 Bed Util All me Bed Utilisation All Wards Bed Utilisation Maternity Bed Util Mat Bed Util Ped Bed Utilisation Paediatric To change the names of an indicator or data element we have to edit its expression or formula for example by right clicking the text box and choosing Edit expression to bring up the Expression editor Edit expression Field pattern L Padding And Borders Hyperlink Copy L mnadator Cut gp y L d SFlindicatorne Paste af y E Delete 4p F Next we have to insert some Java code In the following example we will be replacing the shortname of three indicators with their proper names The code searches for the shortname and then replaces it with a proper name AnO Expression editor F indicatorname eguals Bed Util Al1 Bed Utilisation All Wards BEN P PEP AOA 6508 Bed Util Mat 7 Bed Utilisation Maternity
459. sibility of facility where entity is registered first time Warning No matter what program entities need to enroll they must register into the system first Then health providers will enroll the entities into relevant programs E g every pregnant women and the child need to be registered first as a entity then they will be enrolled in Mother Care program or Child Health program To access Tracked entity instance management function from the Apps menu click Individual Records and click on it Select Find Add Instance option on the left menu to proceed Then after to select organisation unit Click the List All instances button to list all entities in the selected organisation unit If a program in list on the right side is selected the system will load entities who enrolled into the program The registration process Is below 1 To register a entity go to the Apps menu select Individual Records 2 Click the Find Add Instance menu below Tracked entity instance header to go to Tracked entity instance management window 3 Select a facility from the facilities hierarchy displayed on the left side of the screen Then click the Add new button on the right side Note To register new entity and enroll him her into a certain program please select a program in list on main page and click Add new button The entity attributes and entity identifier types which belong to the selected program will be displayed on the registration form
460. source in a Jasper report or as the basis for an SQL view 16 13 Saving chart as favorite 112 Once you have rendered a chart you can save it as a favorite to able to access it easily ata later point Click on the Favorites button on the top menu to open up the favorites window Click Add new and in the name field enter the desired name for your chart The chart will be visible only to yourself For every favorite in the list you have four options to the right You can rename the chart grey button overwrite the chart green button modify the sharing settings of the chart blue button or delete the chart red button These favorite charts can later be included on your personal dashboard After saving you can navigate to the dashboard module click on the Insert link over the chart areas and select your preferred chart Using Data Visualizer Sharing interpretations Update Layout Options Favorites Download Share Table Chart Map About Home Type A Ka K pdate ou ptic e f I e l a p About m 2015 a Favorites ANC 1st to 3rd visit drop out rate by orgunit last year E ANC 13D tRat ANC 1 3 Dropout Rate cator me Add new x 54 7 ANC 1 and 3 coverage Yearly 0000 ilable ted ANC 1 3 dropout rate Yearly 00080 ANC 1 3 trend lines last 12 months 0008 48 ANC 1 4 visits by districts this year stacked 0000 ANC 1 4 visits last 12 months oo ANC 1st and 3rd trends Monthly 0000 42 41 ANC 1st and 3r
461. ssrrsrrrssrrrrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrnrrrnerrrerrnerrnne 168 20 3 CONMGUNING data ADDY OV GD sik sei diuadiecaaiavaas einer haan A E A a a ai 168 204 Data VISIDINEY sasrisiacvbasmescdartedartoiekurenebroretiansneneipianetars arie it 169 205 AOD EOVING OOUG aeaea E A A E nannies 170 20 6 Approving by category option Group Set ssssssrrsrersrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerreerre 170 20 6 1 Approving by one category Option Group Set sssssserssrrsrrrsrererrrerrrere 170 20 6 2 Approving by multiple category Option group Sets cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 2 lis MA DOTE ANG CX DOM w a nisuapabalnald ico eveus dents yvauseuvialeyimened oaeiusa Mie eeaeioadey 173 2 dts MEtA GOta WNDOM erriei A TEA 173 ZA LL Metadata IMDOTE sisine a a a a a A 173 2154 LL Dry r n pefore IMDOMING irea S 174 21 1 1 2 Matching identifiers in DXF2 ccccccccececeeceeeeeeeseeseeeeesteneaneanes 176 2dd 2 MEOIN CSV Metadata aie a ee ee ees 176 2113 GML Gate ANDON meia re reaa aoet 176 DZ V2 se MVNO OVC data e a A a A TE 176 Zlk AML Gala WMP ORG cernir ana r a ear aei 176 212 20 MADOVEING CSV Aata ipia a E T ieee eae 176 2A EVeNt data IMPO aora EE a eds 177 DAA Ae IMPON FOF Gaba kir a E A aes gine T 177 212o MnpOring data FOM DRAIS Da irta avian a 177 21 2 5 1 DHIS 1 4 File database Import sssssssssrnsrrrsrrnsrrnsrrrsrrrrrrnerresre 177 2L n2 DAS AA AME IMPON aena a a a aaa 178 21 2 5 3 Limitations to DHIS 1 4 IMpoOrts
462. stage when an event of this stage completed This property is active only when Repeatable field is set e Generate events by enrollment date Check on it for auto generating due dates of events from program stages of this program based on the enrollment date If it is not checked the due dates are generated based on incident date e Capture coordinates Many types of events may be recorded at a facility or be owned by a health worker at a facility but actually take place somewhere in the community This field is checked to get coordinates of the place e Complete allowed only if validation passes The event created by this program stage is completed only when all validation rules are passed e Description of report date The description for report date which is displayed in case entry form Data elements section Select entity data elements which belong to the program stage There are four properties for each data element selected 1 Compulsory The value of this data element must be filled into data entry form before completing the event 2 Allow provided elsewhere Specify if the value of this data element comes from other facility not in the facility where this data is entered Tracker Programs Attributes 3 Display in reports Display the value of this data element into the SEWoR data entry function 4 Date in future Allow to select a date in future for date data elements 29 2 1 6 2 2 Program stage entry form
463. stions to further improvements to report tables As already mentioned we have started to look at more fine grained parameters for the period dimension as the Reporting month does not cover enough or at least is not intuitive enough when it comes to e g quarterly reports 19 3 Report table outcome 136 When the report table is run the system will calculate values for specified indicators data elements data sets orgunits and periods The data will be presented in DHIS 2 in a table layout The column headers will correspond to the cross tab dimension you have selected An example report table showing ANC coverage for a district in The Gambia is shown below Here the indicator and the periods are cross tabbed as can be seen from the column headers Organisation unit sc a sal ajii Jappineh Village OPD 0 0 0 0 Jappineh PHC Circuit 0 0 0 0 Jara Central District 0 0 0 0 Above the table there are six buttons five download buttons and one Back button Clicking the Back button will simply take you back to the previous screen The function of the five download buttons are presented below the screenshot The five download buttons e Download as Excel Downloads a generated Excel file you can open in Excel e Download as CSV Downloads a generated csv file CSV stands for Comma Separated Values It s a text file with the file ending csv Each line in the file corresponds to a row in the table while the columns are separated with sem
464. t Data values chapter on XML data import for details on the XML format which is used by DHIS2 for aggregate data import 21 2 2 Importing CSV data 176 DHIS2 supports import of data in the CSV Comma Separated Values format This can be used to import exchange file produced by DHIS2 itself It also comes in handy when you want to import data from a third party system as CSV is widely supported in applications and is easy to produce manually Import and export Event data import To import a CSV data exchange file navigate to the CSV Data Import item in the left side menu Upload the exchange file and click Import CSV files can be imported both as plain text file or as compressed ZIP file archive Please refer to the Developer guide gt Web API gt Data values chapter on CSV data import for a description of the CSV format to use 21 2 3 Event data import Event data can also be easily imported with the Event data import function Refer to the section in the WebAPI for more information on the format used for importing events Otherwise the functionality is the same as the XML data import used for aggregate data 21 2 4 Importing PDF data DHIS2 supports import of data in the PDF format This can be used to import data produced by off line PDF data entry forms Please refer to the section Data set management for details on how to produce a PDF form which can be used for off line data entry To import a PDF data file navigate t
465. t 2B Now suppose that at the country level you want each partner to approve the data entered by that partner Once this approval is done you want each agency to then approve the data from accounts that are managed by that agency Finally you want to approve data at the country level across all agencies You could do this by defining the following approval levels 171 Data approval Approving by multiple category 172 option group sets Table 20 4 Example Multiple Category Option Group Set approval levels Approval level Organisation unit level Category option group set 1 Country 2 Country Agency 3 Country Partner Note that multiple approval levels can be defined for the same organisation unit level In our example Partner 1 would approve country wide data at approval level 3 from category options Account 1A and Account 1B Next Agency A would approve country wide data at approval level 2 from category options Account 1A after approval by Partner 1 and Account 2A after approval by Partner 2 Finally after approval from all agencies country wide data can be approved at approval level 1 across all category options Note that approval level 1 does not specify a category option group set meaning that it is for approving data across all category options This example is meant to be illustrative only You may define as many category option groups as you need and as many approval levels as you need
466. t S swarren e r a 137 19 4 1 What is a standard report ssesssssssssrresnrserssrrresnnerrnrrrrernrrrnnrrrnernnrenerne 137 19 4 2 Designing Standard reports in iReport ssssssressersrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerererrnne 137 19 4 2 1 Download and open the design file cccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenes 137 t9422 EUN NE FEDOM sriain as E a 137 tA 2o EOE a a a a hee tueaetechiavint 139 19 4 2 4 Filtering the table rOWS ccccccceeseceeeececeeeeeseceeesseneeesneneneanseenes 140 TIA 2 ec SON LING i sue vies oearceaasanut aut E ES 143 19 4 2 6 Changing indicator data element NAMES cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 145 19 4 2 7 Adding horizontal totals c ec cceceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeaeseeneaeanaes 146 LO 4 2 39 Groups of TADICS s i4caavanvadeaesuavinsignuen avai AAEE EE A aware 146 TOA 79 ENANS epn sha tetieis aE Ie 149 19 4 2 10 Adding the Report to DHIS 2 ccc ccecc ec ecec eee eeseeeeeeeeneneanaes 162 1974 2 L1 Some final GUIGCIINGS ciate arsisis a i asGiseihatpseary eerie tates 163 19 4 3 Designing SQL based standard reports ccccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeaeees 163 19 4 4 Designing HTML based standard reports cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneass 164 vi DHIS 2 User Manual Contents 2 0 DAKa AD DOV Al csvievnise mide E N erie tania A E aA 167 20 Approving and ACCEDING ean a a ee erodes 167 20 2 Authorities for approving data ssssssesss
467. t must have the Update indicator authority granted This does not apply for open objects When you create a new object it will automatically become viewable for everyone if your user account has the authority to create public objects AS an example if you create a standard report and you have the Create public standard report authority granted the report will become viewable for everyone If you do not have that authority granted the report will be viewable only to yourself After you have created an object you may navigate to the Sharing settings dialog and set your desired access control level If you need a user account which is able to view absolutely all objects you can create a user role with the ALL authority and assign a user to that role If you need to switch between a complete view of objects and a personal view of objects it is recommended to create two user accounts one assigned with the ALL authority and one without 8 3 Sharing applied 70 The sharing functionality is useful in several scenarios One use case is setting up a DHIS instance for a global organisation with operations in multiple countries Typically the organisation has a set of global data sets indicators and reports which should apply to all countries while all countries will have the need for country specific data sets indicators and reports In this scenario the following approach could work e Set up one user group for global personnel e
468. t of dimensions or catcombo it can have many and as we see above this is necessary as the dimensions are very different from table to table In the following paragraphs we will analyze how to break down this form into its compoenent pieces and Suggest an implementation pathway in DHIS 2 ANC table This table in the top left corner is one the simpler ones in this form It has two dimensions the first column with the ANC activity or service 1st visit IPT 2nd dose etc and the second and third column which represent the place where the service was given with the two options Fixed and Outreach Since the ANC service is the key phenomena to analyse here and often there is a need for looking at the total of ANC 1st visits no matter where they actually took placed it makes a lot of sense to use this dimension as the data element dimension Thus all items on the first column from 1st ANC visit to 2nd IPT dose given by TBA are represented as individual data elements The where dimension is represented as a data element category from now on referred to as category with the name fixed outreach with the two data element category options from now on catoptions fixed and outreach There is no other dimension here so we add a new catcombo with the name Fixed Outreach with one category Fixed Outreach Strictly soeaking there is another dimension in this table and that is the at PHU or by TBA dimension which is repeated for the
469. t14 weeks after bit gt 9 12 months after bir gt 2years amp above Create new event 2012 07 01 2012 07 27 2012 10 05 2013 04 27 2014 07 26 Report date 2012 07 01 a Due date 2012 07 26 Post comment Data element Entry Height of Child 1200 OPV 0 dose Yes v Child Immunization Place of Delivery Hepatitis B 0 dose Yes v Adverse Event Following Immunisation BCG dose given Select value v Child hospitalized due Congenital anomaly Weight of Child grm 3200 Breast feeding initiated within one hr of birth Select value Post comment Add Complete le Run validation Click on the View access log link in the top right of the dashboard to open history of access log to this entity The Tracked entity instance profile section provides links for editing profile and changing other location of the entity Click on Edit profile link to update individual information of entity Click on Change location link to change other location for the entity Click on a program link in Active programs section to open the data entry form for the next visit of the selected program A form is opened below with five tab 1 Data entry screen tab Where data is manually registered for each entity Click on a event box in tab Then fill a report date to open data entry form of the selected event After entering data values into the data entry form user should click on Run validation button before clicking on Complete button to check reality of dat
470. ta DHIS2 Glossary Indicator N Numerator O Organisational unit Organisational unit level Period U Unique identifier The divisor of an indicator Can be composed of multiple data elements with the use of an indicator formula numerator indicator 1 denominator This is obviously a very generalized example The numerator and indicator themselves can be composed of various data elements factors and the four basic operands addition multiplication division and subtraction The dividend of a indicator Can be composed of multiple data elements and factors with the use of indicator formulas An organisational unit is usually a geographical unit which exists within hierarchy As an example in the United States Georgia would be considered an organisational unit with in the orgunit level of State Organizational units can also be used to specify an administrative unit such as a ward within a hospital The organisational unit dimension specifies essentially where a particular data value occurs Refers to a level within an organizational hierarchy Typically countries are administered at different levels such as 1 Country 2 States 3 Counties 4 Health facilities In the context of DHIS2 health facilities typically are the lowest orgunit level Data is aggregated upwards from the lowest orgunit level to the highest A period is a specific time interval which consists of a start date and e
471. ta 85 Setting up Data Quality Generated min max values functionality entry form option on the top right corner of the screen In this case the minimum and maximum values can be added by double clicking on the data entry box instead of the data element 12 3 2 Generated min max values It is possible to generate the min max value element wise using the DHIS2 In such case you merely need to click on the Generate min max button near the upper right corner In case of default data entry screen the min and max values when generated will appear on the left and right side of the data entry box In case you deselect the default data entry form the generated values will appear on the top right end of the screen 12 4 Validation Rule 86 This module provides management of validation rules A validation rule is based on an expression which defines a relationship between a number of data elements The expression has a left side and a right side and an operator which defines whether the former must be less than equal to or greater than the latter The expression forms a condition which should assert that certain logical criteria are met For instance a validation rule could assert that the total number of vaccines given to infants is less than or equal to the total number of infants To add a validation rule just follow these steps Click on the Add new button Provide a descriptive Name for the validation rule The name must be
472. ta element categories can drastically reduce the amount of time which is required to create data entry forms for data sets Obstructed Labour Sepsis Amani Family Medical Clinic January 2011 PAC Services TB cases detected Children lt 14yrs Female Manual Vacuum Aspiration Dilation and Curettage Family planning uptake at PAC TB Control Children lt 14yrs Adult gt 14yrs Female Female TB cases detected Smear positive TB Smear negative TB Extra Pulmonary TB patients Re treatment TB patients TB patients tested for HIV TB patients HIV ve TB HIV patient on CPT TB Defaulters TB patient completed treatment TB deaths 15 24yrs gt 25yrs VCT clients Counselled VCT clients Tested VCT clients HIV ve 57 Data sets and data entry forms Custom Forms 6 2 3 Custom Forms 58 When the form you want to design is to complicated for the default or section forms then your last option is to use a custom form This takes more time but gives you full flexibility in term of the design DHIS2 uses a built in HTML editor FcK Editor for the form designer and you can either design the form in the UI or paste in your HTML directly using the Source window in the editor A complete reference for use of the editor can be found here One of the big advantages of custom forms is that they can be created to mimic existing paper aggregation forms This makes data entry much easier for users and should reduce the number of data
473. taElement Diastolic blood pressure Variable name diastolic Add Cancel e Source type The source types is determining how the source field is populated with a value e Data element newest event program Populates a source field with the newest data value collected for one data element within the enrollment The newest data value is determined with event date Program rules Defining expressions e Data element newest event program stage Populates a source field with the newest data value collected for one data element within a specified program stage In case of several events within the program stage the newest data value will be selected by event date e Tracked entity attribute Populates the source field with a specified tracked entity attribute for the current enrollment Note When selecting this option fields for selecting program Stage and data element is hidden and a field for selecting tracked entity attribute is displayed instead e Source program stage In case of retrieving data value from a specific program stage this field is used to define what program stage to retrieve data from e Source data element Used to select which data element to retrieve data value for e Variable name Specifying the name that is used for the source field when writing expressions It is encouraged to use a name that makes the expressions readable 31 5 Defining expressions Each program rule has a single expression that determines whe
474. tails Association Yes No Attribute Yes v Yes Only Attribute _ Unique Attr Phone number 84 Age Add Add amp Register new Cancel 29 2 2 1 1 Tracked entity instance dashboard 296 The function provides quick access to individual data of an entity Dashboards consist of several sections some of which provide links to activity programs or relationships of the entity Other sections of the dashboard allow users to enter data values into case entry form reschedule and set status for each events of activity plan and show messages and report of the program The dashboard of an entity is opened after register successfully or click the first icon under Operations corresponding to the entity who you would like Tracker Individual records Tracked entity instance management Dashboard View access Log Tracked entity instance profile Edit profile Change location Active programs Completed programs Enroll Relationships Management Register new person Full name Matthew S Johnson Child Health Program 2012 07 26 Parent Liya Elias Location Ngelehun CHC gt gt 9 12 months after birth 2013 04 27 Gender M Date of birth 1971 05 01 41 yr Mobile phone number None Data entry screen Amibe Reschedule and set status Messages Program reports What do colors mean Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC Ngelehun CHC j TEE i gt Birth Details gt At 10 weeks after bit gt A
475. te Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP referrals Bw Remove Additional notes related to facility Show details Admission Date Age Albendazole given at ANC 2nd trimester To add a new data element click the Add new button There are various options available from this page that allow the user to modify data elements already present in the database Each of the options are described below in the Editing data elements 5 1 1 Editing data elements 42 To edit an existing data element click the name of data element you wish to modify and then select Edit from the context menu which will appear e Name Define the precise name of the data element in this field Each data element must have a unique name e Short name Typically an abbreviation of the full data element name This attribute is often used in reports to display the name of the data element where there is limited space available e Code In many countries data elements are assigned a code This code can be entered in this field e Description Allows a full textual description of the data element to be entered The user Should be as precise as possible and include full information on how the data element is measured and what its meaning Is e Form name This allows you to provide an alternative name that can be used in either section or automatic data entry forms The form name will be applied automatically Domain type Defines whether a data element is an
476. ted from time to time when they visit the facility or whenever the health providers need to track The system will automatically calculate due date for each the program stage and will show same the below enrollment In health program an entity registered and enrolled needs to be checked from time to time by health providers The case update is designed in the same manner so that services which are received by the entities can be updated from time to time when they visit the facility or whenever the health providers need to track 29 2 2 1 3 Editing entity profile After registering an entity to a certain program you can edit profile for that entity 1 Click the second icon under Operations corresponding to the entity you would like to edit Or click the Edit profile link in Dashboard of entity 2 Fill data into the fields 3 Click Update button to update data and go to the entity s dashboard Note If a program in list is selected the registration form with attributes belongs to the selected program will be displayed If no program is selected a common form will be displayed with attributes which are configured in Attribute management will be display 29 2 2 1 4 Adding relationship To open relationship management for an entity click on the Relationship management icon under Operations or click on the Management link on Relationships section in Dashboard The Management page appears Relationship To add relationship fo
477. ted or saved depending on the status of the data entry Fall OoOO O Select Period me eek OF 2011 Completed Week 06 2011 Saved All periods that are not in period list are considered old and will be deleted automatically 2 Storing values duration The number of saved forms on mobile are limited only by the effective amount of storage of the mobile device Forms are saved for limited period only depending on the frequency of collection of the particular dataset e Daily Forms 2 months current and previous month e Weekly Forms 4 weeks current and 3 previous week 243 Mobile Mobile application setup e Monthly Forms 2 months current and previous month e Quarterly Forms 2 quarters current and previous quarter e Yearly Forms 2 years current and previous year 3 Completed forms Uneditable forms 244 If the form has been completed the user can view the form on their phone but they cannot make any subsequent edits to the form Each field is greyed out and inactive for editing Re Edit completed forms If the user wishes to edit data which has already been submitted to the server they can do so by pressing the Edit button They are allowed to do this assuming that the dataset has not been locked for the period in question If they attempt to upload the data the user will be informed that the dataset has been locked and it is not possible to upload the data riyalesn SE a T Upload
478. tem and you should start by adding your users organisational hierarchy data elements and datasets etc Please refer to the other sections of the user manual for instructions on how to do this 11 Getting started with DHIS 2 Downloading and installing the server version 2 2 2 Downloading and installing the server version The latest stable server version can be downloaded from this website For detailed information on how to install it please refer to the installation chapter in the implementation manual 2 3 Logging on to DHIS 2 Regardless of whether you have installed the server version of the desktop Live version you will use a web browser to log on to the application DHIS2 should be compatible with most modern web browsers although you will need to ensure that Java Script is enabled To log on to the application just enter http localhost 8080 dhis if you are using the DHIS2 live package or replace localhost with the name or IP address of the server where the server version is installed Once you have started DHIS2 either on line or off line the displayed screen will prompt you to enter your registered user name and password After entering the required information click on log in button to log into the application The default user name and password are admin and district They should be changed immediately upon logging on the first time DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Welcome to the DHIS 2 demo application
479. th Child Registration No Where the Child lives Birth defect Please select 3 After the selection of program you need to provide two dates 298 Tracker Individual records 1 Date of enrollment the first field The date when entity enrolls into the selected program 2 Date of incident the second field The date when the entity got the disease or he she has just been committed to an equivalent program for being followed up Warning If the selected program has any attributes they are displayed below Users can enter values for them at this time The date of incident are important to generate the activity plan for each entity Health provider needs to ensure recording and reporting date of incidence with each case of multi events with registration However when to define a program if it can be set Generated by enrollment date property as true the activity plan is generated based on the enrollment date not incident date However the date of incident is ignored with single event programs 4 Click the Enroll button to complete the enrollment process The system will automatically calculate due date for each event of program and will show it in the Re schedule and set status tab In health programme an entity registered and enrolled needs to be checked from time to time by health providers The case update is designed in the same manner so that services which are received by the entities can be upda
480. th the update values If you want to delete a data value completely you should select the value of interest and press Delete on your keyboard If you enter a zero and the data element has been configured to not store zeros the previous data value i e the one you wish to modify will not be overwritten with the new value Therefore it is better practice to delete the data value completely waiting for the cell to turn green and then to enter the new value 10 1 4 Validating data in the form When all the available values for the form has been filled in you can run a validation check on the data in the form Click on the Run Validation button in the top right at the beginning of the data entry page or lower left at the end of your data entry page corner All validation rules which involves data elements in the current form dataset will be run against the new data Upon completion you will be presented with a list of violations or a simply a message that says The data entry screen successfully passed validation See the Data Quality chapter for information on how to define such validation rules When you have corrected any erroneous values and are done with the form the recommended practice is to click on the Complete button below the form to register the form as complete This information is used when generating completeness reports for district county province or the national level tno J Validation Result A The data
481. the application Caution Information contained in these sections should be carefully considered and if not heeded could result in unexpected results in analysis performance or functionality Warning Information contained in these sections if not heeded could result in permanent data loss or affect the overall usability of the system Program listings usually contain some type of computer code They will be displayed with a shaded background and a different font Commands will be displayed in bold text and represent a command which would need to be executed on the operating system or database Links to external web sites or cross references will be displayed in blue text and underlined like this Bibliographic references will displayed in square brackets like this Store2007 A full reference can be found in the bibliography contained at the end of this document xi What is DHIS 2 DHIS 2 Background Chapter 1 What is DHIS 2 1 1 After reading this chapter you will be able to understand e What is DHIS 2 and what purpose it serves with respect to health information systems HIS e What are the major technological considerations when it comes to deploying DHIS 2 and what are the options are for extending DHIS 2 with new modules e What is the difference between patient based and aggregate data e What are some of the benefits and challenges with using Free and Open Source Software FOSS for HIS DH
482. the developers that create the integration This availability is often not possible in the case of proprietary software And when it is it comes at a high cost and contractual obligations e FOSS applications like DHIS 2 typically are supported by a global network of developers and thus have access to cutting edge research and development knowledge Getting started with DHIS 2 Using the DHIS 2 demo server Chapter 2 Getting started with DHIS 2 2 1 Using the DHIS 2 demo server The DHIS 2 team maintains a demonstration server at https play dhis2 org demo This is by far the easiest way to try out DHIS2 Simply open the link in your web browser and login with username admin and password district Note All changes on this server are deleted each night so do not save any important work on this server It is strictly for demonstration purposes on only 2 2 Using the DHIS 2 live package 2 2 1 Starting the DHIS 2 Live package The DHIS 2 Live package is the easiest way to get started with DHIS2 on your local computer DHIS2 Live is appropriate for a stand alone installation and demos Simply download the application from here Once the file is downloaded you can simply double click the downloaded file and get started using DHIS 2 2 2 1 1 Prerequisites for DHIS 2 Live You must be sure that you have a current version of the Java Runtime installed on your machine Depending on your operating system there are different ways of
483. the login area Application left side footer Sets a text in the left side footer area of the login page Application right side footer Sets a text in the right side footer area of the login page Style Sets the style look and feel of the system The corresponding user style setting overrides this Settings Email settings Start page Sets page module which the user will be redirected to after logging in The dashboard module Is the recommended start module Help page link A URL can be provided for an alternative help source This defines the URL which users will see when selecting Profile gt Help Flag Sets the flag which is displayed in the left menu of the dashboard module Require authority to add to view object lists Will hide menu and index page items links to lists of objects if the current user does not have the authority to create the type of objects privately or publicly 23 1 4 Email settings Host name Refers to the host name of the SMTP server For instance when using Google SMTP services this should be smtp gmail com Port The port to connect to the SMTP server User name The user name of the user account with the SMTP server For instance mail dhis2 org Password The password of the user account with the SMTP server TLS Refers to whether the SMPT server requires TLS for connections Email sender The email address to use as sender when sending out emails 23 1 5 Access settings Self registrat
484. ther rules action should be triggered if the expression evaluates to true If the expression is true the program rule is in effect and the actions will be executed If the expression is false the program rule is no longer in effect and the actions will no longer be applied As a simple example an expression is defined below using a single user define static value source fields see previous chapter and or operators Expressions can be typed into the edit expression text box but buttons are available for inserting operators and source fields at the cursors position To insert source fields click the source field name within the list at the left 2 Expression evaluate the source fields amp amp l The folliwng list provides a comprehensive list of operators which can be used to define an expression e Add numbers together e Subtract numbers from each other e Multiply two numbers e Divide two numbers e The modulus of two numbers e amp amp Logical AND True only when the expression on the left and right side is true The left and right side can be yes no yes only or a subexpression in parenthesis Logical OR True when either the expression on the left or the expression on the right side is true The left and right side can be yes no yes only or a subexpression in parenthesis e gt Left number greater than right number e gt Left number greater than or equal to right number e lt Left number less than
485. tion on a regular basis 24 3 2 J2ME GPRS 3G facility reporting client The server side component of the web based solution is included in the general build of DHIS2 In order to configure the DHIS2 web based mobile reporting you should follow the following steps Set the Available for Mobile Reporting flag for the data sets you want reported Under Maintenance gt DataSet gt Edit mark the Available for Mobile Reporting check box and Save Create a user role for the mobile user Select Maintenance gt Users gt User Role gt Add new Add a user role name and description Add the desired data sets for the role The mobile user role will need to have at least privileges for DHIS Web API Save the user role by clicking Save Create a user which will be used by the client to login from Maintenance gt Users gt User gt Add new Fill in all of the required details keeping in mind that the password must be at least 8 digits long contain one capital letter and one digit Assign the desired user role to the user which was created in the previous step D Important Assign the user to exactly one organisation unit Each mobile reporting client will need their own user name and password 24 3 3 J2ME GPRS 3G program reporting client Like facility reporting module sever side of activity reporting included in DHIS2 war file Basically server side setup for activity does not require any additional step The mobile application us
486. tion mmunization data Inpatient Discharge Inpatient Morbidity Mortality Key Indicators Logistics Maternal Health Logistics Reproductive Health Malnutrition Mother and Child Health Remove Get as image Share interpretation Explore Resize Remove Get as image Share interpretation Explore Resize Remove Share interpretation Explore Resize Remove Get as image Share interpretation Explore Resize Sierra Leone ANC LLITN coverage districts with labels ANC Coverages and reporting by orgunit last year ANC LLITN coverage district and facility re EA 2ndvist e ANC 3ravist e ANC s 7 U maUe Iv aaa E TFA uu mauer Kambia Kenema ANC 1st visit sl 3rd visi ic Ji ists va 7 1 LNT 1 m ane DBs ANC 1 Coverage ANC 3 Coverage Reproductive Health 5 Ba 27 000 4 Conakry x 9 Ror J Coverage overage gt eproductive al Conakry os 24000 q N i ONV Sierra Leone 103 4 67 2 82 1 o DS gt 2400 x DE 2 ly 21 000 N eee Xissid fougou Bo 143 6 94 2 81 issidougoy iy a i Bombai 83 8 52 87 ph A DY 18 000 4 ame f d p 2 Dd 3 j s 15000 Tonko Bonthe 01 8 61 60 3 et van Gueckedou M x ODi ueckedou Mz 12 Aa S r da 4 Kailahun 83 2 72 4 95 A IN 2 an i D N rx St ted ua 104 9 66 5 89 ms x A estern 3 X y 26 3 88 5 94 1 8 3 39 5 64 2 gt Koina TTT 1 1 1 7 Ko mbu Moya Port l 100 km 100 km Pujehun e interpretation Explore Resize Remove Get as image Share interpretation Explore Resi
487. to disable grey out a few fields in the table both of these functions are supported in section forms This function can be accessed by choosing selecting the dataset and choosing the View sections option from the context menu 6 2 2 Adding a new section form Section forms are separated automatically by data element category combinations which produce a spreadsheet like data entry form for each section When designing a section form the procedure is as follows 1 Set up your data set as described in Section 6 1 Data sets 2 Open the Data Set Section window by selecting your data set followed by the View sections option from the context menu To add a new section to a section form choose the specific category combo and press Add new You can now add data elements from the Available data element list on the left to the Selected data elements list on the right Data elements can be sorted within the section with the use of the Move up i and Move down buttons Be sure to press Save once you have finished Note You can only use one data element category combination per section 56 Data sets and data entry forms Adding a new section form 3 You may need to control how the data element sections are displayed on the final form In the Data set Section management leave All in the Select Category Combo drop down Click on Sort section to sort the order of appearance of your sections in the data entry for
488. try again e Invalid User Name Or Password the username or password Is incorrect e Application not authorized to access restricted APIs The server can be contacted but the user does not have the necessary permissions to access the mobile reporting module 2 Setting the PIN number After the initial login process a PIN number can be entered by the user This will make the login process much easier as the user only has to remember the four digit pin number as opposed to typing in the user name and password each time The PIN number can be preset if the phone is initialized prior to delivery or it can be set by the users themselves if they have been provided with usernames and passwords F mll Enter a 4 digit PIH PIH Please choose a secret PIN code with 4 digits The next time you start the application use this PIM to login After entering the PIN press Menu gt Next 3 Download all forms After the PIN has been specified all forms will be downloaded from the server and stored locally on the phone 239 Mobile Mobile application setup If the user has been configured to report on aggregate datasets a list of appropriate datasets will be displayed If the user is responsible for community based reporting the list of assigned activities is displayed Notes If the Health Worker is responsible for both Facility Reporting and Community Reporting DHIS server will send all forms of both Facility Reporting and C
489. ts An easy to use chart dialogue will guide you through the creation of various types of charts with data on indicators organisational units and periods of your choice These charts can easily be added to one of the four chart sections on your dashboard and there be made easily available right after log in Make sure to set the dashboard module as the start module in user settings 17 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Data dimensions Core building blocks in DHIS 2 Chapter 3 Data dimensions in DHIS2 3 1 Data dimensions Core building blocks in DHIS 2 A data value in DHIS2 is described by at least three dimensions 1 data element 2 organisation unit and 3 period These dimensions form the core building blocks of the data model WHAT Data element Category combo NHEN Period CUSTOM Attribute Combination As an example if you want to know how many children that were immunised for measles in Gerehun CHC in December 2014 the three dimensions which describe that value are the Data Element Measles doses given the Organisation Unit Gerehun CHC and the Period Dececmber 2014 All data values have at least these three dimensions describing What Where and When In addition to the organisation unit period and data element dimensions data values may also be associated with a custom dimension consisting of attributes A common use of this 19 Data elements The What dimension Data dimensions in DHIS2
490. ts that DHIS 2 can produce and these should routinely be produced analysed and acted upon by health managers 1 4 Technical background 1 4 1 DHIS as a platform DHIS can be perceived as a platform on several levels First the application database is designed ground up with flexibility in mind Data structures such as data elements organisation units forms and user roles can be defined completely freely through the application user interface This makes it possible for the system to be adapted to a multitude of locale contexts and use cases We have seen that DHIS supports most major requirements for routine data capture and analysis emerging in country implementations It also makes it possible for DHIS to serve as management system for domains such as logistics labs and finance Second due to the modular design of DHIS it can be extended with additional software modules These software modules can live side by side with the core modules of DHIS and can be integrated into the DHIS portal and menu system This is a powerful feature as it makes it possible to extend the system with extra functionality when needed typically for country specific requirements as earlier pointed out The downside of the software module extensibility is that it puts several constraints on the development process The developers creating the extra functionality are limited to the DHIS technology in terms of programming language and software frameworks in addit
491. ttings F_SYSTEM_SETTING Change Tracked Entity Instance Location F TRACKED ENTITY CHANGE LOCATION Chart External Access F CHART EXTERNAL Concept Management F CONCEPT MANAGEMENT Constant Management F CONSTANT MANAGEMENT Copy Excel Item F COPY EXCEL _ITEM ADMINISTRATION Create and download backup F DASHBOARD_DOWNLOAD_BACKUP Data Admin Locking F DATAADMIN _ LOCK Data Admin UnLocking F DATAADMIN UNLOCK Delete Attribute F ATTRIBUTE DELETE Delete Category Option F CATEGORY OPTION GROUP DELETE Group Delete Category Option F CATEGORY OPTION GROUP SET DELETE Group Set Delete Chart F CHART DELETE User authorities Delete Concept F CONCEPT DELETE Delete Constant F CONSTANT DELETE Delete Data Element F DATAELEMENT DELETE Delete Data Element F CATEGORY DELETE Category Delete Data Element F_ CATEGORY COMBO DELETE Category Combo Delete Data Element Groups F DATAELEMENTGROUP_DELE TE Delete Data Element Group Sets F DATAELEMENTGROUPSET DELETE Delete Data Set F DATASET DELETE Delete Data Value F DATAVALUE DELETE Delete Document F DOCUMENT DELETE Delete Excel Template F EXCEL TEMPLATE MANAGEMENT DELETE Delete Facility F FRED DELETE Delete Indicator F_ INDICATOR DELETE Delete Indicator Group F_ INDICATORGROUP_DELETE Delete Indicator Group Sets
492. two functions of the client namely The solution relies on the mobile phone having a data connection available i e GPRS Edge 3G over which it communicates with a DHIS2 instance which must be publicly available on the internet as any other web server The client application on the phone downloads the data entry forms to the phone from the server and the forms can therefore be updated without installing a new application This is also a crucial feature for community reporting which relies on regularly downloading activity plans from the server e Facility reporting for data entry and reporting of regular DHIS2 aggregate data e Activity reporting for supporting individual activity reporting with the Community module 24 3 1 Data connection availability Data connection availability can be a problem in many of the contexts where DHIS2 mobile reporting would otherwise be a good solution for getting data directly into DHIS2 If that is the case for you you might want to consider trying the SMS based solution described in a separate document Keep in mind that even though a data connection is currently required for communication between the server and the mobile phone it is only required when initializing 236 Mobile J2ME GPRS 3G facility reporting client or updating the mobile application and when sending reports to the server The phone stores all entered data locally so it can work fine with only temporary access to a data connec
493. two ways to do that The first way Is simply to drag the blue band line as shown below rriithiitrl ia wi The other way to adjust the band height is to select a band in the Report Inspector and then adjust the Band height value in the Detail 1 properties area in the lower right corner 138 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport 1 r Rand nronertie d Column Footer J Band height 29 h Last Pac 2 gt Summary uk Lave Pe F E NoD Splitallewed Kd As the fields are already present on the report you probably don t want to do anything than just fix the layout and drag fields around You can also resize the fields by dragging the side top or bottom lines If you want to change the text in the column headers you simply double click the field and change the text To add the a field to the table we simply drag it to the Detail 1 band from the Report Inspector The column header will be added automatically By double clicking the box the text can be edited The format of the text such as size font and alignment can be adjusted with the tools above the document NOTE Fields starting with F present values that are retrieved from the database every time the report is run The values here will vary so do not change these fields unless you want a Static value here 19 4 2 3 Text There are two types of text in iReport Text labels and Text fields data fields T
494. u Komboya Lugbu Niawa Lenga Selenga Tikonko m Aggregate and Save Preview Manual aggregation Tracked entity instance aggregation result Back Save selected values Save all values Ngelehun CHC January 2012 w Data element Category option combo Organisation unit Value Operator Number of children BCG default Ngelehun CHC 2 You can click Aggregate and Save button to save data values aggregated into the database directly 29 2 1 8 Schedule automated message reminder This function is used for scheduling message reminders to be automatically sent to enrolled entities XX days before scheduled appointments and or XX days after a missed visit When the schedule is started messages for each entity are generated based on templates defined in each stage at midnight Ref Add program stage section for defining a template message On the time the scheduled messages are sent Click Start button will enable the scheduled job to run the task Messages are generated based on templates defined in each stages at mid night and sent at a pre determined time or can be run immediately by pressing Execute button 293 Tracker Individual records Click Execute button to generate and send each message for each entity at the time the button clicked 29 2 1 9 Schedule automated aggregation The aggregation query builder jobs can be automatically scheduled to run on regular intervals At midnight this job runs and get all
495. ues on your chart from either low to high or high to low Aggregation Type Defines how the data elements or indicators will be aggregated within the chart Include only completed events All analysis apps provides an option for only including completed events in the aggregation process This is useful e g to exclude partial events in indicator calculations Range axis max min Defines the maximum and minium value which will be visible on the range axis Range axis tick steps Defines the number of ticks which will be visible on the range axis Range axis decimals Defines the number of decimals which will be used for range axis values Range axis title Displays a label next to the range axis also referred to as the Y axis Can give context information to the chart e g the unit of measure being used 111 Using Data Visualizer Displaying a chart e Domain axis title Displays a label below the domain axis also referred to as the X axis Can give context information to the chart e g the type of periods being listed e Hide chart legend Hides the legend and leaves more room for the chart itself e Hide chart title Hides the title of your chart e Chart title Type any title you like and it will appear above the chart 16 11 Displaying a chart You can display a chart based on your selections simply by clicking the Update button on the top centre menu This requires that you have selected one or more elements from all of
496. uired dimensions which describe data in DHIS 2 As we will see in the example below there are often more than one way to represent a paper form in DHIS 2 and it can be difficult to know which dimension to represent with a data element name and which to represent as categories or even as groups as we have seen above Here are some general lessons learned from working with data element and category combinations e Design your dimensions with data use in mind not data collection This means that disaggregation of data values at collection time should be easily aggregated up along the various dimensions as in adding up to a meaningful total e Reuse dimensions as much as possible as this increases the ability to compare disaggregated data e g age groups fixed outreach gender Disaggregation dimensions should add up to a total In certain cases data elements may be collected a subsets of each other In this case use of categories to disaggregate the data element should not be used As an example we might collect Number of confirmed malaria cases and disaggregate this by Under 5 and Over 5 A third data element Number of confirmed malaria cases under 1 might also exist on the form It would seem reasonable then to create three age groups Under 1 Under 5 and Over 5 to describe the disaggregation However the Under 1 is actually a subset of the Under 5 group and when totaled would result in duplication Thus categories should be ge
497. unique among the validation rules Provide a Description for the validation rule Select the Importance you wish to assign to the validation rule high medium or low Select the Rule type For validating correct data choose Validation For monitoring data according to a rule choose Surveillance and follow the extra instructions below Select the Period type for the data being validated Select an Operator The operator options are equal not equal greater than gt greater than or equal gt less than lt less than or equal to gt and compulsory pair The compulsory pair operator allows you to require that data values must be entered for a form for both left and right sides of the expression or for neither side In other words you can require that if one field in a form is filled then one or more other fields must also be filled Define the left side and right side of the validation rule expression First provide a description for the expression Second build the expression with the expression builder The expression is mathematical and contain data elements as well as integers and mathematical operators Data elements can be included by double clicking one in the available data elements list to the right Alternatively one can select a data element and click the insert button Mathematical operators can be included by clicking the corresponding button under the expression builder area There are three state
498. unisations as non pregnant which simplifies the model a bit since we can reuse the TT1 to TT5 data elements So we ended up with a new category called TT place with the three options Fixed Outreach In School and another category called Pregnant Non pregnant with two options The new catcombo TT is then a combination of these two and applied to the 5 TT data elements Since we agreed to put all In Schools immunisations under Non pregnant in means that the combination of options Pregnant In School will never be used in any data entry form and hence become a possible optioncombo which is OK As long as the form is custom designed then you can choose which combinations of options to use or not and therefore it is not a problem to have such passive or unused catoptions Having school as one option in the TT place 33 Data dimensions in DHIS2 Step by step approach to designing datasets category simplifies the model and therefore we thought it was worth it The alternative would be to create 5 more data elements for TT1 in school TT5 in school but then it would be a bit confusing to add these together with the TT1 TT5 plus TT catcombo Having school as a place in the TT place category makes it a lot easier to get the total of TT1 TT5 vaccines given which are the most important numbers and most often used values for data analysis Complications of early and late pregnancy and labour tables We treat these two tables as
499. unit is not the parent organisation unit 141 Setting up report functionality Designing Standard reports in iReport Oe Expression editor S F param_organisationunit_name equals No i Ln 1 Col 44 EA Parameters organisationunitid Field Integer equals Obja E organisationunitname Field String toString 5 ra me reporting_month_name Field String je a Variables pParam_organisationunit_name Field aes C User Defined Express organisation unit is parent Field String compareTc Recent Expressions anc 1 coverage a _ quarterl Field Double indexOf in E Expression Wizards anc 1 coverage a _quarter2 Field Double indexOf St eanc 1 coverage a _ quarter3 Field Double indexOf St anc 1 coverage a quarter4 Field Double e T a anc 3 coverage a quarter Field Double indexOf ie anc 3 coverage a quarter Field Double valueOf Ol coverage a quarters Field Double valueOf de coverage a _quarter4 Field Double valueOf fli a valueOfi lo m i 19 4 2 4 2 Putting the param organisation unit at the bottom of the table Instead of removing the param organisation unit from the table entirely it is also possible to put it at the bottom or top of the table This is done by using the sort functionality explained in the next section and choosing to sort first by organisation unit_is parent Other sorting options can be added in addition to this for example to make a list where the param organisation unit is at the bottom of
500. up your pivot table you can click Update to render your pivot table or click Hide to hide the layout screen without any changes taking effect Since we in our example 101 Using Pivot Table Using table options have selected both the period and organisation unit dimension as rows the pivot table will generate all combinations of the items in these dimensions and produce a table like this Data lt lt lt Update Layout Options Favorites Download Share Periods Periods Organisation units Data BCG doses given Fully immunized child Measles doses given OPV3 doses given Penta3 doses given Total 3 Organisation units Bo 2405 1427 1512 1535 1544 8423 June 2015 Bombali 1585 1168 1228 1183 1200 6364 47 4 TA Seales Bonthe 779 472 515 541 534 2841 3 Bo 4769 3 067 3255 3259 3278 17 628 3 _ Bombali Bo 2255 1351 1382 1559 1492 8039 3 I Bonthe 3 July 2015 Bombali 1438 1219 1252 1300 1303 6512 3 Kailahun 3 amp Kambia Bonthe 650 597 623 593 560 3023 3C Kenema 4343 3 167 3 257 3 452 3355 17574 User org unit User sub units User sub x2 units Bo 2283 2092 2148 2127 2073 10723 5 GB Moyamba August 2015 Bombali 1613 1255 1332 1318 1318 6836 3 Port Loko Bonthe 792 621 650 641 667 3371 a Pujehun 4688 3968 4130 4086 4058 20930 ia GN vistan Aroa Bo 2392 1508 2067 1732 1737 9436 September 2015 Bombali 1526 1344 1432 1337 1403 7042 Bonthe 615 792 684 622 651 3364 4533 3644 4183 3691 3791 19842 Total 18 333 13 846
501. ur modes of the data browser which determine how the data is summarized e Data sets e Data element groups e Organisational unit groups e Organisational units Each of these options can be accessed by selecting the desired option from Browse by drop down menu In order to produce a summary of submitted data for a given period and grouped by data sets the user should follow this procedure Begin by selecting a given periodicity type e g Weekly monthly yearly etc and then a From date and To date e g January 2009 to March 2009 Select the type of summary to be produced e g Dataset from the Browse by drop down menu Click the Browse button to view the summary DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Sao Data Administration Data Browser Data Browser Period Type Monthly Y Data Integrit eee ef Fromdate 2014 01 01 Maintenance To date 2014 01 31 Resource Table Browse b Data set T orn rowse by ala sets Display zeros SOL View Organisation Unit Merge Browse A summary of the number of data element values that have been submitted over the user selected time period is shown below 185 Data Administration Data browser 186 Data sets From date 2014 01 01 To date 2014 01 31 Period Type Monthly Download as Excel DownloadasCSV DownloadasPDF Back Start Data Set list Recorded values Data set Number of recorded values
502. ure you keep control over any changes to your meta data and databases being out of synch on data elements or organisation unit names 21 1 1 1 Dry run before importing Before doing the import into your database it is highly recommended that you run the import with the dry run option set to true first This will enabled you to have a look at how many new updates and ignored meta data there will be After you have selected your file set dry run to true you can now click the import button After doing this you will be greeted by this window Meta Data Import File Choose File No file chosen Format AML T Dry run Mo T Strategy New and Updates T Import Display import summary 2014 12 28 16 15 26 Import done Completed in 14 35 seconds 2014 12 28 16 15 25 Importing 380 OrganisationUnits 2014 12 28 16 15 11 Importing meta data Here you can see a short summary of what was contained in your import file To see further details please click on the Display import summary link 174 Import and export dhis Import Meta Data Import AML Data Import CSV Data Import DHIS 1 4 import Export Meta Data Export Data Export Export to other systems Configuration DHIS 1 4 File Configuration Integration Integration Configuration DHIS 2 Demo Sierra Leone Meta data import Maintenance Meta Data Import Choose File No file chosen New and Updates T Import Import summary Counts 1 Impo
503. ve data elements to and from data element groups e Data element group set editor Create modify view and delete data elements group sets e Data element category options categories and category combinations Create modify view and delete data element categories 5 1 Data elements Data elements form the basis of DHIS2 Data elements define what is actually recorded in system e g number of Immunisations or number of cases of malaria The actual creation and definition of the data elements themselves are far beyond the scope of this manual to describe but it is assumed that an administrator will be provided with a list of standardised data elements for inclusion into the DHIS2 system To access the data element maintenance module choose Maintenance gt Data elements and Indicators gt Data element The Filter by name will allow you to filter a range of data elements if you know either the full name of the data element or just a part of it Type the name into the search field and any matching data elements are displayed below The Sort button can be used to sort the data elements into alphabetical order 41 Data elements Editing data elements Data element management Filter b y name Filter Clear Select domain type v Son Add new Name a Accute Flaccid Paralysis Deaths lt 5 yrs Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP follow up Sharing settings Edi Acute Flaccid Paralysis AFP new lg Edit Transla
504. vent ART entry point No valk ir ART No stared Opportunist Infection prophylaxis ART entry pont No diagnostic testing ART entry point No transfer in ART entry point No old patients ART entry point No other No clients who stopped TRT due to TRT failure VCCT YCCT No positive test HI 1 and HI 2 2 j 1 2 25 1 3 1 YCCT No positive test HIV1 only 7 88 a7 22 D 11 1 YCCT No positive test HIV2 only 3 7 YCCT No recemng positive test results 5 216 9 21 156 343 YCCT No recaming Pre test counselling 452 2342 2737 32 6383 363 1536 2272 YCCT No reiching result amp post test counselling 401 190 2221 267 317 1236 1891 26 YCCT No Test 449 2262 2567 3 357 1469 2193 296 3 8 Case study From paper forms to multidimensional datasets lessons learned Typically the design of a DHIS 2 dataset is based on some requirements from a paper form that is already in use The logic of paper forms are not the same as the data element and data set model of DHIS e g often a field in a tabular paper form is described both by column headings and text on each row and sometimes also with some introductory table heading that provides more context In the database this is captured in one atomic data element with no reference to a position in a visual table format so it is important to make sure the data element with the optional data element categories capture the full meaning of each individual field in the paper form Another imp
505. w DHIS2 database DHIS 1 4 File Configuration Before you can start the 1 4 file import you need to provide a few details about the 1 4 database Datafile Here you put the full path to the DHIS 1 4 data file you want to import from e g C DHIS14 DHIS_ LR_LIBERIA mdb 177 Import and export Importing data from DHIS 1 4 Username Leave blank unless you have set up extra security measures on the file Password Leave blank unless you have set up extra security measures on the file Levels Provide the number of levels in the orgunit hierarchy in your 1 4 database e g 5 Click Save and you will return to the DHIS 1 4 File Import window Import Type As with other imports you have the options to Import directly Preview or Analyse the import We recommend using the Analyse option first to check that the 1 4 database is OK and ready to be imported When importing a large database into a new blank DHIS 2 database we recommend using the Import option to save time For smaller incremental imports the Preview is OK Last Updated If you want the full import all the data in the 1 4 database you leave this field blank If you only want to do an incremental import into an already existing DHIS 2 database you can use this field to filter which data values to import Only values added or edited after the date you specify will be imported This filter makes use of the LastUpdated column in the RoutineData table in the DHIS 1 4 data f
506. w more options You may optionally assign users to user groups on this page 8 Click on Show more options You may optionally restrict the values this user sees in data analytics by selecting dimensions that will restrict the users view For example let s say you have defined Implementing Partner as a category option group set and you have shared with this user only one or more specific implementing partners category option groups If you want to insure that the user does not see totals in analytics that include values from other groups assign Implementing Partner to this user This insures that any data visible to the user through DHIS2 analytics will be filtered to select only the Implementing Partner category option group s which are visible to the user User management User by organisation unit Available User Groups Selected User Groups Search User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 gt User Group 4 lt User Group 5 User Group 6 User Group 7 Available dimension restrictions for data analytics Selected dimension restrictions for data analytics Search Funding Agency Implementing Partner Show less options Add Cancel 9 Click on the Add button to complete adding the new user The recently created new user can be seen in main User management screen You can edit like password surname etc and delete the details of new old users by selecting corresponding User s Edit and Remove menu options 7 1 4 Use
507. wise to the value itself d2 oizp number Evaluates the argument of type number to one if the value is zero or positive otherwise to zero d2 concatenat bject object object Produces a string concatenated string from the input parameters Supports any number of parameters Will mainly be in use in future action types for example to display gestational age with d2 concatenate weeks gestationalageDays d2 daysBetw e ttate date 316 Produces the number of days between the first and second argument If the second argument date is before the first argument the return value will be the negative number of days between the two dates The static date format Is yyyy MM dd Example calculating the gestational age in days of a woman based on the last menstrual period and the current event date Program rules Defining expressions Function Arguments Description d2 daysBetween lastMenstrualDate V event_date d2 weeksBetwegte date Produces the number of full weeks between the first and second argument If the second argument date is before the first argument the return value will be the negative number of weeks between the two dates The static date format is yyyy MM dd d2 monthsBetvaeta date Produces the number of full months between the first and second argument If the second argument date is before the first argument the return value will be the n
508. xport the maps as a PNG image Share Share your favorites as map interpretations with other users In the top right corner of the map viewport you find four buttons Zoom in zoom out Zoom to visible extent automatically adjusts the zoom level and map center position to put the data on your map in focus and measure distances The current longitude latitude position of the mouse cursor is displayed in the bottom right corner of the map viewport 17 2 Thematic mapping This section describes the four vector layers which the user has at his disposal for thematic Mapping Event Layer Facility layer Boundary layer and Thematic layer 1 4 115 Using GIS Event layer 17 2 1 Event layer 116 Favorites Legend Download Share E Table ih Chart E Map Home gt gt gt Layer stack transparency Event layer x E Z Eventiayer 20 Ka J Facility layer Data elements ari Hi Event x aaran Stage Organisation unit Ngelehun CHC a og g Event date 2012 10 04 00 00 00 0 Thematic layer 1 Inpatient morbidity and mortality Y Single Event Inpatient morbidity and morti Y Longitude 11 378576039802283 Latitude 7 486663482151926 J Thematic layer 2 Available data element vai ata elements v Age 5 0 J Thematic layer 3 a ai Gender Male Adrussin Vate Thematic layer 4 Diagnosis ICD 10 l y OpenStreetMap Discharge Date amp Google Hybrid Mode of Discharge oO Kenen v amp Google Streets 60 lt gt Se
509. y e Yes only True values will render as check boxes in data entry e Aggregation type Defines the default aggregation operation that will be used on this data element Most data elements should have the SUM option set This includes all data elements which should be added together Other data elements such as staffing levels Should be set to use the AVERAGE operator when values along the time dimension should not be added together but rather averaged The complete list of aggregation operators e Sum Sum of data values in the period and organisation unit dimension e Average Sum in orgunit hierarchy Average of data values in the period dimension sum in the organisation unit dimensions e Average Average the values in both the period as well as the orgunit dimensions e Count Count of data values Standard deviation Standard deviation population based of data values Variance Variance population based of data values Min Minimum of data values Max Maximum of data values None No aggregation is performed in any dimension Store zero data values By default DHIS2 will not store zeros which are entered in the data entry module If zeros need to be saved for a particular reason this option can be set to Yes URL A URL having an in depth description of the data element can be entered in the URL field This could be for instance a link to a metadata repository or registry that contains detailed tech
510. y Multi organisation unit data entry Data entry can proceed as normal Once you have entered all of the necessary data and the application detects that the server is back on line you will be informed that you have data which needs to be synchronized with the server There is data stored locally please upload to server Upload Once the data has successfully synchronized with the server you will receive a confirmation message that the data has been successfully uploaded to the server 10 1 6 Multi organisation unit data entry 80 In some scenarios it is beneficial to enter data for multiple organisation units in the same data entry form for instance if there are few data elements in the form and a huge number of organisation units in the hierarchy In that case you can enable multi organisation unit data entry by going to System settings and tick the Enable multi organisation unit forms setting Then in data entry select the organisation unit immediately above the organisation unit you want to enter for in the hierarchy Note that this only work for the section based forms You Should now see the data elements appearing as columns and the organisation units appearing as rows in the form Note that the data entry forms should still be assigned to the facilities that you actually enter data for i e the organisation units now appearing in the form Using Data Quality functionality Overview of data quality checks Chapter 1
511. y exists in system Searching a entity can be done through attributes defined name address e g If the entity already exists in the system the program enrollment process can continue If the entity is not available new registration takes place For identification a entity the health worker is first identified through any of the unique attributes or and some attributes such as name address phone number e g in the system After identification treatment cases can be updated for the visits that they have received After enrolled into a health programme the entity is provided with various services through the treatment which are being recorded Based on the services of the program by the time the system creates an activity plan for the entity Each interaction with the entity related to the case is considered to be an treatment case and these cases are recorded into the individual case Individual case is updated with the identification of both the health worker and the entity that is receiving the service Finally the individual cases and information of entities can used for health reports Note In some cases health staff just need to save health treatment cases for reaching aggregating data without private information of entities The registration progress will be Skipped The progress of these case will be start from step 3 For instance of a programs without registration e g In Patient Morbidity and Mortality program Deat
512. y maintained fixed Internet lines Getting in contact with national mobile network companies regarding post paid subscriptions and potential large order benefits can be a wort while effort The network coverage for each network operator in the relevant country should be investigated when deciding which deployment approach to opt for as it might differ and cover different parts of the country 1 4 3 4 Server hosting The online deployment approach raises the question of where and how to host the server which will run the DHIS 2 application Typically there are several options 1 Internal hosting within the Ministry of Health 2 Hosting within a government data centre 3 Hosting through an external hosting company The main reason for choosing the first option is often political motivation for having physical ownership of the database This is perceived as important by many in order to own and control the data There is also a wish to build local capacity for server administration related to sustainability of the project This is often a donor driven initiatives as it is perceived as a concrete and helpful mission Regarding the second option some places a government data centre is constructed with a view to promoting and improving the use and accessibility of public data Another reason is that a proliferation of internal server environments is very resource demanding and it is more effective to establish centralized infrastructure and
513. y orgunits with this property set to Yes will be available for data entry Organisation units Organisation unit group sets e Comment Any additional information that you would like to add can be put here Coordinates This field is used to create the maps in the GIS module Paste in the coordinates of the orgunit in this field either a polygon for orgunits that represent an administrative boundary or a point for health facilities Without this information the GIS module will not work It might be more efficient to import these coordinates later as a batch job for all orgunits using the import module See the GIS chapter for more details e URL You can use this field to insert a URL link to an external web site that has additional information about this specific orgunit e Contact information A contact person address email and phone number can be entered in these fields This information can be vital for facilitating follow up Datasets Datasets can be assigned to organisational units here See the chapter on Data sets for more detailed information on assigning datasets to organisational units Organisation unit groups Assignments to organisational units group sets can be assigned through the individual drop down boxes which appear for each group set In addition to all of the options listed above if you have added any attributes to organisation units your custom attributes may also appear there Please refer to the section on
514. y taken place If the event hasn t occurred yet it is possible to change due date this is effectively doing nothing but rescheduling The buttons at the bottom help to change the status of a selected event Another key feature from this widget is addition of multiple notes for an event Normally data recording is through datalements however there are cases where it is necessary to record additional information or comments This is where the notes section comes handy However a interesting feature here Is it is not possible to delete a note The idea is notes are more like log books Both skip logic and validation error warning messages are supported during data entry Notes this is the same as event notes The difference between the two is that here notes are attached not to events but to enrollments This helps to record some notes based on enrollment for example why is an enrollment terminated or what is the overall observation of the TEI throughout the enrollment Report this is to provide a journal of the TEI per program A report row is provided for each program the TEI is was associated Profile this is to edit TEI s profile or attributes Here if the TEI has an attribute of value type Tracker Associate a small icon next to the input filed is displayed Clcking the icon opens a popup where users are allowed to either search or register new associate Active programs this is an extension of the enrollment wi
515. yal an a pee The identifiers of the input fields in the data entry form is on the format described below This format can be used to select the input fields in your script and perform actions on them lt dataelementid gt lt optioncomboid gt val Since the data set identifier is provided for all events a feasible alternative is to utilize the files Web API resource and keep your callback functions in a single file where you let the javascript code take action based on which data set is currently loaded 6 2 5 Data set assignment editor 60 The data set assignment editor is a tool for adding and removing many data sets to organisation units in batch style Start by selecting an organisation unit from the selection tree In the area below the tree a grid will be displayed showing all data sets as columns and the child organisation units as rows From the grid you can now assign or unassign data sets simply by clicking on of the corresponding icons in the grid If you want to assign or unassign an organisation unit to all data sets you can check or uncheck the checkbox next to the organisation unit Your changes will automatically be saved User management Creating new users and roles Chapter 7 User management DHIS2 allows for multiple users to access the system simultaneously each with a defined set of permissions These permissions can be finely tuned so that certain users can only enter data while others may generate report
516. ynamic attributes need for the program There is a column in Select attribute section called Display in list This is the required field So please make sure that at least one attribute is set this property For the attributes set Display in list the values of these attributes are displayed in entity list in functionalities of Individual records module such as Find Add Instance Visit Schedule Lost to follow up To assign a program for organisation units click on the program which you would like and select Assign program to organisation units menu Then select organisation units where provide the program To assign a program for user roles click on the program which you would like and select Assign program to userroles menu Then select user roles which you want in Available section and click Move selected items button or double click on the user role to move to Selected section Finally click OK to finish Besides you can search user groups by typing a key in text field to set authorities The result will loaded and you can select the group you want Then click button and the selected one will be displayed in below To translate the name of a program click Translation icon the seventh icon under Operations corresponding to the program you would like 29 2 1 6 1 2 Program validation rule To create validation rules for programs click on the program which you would like and select Program validation rule management menu Th
517. you must assign the orgunit to the data set and this mechanism controls which org units that can use which data sets Data sets also are assigned to specific organisation units which will be allowed to enter data for all data elements in that data set You can assign org units to a data set in the Data set management by clicking on the blue folder icon the first icon under Operations next to the data set you would like to modify Alternatively you can manage orgunit assignments for all data sets together in the Data set Assignment Editor available in the right side menu A data set has several properties that must be entered when creating a new one Name short name code and description should be used to identify and describe the data set The other properties deserve an explanation Expiry days Controls for how long it should be possible to enter data in data entry for this data set Expiry days refer to the number of days after the end date of the selected data entry period where the data entry form should be open for entry After the number of days has expired the data set will be locked for further entry You can set manual exceptions to this using the lock exception functionality in data administration module Note If the number of expiry days is set to zero this will allow data entry into all possible historical time periods Open future periods for data entry Defines whether it should be possible to enter data for future periods
518. your mobile phone After the field is focused you can start entering data Press the Up or Down button to go to the next field At the bottom is the menu with Save Complete and Back command 252 Mobile Mobile application setup MOKIA To amp ANC dth check w Select option Select Bac Notes e For the field with Yes No value press the select button on a focused field to open the popup menu then you can select Yes No or Select Option Select Select Option means that you have no data for that field For the field with pre suggested values press the select button to open the popup menu then you can choose one of the options Select Select Option means that you have no data for that field For date type value If server Date is available application will take server Date as default value If server Date is not available date filed will be leave blank for user to input manually 7 Saving Completing After finish step 4 you can choose either Save or Complete to finish your work 253 Mobile Mobile application setup NMOKLA TEIN e Save you may want to use this option if you have not finished your work yet and you want to store the data to continue later e Select Menu or Option at the bottom of your screen The name Menu or Option depend on your mobile phone and then select Save A success message For
519. yout 3 Set tei to active inactive this has nothing to do with widgets or the dashboard but it helps to set the status of dashborad owner the TEI to either active or inactive If a TEI is set to inactive only read operations are allowed no data entry no profile editing no enrollment The widgets 1 Enrollment this helps to enroll the TEI for the selected program If an active enrollment already exists the widget automatically displays it with some details about it The widget also helps to do some operations on the selected enrollment for example terminate complete or a possibility to mark the enrollment for followup The later one helps for example to deal with high risk cases during pregnancy followup A link to history is also provided if the TEI has historical enrollment Indicators any indicator defined for the selected program will have its value cacluated and displayed under this widget Dataentry this is for doing data entry using either default or custom forms Depending on program definition in particular program stages events will be displayed in a timely fashion Clicking on any of them displays the corresponding data entry If a stage needs new event a plus icon is displayed for new event creation To proceed with data entry it is mandatory to have event date Once an event date is specified it is not possible to change due date The assumption is that by specifying event date the event has alread
520. ze Remove Get as image Share interpretation Explore Resize 2015 ANC 4th or more visits 2015 Sierra Leone 2015 ANC 1 Covel E cHe W cHe Micinic Mi Hosta MM cHe E Anc 1 Coverage I ANC 3 Coverage Tonkolll Bombal Ba rage 213 7 diia 206 4 203 1 203 2 187 1 e 147 9 50 j 136 3 _ 114 117380 9 id 105 6 e ose aia 101 6 i 05 6 7 r 88 8 91 955 ogos 926 95 5 92 91 95 195 o2 a 7gs 9 905 29 956 s5 94 apa Sees paag 225 EA maa 82 a 87 1 87 98 9 31 62 87 925 ae 84 3gg 83 7 E F me E 69 4 as a 65 9 ilil 60 4 56 4 65 9 i e TTT TT TT TT TT TTTttttttftt gt lt P of RO P L p Sg PPPS PO CM WO g VT st Pow es PS FF FPP FE PP SP SF PL RRS 5 ASS ey FPF Park PP k ae 39 3 Koa g A og 2 gt RK 3g Pd y We wre p oe 3 g p In this screen shot the dashboard has already been populated with a number of objects such as charts map views tables and messages There are several hyperlink options available on each item e Remove Allows you to remove the item from the dashboard when you have the appropriate user rights e Get as Image Opens up a pop up window and allows you to download the image to your computer e Share interpretation Allows you to share an interpretation of the dashboard item Your interpretation will be shared publicly with other users of the DHIS2 system in the Interpretation section of the dashboard e Explore Loads the favorite in its corresponding app ie a

DHIS 2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents